礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
在长部中· 戒蕴品新疏巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Dīghanikāye · Sīlakkhandhavaggaabhinavaṭīkā
戒蕴品新复注
458 段
著作开篇序言巴利
Ganthārambhakathā
那位宣说了殊胜正法的人,这正法深奥、难以得见;
有远见的人让教法长久住世。
善于调伏所化众生心意的善巧者,具大智慧、大悲心;
向那位具足正法与僧团、值得恭敬的人顶礼之后。
收在三次结集里的,属于殊胜长部经典的那部分;
对它的注释,以及善加称赞的注释。
由阿阇梨法护长老亲手所造。
正确阐明精微、深奥、难见之义。
她确实就是那样,但却是通过辗转传承而来的。
从字面上和意义上来说,都有很多错漏之处。
而且因为太简略,听法的人很难正确理解。
因此,忆念同修梵行者们的请求。
那位拥有众多白象的象王,是统治着各个不同国土的国王;
在净化教法这件事上意志坚定,时时刻刻都振作着心。
依靠他,心想:“也许我也能在阐明导师教法时,
也许能成为一点助缘,他这样思量着。
我要开始写这部注释,它意义深远、利益广大。
依靠这个义理,也依靠其他合适的内容。
渴望法轮增长的智者,内心感到满足欢喜;
名为《善妙庄严》,请你们静下心来听。巴利
Yo desetvāna saddhammaṃ, gambhīraṃ duddasaṃ varaṃ; Dīghadassī ciraṃ kālaṃ, patiṭṭhāpesi sāsanaṃ.1. Vineyyajjhāsaye chekaṃ, mahāmatiṃ mahādayaṃ; Natvāna taṃ sasaddhammagaṇaṃ gāravabhājanaṃ.2. Saṅgītittayamāruḷhā, dīghāgamavarassa yā; Saṃvaṇṇanā yā ca tassā, vaṇṇanā sādhuvaṇṇitā. 3. Ācariyadhammapāla- ttherenevābhisaṅkhatā; Sammā nipuṇagambhīra-duddasatthappakāsanā.4. Kāmañca sā tathābhūtā, paramparābhatā pana; Pāṭhato atthato cāpi, bahuppamādalekhanā.5. Saṅkhepattā ca sotūhi, sammā ñātuṃ sudukkarā; Tasmā sabrahmacārīnaṃ, yācanaṃ samanussaraṃ.6. Yo’nekasetanāgindo, rājā nānāraṭṭhissaro; Sāsanasodhane daḷhaṃ, sadā ussāhamānaso.7. Taṃ nissāya ‘‘mamesopi, satthusāsanajotane; Appeva nāmupatthambho, bhaveyyā’’ti vicintayaṃ.8. Vaṇṇanaṃ ārabhissāmi, sādhippāyamahāpayaṃ; Atthaṃ tamupanissāya, aññañcāpi yathārahaṃ.9. Cakkābhivuḍḍhikāmānaṃ, dhīrānaṃ cittatosanaṃ; Sādhuvilāsiniṃ nāma, taṃ suṇātha samāhitāti. 10.
《造论开端论》的注释巴利
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
这位大注释师有能力深入自宗和他宗义理的密林,他具备大辩才,在开始写这部注释时——这部注释阐明《长部》这部殊胜阿含的深奥难解之义,而《长部》以种种方式善巧统摄三学,深奥、丰富而多样,为诸佛和随佛觉悟者所赞叹,具足能引生信心的功德——他先做礼敬三宝、说明目的等各项准备工作,首先为了礼敬三宝,说出了“以慈悲清凉之心”等话。在这里,注释开头礼敬三宝的用意,各位老师在各处都有很多详细阐述。他们确实是这样解说的——巴利
Nānānayanipuṇagambhīravicitrasikkhattayasaṅgahassa buddhānubuddhasaṃvaṇṇitassa saddhāvahaguṇasampannassa dīghāgamavarassa gambhīraduranubodhatthadīpakaṃ saṃvaṇṇanamimaṃ karonto sakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhanasamattho mahāveyyākaraṇoyamācariyo saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmapayojanādividhānāni karonto paṭhamaṃ tāva ratanattayapaṇāmaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’ntiādimāha. Ettha ca saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇappayojanaṃ tattha tattha bahudhā papañcenti ācariyā. Tathā hi vaṇṇayanti –
在注释的开头礼敬导师,是为了通过法被善说这一点,让人们对导师生起净信;也是为了显示导师的说法真实不虚,从而让人们对法生起净信。因为正是依靠对这两者的净信,才能成就广大的利益。巴利
‘‘Saṃvaṇṇanārambhe satthari paṇāmakaraṇaṃ dhammassa svākkhātabhāvena satthari pasādajananatthaṃ, satthu ca avitathadesanabhāvappakāsanena dhamme pasādajananatthaṃ. Tadubhayappasādā hi mahato atthassa siddhi hotī’’ti (dha. sa. ṭī. 1-1).
或者也可以说:在注释开头礼敬三宝,是为了表明自己对三宝的清净信心;而表明信心,是为了让智者心生欢喜;让智者欢喜,是为了让他们接受这部注释;接受注释,则是为了成就一切圆满。
或者也可以说:在开始写注释时礼敬三宝,是为了说明所注释之法的来源、所依和清净;说明这些,是为了让智者对法的注释生起尊重;生起尊重,是为了让他们通过正确受持、记忆等次第获得正确的修行,成就一切利益和安乐。
或者也可以说:因为礼敬是吉祥的,是一切行为中应当先做的,是智者所奉行的,也能让后人效仿,所以在注释中要行礼拜敬三宝。
或者也可以说:想要注释具备四种甚深性质的法与律,即使具足智慧辩才,也像跳进大海一样,会生起巨大的恐惧;而由忆念三宝功德所产生的这种礼敬供养,能消除恐惧,所以在注释中要行礼拜敬三宝。
或者也可以说:世间人把不是导师的当作导师,为了让他们如实尊崇真正的导师——正等正觉者,为了让他们舍弃对非导师的尊崇,也为了消除“学了如来所说的法与律之后,就认为是自己证悟的”这种过失,所以在注释中要行礼拜敬。
或者也可以说:通过礼敬佛陀世尊,是为了激励修行佛乘的人,为证得正等正觉而精进;通过礼敬正法,是为了激励修行独觉佛乘的人,为证得独觉佛而精进;通过礼敬僧伽,是为了激励修行声闻乘的人,为证得胜义僧而精进,所以在注释中要行礼拜敬。
或者也可以说:为了让那些认为吉祥等仪式能带来无障碍、长久住世、广受尊敬的人心生欢喜,所以在注释中要行礼拜敬。
或者也可以说:为了让听闻的人通过上述礼敬获得无障碍,从而完成受持、记忆等,所以在注释中要行礼拜敬。因为老师们在开始写注释时,主要是为了利益听闻的人,才写下赞叹和礼敬的语句;否则,不用写这些,仅靠身礼和心礼就能达成想要的目的,何必还要在书上郑重其事地写这些呢?诸如此类。
不过,我们在这里要说明的只是这里真正想要表达的目的。因此应当知道:在注释开头礼敬三宝,是为了让所承诺的注释没有障碍地顺利完成。这个目的正是老师在这里想要表达的。因为他接下来会说:“这样,以我清净的信心……凭借它的威力……”礼敬三宝之所以能让所承诺的注释没有障碍地完成,是因为礼敬三宝能使智慧变得锐利,而智慧锐利就能消除贪等烦恼。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘ratanattayapaṇāmavacanaṃ attano ratanattayappasādassa viññāpanatthaṃ, taṃ pana viññūnaṃ cittārādhanatthaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya gāhaṇatthaṃ, taṃ sabbasampattinipphādanattha’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayavandanā saṃvaṇṇetabbassa dhammassa pabhavanissayavisuddhipaṭivedanatthaṃ, taṃ pana dhammasaṃvaṇṇanāsu viññūnaṃ bahumānuppādanatthaṃ, taṃ sammadeva tesaṃ uggahaṇadhāraṇādikkamaladdhabbāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbahitasukhanipphādanattha’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘maṅgalabhāvato, sabbakiriyāsu pubbakiccabhāvato, paṇḍitehi samācaritabhāvato, āyatiṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘catugambhīrabhāvayuttaṃ dhammavinayaṃ saṃvaṇṇetukāmassa mahāsamuddaṃ ogāhantassa viya paññāveyyattiyasamannāgatassāpi mahantaṃ bhayaṃ sambhavati, bhayakkhayāvahañcetaṃ ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇajanitaṃ paṇāmapūjāvidhānaṃ, tato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘asattharipi satthābhinivesassa lokassa yathābhūtaṃ satthari eva sammāsambuddhe satthusambhāvanatthaṃ, asatthari ca satthusambhāvanapariccajāpanatthaṃ, ‘tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’ti (pārā. 195) ca vuttadosapariharaṇatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato paṇāmavidhānena sammāsambuddhabhāvādhigamāya buddhayānaṃ paṭipajjantānaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ, saddhammassa ca paṇāmavidhānena paccekabuddhabhāvādhigamāya paccekabuddhayānaṃ paṭipajjantānaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ, saṅghassa ca paṇāmavidhānena paramatthasaṅghabhāvādhigamāya sāvakayānaṃ paṭipajjantānaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘maṅgalādikāni satthāni anantarāyāni, ciraṭṭhitikāni, bahumatāni ca bhavantīti evaṃladdhikānaṃ cittaparitosanatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘sotujanānaṃ yathāvuttapaṇāmena anantarāyena uggahaṇadhāraṇādinipphādanatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā. Sotujanānuggahameva hi padhānaṃ katvā ācariyehi saṃvaṇṇanārambhe thutipaṇāmaparidīpakāni vākyāni nikkhipīyanti, itarathā vināpi taṃ nikkhepaṃ kāyamanopaṇāmeneva yathādhippetappayojanasiddhito kimetena ganthagāravakaraṇenā’’ti ca evamādinā. Mayaṃ pana idhādhippetameva payojanaṃ dassayissāma, tasmā saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Idameva ca payojanaṃ ācariyena idhādhippetaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘iti me pasannamatino …pe… tassānubhāvenā’’ti. Ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇañhi yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthaṃ ratanattayapūjāya paññāpāṭavabhāvato, tāya ca paññāpāṭavaṃ rāgādimalavidhamanato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
摩诃男,当圣弟子忆念如来的时候,他的心在那个时刻不会被贪欲缠住,不会被嗔恨缠住,不会被愚痴缠住,他的心在那个时刻是正直的。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ mahānāma samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.10; a. ni. 11.11).
因此,通过礼敬三宝,以被洗净了污垢的智慧,成就了智慧的敏锐。或者说,因为礼敬三宝是慧之近因(即定)的因,所以智慧变得敏锐。正如这样说——巴利
Tasmā ratanattayapūjāya vikkhālitamalāya paññāya pāṭavasiddhi. Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya paññāpadaṭṭhānasamādhihetuttā paññāpāṭavaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
摩诃男,圣弟子如果心得正直,就能获得义利之乐,获得法义之乐,获得与法相应的喜悦;心生喜悦,喜就生起;意中有喜,身体就变得轻安;身体轻安,就感受到乐;有乐的人,心就能得定。巴利
‘‘Ujugatacitto kho pana mahānāma ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammopasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedayati, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 6.10; a. ni. 11.11).
另外,定是慧的近因这一点,正如“入定者如实了知”这句经文所说的那样。因此,以这样变得敏锐的智慧克服了疲厌之后,就将完成先前承诺的注释。所以说道:“礼敬三宝……乃至……由于智慧明锐。”或者也可以这样理解:因为礼敬三宝能增长寿命、容貌、快乐和力量,所以能没有障碍地顺利完成。确实,由于礼敬三宝,寿命、容貌、快乐和力量都会增长。因为这样说:巴利
Samādhissa ca paññāya padaṭṭhānabhāvo ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.99; 5.1071; netti. 40; peṭako. 66; mi. pa. 14) vuttoyeva. Tato evaṃ paṭubhūtāya paññāya khedamabhibhuyya paṭiññātaṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samāpayissati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇañhi…pe… paññāpāṭavabhāvato’’ti. Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavaḍḍhanato anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ratanattayapaṇāmena hi āyuvaṇṇasukhabalāni vaḍḍhanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
习惯恭敬问讯、总是敬重长者的人,
四种法会增长:寿命、容貌、快乐和力量。巴利
‘‘Abhivādanasīlissa, niccaṃ vuḍḍhāpacāyino; Cattāro dhammā vaḍḍhanti, āyu vaṇṇo sukhaṃ bala’’nti. (dha. pa. 109);
因此,由于寿命、容貌、快乐和力量增长,事业就一定会成就,所以说“礼敬三宝……中略……应当知道”。或者也可以说,因为礼敬三宝能带来辩才不退失,所以应当知道,能够没有障碍地圆满达成。因为礼敬三宝确实能带来不退失。正如所说的——巴利
Tato āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavuddhiyā hotveva kāriyaniṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘ratanattayapūjāya āyu…pe… veditabba’’nti. Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya paṭibhānāparihānāvahattā anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aparihānāvahā hi ratanattayapūjā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“比丘们,有七种不退法。哪七种?敬重导师、敬重法、敬重僧团、敬重学处、敬重定、亲近善友、易于受教。”(《增支部》7.34)由于辩才不退失,就必定能按照所承诺的那样圆满达成,所以说“礼敬三宝……中略……应当了知”。或者也可以这样理解:因为对净信的对象行供养具有殊胜的功德,所以应当了知能无障难地圆满达成。对净信的对象行供养,确实具有殊胜的功德。正如所说的——巴利
‘‘Sattime bhikkhave, aparihānīyā dhammā, katame satta? Satthugāravatā, dhammagāravatā, saṅghagāravatā, sikkhāgāravatā, samādhigāravatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sovacassatā’’ti (a. ni. 7.34) tato paṭibhānāparihānena hotveva yathāpaṭiññātaparisamāpananti vuttaṃ ‘‘ratanattaya…pe… veditabba’’nti. Atha vā pasādavatthūsu pūjāya puññātisayabhāvato anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Puññātisayā hi pasādavatthūsu pūjā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
供养值得供养的人——无论是佛还是声闻弟子,
已经超越戏论,渡过了忧愁和悲泣。
对这样已寂灭、无所畏惧的人,供养者(的福德不可估量)。
这福德无法计算,不管用什么方法,任何人都算不出来。巴利
‘‘Pūjārahe pūjayato, buddhe yadiva sāvake; Papañcasamatikkante, tiṇṇasokapariddave. Te tādise pūjayato, nibbute akutobhaye; Na sakkā puññaṃ saṅkhātuṃ, imettamapi kenacī’’ti. (khu. pā. 196; apa. 1.10.2);
殊胜的福德,也是达成所期望之圆满的方法。正如所说——巴利
Puññātisayo ca yathādhippetaparisamāpanupāyo. Yathāha –
这个宝藏能满一切所愿,是给天界和人间众生的。
无论他们希求什么,一切都能靠这个得到。巴利
‘‘Esa devamanussānaṃ, sabbakāmadado nidhi; Yaṃ yadevābhipatthenti, sabbametena labbhatī’’ti. (khu. pā. 8.10);
对于已经进入修行方法的人,事业必定会完成,所以这样说:“在净信的基础等处……中间省略……应当了知。”像这样,礼敬三宝,因为以无与伦比的福德之田而觉悟,具有不可测量的威力和殊胜的福德,所以即使身处充满种种障碍的世间众生之中,也能摧毁一切与障碍相缠的烦恼杂染,并能阻止恐惧等灾祸。因此说得好:“在开始注释时礼敬三宝,应当理解为是为了让所承诺的注释没有障碍地圆满完成。”巴利
Upāyesu ca paṭipannassa hotveva kāriyaniṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘pasādavatthūsu…pe… veditabba’’nti. Evaṃ ratanattayapūjā niratisayapuññakkhettasambuddhiyā aparimeyyappabhāvo puññātisayoti bahuvidhantarāyepi lokasannivāse antarāyanibandhanasakalasaṃkilesaviddhaṃsanāya pahoti, bhayādiupaddavañca nivāreti. Tasmā suvuttaṃ ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabba’’nti.
不过,想要这样作一个有目的的礼敬三宝的人,因为其余二宝都以佛宝为根本,所以先礼敬佛宝,于是说:“以悲心清凉之心……中略……已脱诸趣。”因为法与僧二宝都以佛宝为根本,而在法与僧之中,僧宝又以法宝为根本。这种关系应当依据注释书中提到的譬喻来理解,比如:“世尊如满月,由他所宣说的法如月轮放出的光,僧伽则如因月光而心生欢喜的世间。”或者,因为佛是一切众生中最上者,所以先说佛;因为法从佛而生、由佛所教示,所以紧接着说法;因为僧与法相应、依止法而修习,所以紧接着说僧。也应当依据注释书中的说法来理解这个次第:“因为佛是引导一切众生获得利益者,所以先说佛;因为法能利益一切众生,所以紧接着说法;因为僧已依道修行、获得了利益、已证得利益,所以紧接着说僧。”巴利
Evaṃ pana sapayojanaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmaṃ kattukāmo buddharatanamūlakattā sesaratanānaṃ paṭhamaṃ tassa paṇāmaṃ kātumāha – ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ…pe… gativimutta’’nti. Buddharatanamūlakāni hi dhammasaṅgharatanāni, tesu ca dhammaratanamūlakaṃ saṅgharatanaṃ, tathābhāvo ca ‘‘puṇṇacando viya bhagavā, candakiraṇanikaro viya tena desito dhammo, candakiraṇasamuppāditapīṇito loko viya saṅgho’’ti evamādīhi aṭṭhakathāyamāgataupamāhi vibhāvetabbo. Atha vā sabbasattānaṃ aggoti katvā paṭhamaṃ buddho, tappabhavato, tadupadesitato ca tadanantaraṃ dhammo, tassa dhammassa sādhāraṇato , tadāsevanato ca tadanantaraṃ saṅgho vutto. ‘‘Sabbasattānaṃ vā hite viniyojakoti katvā paṭhamaṃ buddho, sabbasattahitattā tadanantaraṃ dhammo, hitādhigamāya paṭipanno adhigatahito cāti katvā tadanantaraṃ saṅgho vutto’’ti aṭṭhakathāgatanayena anupubbatā veditabbā.
礼敬佛宝时,他通过“悲心清凉之心”等语句,显示这种礼敬是以赞叹为先导的,而不是单纯的礼敬,从而表明功德殊胜。因为以赞叹为先导的礼敬,能显示与世尊殊胜功德的相应,由此显示世尊无与伦比的应受礼敬,由此显示自己的礼敬已成为殊胜的福田,由此显示已入福田的礼敬是所求如愿之因。在显示以赞叹为先导时,他想要注释的那部经教,正是以悲与慧为主导,不像律教那样以悲为主导,也不像论教那样以慧为主导,所以他以兼具这两者来开始赞叹。这确实是这位阿阇梨的一贯做法,即赞叹与开端相应。正因如此,在注释律教的开端,他以悲为主导开始赞叹:“那位即使经历千万劫……的大悲者”;在注释论教的开端,则以慧为主导开始赞叹:“如悲……随其所愿”。因为律教是世尊出于不顾根器等、纯粹的大悲——让本不该听的人听,问本不该问的,说本不该说的——而制定学处,所以以悲为主导。比如,世尊虽然已具足最高的惭愧,但被大悲心所推动,仍在大众中说出“尖角、破裂”等话,以及随犯而说的呵责语;为了制定各条学处,他还在毗兰若等地忍受身体的疲劳。因此,虽然制定律的智慧像讨论各地因缘和时机等的智慧一样,因其独特而具有极重要的功用,但悲的作用比它更大,所以说律教以悲为主导。因为教法以悲的作用更为突出,所以以悲为主导;而论教则纯粹以慧为主导,因为慧在论教中极为殊胜,能如实通达究竟法。经教则以悲与慧为主导,因为慧能辨别各类众生的根器、烦恼倾向、意乐、性格等,而大悲对众生也在经教中极为殊胜。经教中,大悲在应受调伏者的相续中多所现起,随顺其意乐,安立深奥的义句。因此应当知道,与开端相应的赞叹,正是以悲与慧为主导的。这就是此处的大意。巴利
Buddharatanapaṇāmañca karonto kevalapaṇāmato thomanāpubbaṅgamovasātisayoti ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’ntiādipadehi thomanāpubbaṅgamataṃ dasseti. Thomanāpubbaṅgamena hi paṇāmena satthu guṇātisayayogo, tato cassa anuttaravandanīyabhāvo, tena ca attano paṇāmassa khettaṅgatabhāvo, tena cassa khettaṅgatassa paṇāmassa yathādhippetanipphattihetubhāvo dassitoti. Thomanāpubbaṅgamatañca dassento yassā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, sā suttantadesanā karuṇāpaññāppadhānāyeva, na vinayadesanā viya karuṇāppadhānā, nāpi abhidhammadesanā viya paññāppadhānāti tadubhayappadhānameva thomanamārabhati. Esā hi ācariyassa pakati, yadidaṃ ārambhānurūpathomanā. Teneva ca vinayadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘yo kappakoṭīhipi…pe… mahākāruṇikassa tassā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) karuṇāppadhānaṃ, abhidhammadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘karuṇā viya…pe… yathārucī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1) paññāppadhānañca thomanamāraddhaṃ. Vinayadesanā hi āsayādinirapekkhakevalakaruṇāya pākatikasattenāpi asotabbārahaṃ suṇanto, apucchitabbārahaṃ pucchanto, avattabbārahañca vadanto sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesīti karuṇāppadhānā. Tathā hi ukkaṃsapariyantagatahirottappopi bhagavā lokiyasādhujanehipi pariharitabbāni ‘‘sikharaṇī, sambhinnā’’tiādivacanāni, (pārā. 185) yathāparādhañca garahavacanāni mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso mahāparisamajjhe abhāsi, taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññatti kāraṇāpekkhāya ca verañjādīsu sārīrikaṃ khedamanubhosi. Tasmā kiñcāpi bhūmantarapaccayākārasamayantarakathānaṃ viya vinayapaññattiyāpi samuṭṭhāpikā paññā anaññasādhāraṇatāya atisayakiccavatī, karuṇāya kiccaṃ pana tatopi adhikanti vinayadesanāya karuṇāppadhānatā vuttā. Karuṇābyāpārādhikatāya hi desanāya karuṇāpadhānatā, abhidhammadesanā pana kevalapaññāppadhānā paramatthadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhasamatthāya paññāya tattha sātisayappavattito. Suttantadesanā pana karuṇāpaññāppadhānā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayādhimutticaritādibhedaparicchindanasamatthāya paññāya sattesu ca mahākaruṇāya tattha sātisayappavattito. Suttantadesanāya hi mahākaruṇāya samāpattibahulo vineyyasantāne tadajjhāsayānulomena gambhīramatthapadaṃ patiṭṭhapesi. Tasmā ārambhānurūpaṃ karuṇāpaññāppadhānameva thomanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, ayamettha samudāyattho.
这个“有支”义则是这样:所谓“悲”,来自“kirati”(散播)——它通过令(苦的)生起条件匮乏的方式,去除他人的苦,这就是它的含义。或者,在受苦的人当中,它被散播、被伸展,所以叫“悲”。又或者,“kiṇāti”(摧破)就是“悲”——当他人有苦时,它冲击、逼迫具有悲心的人,或者说它摧毁他人的苦,这就是含义。又或者,当他人有苦时,它使善人的心颤动、内心忧戚,所以叫“悲”。又或者,“kam”是安乐,它阻挡安乐,所以叫“悲”。因为这种悲以想要去除他人之苦为特征,不顾自己的安乐,所以它阻挡、障碍具有悲心者的安乐。在所有这些地方,都应该依照声明文法来理解词的形成。“清凉”是指被热恼所逼的人所亲近的,即热恼的平息。领受、执取那清凉的,就是“清凉的”。在“我要把你的心掷出去,或者把你的心脏劈开”这句话里,胸中之物被称为“心脏”;在“肾脏、心脏”里,指的是心脏这个依处;在“以心知心,如实了知”里,指的是心识;这里也是依据内在之义,心识本身就是“心脏”。或者,它保持自己的本性,所以叫“心脏”——这是文法家把“ra”音变成“da”音来说的。悲的清凉之心,就是说他拥有悲的清凉之心,即“悲清凉心”。巴利
Ayaṃ pana avayavattho – kiratīti karuṇā, paradukkhaṃ vikkhipati paccayavekallakaraṇena apanetīti attho. Dukkhitesu vā kiriyati pasāriyatīti karuṇā. Atha vā kiṇātīti karuṇā, paradukkhe sati kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsati vibādhati, paradukkhaṃ vā vināsetīti attho. Paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ kampanaṃ hadayakhedaṃ karotīti vā karuṇā. Atha vā kamiti sukhaṃ, taṃ rundhatīti karuṇā. Esā hi paradukkhāpanayanakāmatālakkhaṇā attasukhanirapekkhatāya kāruṇikānaṃ sukhaṃ rundhati vibandhatīti, sabbattha saddasatthānusārena padanipphatti veditabbā. Uṇhābhitattehi sevīyatīti sītaṃ, uṇhābhisamanaṃ. Taṃ lāti gaṇhātīti sītalaṃ, ‘‘cittaṃ vā te khipissāmi, hadayaṃ vā te phālessāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. āḷavakasutta) ettha uro ‘‘hadaya’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘vakkaṃ hadaya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.110; 2.114; 3.154) ettha hadayavatthu, ‘‘hadayā hadayaṃ maññe aññāya tacchatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.63) ettha cittaṃ, idhāpi cittameva abbhantaraṭṭhena hadayaṃ. Attano sabhāvaṃ vā haratīti hadayaṃ, ra-kārassa da-kāraṃ katvāti neruttikā. Karuṇāya sītalaṃ hadayamassāti karuṇāsītalahadayo, taṃ karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ.
在这里,虽然由于慈与喜具有利益他人、不舍安乐等的思择本性,又因为与嗔害等直接相违,能令有情相续中的热恼断除之行相生起,因此也可知慈与喜是使心清凉的原因;然而,唯有悲——以去除他人痛苦为行相、以不忍他人受苦为味、其本质是无害——才特别成为世尊之心清凉的原因,就像心轻安一样,因此只说悲是使心清凉的原因。或者应当这样理解:是以悲为门,而说慈与喜也是使心清凉的原因。因为并非在所有地方都开示毫无遗漏的含义,而是依据主要、俱行、不相离等理趣,随宜取义。而且在这里,与悲相应的智慧,由于摄属六种不共智,成为不共智差别的基础,所以悲具有殊胜性;悲已达到犹如一切知智遍及其所缘那样无余且殊胜的大悲状态,成为他人所不共的极为殊胜者,因此唯独以悲为心清凉的原因。再者,虽然慈与喜也因利益他人、不舍安乐等的思择本性,殊胜地成为心清凉的原因,并且是一切佛陀功德差别的原因,但正因为它们也以悲为因,所以说悲是心清凉的原因。因为一切佛陀功德都以大悲为根本。世尊以悲之力息灭轮回苦热,因欲拔除他人之苦,虽于无数无量劫中不疲厌地圆满一切成佛之法,已得法自在,即使现前有众生聚集所引生之心热恼之缘,其心的清凉也没有丝毫变异。在此三种解说中,第一说所摄的是通于一切佛地的悲;第二说所摄的是达到大悲状态的悲;第三说所摄的是从初发心以来、在三个阶段中都现行的世尊之悲。应如是知。巴利
Kāmañcettha paresaṃ hitopasaṃhārasukhādiaparihānijjhānasabhāvatāya, byāpādādīnaṃ ujuvipaccanīkatāya ca sattasantānagatasantāpavicchedanākārappavattiyā mettāmuditānampi cittasītalabhāvakāraṇatā upalabbhati, tathāpi paradukkhāpanayanākārappavattiyā parūpatāpāsahanarasā avihiṃsābhūtā karuṇāva visesena bhagavato cittassa cittapassaddhi viya sītibhāvanimittanti tassāyeva cittasītalabhāvakāraṇatā vuttā. Karuṇāmukhena vā mettāmuditānampi hadayasītalabhāvakāraṇatā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi sabbattha niravasesattho upadisīyati, padhānasahacaraṇāvinābhāvādinayehipi yathālabbhamānaṃ gayhamānattā. Apicettha taṃsampayuttañāṇassa chaasādhāraṇañāṇapariyāpannatāya asādhāraṇañāṇavisesanibandhanabhūtā sātisayaṃ, niravasesañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viya savisayabyāpitāya mahākaruṇābhāvamupagatā anaññasādhāraṇasātisayabhāvappattā karuṇāva hadayasītalattahetubhāvena vuttā. Atha vā satipi mettāmuditānaṃ paresaṃ hitopasaṃhārasukhādiaparihānijjhānasabhāvatāya sātisaye hadayasītalabhāvanibandhanatte sakalabuddhaguṇavisesakāraṇatāya tāsampi kāraṇanti karuṇāya eva hadayasītalabhāvakāraṇatā vuttā. Karuṇānidānā hi sabbepi buddhaguṇā. Karuṇānubhāvanibbāpiyamānasaṃsāradukkhasantāpassa hi bhagavato paradukkhāpanayanakāmatāya anekānipi kappānamasaṅkhyeyyāni akilantarūpasseva niravasesabuddhakaradhammasambharaṇaniratassa samadhigatadhammādhipateyyassa ca sannihitesupi sattasaṅghātasamupanītahadayūpatāpanimittesu na īsakampi cittasītibhāvassa aññathattamahosīti. Tīsu cettha vikappesu paṭhame vikappe avisesabhūtā buddhabhūmigatā, dutiye tatheva mahākaruṇābhāvūpagatā, tatiye paṭhamābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya tīsupi avatthāsu pavattā bhagavato karuṇā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“了知”所以叫慧,意思是它按事物的本来样子,以各种方式通达。或者说,“使人了知”所以叫慧,意思是它让那个含义显现出来。这慧本身,因为断除了所知障,以各种方式照亮法的自性,所以叫灯,也就是慧灯。有慧的人即使只是在一个座位上坐着,一万个世界也会被同一盏灯照亮。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,有四种灯。哪四种?月灯、日灯、火灯、慧灯。比丘们,这就是四种灯。比丘们,在这四种灯中,慧灯最为第一。”被这慧灯破除、以殊胜的方式连根拔除的,就是“慧灯所破”;这里所说的殊胜性,下面会显现出来。让人迷惑,或者自己迷惑,或者只是迷惑本身,这就是痴,也就是无明。这痴因为遮蔽了所缘的自性,和黑暗相似,所以像暗一样,就是痴暗。虽然“暗”这个词本身也能表示无明,但这里以“痴”这个词的邻近,采用相似假借是合理的。慧灯所破的痴暗,属于那个人,就是“慧灯所破痴暗者”;那个就是慧灯所破痴暗者。巴利
Pajānātīti paññā, yathāsabhāvaṃ pakārehi paṭivijjhatīti attho. Paññapetīti vā paññā, taṃ tadatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karotīti attho. Sāyeva ñeyyāvaraṇappahānato pakārehi dhammasabhāvajotanaṭṭhena pajjototi paññāpajjoto. Paññavato hi ekapallaṅkenapi nisinnassa dasasahassilokadhātu ekapajjotā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘cattārome bhikkhave, pajjotā. Katame cattāro? Candapajjoto, sūriyapajjoto, aggipajjoto, paññāpajjoto, ime kho bhikkhave, cattāro pajjotā. Etadaggaṃ bhikkhave, imesaṃ catunnaṃ pajjotānaṃ yadidaṃ paññāpajjoto’’ti (a. ni. 4.145). Tena vihato visesena samugghāṭitoti paññāpajjotavihato, visesatā cettha upari āvi bhavissati. Muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhanamattameva vā tanti moho, avijjā. Sveva visayasabhāvapaṭicchādanato andhakārasarikkhatāya tamo viyāti mohatamo. Satipi tamasaddassa sadisakappanamantarena avijjāvācakatte mohasaddasannidhānena tabbisesakatāvettha yuttāti sadisakappanā. Paññāpajjotavihato mohatamo yassāti paññāpajjotavihatamohatamo, taṃ paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ.
难道不是一切漏尽者都能以慧灯破除无明黑暗吗?那为什么还用与其他圣者共通的功德来称叹世尊呢?因为世尊断除了习气,具有与他人不共的殊胜性。虽然一切漏尽者都能以慧灯破除无明黑暗,但就像信解脱者和见至者之间那样,声闻、辟支佛与正等正觉者之间,确实存在因断除习气而带来的烦恼断除上的差别。另一种说法是:世尊不靠别人的教导,在自身相续中彻底灭尽了无明黑暗,并且在其中证得了一切知智和诸力的自在;同时又能以说法的殊胜威力,令他人相续中的无明黑暗也真正被灭除。所以只有世尊,才特别应该以“慧灯所破痴暗者”的身份来被称叹。在这个义释中,“慧灯”一词,通过总说或举一摄余的方式,同时包含了破除自相续中痴暗的通达慧和破除他相续中痴暗的说法慧。应当知道,并不像前一种义释那样只指通达慧。巴利
Nanu ca sabbesampi khīṇāsavānaṃ paññāpajjotena avijjandhakārahatatā sambhavati, atha kasmā aññasādhāraṇāvisesaguṇena bhagavato thomanā vuttāti? Savāsanappahānena anaññasādhāraṇavisesatāsambhavato. Sabbesampi hi khīṇāsavānaṃ paññāpajjotahatāvijjandhakārattepi sati saddhādhimuttehi viya diṭṭhippattānaṃ sāvakapaccekabuddhehi sammāsambuddhānaṃ savāsanappahānena kilesappahānassa viseso vijjatevāti. Atha vā paropadesamantarena attano santāne accantaṃ avijjandhakāravigamassa nipphāditattā (nibbattitattā ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1), tattha ca sabbaññutāya balesu ca vasībhāvassa samadhigatattā, parasantatiyañca dhammadesanātisayānubhāvena sammadeva tassa pavattitattā, bhagavāyeva visesato paññāpajjotavihatamohatamabhāvena thometabboti. Imasmiñca atthavikappe paññāpajjotapadena sasantānagatamohavidhamanā paṭivedhapaññā ceva parasantānagatamohavidhamanā desanāpaññā ca sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā saṅgahitā. Na tu purimasmiṃ atthavikappe viya paṭivedhapaññāyevāti veditabbaṃ.
另一种理解方式:世尊的智慧以所知为极限,所以用能完全通达一切所知法自性的、被称为无碍智的智慧之光,破除了遮蔽一切所知法自性的愚痴黑暗。因此应当知道,世尊是以“成为无碍智、以他人不共的智慧之光破除愚痴黑暗”这一身份而受到赞叹的。不过,在这个义解中,因为是在破除愚痴黑暗时证得了无碍智,所以应当知道,这是以因的转用来称自身相续中的愚痴黑暗被破除。因为依靠愿力成就而断除烦恼及其习气,这才是断除烦恼的所知障;而对于他人相续中愚痴黑暗的破除,由于无碍智是它的因,所以是以果的转用,说无碍智本身就是愚痴黑暗的破除。所谓无碍智,就是一切知智,世尊用它来做说法和观察。这两种智在意义上其实是一回事。因为以一切有为法、无为法和假名法为所缘,一切知智对它们没有障碍,所以从无著而行的角度说,称为无碍智;但从所缘活动的方式来看,为了显示它与其他智不共的特点,就把它分成两种,在六种不共智的分类中加以说明。巴利
Aparo nayo – bhagavato ñāṇassa ñeyyapariyantikattā sakalañeyyadhammasabhāvāvabodhanasamatthena anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātena paññāpajjotena sakalañeyyadhammasabhāvacchādakamohatamassa vihatattā anāvaraṇañāṇabhūtena anaññasādhāraṇapaññāpajjotavihatamohatamabhāvena bhagavato thomanā veditabbā. Imasmiṃ pana atthavikappe mohatamavidhamanante adhigatattā anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ kāraṇūpacārena sakasantāne mohatamavidhamananti veditabbaṃ. Abhinīhārasampattiyā savāsanappahānameva hi kilesānaṃ ñeyyāvaraṇappahānanti, parasantāne pana mohatamavidhamanassa kāraṇabhāvato phalūpacārena anāvaraṇañāṇameva mohatamavidhamananti vuccati. Anāvaraṇañāṇanti ca sabbaññutaññāṇameva, yena dhammadesanāpaccavekkhaṇāni karoti. Tadidañhi ñāṇadvayaṃ atthato ekameva. Anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammārammaṇatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tatthāvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti, visayappavattimukhena pana aññehi asādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ dvidhā katvā chaḷāsādhāraṇañāṇabhede vuttaṃ.
那么,这里有什么理由呢?为什么在赞叹世尊时,只以无明的彻底断除作为断除成就的代表,而不取更殊胜的、无余断除一切烦恼呢?回答说:因为只要说到断除无明,就已经显示了与它同属一组的整个杂染的彻底断除,所以这里就已经包含了无余断除一切烦恼。因为没有任何杂染会在无明被无余断除时还不断除。或者,就像明是生起一切善法、止息轮回的主要原因一样,无明正是生起一切不善法、让轮回持续的主要原因,因此只要说到摧破无明,就已经成立彻底断除一切杂染之义,所以只取这一个为代表。又或者,因为无明是一切杂染法的顶首,所以只以它的彻底断除为代表。正如所说:巴利
Kiṃ panettha kāraṇaṃ avijjāsamugghātoyeveko pahānasampattivasena bhagavato thomanāya gayhati, na pana sātisayaṃ niravasesakilesappahānanti? Vuccate – tappahānavacaneneva hi tadekaṭṭhatāya sakalasaṃkilesasamugghātassa jotitabhāvato niravasesakilesappahānamettha gayhati. Na hi so saṃkileso atthi, yo niravasesāvijjāsamugghātanena na pahīyatīti. Atha vā sakalakusaladhammuppattiyā, saṃsāranivattiyā ca vijjā viya niravasesākusaladhammuppattiyā, saṃsārappavattiyā ca avijjāyeva padhānakāraṇanti tabbighātavacaneneva sakalasaṃkilesasamugghātavacanasiddhito soyeveko gayhatīti. Atha vā sakalasaṃkilesadhammānaṃ muddhabhūtattā avijjāya taṃ samugghātoyeveko gayhati. Yathāha –
要知道,无明是头,明是斩断头的。
与信、念、定,以及欲和精进相应。巴利
‘‘Avijjā muddhāti jānāhi, vijjā muddhādhipātinī; Saddhāsatisamādhīhi, chandavīriyena saṃyutā’’ti. (su. ni. 1032; cūḷa. ni. 51);
在“sanarāmaralokagaruṃ”这个词里,如果按第一种词性不加区分地说,有情众生也可以叫“人”(nara);但这里按第二种词性,只指男人、人,不然“世间”(loka)这个词就用不上了。正如注释《船与天宫》时所说:“就像按第一种词性说的有情,依另一种词性,因为最殊胜,所以先处在高位、安住并运作,因此叫purisa(人);同样,因为能导向最胜的状态,所以叫nara(人)。即使是儿子、兄弟这样的人,也能处在母亲、姐姐的上位,更何况是丈夫对于其他女人呢?”再按省略法和复数复合词的拆解来说:nara就是众人,maraṇa是死,mara就是死,没有这个的即是不死者(amarā),与众人及不死者共俱,就是sanarāmaro。“garati”是升举、升高的意思,已经升举而变得明显可知的,就是garu(重/尊),因为“gara”这个词有升举的意思。另外,也像石伞一样,以沉重的意义而称为“garu(重)”。巴利
Sanarāmaralokagarunti ettha pana paṭhamapakatiyā avibhāgena sattopi naroti vuccati, idha pana dutiyapakatiyā manujapurisoyeva, itarathā lokasaddassa avattabbatā siyā. ‘‘Yathā hi paṭhamapakatibhūto satto itarāya pakatiyā seṭṭhaṭṭhena pure uccaṭṭhāne seti pavattatīti purisoti vuccati, evaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ netīti naroti. Puttabhātubhūtopi hi puggalo mātujeṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ pituṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, pageva bhattubhūto itarāsa’’nti (vi. aṭṭha. 43-46) nāvāvimānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekasesappakappanena puthuvacanantaviggahena vā narā, maraṇaṃ maro, so natthi yesanti amarā, saha narehi, amarehi cāti sanarāmaro.Garati uggacchati uggato pākaṭo bhavatīti garu, garasaddo hi uggame. Apica pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya bhāriyaṭṭhena ‘‘garū’’ti vuccati.
对父母和师长,以及对难消化的食物和沉重之物,
对于伟大而崇高的人,以及善巧聪敏等各类人,
同样,garu 这个词也用在各种颜色的区别上。巴利
Mātāpitācariyesu , dujjare alahumhi ca; Mahante cuggate ceva, nichekādikaresu ca; Tathā vaṇṇavisesesu, garusaddo pavattati.
在这里,对于一切世间之师——如来。有些人说:“garu 和 guru 要分两种来理解:表示‘沉重’的意思时用 garu 这个词,表示‘师长’的意思时用 guru 这个词。”这种说法不能采纳。因为在巴利语的范围内,前面所说的所有含义都只能用 garu 这个词来表达,因为由 a 变成 ā,可以看出派生词 gārava 带有增音。而在梵语的范围内,才应该只用 guru 这个词,因为由 u 发生增音,其派生词以另一种形式出现。sanarāmaro 就是那个世间,所以是 sanarāmaraloko,它的 garu(尊长),即 sanarāmaralokagaruṃ。也有人读作 sanaramarūlokagaruṃ,那也是合理的,因为这是圣者的偈颂,从表达规则和意义上都说得通。从意义上说,诸天虽然长寿,但因为随各自的限度而有死亡的本质,所以也称为 marū。由此说明,就像对诸天和人类一样,世尊也随宜以功德殊胜来利益其余众生。那么,这里诸天和人类才是主要的,为什么却把他们说成非主要的呢?因为要从意义上理解他们才是主要的。词序是一回事,义序是另一回事。所以不应根据词序来质疑主要与非主要之分。在这类复合词中,主要的部分也会像非主要的一样被列出,比如“sarājikāya parisāyā”(有国王的随众)那样。因此,一切地方都应该从意义上寻求意图,而不是只看字面。正如古人所说——巴利
Idha pana sabbalokācariye tathāgate. Keci pana ‘‘garu, gurūti ca dvidhā gahetvā bhāriyavācakatte garusaddo, ācariyavācakatte tu gurusaddo’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Pāḷivisaye hi sabbesampi yathāvuttānamatthānaṃ vācakatte garusaddoyevicchitabbo akārassa ākārabhāvena ‘‘gārava’’nti taddhitantapadassa savuddhikassa dassanato. Sakkatabhāsāvisaye pana gurusaddoyevicchitabbo ukārassa vuddhibhāvena aññathā taddhitantapadassa dassanatoti. Sanarāmaro ca so loko cāti sanarāmaraloko, tassa garūti tathā, taṃ sanarāmaralokagaruṃ.‘‘Sanaramarūlokagaru’’ntipi paṭhanti, tadapi ariyāgāthattā vuttilakkhaṇato, atthato ca yuttameva. Atthato hi dīghāyukāpi samānā yathāparicchedaṃ maraṇasabhāvattā marūti devā vuccanti. Etena devamanussānaṃ viya tadavasiṭṭhasattānampi yathārahaṃ guṇavisesāvahatāya bhagavato upakārakataṃ dasseti. Nanu cettha devamanussā padhānabhūtā, atha kasmā tesaṃ appadhānatā niddisīyatīti? Atthato padhānatāya gahetabbattā. Añño hi saddakkamo, añño atthakkamoti saddakkamānusārena padhānāpadhānabhāvo na codetabbo. Edisesu hi samāsapadesu padhānampi appadhānaṃ viya niddisīyati yathā taṃ ‘‘sarājikāya parisāyā’’ti, tasmā sabbattha atthatova adhippāyo gavesitabbo, na byañjanamattena. Yathāhu porāṇā –
世尊确实说过:义就是皈依处,
大仙不靠文辞来利益世间。
所以,不要对文辞产生贪爱,
有智慧的人应当把心念安住在义理上。巴利
‘‘Atthañhi nātho saraṇaṃ avoca, Na byañjanaṃ lokahito mahesi. Tasmā akatvā ratimakkharesu, Atthe niveseyya matiṃ matimā’’ti. (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);
在这里,世间虽然按众生行与容器分为三种,但因为这里强调的是值得尊重这一点,而只有能做出尊重行为的人才算符合这个意思,所以应该按众生世间来理解。因为在这个语境里,福业、非福业以及它们的果报被称为世间,而语言学家们也认为“世间”这个词有“见”的意思。这里用“不死”一词来指化生天众。另一种解释是:这里的“世间”一词有“集合”的意思,因为是按集合体来认知、施设的。“与人共”就是与人在一起,他们就是不死者,所以是“与人及不死者共”,其世间也是如此,应按照前面的方式来理解。这里用“不死”一词,不仅包括化生天众,也包括清净天众,因为从究竟意义上说他们没有死亡,所以是不死者。不过在这个义解中,只取人和天众,这是按最胜的方式来宣说,就像说“导师是天人的导师”一样。同样,世尊以远离一切不利为先,致力于给予无余的利乐,具足无上的修行成就,对包括天人在内的一切众生有究竟的饶益,并具足无量、无与伦比的威德功德,所以是无量世界、无量众生中最上、无与伦比、不共的尊重处。虽然妇女也同样因此饶益而尊重世尊,但为了显示主要的所化世间,所以用男性词来表达,应当这样理解。语源学家则主张在未特别确定之处是如此说明的,如“人、龙与乾闼婆,礼敬后离去”。并且他们这样说:巴利
Kāmañcettha sattasaṅkhārabhājanavasena tividho loko, garubhāvassa pana adhippetattā garukaraṇasamatthasseva yujjanato sattalokavasena attho gahetabbo. So hi lokīyanti ettha puññāpuññāni , tabbipāko cāti loko, dassanatthe ca lokasaddamicchanti saddavidū. Amaraggahaṇena cettha upapattidevā adhippetā. Aparo nayo – samūhattho ettha lokasaddo samudāyavasena lokīyati paññāpīyatīti katvā. Saha narehīti sanarā, teyeva amarāti sanarāmarā, tesaṃ loko tathā, purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Amarasaddena cettha upapattidevā viya visuddhidevāpi saṅgayhanti. Tepi hi paramatthato maraṇābhāvato amarā. Imasmiṃ pana atthavikappe narāmarānameva gahaṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena yathā ‘‘satthā devamanussāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.157, 255). Tathā hi sabbānatthaparihānapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā, sadevamanussāya pajāya accantamupakāritāya aparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇasamaṅgitāya ca sabbasattuttamo bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamamanaññasādhāraṇaṃ gāravaṭṭhānanti. Kāmañca itthīnampi tathāupakārattā bhagavā garuyeva, padhānabhūtaṃ pana lokaṃ dassetuṃ purisaliṅgena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Neruttikā pana avisesanicchitaṭṭhāne tathā niddiṭṭhamicchanti yathā ‘‘narā nāgā ca gandhabbā, abhivādetvāna pakkamu’’nti (apa. 1.1.48). Tathā cāhu –
是用中性词性,还是用阳性词性来表达这个词呢?
应当知道,这是在尚未特别确定之处才如此说明的。巴利
‘‘Napuṃsakena liṅgena, saddodāhu pumena vā; Niddissatīti ñātabbamavisesavinicchite’’ti.
在这里,对于“礼敬”一词,另外要说的是:巴利
Vandeti ettha pana –
在现在时、第五式和第七式语尾中,
在这三种情况下,用的都是“礼敬”这个词。巴利
Vattamānāya pañcamyaṃ, sattamyañca vibhattiyaṃ; Etesu tīsu ṭhānesu, vandesaddo pavattati.
这里,由于是现在时,而且没有别的可能主语,所以应当按“第一人称”的意思来理解“我礼敬”。在这个问题上,老师们认为“礼敬”一词有“鞠躬”和“称赞”两种含义,因此要补上“善逝”或“依怙”这个词来连接。所谓“善逝”,就是他的去、他的行是善妙的。这里的“去”有两种:身去和智去。身去又分两种:一是为了接近所化众生而去,二是自然而行。世尊接近所化众生,完全是为了成就他们的利益和安乐,所以是善妙的;同样,他的色身具足相好庄严,自然而行时像鹅王、牛王、象王、鹿王那样,没有迟缓、蹒跚、失足、拖曳、压迫、蜷缩、弯曲、混乱等过失,也没有傲慢。他的智去则具足无垢、广大的悲、念、精进等殊胜功德,从发愿开始直到大菩提,因为毫无过失,所以纯粹是善妙的。或者也可以说:以自觉智,通过遍知通达而遍知整个世间,已善去、已通达,所以是善逝。凡是“去”的意思,就是“觉了”的意思;凡是“觉了”的意思,就是“去”的意思。同样,以断除通达而断除世间集,令其达到不再生起的法性,已善去、已超越,所以是善逝。以作证通达而证得世间灭,已善去、已证得,所以是善逝。以修习通达而修习趣向世间灭之道,已善去、已行道,所以是善逝。这个含义应当依照“以预流道所断的烦恼,他们不再返回那些烦恼,不再退转,不再回来”这样的解释方式来说明,即“善逝”等。巴利
Idha pana vattamānāyaṃ aññāsamasambhavato. Tattha ca uttamapurisavasenattho gahetabbo ‘‘ahaṃ vandāmī’’ti. Namanathutiyatthesu ca vandasaddamicchanti ācariyā, tena ca sugatapadaṃ, nāthapadaṃ vā ajjhāharitvā yojetabbaṃ. Sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato. Gamanañcettha kāyagamanaṃ, ñāṇagamanañca, kāyagamanampi vineyyajanopasaṅkamanaṃ, pakatigamanañcāti dubbidhaṃ. Bhagavato hi vineyyajanopasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ, tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya dutavilambitakhalitānukaḍḍhananippīḷanukkuṭika-kuṭilākulatādidosarahita- mavahasitarājahaṃsa- vasabhavāraṇamigarājagamanaṃ pakatigamanañca, vimalavipulakaruṇāsativīriyādiguṇavisesasahitampi ñāṇagamanaṃ abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva mahābodhi, tāva niravajjatāya sobhanamevāti. Atha vā ‘‘sayambhūñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanto sammā gato avagatoti sugato. Yo hi gatyattho, so buddhayattho. Yo ca buddhayattho, so gatyatthoti. Tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānābhisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammatamāpādento sammā gato atītoti sugato. Lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato adhigatoti sugato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhisamayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato, ayañcattho ‘sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatī’ti (mahāni. 38; cūḷani. 27) sugatotiādinā niddesanayena vibhāvetabbo.
另一种解释:已经到达并证得殊胜的正等觉,或者就是涅槃,所以叫善逝。或者说,他能如实、真实、有益、恰当地、在合适的时机,为应当受教化的众生正确地宣说言语,所以叫善逝——这是把“da”变成“ta”,就成了“善逝”。依福德业和非福德业,以投生的方式应当去往的地方,就是“趣”,也就是各种投生存在的类别。这些趣按地狱等类别分为五种。由于证得圣道,使一切导向存在的业都变得不会成熟结果,因此从这五种趣中脱离出来、得到解脱,就是“趣解脱”。因为那些往生到更高更高存在的天人们,虽然在各自业报成熟的时候,从那一处存在中得到解脱,但那只是暂时的解脱,并不是依远离束缚而解脱;而且他们仍然属于趣的范畴,因为圣道还没有使他们导向那一处存在的业回转。世尊却不是这样。世尊是按上面所说的方式,已经远离束缚、得到解脱。因此,这就显示世尊在任何趣中都不被包含。也正因如此,世尊被称为“天中天”。所以这样说:巴利
Aparo nayo – sundaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ, nibbānameva vā gato adhigatoti sugato. Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ yathārahaṃ kālayuttameva vācaṃ vineyyānaṃ sammā gadatīti vā sugato, da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā, taṃ sugataṃ. Puññāpuññakammehi upapajjanavasena gantabbāti gatiyo, upapattibhavavisesā. Tā pana nirayādibhedena pañcavidhā, sakalassāpi bhavagāmikammassa ariyamaggādhigamena avipākārahabhāvakaraṇena nivattitattā pañcahipi tāhi visaṃyutto hutvā muttoti gativimutto. Uddhamuddhabhavagāmino hi devā taṃtaṃkammavipākadānakālānurūpena tato tato bhavato muttāpi muttamattāva, na pana visaññogavasena muttā, gatipariyāpannā ca taṃtaṃbhavagāmikammassa ariyamaggena anivattitattā, na tathā bhagavā. Bhagavā pana yathāvuttappakārena visaṃyutto hutvā muttoti. Tasmā anena bhagavato katthacipi gatiyā apariyāpannataṃ dasseti. Yato ca bhagavā ‘‘devātidevo’’ti vuccati. Tenevāha –
凭这个因缘,我可能往生为天神,或者成为甘塔拔,或者变成飞鸟;
凭这个,我可以投生为夜叉,也能达于人身;
我的那些漏已经灭尽,已被摧毁,已被连根拔除。巴利
‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36);
那些导向各种趣的业和烦恼,已经在菩提树下被最上之道彻底断除,所以世尊根本不可能再归属于任何趣,世尊确实已经完全从一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居、有情众中解脱出来。另一种说法是:即使还在有余涅槃界中,他也已经从那些趣中解脱了;而“以慧灯破除痴暗”这句话虽然也包含这个意思,但应当理解为,它是专门用来赞叹无余涅槃界的。巴利
Taṃtaṃgatisaṃvattanakānañhi kammakilesānaṃ mahābodhimūleyeva aggamaggena pahīnattā natthi bhagavato taṃtaṃgatipariyāpannatāti accantameva bhagavā sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsasattanikāyehi parimuttoti. Atha vā kāmaṃ saupādisesāyapi nibbānadhātuyā tāhi gatīhi vimutto, esā pana ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti etthevantogadhāti iminā padena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāva thometīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在这里,对世尊的赞叹是依照自利成就和利他行两种方式而作的。其中,证得无障智、连同习气一起彻底断除烦恼、证得无余依涅槃,这叫做自利成就;而对利养、恭敬等心无期待,致力于宣说能令一切苦解脱的法,对提婆达多等敌对众生也永远怀着利益之心,并且能在应当受调伏的众生心智成熟之时随其根机而前往——这叫做利他行。这利他行又依意趣和加行分为两种,自利成就则分为三种,这些在这首偈颂中都已按各自对应的方式显示出来。“以慈悲清凉心”这一句,显示的是依意趣的利他行;而“善逝”一词含有“正确宣说”之义,显示的是依加行的利他行。“以慧灯破除痴暗、解脱诸趣”这些词句,以及“善逝”一词含有“证知四谛”之义,显示的是三种自利成就;而依其余未尽的含义,以及“天人与不死者世间之尊”这一句,则总显了一切自利成就和利他行。巴利
Ettha pana attahitasampattiparahitapaṭipattivasena dvīhākārehi bhagavato thomanā katā hoti. Tesu anāvaraṇañāṇādhigamo, saha vāsanāya kilesānamaccantappahānaṃ, anupādisesanibbānappatti ca attahitasampatti nāma, lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa pana sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammadesanāpayogato devadattādīsupi viruddhasattesu niccaṃ hitajjhāsayatā, vinītabbasattānaṃ ñāṇaparipākakālāgamanañca āsayato parahitapaṭipatti nāma. Sā pana āsayapayogato duvidhā, parahitapaṭipatti tividhā ca attahitasampatti imāya gāthāya yathārahaṃ pakāsitā hoti. ‘‘Karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti hi etena āsayato parahitapaṭipatti, sammā gadanatthena sugatasaddena payogato parahitapaṭipatti. ‘‘Paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ gativimutta’’nti etehi, catusaccapaṭivedhatthena ca sugatasaddena tividhāpi attahitasampatti, avasiṭṭhaṭṭhena pana tena, ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’nti ca etena sabbāpi attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca pakāsitā hoti.
或者,依因、果和饶益众生这三种方式作赞叹。其中,所谓“因”,就是与大悲相应,以及积集菩提资粮;这两者由第一句按字面和按功能显示出来。而“果”则依智成就、断成就、威力成就和色身成就分为四种。其中,以一切智智为依托的道智,以及以它为根本的十力等诸智,是智成就;使一切烦恼杂染连同习气永远不再生起,是断成就;在如愿成办中拥有自在,是威力成就;作为一切世间的眼目、如同灌顶般尊贵、具足相与随好庄严的自身,是色身成就。在这些当中,智成就和断成就由第二句以及“善逝”一词中“证知谛义”的含义显示;威力成就由第三句显示;色身成就由“善逝”一词中“妙行”的含义显示,因为如果没有相与随好的圆满,就不可能有这样的色身。如上所说的两种利他行,就是饶益众生成就;应当知道,这是由“善逝”一词中“正确宣说”的含义显示的。巴利
Atha vā hetuphalasattūpakāravasena tīhākārehi thomanā katā. Tattha hetu nāma mahākaruṇāsamāyogo, bodhisambhārasambharaṇañca, tadubhayampi paṭhamapadena yathārutato, sāmatthiyato ca pakāsitaṃ. Phalaṃ pana ñāṇappahānaānubhāvarūpakāyasampadāvasena catubbidhaṃ . Tattha sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ, tammūlakāni ca dasabalādiñāṇāni ñāṇasampadā, savāsanasakalasaṃkilesānamaccantamanuppādadhammatāpādanaṃ pahānasampadā, yathicchitanipphādane ādhipaccaṃ ānubhāvasampadā, sakalalokanayanābhisekabhūtā pana lakkhaṇānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitā attabhāvasampatti rūpakāyasampadā. Tāsu ñāṇappahānasampadā dutiyapadena, saccapaṭivedhatthena ca sugatasaddena pakāsitā, ānubhāvasampadā tatiyapadena, rūpakāyasampadā sobhanakāyagamanatthena sugatasaddena lakkhaṇānubyañjanapāripūriyā vinā tadabhāvato. Yathāvuttā duvidhāpi parahitapaṭipatti sattūpakārasampadā, sā pana sammā gadanatthena sugatasaddena pakāsitāti veditabbā.
另外,通过这首偈颂,老师展示了许多佛的功德,包括正自觉、它的根本、依它而起的修行等等。这本来就是老师们的做法,也就是用某种方式让人明白不同的义理。怎么展示的呢?通过“以悲清凉之心”这一句,指出正自觉的根本。因为世尊的心被大悲所触动,为了把众生从轮回的泥沼中救拔出来而发愿,逐渐圆满诸波罗蜜,最终证得无上正自觉,所以悲是正自觉的根本。通过“以智慧之光照破愚痴黑暗”这一句,指出正自觉本身。以一切知智为依托的道智,以及以道智为依托的一切知智,就叫做“正自觉”。通过“善逝”一词中“正确前行”的含义,指出正自觉的修行实践,因为它说明的是远离昏沉掉举的偏执、远离沉迷欲乐和折磨身体的苦行、远离常见和断见等两边,由悲和智慧所摄持的中道修行;通过其余的词句,指出正自觉的主要作用和次要作用及其目的。在这里,把众生从轮回的大洪流中渡过去是主要作用,其他的是次要作用。在這些作用和目的中,通过主要作用显示利他之行,通过次要作用显示自利成就,通过这两者,在自利利他等四种人中,说明世尊属于第四种人。由此阐明世尊是无上的应受供养者、最上的应受礼敬者,以及自身礼敬的福田已经清净。巴利
Apica imāya gāthāya sammāsambodhi tammūla – tappaṭipattiyādayo aneke buddhaguṇā ācariyena pakāsitā honti. Esā hi ācariyānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ yena kenaci pakārena atthantaraviññāpanaṃ. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti hi etena sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ dasseti . Mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso hi bhagavā saṃsārapaṅkato sattānaṃ samuddharaṇatthaṃ katābhinīhāro anupubbena pāramiyo pūretvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhimadhigatoti karuṇā sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ. ‘‘Paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti etena sammāsambodhiṃ dasseti. Sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi aggamaggañāṇaṃ, aggamaggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ‘‘sammāsambodhī’’ti vuccati. Sammā gamanatthena sugatasaddena sammāsambodhiyā paṭipattiṃ dasseti līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogasassatucchedābhinivesādiantadvayarahitāya karuṇāpaññāpariggahitāya majjhimāya paṭipattiyā pakāsanato, itarehi sammāsambodhiyā padhānāppadhānappabhedaṃ payojanaṃ dasseti. Saṃsāramahoghato sattasantāraṇañhettha padhānaṃ, tadaññamappadhānaṃ. Tesu ca padhānena payojanena parahitapaṭipattiṃ dasseti, itarena attahitasampattiṃ, tadubhayena ca attahitapaṭipannādīsu catūsu puggalesu bhagavato catutthapuggalabhāvaṃ pakāseti. Tena ca anuttaraṃ dakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ, uttamañca vandanīyabhāvaṃ, attano ca vandanāya khettaṅgatabhāvaṃ vibhāveti.
再者,通过选取悲心,说明了已证得世间广大境界的不共功德,从而显示了一切世间功德的圆满;通过选取智慧,说明了作为一切知智之近因的道智,从而显示了一切出世间功德的圆满。这两者所成立的意义,在“为天、人、世间所尊敬”等语句中得到了详细展开。而且,选取悲心显示了向无烦恼状态的趋近,选取智慧显示了烦恼的离去。同样,选取悲心显示了世尊随顺世间共许的运作方式,因为悲心属于世间言说的范畴;选取智慧显示了不超越世间共许。因为不如实了知诸法的自性,就会超越自性而执取众生等概念。同样,选取悲心显示了大悲定住,选取智慧显示了三时无碍智、四谛智、四无碍解智、四无畏智;由于选取悲心已经含摄了大悲定智,所以更以其余不共智——比如六神通、八众中无怖畏智、十力、十四佛德、十六智行、十八佛法、四十四智事、七十七智事等众多智慧分类——来显示智的行相。同样,选取悲心显示了行成就,选取智慧显示了明成就。选取悲心显示了以自己为尊,选取智慧显示了以法为尊。选取悲心显示了为世间依怙,选取智慧显示了以自己为依怙。同样,选取悲心显示了先作利他的状态,选取智慧显示了知恩的状态。选取悲心显示了不恼害他人,选取智慧显示了不恼害自己。或者,选取悲心显示了成佛之因的成就,选取智慧显示了成佛之果的成就。同样,选取悲心显示了度脱他人,选取智慧显示了度脱自己。同样,选取悲心显示了于一切众生有摄受之心,选取智慧显示了于一切法有离染之心。因为悲心是一切佛德的开始,以它为因;智慧是终结,因为在此之上再无应作之事。如此,通过显示开始与终结,一切佛德都已显示。同样,选取悲心显示了以戒蕴为先的定蕴;因为戒以悲为因,由此生起远离杀生等,而且与前三禅相应;提及智慧,则显示了慧蕴。戒是一切佛德的开始,定在中间,慧在终结。如此,一切佛德都以开始、中间、终结为善,因为是以方式显示。这确实是无余显示佛德的唯一方法,就是把握方式;否则,谁能有能力逐步无余显示世尊的功德呢?因此说:巴利
Apica karuṇāggahaṇena lokiyesu mahaggatabhāvappattāsādhāraṇaguṇadīpanato sabbalokiyaguṇasampatti dassitā, paññāggahaṇena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānamaggañāṇadīpanato sabbalokuttaraguṇasampatti. Tadubhayaggahaṇasiddho hi attho ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’ntiādinā vipañcīyatīti. Karuṇāggahaṇena ca nirupakkilesamupagamanaṃ dasseti, paññāggahaṇena apagamanaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena lokasamaññānurūpaṃ bhagavato pavattiṃ dasseti lokavohāravisayattā karuṇāya, paññāggahaṇena lokasamaññāya anatidhāvanaṃ. Sabhāvānavabodhena hi dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ atidhāvitvā sattādiparāmasanaṃ hoti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattivihāraṃ dasseti, paññāggahaṇena tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, catusaccañāṇaṃ, catupaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ, karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattiñāṇassa gahitattā sesāsādhāraṇañāṇāni, cha abhiññā, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇāni, dasa balāni, cuddasa buddhaguṇā, soḷasa ñāṇacariyā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, catucattārīsa ñāṇavatthūni, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūnīti evamādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paññāpabhedānaṃ vasena ñāṇacāraṃ dasseti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena caraṇasampattiṃ, paññāggahaṇena vijjāsampattiṃ. Karuṇāggahaṇena attādhipatitā, paññāggahaṇena dhammādhipatitā. Karuṇāggahaṇena lokanāthabhāvo, paññāggahaṇena attanāthabhāvo. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena pubbakārībhāvo, paññāggahaṇena kataññutā. Karuṇāggahaṇena aparantapatā, paññāggahaṇena anattantapatā. Karuṇāggahaṇena vā buddhakaradhammasiddhi, paññāggahaṇena buddhabhāvasiddhi. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena parasantāraṇaṃ, paññāggahaṇena attasantāraṇaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena sabbasattesu anuggahacittatā, paññāggahaṇena sabbadhammesu virattacittatā dassitā hoti sabbesañca buddhaguṇānaṃ karuṇā ādi tannidānabhāvato, paññā pariyosānaṃ tato uttari karaṇīyābhāvato. Iti ādipariyosānadassanena sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena sīlakkhandhapubbaṅgamo samādhikkhandho dassito hoti. Karuṇānidānañhi sīlaṃ tato pāṇātipātādiviratippavattito, sā ca jhānattayasampayoginīti, paññāvacanena paññākkhandho. Sīlañca sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ ādi, samādhi majjhe, paññā pariyosānanti evampi ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti nayato dassitattā. Eso eva hi niravasesato buddhaguṇānaṃ dassanupāyo, yadidaṃ nayaggāhaṇaṃ, aññathā ko nāma samattho bhagavato guṇe anupadaṃ niravasesato dassetuṃ. Tenevāha –
即使是佛陀,要赞叹另一位佛陀的功德,
就算不说别的,说上一整劫,
就算用上漫长遥远的一大劫时间来说,劫期也会耗尽,也说不完。
如来的称誉也不会减损。巴利
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno. Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti.
也正因为这样,当世尊追问舍利弗长老对佛功德的分别时,长老先用“尊者,并不是这样”来否认,然后又说“不过,尊者,我已了知法的次第”,这记载在《自欢喜经》里。巴利
Teneva ca āyasmatā sāriputtattherenāpi buddhaguṇaparicchedanaṃ pati bhagavatā anuyuttena ‘‘no hetaṃ bhante’’ti paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘api ca me bhante dhammanvayo vidito’’ti sampasādanīyasutte vuttaṃ.
就这样,先用简要的方式,以世尊具足一切知等种种功德来开头的赞叹和敬礼做完了;现在,为了也以赞叹正法来开头的敬礼,说出了“buddhopi”等话。这里,连同词句关联起来的简要意思是:具足前面所说种种功德聚的佛陀,也礼敬那被称为圣道的法——也就是通过修习被称为圣道的法(或者连同前行阶段的修行法),以及通过证悟被称为果与涅槃的法(或者连同教法、修行法),而达到了被称为正等觉的佛位;他礼敬那无垢无上的法本身。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhepena sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavato thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni saddhammassāpi thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ karonto ‘‘buddhopī’’tiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ saha padasambandhena saṅkhepattho – yathāvuttavividhaguṇagaṇasamannāgato buddhopi yaṃ ariyamaggasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ, saha pubbabhāgapaṭipattidhammena vā ariyamaggabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā ceva yaṃ phalanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ, pariyattidhammapaṭipattidhammehi vā saha phalanibbānabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikatvā ca sammāsambodhisaṅkhātaṃ buddhabhāvamupagato, vītamalamanuttaraṃ taṃ dhammampi vandeti.
在这里,先要理解“佛”这个词的含义,可以按照“觉悟了诸谛,所以是佛;令众生觉悟,所以是佛”这类解说的方式来理解。或者,因为通过证得最高道智,彻底断除了连同习气在内的愚痴睡眠,又因为达到了具足无量功德庄严的一切知智而开显觉悟,所以称为佛,这是从觉醒、开显的意义上来说的。或者,由于没有任何应知之法是未觉悟的,不把特定的应知之法执取为所作业,因此没有作业的欲求,这是从了知的意义上,只就作者来解说,所以也可以说“觉悟故为佛”。因为如果不限定范围来执取,就知道所取的是无余的,就像说“受戒者不施”一样。这样看来,应当知道“佛”这个词是只就作者成立的,不观待特殊的作业。但从义理上说,佛是由波罗蜜所成熟、以自然智断尽连同习气在内的一切烦恼、摧毁无余烦恼、作为大悲与一切知智等无量功德聚所依的蕴相续,正如所说——巴利
Tattha buddhasaddassa tāva ‘‘bujjhitā saccānīti buddho. Bodhetā pajāyāti buddho’’tiādinā niddesanayena attho veditabbo. Atha vā aggamaggañāṇādhigamena savāsanāya sammohaniddāya accantavigamanato, aparimitaguṇagaṇālaṅkatasabbaññutaññāṇappattiyā vikasitabhāvato ca buddhavāti buddho jāgaraṇavikasanatthavasena. Atha vā kassacipi ñeyyadhammassa anavabuddhassa abhāvena ñeyyavisesassa kammabhāvāgahaṇato kammavacanicchāyābhāvena avagamanatthavasena kattuniddesova labbhati, tasmā buddhavāti buddhotipi vattabbo. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Evañca katvā kammavisesānapekkhā kattari eva buddhasaddasiddhi veditabbā, atthato pana pāramitāparibhāvito sayambhuñāṇena saha vāsanāya vihataviddhastaniravasesakilesomahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimeyyaguṇagaṇādhāro khandhasantāno buddho, yathāha –
所谓“佛陀”,就是指那位世尊——他无师自悟,没有老师指导,在以前从未听人宣说过的诸法中,自己觉悟了诸谛,并在其中达到了全知,对种种力也获得了自在。巴利
‘‘Buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto, balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. 97; paṭi. ma. 161).
“Api”这个词表示赞叹。通过它说明:就连那位具足如此殊胜功德的世尊,也是修习了这样的法、亲证了之后才成就佛位的,那其他人成就声闻等果位就更不用说了。这是在表达对法的赞叹。“佛位”就是正自觉。因为,以一切知智为直接基础的最上道智,以及以最上道智为直接基础的一切知智,使世尊被称为“佛陀”;而以此为所缘的智也生起,在这里就称为“位”。所谓“位”,就是“觉”等词所依之处。正如他们所说——巴利
Apisaddo sambhāvane, tena evaṃ guṇavisesayutto sopi nāma bhagavā īdisaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā, sacchikatvā ca buddhabhāvamupagato, kā nāma kathā aññesaṃ sāvakādibhāvamupagamaneti dhamme sambhāvanaṃ dīpeti. Buddhabhāvanti sammāsambodhiṃ. Yena hi nimittabhūtena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānena aggamaggañāṇena, aggamaggañāṇapadaṭṭhānena ca sabbaññutaññāṇena bhagavati ‘‘buddho’’ti nāmaṃ, tadārammaṇañca ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tamevidha ‘‘bhāvo’’ti vuccati. Bhavanti buddhisaddā etenāti hi bhāvo. Tathā hi vadanti –
无论以哪种相,觉这个词都会随之出现;
由那些各自的因相所宣说的“状态”。巴利
‘‘Yena yena nimittena, buddhi saddo ca vattate; Taṃtaṃnimittakaṃ bhāvapaccayehi udīrita’’nti.
“修习”是指令它生起,或者令它增长。“亲证”是指以现前之智了知。“Ceva”和“ca”这两个词在这里都表示合集。因此,通过这两个词,合集说明:世尊并不是仅仅靠修习法就达到了佛位,也不是仅仅靠亲证,而是靠这两者一起才达到的。“达到”就是证得、获得的意思,这里和“佛位”这个词相关联。“无垢”:在这里,“离”以远离的方式存在、运作,所以叫“离”;远离垢染,所以叫“离垢”;或者说,他的垢染已经离去,所以叫“离垢”,那即是“无垢”。也见到“gatamala”这样的文本读法,若如此,则如带有前缀一样,不带前缀的“gata”一词也应知道是表示远离之义,因为诸界有多种含义。因为“去、离去”,所以是“gata”,即法。或者说,垢已去,依前一种方式构成复合词。“无上”:无有更上。对于依所教而行的人,从恶趣、从轮回中不堕落,令持守,所以是“法”,即九种出世间法。由于能宣示它,又由于亲证与观照的同义词可得,所以教理之法在这里也被包括在内。正如《义注》中说:“证得了阿毗达摩法的海洋,观照了三藏”,又如说“修习、亲证了那法”,因此,应知由于适合修习与亲证,与作为佛陀所作之法的波罗蜜一起,前分戒学等在这里也被包括在内。那些也因为远离了敌对法而是“无垢”,因为不共于他者而是“无上”。然而,怎样修习、亲证了那些之后,世尊达到了佛位呢?回答说:因为众生为了从轮回流转之苦中出离,所造的大誓愿、大悲的堪忍、柔软、胜解,以及以智慧殊胜而清净无染的布施、调御、自制等最上诸法,历经四阿僧祇劫又十万劫,恭敬、无间、无余地以修习与亲证,于业等处获得自在力,具有不可思议的大威神力,达到增上戒、增上心的究竟圆满,世尊以二十四万俱胝百千种方式对缘起发出大金刚智,达到了名为无上正等菩提的佛位。巴利
Bhāvetvāti uppādetvā, vaḍḍhetvā vā. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā. Ceva-saddo ca-saddo ca tadubhayattha samuccaye. Tena hi saddadvayena na kevalaṃ bhagavā dhammassa bhāvanāmattena buddhabhāvamupagato, nāpi sacchikiriyāmattena, atha kho tadubhayenevāti samuccinoti. Upagatoti patto, adhigatoti attho. Etassa ‘‘buddhabhāva’’nti padena sambandho. Vītamalanti ettha virahavasena eti pavattatīti vīto, malato vīto, vītaṃ vā malaṃ yassāti vītamalo, taṃ vītamalaṃ. ‘‘Gatamala’’ntipi pāṭho dissati, evaṃ sati saupasaggo viya anupasaggopi gatasaddo virahatthavācako veditabbo dhātūnamanekatthattā. Gacchati apagacchatīti hi gato, dhammo . Gataṃ vā malaṃ, purimanayena samāso. Anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ. Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyato, saṃsārato ca apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo, navavidho lokuttaradhammo. Tappakāsanattā, sacchikiriyāsammasanapariyāyassa ca labbhamānattā pariyattidhammopi idha saṅgahito . Tathā hi ‘‘abhidhammanayasamuddaṃ adhigacchi, tīṇi piṭakāni sammasī’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘yaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā sacchikatvā’’ti ca vuttattā bhāvanāsacchikiriyāyogyatāya buddhakaradhammabhūtāhi pāramitāhi saha pubbabhāgaadhisīlasikkhādayopi idha saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Tāpi hi vigatapaṭipakkhatāya vītamalā, anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttarā ca. Kathaṃ pana tā bhāvetvā, sacchikatvā ca bhagavā buddhabhāvamupagatoti? Vuccate – sattānañhi saṃsāravaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇāya [nissaraṇatthāya (paṇṇāsa ṭī.) nissaraṇe (katthaci)] katamahābhinīhāro mahākaruṇādhivāsanapesalajjhāsayo paññāvisesapariyodātanimmalānaṃ dānadamasaññamādīnaṃ uttamadhammānaṃ kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ niravasesaṃ bhāvanāsacchikiriyāhi kammādīsu adhigatavasībhāvo acchariyācinteyyamahānubhāvo adhisīlādhicittānaṃ paramukkaṃsapāramippatto bhagavā paccayākāre catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pesetvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhisaṅkhātaṃ buddhabhāvamupagatoti.
不过,这首偈颂是用明与解脱等种种成就、众多功德,按各自合适的方式赞叹正法。怎么赞叹呢?这里,“修习之后”这一说法,是以明的成就来赞叹;“亲证之后”这一说法,是以解脱的成就来赞叹。同样,以第一项(修习)表示禅那的成就,以第二项(亲证)表示解脱的成就。或者,以第一项表示定的成就,以第二项表示等至的成就。或者,以第一项表示尽智的状态,以第二项表示无生智的状态。或者,以第一项表示如电光一般,以第二项表示如金刚一般。或者,以第一项表示离欲的成就,以第二项表示灭尽的成就。同样,以第一项表示出离的性质,以第二项表示脱离的性质。或者,以第一项表示因的性质,以第二项表示无为的性质。或者,以第一项表示见的性质,以第二项表示远离的性质。或者,以第一项表示增上的性质,以第二项表示不死的性质,这样来赞叹法。或者,用“修习了某法而达到佛位”这一句,以善说性来赞叹法;用“亲证”这一句,以现见性来赞叹法。同样,以第一项表示无时性,以第二项表示来见性。或者,以第一项表示应导入性,以第二项表示各自应证知性。或者,以第一项连同前行的戒等,用有学者的戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴来赞叹法;以第二项连同无为界,用无学法来赞叹法。巴利
Imāya pana gāthāya vijjāvimuttisampadādīhi anekehi guṇehi yathārahaṃ saddhammaṃ thometi. Kathaṃ? Ettha hi ‘‘bhāvetvā’’ti etena vijjāsampadāya thometi, ‘‘sacchikatvā’’ti etena vimuttisampadāya. Tathā paṭhamena jhānasampadāya, dutiyena vimokkhasampadāya. Paṭhamena vā samādhisampadāya, dutiyena samāpattisampadāya. Atha vā paṭhamena khayañāṇabhāvena, dutiyena anuppādañāṇabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā vijjūpamatāya, dutiyena vajirūpamatāya. Paṭhamena vā virāgasampattiyā, dutiyena nirodhasampattiyā. Tathā paṭhamena niyyānabhāvena, dutiyena nissaraṇabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā hetubhāvena, dutiyena asaṅkhatabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā dassanabhāvena, dutiyena vivekabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā adhipatibhāvena, dutiyena amatabhāvena dhammaṃ thometi. Atha vā ‘‘yaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā buddhabhāvaṃ upagato’’ti etena svākkhātatāya dhammaṃ thometi, ‘‘sacchikatvā’’ti etena sandiṭṭhikatāya. Tathā paṭhamena akālikatāya, dutiyena ehipassikatāya. Paṭhamena vā opaneyyikatāya, dutiyena paccattaṃveditabbatāya. Paṭhamena vā saha pubbabhāgasīlādīhi sekkhehi sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhehi , dutiyena saha asaṅkhatadhātuyā asekkhehi dhammaṃ thometi.
用“无垢”这个词,是通过说明没有杂染,以清净性来赞叹法;用“无上”这个词,是通过说明没有其他更殊胜的,以圆满性来赞叹法。或者,前者是以断除的成就来赞叹,后者是以自性的成就来赞叹。或者,前者是以堪能获得修习之果来赞叹,后者是以堪能获得亲证之果来赞叹。因为正是通过修习的功德,它才能断除杂染之垢,所以用前者说的是修习行为之果。因为再没有比这更高的应作之事,所以它不共于其他法的无上性是由亲证产生的,因此用后者说的是亲证之果。巴利
‘‘Vītamala’’nti iminā pana saṃkilesābhāvadīpanena visuddhatāya dhammaṃ thometi, ‘‘anuttara’’nti etena aññassa visiṭṭhassa abhāvadīpanena paripuṇṇatāya. Paṭhamena vā pahānasampadāya, dutiyena sabhāvasampadāya. Paṭhamena vā bhāvanāphalayogyatāya. Bhāvanāguṇena hi so saṃkilesamalasamugghātako, tasmānena bhāvanākiriyāya phalamāha. Dutiyena sacchikiriyāphalayogyatāya. Taduttarikaraṇīyābhāvato hi anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttarabhāvo sacchikiriyānibbattito, tasmānena sacchikiriyāphalamāhāti.
就这样,先用简要的方式,以赞叹一切正法功德为先导,对正法作了礼敬;现在又以赞叹为先导,对圣僧团作礼敬,于是说出“善逝的亲生子”等话。这里,“善逝的”是表示属格关系,要和“子”这个词连在一起理解。所谓“亲生”,是指从胸中出生、由胸中所生,或者在胸中长大。在四种儿子——自生子、田生子、弟子、所赋予子——当中,这里指的是自生子;不过因为相似,圣者们也被称为“亲生”。就像世人的亲生儿子,因为是从自己而出生的,所以特别有资格继承父亲的遗产;同样,这些圣者在听闻正法结束时,以圣者的出生而出生,因此特别有资格继承属于世尊的解脱之乐和法宝遗产。或者,凭借世尊说法的威力,正在进入或已经进入圣者境界的圣弟子们,因为是在世尊胸怀中由精进所生的殊胜出生,所以不必借助比喻,就完全配得上“亲生”这个称呼。因为世尊观察他们的习性、随眠、行为、胜解等,又省察他们的过失,把他们放在心里,遮止他们的过失,让他们安住在没有过失的地方,用戒等法身来滋养、使他们成长。正如世尊在《如是语》中说:“诸比丘,我是婆罗门……你们是我的儿子,是亲生,从口所生”等等。难道弟子所说的教法就不能带来圣者境界吗?确实能,但它因为是以世尊的教法为根本,又在特相等方面没有差别,所以仍然被算作“世尊的说法”,因此还是应该说他们是世尊的亲生儿子。由此说明,在四种儿子当中,圣僧团是自生子的身份。他们能回归并净化自己的家族,或者能填满父母的心,所以叫“儿子”,有自生子等类。而圣者们通过净化法统、通过随法修行来使心欢喜,因此与世尊相类似,被称为世尊的儿子。这里和“众”这个词相连。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhepeneva sabbasaddhammaguṇehi saddhammassāpi thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni ariyasaṅghassāpi thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ karonto ‘‘sugatassa orasāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sugatassāti sambandhaniddeso, ‘‘puttāna’’nti etena sambajjhitabbo. Urasi bhavā, jātā, saṃvuddhā vā orasā, attajo khettajo antevāsiko dinnakoti catubbidhesu puttesu attajā, taṃsarikkhatāya pana ariyapuggalā ‘‘orasā’’ti vuccanti. Yathā hi manussānaṃ orasaputtā attajātatāya pitusantakassa dāyajjassa visesabhāgino honti, evametepi saddhammasavanante ariyāya jātiyā jātatāya bhagavato santakassa vimuttisukhassa dhammaratanassa ca dāyajjassa visesabhāginoti. Atha vā bhagavato dhammadesanānubhāvena ariyabhūmiṃ okkamamānā, okkantā ca ariyasāvakā bhagavato ure vāyāmajanitābhijātatāya sadisakappanamantarena nippariyāyeneva ‘‘orasā’’ti vattabbatamarahanti. Tathā hi te bhagavatā āsayānusayacariyādhimuttiādiolokanena, vajjānucintanena ca hadaye katvā vajjato nivāretvā anavajje patiṭṭhāpentena sīlādidhammasarīraposanena saṃvaḍḍhāpitā. Yathāha bhagavā itivuttake ‘‘ahamasmi bhikkhave brāhmaṇo…pe… tassa me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā’’tiādi (itivu. 100). Nanu sāvakadesitāpi desanā ariyabhāvāvahāti? Saccaṃ, sā pana tammūlikattā, lakkhaṇādivisesābhāvato ca ‘‘bhagavato dhammadesanā’’ icceva saṅkhyaṃ gatā, tasmā bhagavato orasaputtabhāvoyeva tesaṃ vattabboti, etena catubbidhesu puttesu ariyasaṅghassa attajaputtabhāvaṃ dasseti. Attano kulaṃ punenti sodhenti, mātāpitūnaṃ vā hadayaṃ pūrentīti puttā, attajādayo. Ariyā pana dhammatantivisodhanena, dhammānudhammapaṭipattiyā cittārādhanena ca tappaṭibhāgatāya bhagavato puttā nāma, tesaṃ. Tassa ‘‘samūha’’nti padena sambandho.
成为杂染的相状,杀害、损害功德,所以叫魔,也就是天子魔。用它来绑住其他人,所以叫军;魔的军也是这样。把魔和魔军捣碎、碾碎,所以叫碎魔军者,指的是他们。本来应该说碎魔与魔军者,但这里按部分省略、以部分代表整体的方式这样说。或者,因为魔这个词就在旁边,军这个词就应当理解为魔军,而且这里为了偈颂的韵律而缩短了。有些地方读作碎魔军者,但那个读法对这首偈颂来说并不合适,因为这首偈颂是圣者们所说的。难道圣弟子们在证得圣道的时候,不像世尊那样,有天子魔或魔军来制造障碍吗?那为什么这样说呢?因为他们应当被排除的那个原因已经被碾碎了。也就是说,他们应当被排除的原因——杂染——已经被碾碎,所以他们也就算是已经被碾碎了。或者,就像蕴魔和行魔一样,天子魔也因为帮助杀害功德,所以这里把烦恼的力量称为魔军,正如世尊所说——巴利
Saṃkilesanimittaṃ hutvā guṇaṃ māreti vibādhatīti māro, devaputtamāro. Sināti pare bandhati etāyāti senā, mārassa senā tathā, mārañca mārasenañca mathenti vilothentīti mārasenamathanā, tesaṃ. ‘‘Māramārasenamathanāna’’nti hi vattabbepi ekadesasarūpekasesavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Mārasaddasannidhānena vā senāsaddena mārasenā gahetabbā, gāthābandhavasena cettha rasso. ‘‘Mārasenamaddanāna’’ntipi katthaci pāṭho, so ayuttova ariyājātikattā imissā gāthāya. Nanu ca ariyasāvakānaṃ maggādhigamasamaye bhagavato viya tadantarāyakaraṇatthaṃ devaputtamāro vā mārasenā vā na apasādeti, atha kasmā evaṃ vuttanti? Apasādetabbabhāvakāraṇassa vimathitattā. Tesañhi apasādetabbatāya kāraṇe saṃkilese vimathite tepi vimathitā nāma hontīti. Atha vā khandhābhisaṅkhāramārānaṃ viya devaputtamārassāpi guṇamāraṇe sahāyabhāvūpagamanato kilesabalakāyo idha ‘‘mārasenā’’ti vuccati yathāha bhagavā –
欲乐是你的第一支军,第二支叫作不乐。
第三是你的饥渴,第四称为渴爱。
第五是昏沉睡眠,第六称为怖畏。
第七是你的疑,抹恩是你的第八,顽固也是你的第八。
得到、名声和恭敬,
还有靠邪门歪道得来的名声和追随者;
如果有人抬高自己,
还轻视别人。
这就是你的军队,魔罗,黑暗者用来进攻的力量。
不勇猛的人胜不了它,战胜了就能得到快乐。巴利
‘‘Kāmā te paṭhamā senā, dutiyā arati vuccati; Tatiyā khuppipāsā te, catutthī taṇhā pavuccati. Pañcamaṃ thinamiddhaṃ te, chaṭṭhā bhīrū pavuccati; Sattamī vicikicchā te, makkho thambho te aṭṭhamo. Lābho siloko sakkāro, Micchāladdho ca yo yaso; Yo cattānaṃ samukkaṃse, Pare ca avajānati. Esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī; Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukha’’nti. (su. ni. 438; mahāni. 28; cūḷani. 47);
那一千五百种乃至无量种的烦恼军队,被那些圣弟子们用念、择法、精进、止等功德作为武器,一部分一部分地粉碎、摧毁、消灭,因此他们被称为“碎魔军者”。这里说的粉碎,就是摧毁或消灭。另外,蕴魔、行魔、死魔、天子魔都来充当它的帮手,所以对那个被称为“军”的烦恼魔的粉碎,也可以这样理解:由于粉碎了五魔,这个含义就完整了。圣弟子们通过断除集和遍知来粉碎蕴魔,通过让行魔失去所有助伴、彻底不再生起来粉碎行魔,通过摧伏其力和超越其境来粉碎死魔与天子魔,通过彻底断除使烦恼魔不再生起来粉碎烦恼魔。这就说明了他们是世尊亲生儿子的原因,也说明在三种儿子中他们是随生子。正因为粉碎了魔军,他们才是世尊的亲生儿子,也是随生子。巴利
Sā ca tehi ariyasāvakehi diyaḍḍhasahassabhedā, anantabhedā vā kilesavāhinī satidhammavicayavīriyasamathādiguṇapaharaṇīhi odhiso mathitā, viddhaṃsitā, vihatā ca, tasmā ‘‘mārasenamathanā’’ti vuccanti. Vilothanañcettha viddhaṃsanaṃ, vihananaṃ vā. Apica khandhābhisaṅkhāramaccudevaputtamārānaṃ tesaṃ sahāyabhāvūpagamanatāya senāsaṅkhātassa kilesamārassa ca mathanato ‘‘mārasenamathanā’’tipi attho gahetabbo. Evañca sati pañcamāranimmathanabhāvena attho paripuṇṇo hoti. Ariyasāvakāpi hi samudayappahānapariññāvasena khandhamāraṃ, sahāyavekallakaraṇena sabbathā, appavattikaraṇena ca abhisaṅkhāramāraṃ, balavidhamanavisayātikkamanavasena maccumāraṃ, devaputtamārañca samucchedappahānavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena kilesamāraṃ mathentīti, iminā pana tesaṃ orasaputtabhāve kāraṇaṃ, tīsu puttesu ca anujātataṃ dasseti. Mārasenamathanatāya hi te bhagavato orasaputtā, anujātā cāti.
“八众”是数量上的限定。通过这个限定说明:即使他们按各自类别分成成百上千种不同的数目,从圣道与圣果之法的类别来说,都不会超出这个数量范围,也就是不会超出处于道位和果位的状态。pi 这个词,或者 api 这个词,是因为措辞顺口等原因才用在了不合适的位置上,它应该和“圣僧”连在一起理解,这样就把意思总括为:不只是佛和法,还包括圣僧。虽然离开组成部分并没有一个独立存在的聚合体,因为聚合体是依据组成部分才说的,但可以用已知的聚合体来限定未知的聚合体,所以说“八众的集合”。这就特别说明:这里说的“圣僧”,其聚合不是靠某种形态或身体上的和合,而是靠处于道位和果位的状态。把组成部分聚集起来,应当被思量、被考量、被集合在一起,所以叫“众”;由于词语连读等原因,它也就是“集”。两种读法都讲得通。因为远离烦恼,不走邪道,并且行于正道,所以按词源叫“圣”。或者,因为被包括天神在内的世间所皈依,值得被忆念、被亲近,而且亲近的人能因此成就目标,所以叫“圣”;因为见解和戒行相同而和合,或者以聚合体的方式共同从事和合之事,所以叫“僧”。圣者们的僧团,或者按上面说的方式,既是圣者又是僧团,这就是“圣僧”。世尊之后,佛宝和法宝的证得也依赖于僧宝,为了说明圣僧的巨大帮助,就在这里说了“以头顶礼敬”。这个意思必定应当接受,因为在《律藏注》等中也是这样说的。不过有些人把那个词也应用到前面的偈颂中来理解,那是不恰当的,因为这里是显示三宝不共功德之处,而且如上所说的理由也是所有赞叹方式所意乐的。巴利
Aṭṭhannanti gaṇanaparicchedo, tenasatipi tesaṃ taṃtaṃbhedena anekasatasahassasaṅkhyābhede ariyabhāvakaramaggaphaladhammabhedena imaṃ gaṇanaparicchedaṃ nātivattanti maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvānativattanatoti dasseti. Pi-saddo, api-saddo vā padalīḷādinā kāraṇena aṭṭhāne payutto, so ‘‘ariyasaṅgha’’nti ettha yojetabbo, tena na kevalaṃ buddhadhammeyeva, atha kho ariyasaṅghampīti sampiṇḍeti. Yadipi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma koci natthi avayavaṃ upādāya samudāyassa vattabbattā, aviññāyamānasamudāyaṃ pana viññāyamānasamudāyena visesitumarahatīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti, etena ‘‘ariyasaṅgha’’nti ettha na yena kenaci saṇṭhānādinā, kāyasāmaggiyā vā samudāyabhāvo, api tu maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvenevāti viseseti. Avayavameva sampiṇḍetvā ūhitabbo vitakketabbo, saṃūhanitabbo vā saṅghaṭitabboti samūho, soyeva samoho vacanasiliṭṭhatādinā. Dvidhāpi hi pāṭho yujjati. Ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato ariyā niruttinayena . Atha vā sadevakena lokena saraṇanti araṇīyato upagantabbato, upagatānañca tadatthasiddhito ariyā, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhato, samaggaṃ vā kammaṃ samudāyavasena samupagatoti saṅgho, ariyānaṃ saṅgho, ariyo ca so saṅgho ca yathāvuttanayenāti vā ariyasaṅgho, taṃ ariyasaṅghaṃ. Bhagavato aparabhāge buddhadhammaratanānampi samadhigamo saṅgharatanādhīnoti ariyasaṅghassa bahūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ idheva ‘‘sirasā vande’’ti vuttaṃ. Avassañcāyamattho sampaṭicchitabbo vinayaṭṭhakathādīsupi (pārā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) tathā vuttattā. Keci pana purimagāthāsupi taṃ padamānetvā yojenti, tadayuttameva ratanattayassa asādhāraṇaguṇappakāsanaṭṭhānattā, yathāvuttakāraṇassa ca sabbesampi saṃvaṇṇanākārānamadhippetattāti.
通过这首偈颂,圣僧团体的出身成就、断除成就等许多功德就被显示出来了。怎么显示的呢?用“善逝的亲生子”这一句,说明圣僧团体来源于正等正觉者,从而显示其出身成就。用“摧破魔军”这一句,说明断除了一切烦恼杂染,从而显示其断除成就。用“八众的集合”这一句,说明他们处于道位和果位的状态,从而显示其智慧成就。用“圣僧”这一句,说明他们是一切僧众中最上的,从而显示其自性成就。或者也可以这样理解:用“善逝的亲生子”显示圣僧团体具有清净的依止;用“摧破魔军”显示他们正确地、正直地、如法地修行;用“八众的集合”显示他们值得供养等性质;用“圣僧”显示他们是最上的福田。同样,用“善逝的亲生子”显示圣僧团体具有出世间皈依的本质,因为他们正是通过出世间皈依才成为世尊的亲生子。用“摧破魔军”显示由愿行成就所圆满的前分正行,因为已经立下愿行并正确修行的人,能够战胜魔和魔军。用“八众的集合”,通过补特伽罗的施设来显示道果诸法,从而显示摧破敌对者的有学法和无学法。用“圣僧”显示他们是最上的应供者,因为显示了他们是最上的福田。皈依是弟子们一切功德的开始,连同前分修行,有学阶段的戒蕴等是中间,无学阶段的戒蕴等是最终——如此,从开始、中间到最终都善好的、简要来说圣僧团体的一切功德就都显示出来了。巴利
Imāya pana gāthāya ariyasaṅghassa pabhavasampadā pahānasampadādayo aneke guṇā dassitā honti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti hi etena ariyasaṅghassa pabhavasampadaṃ dasseti sammāsambuddhapabhavatādīpanato. ‘‘Mārasenamathanāna’’nti etena pahānasampadaṃ sakalasaṃkilesappahānadīpanato. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti etena ñāṇasampadaṃ maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvadīpanato . ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti etena sabhāvasampadaṃ sabbasaṅghānaṃ aggabhāvadīpanato. Atha vā ‘‘sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti ariyasaṅghassa visuddhanissayabhāvadīpanaṃ. ‘‘Mārasenamathanāna’’nti sammāujuñāyasāmīcipaṭipannabhāvadīpanaṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti āhuneyyādibhāvadīpanaṃ. ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti anuttarapuññakkhettabhāvadīpanaṃ. Tathā ‘‘sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti etena ariyasaṅghassa lokuttarasaraṇagamanasabbhāvaṃ dasseti. Lokuttarasaraṇagamanena hi te bhagavato orasaputtā jātā. ‘‘Mārasenamathanāna’nti etena abhinīhārasampadāsiddhaṃ pubbabhāgasammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Katābhinīhārā hi sammāpaṭipannā māraṃ, mārasenaṃ vā abhivijinanti. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti etena viddhastavipakkhe sekkhāsekkhadhamme dasseti puggalādhiṭṭhānena maggaphaladhammānaṃ dassitattā. ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti etena aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ dasseti anuttarapuññakkhettabhāvassa dassitattā. Saraṇagamanañca sāvakānaṃ sabbaguṇassa ādi, sapubbabhāgapaṭipadā sekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo majjhe, asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo pariyosānantiādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā saṅkhepato sabbepi ariyasaṅghaguṇā dassitā hontīti.
就这样,先用三首偈颂从总体上以赞叹一切功德的方式礼敬了三宝,现在要把这份恭敬之举转向所期望的目的,于是说了“iti me”等话。其中,“iti”这个词表示指示,用它来指出前面所说的三首偈颂的方式。“me”是用工具格来说自己作为行为者,剩下的文句“yaṃ puññaṃ mayā laddhaṃ”与它相连;或者这是与格的说明,补上“atthi”;或者是属格的说明,即“yaṃ mama puññaṃ vandanāmayaṃ”。内心清净、生起净信的人,具有那样的慧或那样的心,就叫作“pasannamati”;因为这个复合词的性由后一词决定,所以说成“pasannamatino”。能带来、产生或承载喜乐的,就是宝;有七种宝或十种宝之说,词源学者说它们就像这些宝一样。不过,除了相似假立之外,按前面所说的词义,佛陀等确实具有宝的性质,这也是成立的。因为当人如理作意“彼世尊是阿拉汉……”等真实功德时,就会生起无量喜悦与欢喜,成为证得不死之因。正如所说:巴利
Evaṃ gāthāttayena saṅkhepato sakalaguṇasaṃkittanamukhena ratanattayassa paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni taṃ nipaccakāraṃ yathādhippetapayojane pariṇāmento ‘‘iti me’’tiādimāha. Tattha iti-saddo nidassane. Tena gāthāttayena yathāvuttanayaṃ nidasseti. Meti attānaṃ karaṇavacanena kattubhāvena niddisati. Tassa ‘‘yaṃ puññaṃ mayā laddha’’nti pāṭhasesena sambandho, sampadānaniddeso vā eso, ‘‘atthī’’ti pāṭhaseso, sāminiddeso vā ‘‘yaṃ mama puññaṃ vandanāmaya’’nti. Pasīdīyate pasannā, tādisā mati paññā, cittaṃ vā yassāti pasannamati, aññapadaliṅgappadhānattā imassa samāsapadassa ‘‘pasannamatino’’ti vuttaṃ. Ratiṃ nayati, janeti, vahatīti vā ratanaṃ, sattavidhaṃ, dasavidhaṃ vā ratanaṃ, tamiva imānīti neruttikā. Sadisakappanamaññatra pana yathāvuttavacanattheneva buddhādīnaṃ ratanabhāvo yujjati. Tesañhi ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.157, 255) yathābhūtaguṇe āvajjantassa amatādhigamahetubhūtaṃ anappakaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Yathāha –
摩诃男,当圣弟子忆念如来的时候,就在那个时候,他的心不会被贪欲缠住,不会被嗔缠住……不会被痴缠住……摩诃男,就在那个时候,他的心只是正直地朝向如来。摩诃男,心正直的圣弟子会得到义之乐,会得到法之乐,会得到与法相应的喜悦;喜悦了,喜就会生起。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ mahānāma samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa…pe… na moha…pe… ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti tathāgataṃ ārabbha. Ujugatacitto kho pana mahānāma ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11).
或者,被尊重等状态就是宝的含义。这一点在注疏中已经说过:巴利
Cittīkatādibhāvo vā ratanaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu –
受到恭敬,又价值高昂,无可比拟,难得一见;
因为具有为卓越有情所受用的特性,所以被称为宝。巴利
‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ; Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti. (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; udāna. aṭṭha. 47; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; su. ni. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 1.226);
恭敬性等特质,因为只有佛陀等圣者才具有,而且最为殊胜,不为其他圣者所共有。详细解释应当从《宝经注》中获取。不过,这个含义并不是从词源分析的角度来说的,那是从什么角度说的呢?精通语言的人说:是从世间公认的宝物应当被尊重等含义的角度来说的。又因为善人们喜悦于它,因为它能让人渡过轮回的苦海,因为它能引导人走向善趣和涅槃,所以叫“宝”——这是按同义复合词来解释的,不需要再过多分析。或者用省略其中一方的构词方式,或者用复数形式的词源解释,称为“诸宝”。三者的集合,或者三者聚合在一起,或者它有三个组成部分,所以叫“三”,就是诸宝的三,不是别的,所以叫“三宝”。然而,离开了组成部分,整体就不存在,所以正是这三者被称为宝,而不是仅仅指集合体,不过是从集合体的角度使用了单数形式。被礼敬就是礼敬,这礼敬本身所构成的,就叫“礼敬所成”,就像说“布施所成、持戒所成”一样。这里的礼敬,是指以身、语、意对三宝的功德心生倾向,或者说是称赞。此外,与那种思心所同时生起、以此为助缘的,与信、慧、念、精进等相应的法,就是礼敬,由它所造作的,就叫“礼敬所成”,就像说“金所成、银所成”一样,从意义上说,其实就是前面所说的那种思心所本身。对三宝的,或者属于三宝的礼敬所成,就是“三宝礼敬所成”。因为能产生应当供养的果报,所以按词源学叫“福”,它清净自己的造作者或心相续,所以叫“福”——这是从及物动词的使役用法来解释词义的,而词的构成则纯粹是从语音本身来的——精通语言的人是这样说的。巴利
Cittīkatabhāvādayo ca anaññasādhāraṇā sātisayato buddhādīsuyeva labbhantīti. Vitthāro ratanasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226) gahetabbo. Ayamattho pana nibbacanatthavasena na vutto, atha kenāti ce? Loke ratanasammatassa vatthuno garukātabbatādiatthavasenāti saddavidū. Sādhūnañca ramanato, saṃsāraṇṇavā ca taraṇato, sugatinibbānañca nayanato ratanaṃ tulyatthasamāsavasena, alamatipapañcena. Ekasesapakappanena, puthuvacananibbacanena vā ratanāni. Tiṇṇaṃ samūho, tīṇi vā samāhaṭāni, tayo vā avayavā assāti tayaṃ, ratanānameva tayaṃ, nāññesanti ratanattayaṃ. Avayavavinimuttassa pana samudāyassa abhāvato tīṇi eva ratanāni tathā vuccanti, na samudāyamattaṃ, samudāyāpekkhāya pana ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Vandīyate vandanā, sāva vandanāmayaṃ yathā ‘‘dānamayaṃ sīlamaya’’nti (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 33). Vandanā cettha kāyavācācittehi tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇaninnatā, thomanā vā. Apica tassā cetanāya sahajātādopakāreko saddhāpaññāsativīriyādisampayuttadhammo vandanā, tāya pakatanti vandanāmayaṃ yathā ‘‘sovaṇṇamayaṃ rūpiyamaya’’nti, atthato pana yathāvuttacetanāva. Ratanattaye, ratanattayassa vā vandanāmayaṃ ratanattayavandanāmayaṃ. Pujjabhavaphalanibbattanato puññaṃ niruttinayena, attano kārakaṃ, santānaṃ vā punāti visodhetīti puññaṃ, sakammakattā dhātussa kāritavasena atthavivaraṇaṃ labbhati, saddanipphatti pana suddhavasenevāti saddavidū.
那个障碍,是以系缚种种成就的方式,来到有情相续的中间、间隙,所以叫“障碍”,也就是现世等的不利。依照礼敬作用中所说的方法,障碍被彻底破坏、摧毁,所以叫“善摧障碍者”。这里所说的“破坏”,应当理解为:通过避开能生起那些障碍的因,使那些障碍不再生起。“已存在”是表示过去时间的动作,它和“我将阐明义理”这句话相连。“彼的”——指以“yaṃ”这个词所指出的、由礼敬所成的福德。“以威力”——就是以力量。巴利
Taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Paṇāmapayojane vuttavidhinā suṭṭhu vihato viddhasto antarāyo assāti suvihatantarāyo. Vihananañcettha taduppādakahetupariharaṇavasena tesaṃ antarāyānamanuppattikaraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Hutvāti pubbakālakiriyā, tassa ‘‘atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti etena sambandho. Tassāti yaṃ-saddena uddiṭṭhassa vandanāmayapuññassa. Ānubhāvenāti balena.
火界、精进、谋略,以及影响力、能力,这五种——
他们说,这被称为“威力”,也被称为“影响力”。巴利
‘‘Tejo ussāhamantā ca, pabhū sattīti pañcime; ‘Ānubhāvo’ti vuccanti, ‘pabhāvo’ti ca te vade’’ti. –
对于前面已经讲过的那些含义,这里说的是能力。因为“anu”就是一次又一次地让具有它的人修习、增长,所以叫“anubhāva”,也就是“ānubhāva”——《优陀那注》里是这样说的。不过从实际含义来说,它就是礼敬所成的福德所具有的那种能力,这种福德以所获得的成就为相,能资助过去所造之业的力量;又因为它能善巧地摧毁障碍,所以也就成为那件事的因。巴利
Vuttesu hi atthesu idha sattiyaṃ vattati. Anu punappunaṃ taṃsamaṅgiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti hi anubhāvo, soyeva ānubhāvoti udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, atthato pana yathāladdhasampattinimittakassa purimakammassa balānuppadānavasasaṅkhātā vandanāmayapuññassa sattiyeva, sā ca suvihatantarāyatāya karaṇaṃ, hetu vā sambhavati.
在这里,“以净信心”这一句,说明的是他自己净信的成就;“三宝礼敬所成”这一句,说明的是三宝作为福田的成就。由此,通过自身净信的成就和三宝福田的成就这两方面来阐明义理,就显示出他有能力消除那些会破坏和障碍它的灾祸。因为就像布施的思心所具备四支一样,礼敬的思心所也具备两支,由于能消除障碍,所以成为现世可见的。巴利
Ettha pana ‘‘pasannamatino’’ti etena attano pasādasampattiṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ratanattayavandanāmaya’’nti etena ratanattayassa khettabhāvasampattiṃ, tato ca tassa puññassa attano pasādasampattiyā, ratanattayassa ca khettabhāvasampattiyāti dvīhi aṅgehi atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya upaghātakaupaddavānaṃ vihanane samatthataṃ dīpeti. Caturaṅgasampattiyā dānacetanā viya hi dvayaṅgasampattiyā paṇāmacetanāpi antarāyavihananena diṭṭhadhammikāti.
这样说明了礼敬三宝的作用之后,现在为了注释那部法教的意义,先以应被注释之法的性质把它显示出来,再以称扬殊胜功德的方式加以赞叹,于是说出“对于《长部》……”等话。这确实是阿阇梨的一贯做法,就是在各种注释的开头,先称扬那部应被注释之法的特殊功德而作赞叹。正如在《破除迷执》《显扬义理》《满足希求》《阿毗达摩义集》等注释中,依次有“摧破外道论,生起种种智,生起说法师牛王之种种辩才”等语。巴利
Evaṃ ratanattayassa nipaccakārakaraṇe payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni yassā dhammadesanāya atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetukāmo, tadapi saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammabhāvena dassetvā guṇābhitthavanavisesena abhitthavetuṃ ‘‘dīghassā’’tiādimāha. Ayañhi ācariyassa pakati, yadidaṃ taṃtaṃsaṃvaṇṇanāsu ādito tassa tassa saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammassa visesaguṇakittanena thomanā. Tathā hi tesu tesu papañcasūdanīsāratthapakāsanīmanorathapūraṇīaṭṭhasālinīādīsu yathākkamaṃ ‘‘paravādamathanassa, ñāṇappabhedajananassa, dhammakathikapuṅgavānaṃ vicittapaṭibhānajananassa,
他被甚深之智不断深入,
对于以种种理趣庄严、从最初就极为善巧的阿毗达摩,如此以偈颂赞叹。巴利
Tassa gambhīrañāṇehi, ogāḷhassa abhiṇhaso; Nānānayavicittassa, abhidhammassa ādito’’ti. ādinā –
赞叹已经作了。其中,“长的”指名为“长”的。“以长经为标记的”,是指以那些篇幅长、文句展开广博的经为标记的;这里显示出,“长”这个名称是随顺这部圣典的意义而起的称呼。难道经本身就是阿含吗?那它怎么以那些经为标记呢?从胜义上说,这确实没错;但从施设上说,因为依于经而安立了阿含的性质,所以是以作为部分的经来标记作为整体的阿含。就像对义与文的聚合有“经”这个说法一样,对诸经的聚合也有“阿含”这个说法。因为具有缘起等微细深奥之义,所以是微细的。自利、利他等意义在这里到来,或通过它到来,或从它而来,所以是“阿含”;以最上之义、以应希求之义,它是殊胜的,所以是“阿含之胜”。再者,相较于外道所认可的《婆罗多往世书》《那罗希王往世书》等被称为阿含的典籍,它也是殊胜的,所以是“阿含之胜”,即指这部圣典。随佛陀之后觉悟的人,即随觉者,是随顺佛陀所证悟的真理而同样证得真理的上首弟子等圣者;他们以解释义理的方式、以赞叹功德的方式作了注释,所以说是“如此”。或者,佛陀与随觉者们以如上所说的方式作了注释,所以说是“如此”,即指这部圣典。因为正等觉者确实曾宣说三藏义理注释的次第,此后则由弟子们以结集等方式传承,这是阿阇梨们所说的。并且在《中部注》的《优波离经注》中说:“‘分别’者,即详细开示义理者。因为世尊没有未解释的经典语句,一切义理都已宣说。”以能引生信心的功德者,即以对佛陀等引生净信的功德者。难道一切佛语三藏不都是能引生信心的功德吗?那么为什么以不共的功德来赞叹它呢?因为这部圣典具有殊胜的功德。这部阿含在《梵网经》等中以完全开示戒、见等的方式,在《大本经》等中以开示过去诸佛功德的等方式,在《巴提迦经》等中以摧伏外道、发出不可退转的狮子吼等方式,在《无上经》等中以特别阐明佛陀功德的方式,对三宝引生殊胜的信心。巴利
Thomanā katā. Tattha dīghassāti dīghanāmakassa. Dīghasuttaṅkitassāti dīghehi abhiāyatavacanappabandhavantehi suttehi lakkhitassa, anena ‘‘dīgho’’ti ayaṃ imassa āgamassa atthānugatā samaññāti dasseti. Nanu ca suttāniyeva āgamo, kathaṃ so tehi aṅkīyatīti? Saccametaṃ paramatthato, paññattito pana suttāni upādāya āgamabhāvassa paññattattā avayavehi suttehi avayavībhūto āgamo aṅkīyati. Yatheva hi atthabyañjanasamudāye ‘‘sutta’’nti vohāro, evaṃ suttasamudāye āgamavohāroti. Paṭiccasamuppādādinipuṇatthabhāvato nipuṇassa. Āgacchanti attatthaparatthādayo ettha, etena, etasmāti vā āgamo, uttamaṭṭhena, patthanīyaṭṭhena ca so varoti āgamavaro. Apica āgamasammatehi bāhirakapaveditehi bhāratapurāṇakathānarasīhapurāṇakathādīhi varotipi āgamavaro, tassa. Buddhānamanubuddhā buddhānubuddhā, buddhānaṃ saccapaṭivedhaṃ anugamma paṭividdhasaccā aggasāvakādayo ariyā, tehi atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena, guṇasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena ca saṃvaṇṇitoti tathā. Atha vā buddhā ca anubuddhā ca, tehi saṃvaṇṇito yathāvuttanayenāti tathā, tassa. Sammāsambuddheneva hi tiṇṇampi piṭakānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇanākkamo bhāsito, tato paraṃ saṅgāyanādivasena sāvakehīti ācariyā vadanti. Vuttañca majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāya upālisuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘veyyākaraṇassāti vitthāretvā atthadīpakassa. Bhagavatā hi abyākataṃ tantipadaṃ nāma natthi, sabbesaṃyeva attho kathito’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.76). Saddhāvahaguṇassāti buddhādīsu pasādāvahaguṇassa. Nanu ca sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ tepiṭakaṃ saddhāvahaguṇameva, atha kasmā ayamaññasādhāraṇaguṇena thomitoti? Sātisayato imassa tagguṇasampannattā. Ayañhi āgamo brahmajālādīsu sīladiṭṭhādīnaṃ anavasesaniddesādivasena, mahāpadānādīsu (dī. ni. 2.3) purimabuddhānampi guṇaniddesādivasena, pāthikasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 3.1.4) titthiye madditvā appaṭivattiyasīhanādanadanādivasena, anuttariyasuttādīsu visesato buddhaguṇavibhāvanena ratanattaye sātisayaṃ saddhaṃ āvahatīti.
就这样,先对应当赞说的法作了赞叹,现在为了显示即将进行的解释其来源清净,而说出“为了阐明义理”等话。因为通过这首偈颂,表明这即将进行的解释,除了仅仅去掉僧伽罗语这一点之外,正是从登上三次结集的长部义注而来,并非来自其他地方;应当以这个理由来说,而非以其他理由。这样就显示了自己解释的来源清净。另一种说法是:为了显示解释的依据,而说“为了阐明义理”等话。因为这部圣典极其精微深奥,是佛陀的境界,其他人根本无法言说,而我要凭自己的力量来阐释它。通过这首偈颂,表明我是依靠先前诸位大师的力量来解释其义理的。这样就显示了自己解释的依据。其中,“为了阐明义理”:是为了阐明多种多样的义理,比如文句义、自性义、所知义、随文义、随彼义、有余义、无余义、了义、不了义等等,或者就是为了阐明。由于偈颂体裁的圆满,而有这两种表述方式。通过它来解说义理,所以叫“义注”;“义注”本身就是“义注”,其中“ttha”音变成了“ṭṭha”音,就像“苦的逼迫义”那样,这是有连声规则的,因为它源自圣者的语言。就连文法家们也在说了“tathānaṃṭṭha yuga”这个规则之后,举了这个例子。巴利
Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammassa abhitthavanampi katvā idāni saṃvaṇṇanāya sampati vakkhamānāya āgamanavisuddhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atthappakāsanattha’’ntiādimāha. Imāya hi gāthāya saṅgītittayamāruḷhadīghāgamaṭṭhakathātova sīhaḷabhāsāmattaṃ vinā ayaṃ vakkhamānasaṃvaṇṇanā āgatā, nāññato, tadeva kāraṇaṃ katvā vattabbā, nāññanti attano saṃvaṇṇanāya āgamanavisuddhiṃ dasseti. Aparo nayo – paramanipuṇagambhīraṃ buddhavisayamāgamavaraṃ attano baleneva vaṇṇayissāmīti aññehi vattumpi asakkuṇeyyattā saṃvaṇṇanānissayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘atthappakāsanattha’’ntiādi. Imāya hi pubbācariyānubhāvaṃ nissāyeva tassa atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāmīti attano saṃvaṇṇanānissayaṃ dasseti. Tattha ‘‘atthappakāsanattha’’nti pāṭhattho, sabhāvattho, ñeyyattho, pāṭhānurūpattho, tadanurūpattho, sāvasesattho, nivarasesattho, nītattho, neyyatthotiādinā anekappakārassa atthassa pakāsanatthāya, pakāsanāya vā. Gāthābandhasampattiyā dvibhāvo. Attho kathīyati etāyāti atthakathā, sāyeva aṭṭhakathā ttha-kārassa ṭṭha-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.17; 2.8), ayañca sasaññogavidhi ariyājātibhāvato. Akkharacintakāpi hi ‘‘tathānaṃṭṭha yuga’’nti lakkhaṇaṃ vatvā idamevudāharanti.
用什么样的言辞,他们顺着文句和义理来阐明其中的意义;
这部义注被认为与因缘故事相关。巴利
Yāya’tthamabhivaṇṇenti, byañjanatthapadānugaṃ; Nidānavatthusambandhaṃ, esā aṭṭhakathā matā.
“最初”是指在第一次结集的时候。大迦叶长老等人,因为具足了六种神通,达到了极其殊胜的心自在,并且在禅那等方面具备五种自在,所以被称为“自在者”;就是由这五百位长老结集。“结集”,是指为了阐明义理,在合适的地方用“这是这句话的意思,这是这句话的意思”的方式,把义理收集起来而说出的义注。而“随后也再结集”:不只是在第一次结集时,后来在第二次、第三次结集时也再结集了。应当知道,不只是最初由五百位自在者长老结集,后来也由耶舍长老等人再结集,这里要按“并且”这个合集的意思来理解,因为前后两次合集各自对应着各自发生的时机。巴利
Āditotiādimhi paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ. Chaḷabhiññatāya paramena cittavasībhāvena samannāgatattā, jhānādīsu pañcavasitā sabbhāvato ca vasino, therā mahākassapādayo, tesaṃ satehi pañcahi.Yā saṅgītāti yā aṭṭhakathā atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne ‘‘ayametassa attho, ayametassa attho’’ti saṅgahetvā vuttā. Anusaṅgītā ca pacchāpīti na kevalaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiyameva, atha kho pacchā dutiyatatiyasaṅgītīsupi. Na ca pañcahi vasisatehi ādito saṅgītāyeva, api tu yasattherādīhi anusaṅgītā cāti saha samuccayena attho veditabbo. Samuccayadvayañhi paccekaṃ kiriyākālaṃ samuccinoti.
既然古注疏已经存在,为什么现在还要重新造一部注疏呢?他想到“重复造作”和“没有意义”这两个过失,为了避开它们,就说出“狮子岛”等话。正是通过这种避开,他显示了这部注疏的写作缘由。其中,“执取狮子”就是把la音变成ḷa音,读作“sīhaḷo”,就像“garuḷo”那样。在那个世系里,最早的祖先是狮子王子,而从那个世系出生的坦巴潘尼岛的刹帝利,以及所有民众,都依照派生词的规则,或者依照习惯称呼,被称为“僧伽罗”;他们居住的岛也依照派生词的规则,或者依照地名,应当理解为“狮子岛”。“岛”的意思是,在水中显现,或者水在这里被分开;由于看到它四面环水而呈现分隔之相,也可这样解释。“又”这个字含有不满的暗示,借此表明:这部注疏虽然已经收入三次结集,但仍然是这样一种状态,因此暗示不满。由于意义上的关联,与前一首偈颂“虽然已经结集,也再结集”相连,就可以产生“连同结集”的解释,因为在其他地方也能看到这种用法。“被带来”是指从赡部洲带来。“然后”是指从结集之时以后,这样一来,就与“被带来”这个词相连。或者,“然后”是指从大摩哂陀长老带来之后,这样一来,就与“放置”这个词相连。因为这部注疏首先由结集佛法的长老们结集了三藏,并且按照阐明其义理的方式被录入口诵之道,所以它确实已经收入三次结集;此后,又由大摩哂陀长老带到坦巴潘尼岛;后来,坦巴潘尼岛的大长老们为了避开不同部派主张混杂的问题,用僧伽罗语把它放置下来。不过,阿阇梨法护长老只解释了后一种关联,因为这种关联难以看出。同样,“为了岛上居民的利益”这一句,也应当与“放置”和“取出后安立”这些词相连。因为即使是一个词,通过重复等方式,也能与多种意义产生关联。在这里,依照前一种关联,就是:为了狮子岛居民的利益,为了避开不同部派主张混杂的问题,用僧伽罗语放置下来,这显示了坦巴潘尼岛长老们放置它的目的。依照后一种关联,则是:为了赡部洲居民和其他岛上居民的利益,把僧伽罗语取走,再按照经轨相应的语言安立,这就是目的。由于具有大自在,所以叫“大摩哂陀”;这是他在王子时期的名字,后来因为功德广大,被称为“大摩哂陀”。所谓僧伽罗语,就是用许多字母来表达同一个意思,因此别人要使用它极为困难,像紧身衣一样,是僧伽罗人惯用的语言。巴利
Atha porāṇaṭṭhakathāya vijjamānāya kimetāya adhunā puna katāya saṃvaṇṇanāyāti punaruttiyā, niratthakatāya ca dosaṃ samanussaritvā taṃ pariharanto ‘‘sīhaḷadīpa’’ntiādimāha. Taṃ pariharaṇeneva hi imissā saṃvaṇṇanāya nimittaṃ dasseti. Tattha sīhaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti sīhaḷo la-kārassa ḷa-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘garuḷo’’ti. Tasmiṃ vaṃse ādipuriso sīhakumāro, tabbaṃsajātā pana tambapaṇṇidīpe khattiyā, sabbepi ca janā taddhitavasena, sadisavohārena vā sīhaḷā, tesaṃ nivāsadīpopi taddhitavasena, ṭhānīnāmena vā ‘‘sīhaḷo’’ti veditabbo. Jalamajjhe dippati, dvidhā vā āpo ettha sandatīti dipo, soyeva dīpo, bhedāpekkhāya tesaṃ dīpoti tathā. Panasaddo arucisaṃsūcane, tena kāmañca sā saṅgītittayamāruḷhā, tathāpi puna evaṃbhūtāti aruciyabhāvaṃ saṃsūceti. Tadatthasambandhatāya pana purimagāthāya ‘‘kāmañca saṅgītā anusaṅgītā cā’’ti sānuggahatthayojanā sambhavati. Aññatthāpi hi tathā dissatīti. Ābhatāti jambudīpato ānītā. Athāti saṅgītikālato pacchā, evaṃ sati ābhatapadena sambandho. Athāti vā mahāmahindattherenābhatakālato pacchā, evaṃ sati ṭhapitapadena sambandho. Sā hi dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāyeva, tato pacchā ca mahāmahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpamābhatā, pacchā pana tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapitāti. Ācariyadhammapālatthero pana pacchimasambandhameva duddasattā pakāseti. Tathā ‘‘dīpavāsīnamatthāyā’’ti idampi ‘‘ṭhapitā’’ti ca ‘‘apanetvā āropento’’ti ca etehi padehi sambajjhitabbaṃ. Ekapadampi hi āvuttiyādinayehi anekatthasambandhamupagacchati. Purimasambandhena cettha sīhaḷadīpavāsīnamatthāya nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇena sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapitāti tambapaṇṇiyattherehi ṭhapanapayojanaṃ dasseti. Pacchimasambandhena pana imāya saṃvaṇṇanāya jambudīpavāsīnaṃ, aññadīpavāsīnañca atthāya sīhaḷabhāsāpanayanassa, tantinayānucchavikabhāsāropanassa ca payojananti. Mahāissariyattā mahindoti rājakumārakāle nāmaṃ, pacchā pana guṇamahantatāya mahāmahindoti vuccati. Sīhaḷabhāsā nāma anekakkharehi ekatthassāpi voharaṇato paresaṃ voharituṃ atidukkarā kañcukasadisā sīhaḷānaṃ samudāciṇṇā bhāsā.
就算古注是那样吧。可是现在正在新造的这部义注,又是怎么做的呢?面对这个追问,为了说明这部义注的写作方式,他说出了“取出”等话。这里的意思是:从根本义注中把僧伽罗语去掉,也就是把它清除掉、不放进书里,前后这样连接起来。通过这一点,他要表明:下面将要说的这部义注,除了只是把三次结集所传诵的根本义注中的僧伽罗语去掉之外,在义理上和根本义注完全吻合、完全一致,就像恒河水和耶牟那河水汇合在一起那样。“令人愉悦的”等词,是用来修饰“语言”的,说明它具备自然语法的性质。因为以自然语法的本质让智者的心感到愉悦,所以叫“令人愉悦”。所谓“伸展”,是说它伸展义理,或者依义理被展开阐明,或者让人从轮回中渡到彼岸,或者借它跨越对种种不同义理的疑惑,所以叫“经轨”,也就是巴利圣典。它随顺那被称为“轨则”的走向,如影随形地跟随着,所以叫“契合经轨”。由于远离了夹杂非自然语法之外来语的过失,所以叫“无过”,也就是具备这样自然语法本质的——巴利
Evaṃ hotu porāṇaṭṭhakathāya, adhunā kariyamānā pana aṭṭhakathā kathaṃ karīyatīti anuyoge sati imissā aṭṭhakathāya karaṇappakāraṃ dassetumāha ‘‘apanetvānā’’tiādi. Tattha tato mūlaṭṭhakathāto sīhaḷabhāsaṃ apanetvā potthake anāropitabhāvena niraṅkaritvāti sambandho, etena ayaṃ vakkhamānā aṭṭhakathā saṅgītittayamāropitāya mūlaṭṭhakathāya sīhaḷabhāsāpanayanamattamaññatra atthato saṃsandati ceva sameti ca yathā ‘‘gaṅgodakena yamunodaka’’nti dasseti. ‘‘Manorama’’ miccādīni ‘‘bhāsa’’nti etassa sabhāvaniruttibhāvadīpakāni visesanāni. Sabhāvaniruttibhāvena hi paṇḍitānaṃ manaṃ ramayatīti manoramā. Tanoti atthametāya, tanīyati vā atthavasena vivarīyati, vaṭṭato vā satte tāreti , nānātthavisayaṃ vā kaṅkhaṃ taranti etāyāti tanti, pāḷi. Tassā nayasaṅkhātāya gatiyā chaviṃ chāyaṃ anugatāti tantinayānucchavikā. Asabhāvaniruttibhāsantarasaṃkiṇṇadosavirahitatāya vigatadosā, tādisaṃ sabhāvaniruttibhūtaṃ –
摩揭陀语是根本语言,最初形成的人就是用这种语言说话的。
梵天们的语言也是这样,正自觉者们也同样这样说。巴利
‘‘Sā māgadhī mūlabhāsā, narā yāyā’dikappikā; Brahmāno cassutālāpā, sambuddhā cāpi bhāsare’’ti. –
意思是:把所宣说的巴利语以书写的方式录写到书册上;借此说明它没有音声上的过失。巴利
Vuttaṃ pāḷigatibhāsaṃ potthake likhanavasena āropentoti attho, iminā saddadosābhāvamāha.
“不违背宗义”是指不与宗义相冲突,这里借此说明它没有义理上的过失。正因为不相违,长老们的主张在这里也会被阐明。那么,这是谁的主张呢?他说“长老们”等,以此排除了罗睺罗阿阇梨等人的祇园派和无畏山派的宗义。具足戒、闻、定、解脱这些称为“坚固”的功德,所以称为长老。正如经中说:“诸比丘,有四种法使比丘成为长老。哪四种?诸比丘,在这里,比丘具戒……”(增支部4.22)。另外,因为具足由谛、法等使人坚固的素质,所以称为长老。正如法王在《法句经》中说:巴利
Samayaṃavilomentoti siddhantamavirodhento, iminā pana atthadosābhāvamāha. Aviruddhattā eva hi te theravādāpi idha pakāsayissanti. Kesaṃ pana samayanti āha ‘‘therāna’’ntiādi, etena rāhulācariyādīnaṃ jetavanavāsīabhayagirivāsīnikāyānaṃ samayaṃ nivatteti. Thirehi sīlasutajhānavimuttisaṅkhātehi guṇehi samannāgatāti therā. Yathāha ‘‘cattārome bhikkhave therakaraṇā dhammā. Katame cattāro? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu sīlavā hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.22). Apica saccadhammādīhi thirakaraṇehi samannāgatattā therā. Yathāha dhammarājā dhammapade –
一个人如果具备真理、正法、不伤害、自我约束和调伏,
那位确实已吐尽污垢的智者,才被称为“长老”。巴利
‘‘Yamhi saccañca dhammo ca, ahiṃsā saṃyamo damo; Sa ve vantamalo dhīro, ‘thero’iti pavuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 260);
那些长老的传承,从大迦叶长老等人传来,称为长老传承。他们属于这个传承,因为具足教法与证悟,以智慧之光照亮它,所以用那种方式阐明它;或者说,他们在那传承中就像灯一样,所以叫长老传承之灯。以种种方式加以判定,所以叫判定,也就是在疑难之处以破除症结的方式进行的断疑之论。这些人具有极为善巧、微细的判定,所以叫善巧微细判定者。或者说,能判定就叫判定,即针对上述对象的智慧;这些人具有极为善巧、熟练的判定,所以叫善巧微细判定者。坐落在大云林中的精舍叫大寺,它因世尊的大菩提而光辉;住在那里的人叫大寺住者,意思是不违背这些人的主张。由此,从补特伽罗增上的角度,说明从大迦叶等长老传承而来、在其中无有颠倒、微细善巧的判定,正是大寺住者主张的准量。巴利
Tesaṃ. Mahākassapattherādīhi āgatā ācariyaparamparā theravaṃso, tappariyāpannā hutvā āgamādhigamasampannattā paññāpajjotena tassa samujjalanato taṃ pakārena dīpenti, tasmiṃ vā padīpasadisāti theravaṃsapadipā. Vividhena ākārena nicchīyatīti vinicchayo, gaṇṭhiṭṭhānesu khīlamaddanākārena pavattā vimaticchedanīkathā, suṭṭhu nipuṇo saṇho vinicchayo etesanti sunipuṇavinicchayā. Atha vā vinicchinotīti vinicchayo, yathāvuttavisayaṃ ñāṇaṃ, suṭṭhu nipuṇo cheko vinicchayo etesanti sunipuṇavinicchayā. Mahāmeghavane ṭhito vihāro mahāvihāro, yo satthu mahābodhinā virocati, tasmiṃ vasanasīlā mahāvihāravāsino, tādisānaṃ samayaṃ avilomentoti attho, etena mahākassapāditheraparamparāgato, tatoyeva aviparito saṇhasukhumo vinicchayoti mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ samayassa pamāṇabhūtataṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānavasena dasseti.
已经舍弃了反复重复的内容,也就是在一处已经说过的义理,又在别处重新引述,因为这样就成了重复,也会让文卷变得沉重;现在我要说明那部圣典的义理——这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Hitvā punappunabhatamatthanti ekattha vutampi puna aññattha ābhatamatthaṃ punaruttibhāvato, ganthagarukabhāvato ca cajitvā tassa āgamavarassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmīti attho.
这样展示了做法之后,为了说明除了“为了岛民的利益”所说的目的之外,注释还有别的目的,就说了“以及为了善士”等话。其中,“以及为了善士”里的“以及”是集合的意思,用它来集合:不只是为了赡部洲居民的利益,也是为了令善士欢喜。正因为这样,“也是为了铜掌岛居民的利益”这个意思也就成立了,因为通过容易学习等,对他们也有很大帮助。“以及为了法久住”这里,“以及”也不只是集合那两个意思,而是显示集合三种:教法、行道法、通达法,或者教理之法住立五千年那么久的利益。因为教理之法住立时,行道法和通达法也得以住立,教理正是它们的根本。而教理之法,靠妥善安立的文句和义理才能长久正确地住立;注释中,文句没有颠倒、妥善安立,义理也没有颠倒、妥善安立。因此,依据注释能使文句和义理无颠倒、善安立这一点,所以说“以及为了法的久住”。这正是世尊所说——巴利
Evaṃ karaṇappakārampi dassetvā ‘‘dīpavāsīnamatthāyā’’ti vuttappayojanato aññampi saṃvaṇṇanāya payojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sujanassa cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sujanassa cāti ca-saddo samuccayattho, tena na kevalaṃ jambudīpavāsīnameva atthāya, atha kho sādhujanatosanatthañcāti samuccinoti. Teneva ca tambapaṇṇidīpavāsīnampi atthāyāti ayamattho siddho hoti uggahaṇādisukaratāya tesampi bahūpakārattā. Ciraṭṭhitatthañcāti etthāpi ca-saddo na kevalaṃ tadubhayatthameva, api tu tividhassāpi sāsanadhammassa, pariyattidhammassa vā pañcavassasahassaparimāṇaṃ cirakālaṃ ṭhitatthañcāti samuccayatthameva dasseti. Pariyattidhammassa hi ṭhitiyā paṭipattidhammapaṭivedhadhammānampi ṭhiti hoti tasseva tesaṃ mūlabhāvato. Pariyattidhammo pana sunikkhittena padabyañjanena, tadatthena ca ciraṃ sammā patiṭṭhāti, saṃvaṇṇanāya ca padabyañjanaṃ aviparītaṃ sunikkhittaṃ, tadatthopi aviparīto sunikkhitto hoti, tasmā saṃvaṇṇanāya aviparītassa padabyañjanassa, tadatthassa ca sunikkhittassa upāyabhāvamupādāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ciraṭṭhitatthañca dhammassā’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有两种法能让正法保持、不混乱、不消失。是哪两种?就是文句被好好安立,以及义理被好好理解。这两种法……(中略)……能让正法保持。巴利
‘‘Dveme bhikkhave dhammā saddhammassa ṭhitiyā asammosāya anantaradhānāya saṃvattanti. Katame dve? Sunikkhittañca padabyañjanaṃ, attho ca sunīto, ime kho…pe… saṃvattantī’’tiādi (a. ni. 2.21).
这样说明了用意之后,为了在讲解即将展开的注释时,以舍弃繁重篇幅的方式避免让这部论著变得过于沉重,所以说了“戒论”等话。正如所说的“我不会对它详细分别”。另一种理解方式是:想要造注释的人,应当把《清净道论》当作其中的一部分来采用,于是为说法者们作教导,为了以提纲的方式显示其中已经讨论过的法,而说了“戒论”等话。其中,“戒论”是指从行戒、止戒等方面对戒所作的详细论述。“头陀法”是指常乞食支等十三种能断除烦恼的法。“业处”是指名为修习的瑜伽业所生之处,即种种法。然而,那些业处不应只取巴利中传来的三十八种,为了说明注释中传来的也有两种,所以说了“一切”。与行处规定俱起是指与贪行等自性等规定一起生起的,这是对“禅那等至详说”的修饰语。在此,色界禅那名为禅那,无色界禅那名为等至。或者,两者中刚获得的程度名为禅那,达到等至自在状态名为等至。再者,那两者也都是禅那,而果等至与灭等至则是等至,意思是它们的详说。巴利
Evaṃ payojanampi dassetvā vakkhamānāya saṃvaṇṇanāya mahattapariccāgena ganthagarukabhāvaṃ pariharitumāha ‘‘sīlakathā’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘na taṃ vicarayissāmī’’ti. Aparo nayo – yadaṭṭhakathaṃ kattukāmo, tadekadesabhāvena visuddhimaggo gahetabboti kathikānaṃ upadesaṃ karonto tattha vicāritadhamme uddesavasena dassetumāha ‘‘sīlakathā’’tiādi. Tattha sīlakathāti cārittavārittādivasena sīlavitthārakathā. Dhutadhammāti piṇḍapātikaṅgādayo terasa kilesadhunanakadhammā. Kammaṭṭhānānīti bhāvanāsaṅkhātassa yogakammassa pavattiṭṭhānattā kammaṭṭhānanāmāni dhammajātāni. Tāni pana pāḷiyamāgatāni aṭṭhatiṃ seva na gahetabbāni, atha kho aṭṭhakathāyamāgatānipi dveti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘sabbānipī’’ti vuttaṃ. Cari yāvidhānasahitoti rāgacaritādīnaṃ sabhāvādividhānena saha pavatto, idaṃ pana ‘‘jhānasamāpattivitthāro’’ti imassa visesanaṃ. Ettha ca rūpāvacarajjhānāni jhānaṃ, arūpāvacarajjhānāni samāpatti. Tadubhayampi vā paṭiladdhamattaṃ jhānaṃ, samāpajjanavasībhāvappattaṃ samāpatti. Apica tadapi ubhayaṃ jhānameva, phalasamāpattinirodhasamāpattiyo pana samāpatti, tāsaṃ vitthāroti attho.
为了涵盖世间与出世间两类共六种神通,所以说了“一切神通”。“慧的算计与判定”是指:依照《智分别》等文献中所述的方式,按一种等多种分类,用慧去算计、汇总或计数,从而作出判定。称为“圣”是因为佛等圣者应当通达它们,或者因为它们能成就圣者的境界,所以称为圣,这是省略了后面的词;又或者因为它们真实不虚、应当被取、应当被了知,所以称为圣,这是“谛”的修饰语。巴利
Lokiyalokuttarabhedānaṃ channampi abhiññānaṃ gahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘sabbā ca abhiññāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇavibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 751) āgatanayena ekavidhādinā bhedena paññāya saṅkalayitvā sampiṇḍetvā, gaṇetvā vā vinicchayanaṃ paññāsaṅkalanavinicchayo. Ariyānīti buddhādīhi ariyehi paṭivijjhitabbattā, ariyabhāvasādhakattā vā ariyāni uttarapadalopena. Avitathabhāvena vā araṇīyattā, avagantabbattā ariyāni, ‘‘saccānī’’timassa visesanaṃ.
因缘等诸缘法,以因缘等方式对缘所生法产生资助,这就是缘相;对它的开示就是那样,意思是缘起的讲述。而这个讲述因为不混杂其他部派的见解,所以极其清净;因为剖析密集极其困难,所以微细;又带有“一”等理趣在其中被分别,所以说“极清净、微细、理趣”。这三个词也是缘相开示的修饰语。因为不舍弃《无碍解道》等中所说的理趣就加以分别,所以其道未脱离本母,这就是“未脱本母之道”。这里,“道”指名为圣典的方法,因为它是通达种种义或通达谛的方便。或者,因为长行相续,与寻常之道相似,这是“观”和“修习”这两个词的修饰语。巴利
Hetādipaccayadhammānaṃ hetupaccayādibhāvena paccayuppannadhammānamupakārakatā paccayākāro, tassa desanā tathā, paṭiccasamuppādakathāti attho. Sā pana nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkararahitatāya suṭṭhu parisuddhā, ghanavinibbhogassa ca sudukkaratāya nipuṇā, ekattādinayasahitā ca tattha vicāritāti āha ‘‘suparisuddhanipuṇanayā’’ti. Padattayampi hetaṃ paccayākāradesanāya visesanaṃ. Paṭisambhidādīsu āgatanayaṃ avissajjitvāva vicāritattā avimutto tantimaggo yassāti avimuttatanti maggā. Maggoti cettha pāḷisaṅkhāto upāyo taṃtadatthānaṃ avabodhassa, saccapaṭivedhassa vā upāyabhāvato. Pabandho vā dīghabhāvena pakatimaggasadisattā, idaṃ pana ‘‘vipassanā, bhāvanā’’ti padadvayassa visesanaṃ.
这里,“iti”这个词表示结束,因为按照所列出的纲目已经全部讲完,意思是“就这么多,就是全部”。“pana”只是说话上的修饰,没有单独的含义。由于词义不混杂,也没有该说而未说的剩余部分,所以容易理解、非常清净,这是和“一切”这个词的联系;或者这是一个中性的抽象词,因为它和“已说”这个词相连。“bhiyyo”意思是更多、极其广泛,借此表示“我只考察词本身的含义”。意思是:这一切我在这里的注疏中不再考察,因为会重复,也会让著作变得沉重。而“vicarayissāmīti”应当看作不是因为偈颂而发生的词形增长。巴利
Itipana sabbanti ettha iti-saddo parisamāpane yathāuddiṭṭhauddesassa pariniṭṭhitattā, ettakaṃ sabbanti attho. Panāti vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ visuṃ atthābhāvato. Padatthasaṃkiṇṇassa, vattabbassa ca avuttassa avasesassa abhāvato suviññeyyabhāvena suparisuddhaṃ, ‘‘sabba’’nti iminā sambandho, bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ vā etaṃ ‘‘vutta’’nti iminā sambajjhanato. Bhiyyoti atirekaṃ, ativitthāranti attho, etena padatthamattameva vicārayissāmīti dasseti. Etaṃ sabbaṃ idha aṭṭhakathāya na vicārayissāmi punaruttibhāvato, ganthagarukabhāvato cāti adhippāyo. Vicarayissāmīti ca gāthābhāvato na vuddhibhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
就算这样,这部《清净道论》还是没有阐明诸阿含的义理,那么这一切在这里都应该被审察。为了确定不审察的绝对理由并回应这个责难,他说了“majjhe visuddhimaggo”等话。其中,“majjhe”是指在《小部》之外的其他四部阿含之中。“hi”一词表示原因,由此点明前面所说的理由。“tattha”是指在那些四部阿含中。“yathābhāsitaṃ”是指世尊所各别宣说的,或者与所宣说相应的。另外,以注释者依注释方式所各别宣说的,或者与所宣说相应的,也是这个意思。“iccevā”在这里,以“iti”一词指出前面所说的理由,意思就是“以此理由”,或者“正是将此理由置于心中”。在“kato”这里,也应看作“visuddhimaggo esā”这一词以业格结合,依照重复等方式。以智摄持那《清净道论》后(tampi),以此名为《吉祥悦意》的注疏(etāya),在这里,通过“majjhe ṭhatvā”这一说明中道性的表述,特别显示《清净道论》是四部阿含共通的注疏,而不是像《吉祥悦意》等那样不共的注疏。然而,从无差别方面说,它也确实适当地是律、论共通的注疏,并且由于与它们混合,对于此外剩余的《小部》阿含,虽然特别地是共通的,但除了那之外,仍被说为只是四部阿含共通的。巴利
Evampi esa visuddhimaggo āgamānamatthaṃ na pakāseyya, atha sabbopeso idha vicāritabboyevāti codanāya tathā avicāraṇassa ekantakāraṇaṃ niddhāretvā taṃ pariharanto ‘‘majjhe visuddhimaggo’’tiādimāha. Tattha majjheti khuddakato aññesaṃ catunnampi āgamānaṃ abbhantare. Hi-saddo kāraṇe, tena yathāvuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ joteti. Tatthāti tesu catūsu āgamesu. Yathābhāsitanti bhagavatā yaṃ yaṃ desitaṃ, desitānurūpaṃ vā. Api ca saṃvaṇṇakehi saṃvaṇṇanāvasena yaṃ yaṃ bhāsitaṃ, bhāsitānurūpantipi attho. Iccevāti ettha iti-saddena yathāvuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ nidasseti, imināva kāraṇena, idameva vā kāraṇaṃ manasi sannidhāyāti attho. Katoti etthāpi ‘‘visuddhimaggo esā’’ti padaṃ kammabhāvena sambajjhati āvuttiyādinayenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tampīti taṃ visuddhimaggampi ñāṇena gahetvāna. Etāyāti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā nāma etāya aṭṭhakathāya. Ettha ca ‘‘majjhe ṭhatvā’’ti etena majjhattabhāvadīpanena visesato catunnampi āgamānaṃ sādhāraṇaṭṭhakathā visuddhimaggo, na sumaṅgalavilāsinīādayo viya asādhāraṇaṭṭhakathāti dasseti. Avisesato pana vinayābhidhammānampi yathārahaṃ sādhāraṇaṭṭhakathā hotiyeva, tehi sammissatāya ca tadavasesassa khuddakāgamassa visesato sādhāraṇā samānāpi taṃ ṭhapetvā catunnameva āgamānaṃ sādhāraṇātveva vuttāti.
《因缘论》的注释巴利
Nidānakathāvaṇṇanā
像前面所说的那样,以种种方式完成了礼赞等造论前的准备工作之后,现在,为了让那些有分类的内容的自性清楚显示出来,只要通过展示分类的方式,就能很好地阐明、很好地让人理解。因此,先按品和经来展示分类,说了“其中,名为《长部》”等话。其中“其中”是指“我要阐明《长部》这部殊胜阿含的义理”这句话。意思是:已经承诺“我要阐明其义理”的那个《长部》,应当按品和经这样来了知,或者这样来分类。另一种理解是,“其中”是指“依止《长部》”这句话。所说的《长部》,这个名为《长部》的,应当按品和经这样来分析,或者具有这样的分类。因为像“长部的”这样说的远处词语,用“那”这个词来复指;同样,“依止《长部》”这样说的近处词语,也用“那”这个词来复指,因为它在自己心中就像面向背后而转动一样。在这类情况下,无论在自己心中是面向正面还是面向背后而转动,都可以随宜复指,因为仅仅用词语来复指并不违背义理。品、经等的词源解释后面会清楚说明。“有三品”就是具有三品。三十四部经收录在其中,或者它们的收录、计算在此处,所以叫“三十四经收录”。巴利
Evaṃ yathāvuttena vividhena nayena paṇāmādikaṃ pakaraṇārambhavidhānaṃ katvā idāni vibhāgavantānaṃ sabhāvavibhāvanaṃ vibhāgadassanavaseneva suvibhāvitaṃ, suviññāpitañca hotīti paṭhamaṃ tāva vaggasuttavasena vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha dīghāgamo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti ‘‘dīghassa āgamavarassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti yadidaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vacane. ‘‘Yassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti paṭiññātaṃ, so dīghāgamo nāma vaggasuttavasena evaṃ veditabbo, evaṃ vibhāgoti vā attho. Atha vā tatthāti ‘‘dīghāgamanissita’’nti yaṃ vuttaṃ, etasmiṃ vacane. Yo dīghāgamo vutto, so dīghāgamo nāma vaggasuttavasena. Evaṃ vibhajitabbo, edisoti vā attho. ‘‘Dīghassā’’tiādinā hi vuttaṃ dūravacanaṃ taṃ-saddena paṭiniddisati viya ‘‘dīghāgamanissita’’nti vuttaṃ āsannavacanampi taṃ-saddena paṭiniddisati attano buddhiyaṃ parammukhaṃ viya parivattamānaṃ hutvā pavattanato. Edisesu hi ṭhānesu attano buddhiyaṃ sammukhaṃ vā parammukhaṃ vā parivattamānaṃ yathā tathā vā paṭiniddisituṃ vaṭṭati saddamattapaṭiniddesena atthassāvirodhanato. Vaggasuttādīnaṃ nibbacanaṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Tayo vaggā yassāti tivaggo. Catuttiṃsa suttāni ettha saṅgayhanti, tesaṃ vā saṅgaho gaṇanā etthāti catuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho.
为了说明自己的注释确实是按照第一结集中安立的次第来展开的,所以说“彼之……以序分为始”等。这里“为始”应当理解为就是依照结集的次第。可是,为什么在四部阿含中,《长部》最先结集,其中《戒蕴品》最先安立,其中《梵网经》最先安立,其中又以“序分”为先呢?这种追问在任何地方都不成立,因为一切都只是依据言说的次第来追问的。再者,因为《长部》具有能引生信的功德,所以最先结集。信确实是诸善法的种子,正如说“信为种子,苦行为雨”。而它具足能引生信的功德,前面已经说明了。此外,因为它收录的经典较少、篇幅也不大,容易领受、忆持等,所以最先结集。它就这样收录了三十四经,篇幅为六十四诵分。又因为关于戒的论说很多,所以《戒蕴品》最先安立。戒确实是教法的开端,因为一切功德都以戒为依止。因此说:“所以,比丘!你应当首先清净善法。什么是善法的开端?就是戒极为清净”等。由于关于戒蕴的论说很多,所以它被称为《戒蕴品》。又因为它是破除邪见的论说,而《梵网经》对经藏中一切邪见作了无余的分析,所以应当知道它最先被安立。因为在三藏佛语中,没有哪部经像《梵网经》那样,把种种邪见无遗余、无纠结地分析开示出来。至于序分,则是在第一结集时,由大迦叶长老提问、具寿阿难为了显示说法者、时间等而最先安立的。因此说“《梵网经》的……”等。其中,“由具寿”等语确定了说法者;而“在第一结集时”则确定了时间。这个意思后面会清楚显现。巴利
Attano saṃvaṇṇanāya paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkameneva pavattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa…pe… nidānamādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ādibhāvo hettha saṅgītikkameneva veditabbo. Kasmā pana catūsu āgamesu dīghāgamo paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto, tattha ca sīlakkhandhavaggo paṭhamaṃ nikkhitto, tasmiñca brahmajālasuttaṃ, tatthāpi nidānanti? Nāyamanuyogo katthacipi na pavattati sabbattheva vacanakkamamattaṃ paṭicca anuyuñjitabbato. Apica saddhāvahaguṇattā dīghāgamova paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto. Saddhā hi kusaladhammānaṃ bījaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.197; su. ni. 77). Saddhāvahaguṇatā cassa heṭṭhā dassitāyeva. Kiñca bhiyyo – katipayasuttasaṅgahatāya ceva appaparimāṇatāya ca uggahaṇadhāraṇādisukhato paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto. Tathā hesa catuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho, catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāraparimāṇo ca. Sīlakathābāhullato pana sīlakkhandhavaggo paṭhamaṃ nikkhitto. Sīlañhi sāsanassa ādi sīlapatiṭṭhānattā sabbaguṇānaṃ . Tenevāha ‘‘tasmā tiha tvaṃ bhikkhu ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.469). Sīlakkhandhakathābāhullato hi so ‘‘sīlakkhandhavaggo’’ti vutto. Diṭṭhiviniveṭhanakathābhāvato pana suttantapiṭakassa niravasesadiṭṭhivibhajanaṃ brahmajālasuttaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhittanti veditabbaṃ. Tepiṭake hi buddhavacane brahmajālasadisaṃ diṭṭhigatāni niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā vibhattasuttaṃ natthi. Nidānaṃ pana paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ mahākassapattherena puṭṭhena āyasmatā ānandena desakālādinidassanatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhittanti. Tenāha ‘‘brahmajālassāpī’’tiādi. Tattha ca ‘‘āyasmatā’’tiādinā desakaṃ niyameti, paṭhamasaṅgītikāleti pana kālanti, ayamattho upari āvi bhavissati.
第一次大结集之说的详细解释巴利
Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā
现在,借着“第一次大结集时”这句话的因缘,为了说明那第一次大结集,或者因为想要按照第一次大结集中所安立的次第来作注释,所以对它加以阐明,并且为了说明即使它已经载入那部传承,在这里提到它仍然有理由,于是说了“这名为第一次大结集”等话。这里,虽然……(中略)……已载入传承,由此就引出一个诘难:那次结集不是已经载入《结集犍度》的传承了吗?为什么在这里又再说一遍?如果再说一遍,岂不是没有意义,而且会让著作变得累赘?然而,通过“缘起……应知”等话,显示其特殊理由来避免这个过失:因为具有通达缘起的利益,所以不会有前面所说的过失。在“这名为第一次大结集”这句里,ca这个词在这样场合有把应说内容汇集起来的意思。因此,它汇集了这样的意思:以第一次大结集时所说的缘起等为开头,而这第一次大结集本身也应当这样来理解。或者,ca这个词有“更起说”的意思,而“更起说”就是指语句的开端。因为这是论师们的惯例:在说了某些内容之后,又要开始说另一内容时,就会用ca这个词。至于金刚觉长老所说“这里ca这个词是多余的意思,用它来表示还有其他”,那完全不合理。因为在这里,ca这个词并不能让人领会那个意思。如果在这里,ca这个词是为了显示那个意思,那么这样的话,它根本就不该用,因为“第一次”这个词本身就已经显示了还有第二等结集的存在。因为相对于第二等而言才用“第一次”这个词,就像相对于长音等而言才用“短音”这个词一样。依照各自的因缘,在种种地方所开示、所安立的散乱的法与律,把它们收集起来诵出、宣说,就叫结集;由此,那些学处和那些经的开头、结尾以及中间,按照关联而安立的结集者的话,也就都被收摄进来了。因为所涉范围广大、受到尊崇,所以是大的结集,即大结集;第一次的大结集,就是第一次大结集。“虽然”这个词有摄益的意思,以此摄益:在巴利文中,那次结集也已经载入传承。即便如此,仅仅因为在那里载入传承,在这里的听众并不能获得对缘起的通达,所以用“然而”这个词来表示不满足之意。把开示按照开示的时间、地点等而未被了知的内容,令其了知、显现出来,所以叫“缘起”;对那缘起有善巧,就是这个意思。巴利
Idāni ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle’’ti vacanappasaṅgena taṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassento, yassaṃ vā paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkamena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmattā taṃ vibhāvento tassā tantiyā āruḷhāyapi idha vacane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesā’’tiādimāha. Ettha hi kiñcāpi…pe… māruḷhāti etena nanu sā saṅgītikkhandhake tantimāruḷhā, kasmā idha puna vuttā, yadi ca vuttā assa niratthakatā, ganthagarutā ca siyāti codanālesaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nidāna…pe… veditabbā’’ti pana etena nidānakosallatthabhāvato yathāvuttadosatā na siyāti visesakāraṇadassanena pariharati. ‘‘Paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesā’’ti ettha ca-saddo īdisesu ṭhānesu vattabbasampiṇḍanattho. Tena hi paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānañca ādi, esā ca paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma evaṃ veditabbāti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Upaññāsattho vā ca-saddo, upaññāsoti ca vākyārambho vuccati. Esā hi ganthakārānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ kiñci vatvā puna aparaṃ vattumārabhantānaṃ ca-saddapayogo. Yaṃ pana vajirabuddhittherena vuttaṃ ‘‘ettha ca-saddo atirekattho, tena aññāpi atthīti dīpetī’’ti (vajira ṭī. bāhiranidānakathāvaṇṇanā), tadayuttameva. Na hettha ca-saddena tadattho viññāyati. Yadi cettha tadatthadassanatthameva ca-kāro adhippeto siyā, evaṃ sati so na kattabboyeva paṭhamasaddeneva aññāsaṃ dutiyādisaṅgītīnampi atthibhāvassa dassitattā. Dutiyādimupādāya hi paṭhamasaddapayogo dīghādimupādāya rassādisaddapayogo viya. Yathāpaccayaṃ tattha tattha desitattā, paññattattā ca vippakiṇṇānaṃ dhammavinayānaṃ saṅgahetvā gāyanaṃ kathanaṃ saṅgīti, etena taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ, taṃtaṃsuttānañca ādipariyosānesu, antarantarā ca sambandhavasena ṭhapitaṃ saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Mahāvisayattā, pūjitattā ca mahatī saṅgīti mahāsaṅgīti, paṭhamā mahāsaṅgīti paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti. Kiñcāpīti anuggahattho, tena pāḷiyampi sā saṅgītimāruḷhāvāti anuggahaṃ karoti, evampi tatthāruḷhamattena idha sotūnaṃ nidānakosallaṃ na hotīti pana-saddena aruciyatthaṃ dasseti. Nidadāti desanaṃ desakālādivasena aviditaṃ viditaṃ katvā nidassetīti nidānaṃ, tasmiṃ kosallaṃ, tadatthāyāti attho.
现在,为了详细说明这一点,而说了“转法轮”等话。在这里,虽然世尊还有其他各种行为,也能成为众生获得无上见、皈依等利益的因,但为了从本质上说明:只有随顺“佛陀应当令众生觉悟”这一誓愿、能成为所化众生证得道果之因的行为,才是不加限定地被称为“佛事”的,所以说了“转法轮……调伏”。然而,在转法轮之前,即使听闻世尊所说的法,也只是成为习气分,而不是有学分,也不是决择分,就像为塔普沙和跋利迦授予皈依那样。因为这是法性,所以应当知道,正是以这一点为界限而说的。信根等法本身,由于有转动的意义,所以称为“轮”,因此是“法轮”。或者,“轮”指教令,由于不离法,既是法又是轮,所以是“法轮”。由于是以法、以正理而转动,所以也是“法轮”。正如《无碍解道》中所说:巴利
Idāni taṃ vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammacakkapavattanañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattānaṃ dassanānuttariyasaraṇādipaṭilābhahetubhūtāsu vijjamānāsupi aññāsu bhagavato kiriyāsu ‘‘buddho bodheyya’’nti (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. abbhantaranidāna 1; cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā; udāna aṭṭha. 18) paṭiññāya anulomanato vineyyānaṃ maggaphaluppattihetubhūtā kiriyāva nippariyāyena buddhakiccaṃ nāmāti taṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammacakkappavattanañhi…pe… vinayanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammacakkappavattanato pana pubbabhāge bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suṇantānampi vāsanābhāgiyameva jātaṃ, na sekkhabhāgiyaṃ, na nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ tapussabhallikānaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya. Esā hi dhammatā, tasmā tameva mariyādabhāvena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Saddhindriyādi dhammoyeva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Atha vā cakkanti āṇā, dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Dhammena ñāyena cakkantipi dhammacakkaṃ. Vuttañhi paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
把法和轮都转动起来,所以叫法轮。把轮和法都转动起来,所以叫法轮。因为是依法而转动,所以叫法轮。因为是依修法而转动,所以叫法轮。巴利
‘‘Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammacariyāya pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 2.40, 41).
它的运转也是如此。说到“运转”,有“正在运转”和“已运转”两种含义,这是就现在和过去而说的。针对这一点,注疏里说:“在宣说《转法轮经》时,就叫作转动法轮;从阿若憍陈如长老证得道果开始,就叫作已转动。”不过在这里,只按现在的含义来理解才合适。“yāva”是表示限定的不变词,应当理解为“以调伏名叫须跋陀罗的游方者为内在界限”。因为世尊正是躺在般涅槃床上调伏了他。“kataṃ pariniṭṭhāpitaṃ buddhakiccaṃ yena”意思是“由他而成办、究竟了佛陀的事业”,也就是“在他之中”。关联句是:“在已成办佛陀事业的世尊、世间依怙般涅槃时”,以此显示佛陀所应作的事业已无任何遗留。正因如此,世尊才般涅槃。难道不是这样吗:即使是由声闻弟子所调伏的有缘者,也名为由世尊亲自调伏。同样,声闻所说的经也称为“佛说”。然而,若尚有声闻所应调伏的有缘者未被调伏,岂不应说“佛陀事业尚未成办”?这并非过失,因为调伏他们的方法已安立在声闻弟子之中。正因如此,他说——巴利
Tassa pavattanaṃ tathā. Pavattananti ca pavattayamānaṃ, pavattitanti paccuppannātītavasena dvidhā attho. Yaṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkapavattanasuttantaṃ desento dhammacakkaṃ pavatteti nāma, aññāsikoṇḍaññattherassa maggaphalādhigatato paṭṭhāya pavattitaṃ nāmā’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1081-1088; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.40). Idha pana paccuppannavaseneva attho yutto. Yāvāti paricchedatthe nipāto, subhaddassa nāma paribbājakassa vinayanaṃ antoparicchedaṃ katvāti abhividhivasena attho veditabbo. Tañhi bhagavā parinibbānamañce nipannoyeva vinesīti. Kataṃ pariniṭṭhāpitaṃ buddhakiccaṃ yenāti tathā, tasmiṃ. Katabuddhakicce bhagavati lokanāthe parinibbuteti sambandho, etena buddhakattabbassa kiccassa kassacipi asesitabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tatoyeva hi bhagavā parinibbutoti. Nanu ca sāvakehi vinītāpi vineyyā bhagavatāyeva vinītā nāma. Tathā hi sāvakabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ ‘‘buddhabhāsita’’nti vuccati. Sāvakavineyyā ca na tāva vinītā, tasmā ‘‘katabuddhakicce’’ti na vattabbanti? Nāyaṃ doso tesaṃ vinayanupāyassa sāvakesu ṭhapitattā. Tenevāha –
邪恶者,只要我的比丘弟子们还没有成为善巧、调伏、自信、多闻、持法……能够用正法彻底折伏已生起的他宗论说,并宣说具足神通变化的法,在此之前,我不会般涅槃。巴利
‘‘Na tāvāhaṃ pāpima parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā…pe… uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ saha dhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā sapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammaṃ desessantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.168; udā. 51).
“在拘尸那罗”等语,是在说明世尊般涅槃的地点和时间,目的是破除有人把“世尊尚未般涅槃”执为真实,也是为了显示世尊在世间出生、成长等情形。同样,为了让人们清楚知道这是人的身份,大菩萨们在最后一生也会娶妻等。“在拘尸那罗”就是在名叫拘尸那罗的城里。那座城因为建在人们能看到手握拘舍草之人的地方,所以称为“拘尸那罗”,这里用的是表示附近的格。“在末罗人的沙罗树林,即优波跋陀那”,就是在那座城附近的、属于末罗王的沙罗树林中。那片沙罗树林,因为想进城的人从园林出来后会绕过它、经由它前往,所以称为“优波跋陀那”。就像阿努拉德普勒城的西南方有塔园一样,那片园林也在拘尸那罗的西南方。又像从塔园经南门入城的道路先向东走再转向北一样,从园林出来的沙罗树行也是先向东走再转向北,因此称为“优波跋陀那”。另有人说:“到了那片沙罗树林,看望过亲友后再返回,所以叫优波跋陀那”,这种说法已经广为人知。“在两棵双沙罗树之间”,就是在两棵双沙罗树的中间。据说在那里,为世尊敷设的般涅槃床,头部方向有一排沙罗树,脚部方向有一排。那里还有一棵年轻的沙罗树靠近头部方向,一棵靠近脚部方向,所以说“在两棵双沙罗树之间”。另外,《大义注》中说:“所谓双沙罗树,就是从根、干、枝、叶相互交缠而立的沙罗树。”“mā”是月亮,因为以它的运行来计算日子,那时一切时分圆满,正是满月,所以叫“puṇṇamā”(满月)。但语言学家依据梵语中“mo sivo candimā cevā”的说法,也主张以“o”结尾的“ma”一词可以表示月亮。与毗舍佉月相应的满月,就是毗舍佉满月,那一天也是如此,就在那一天。破除黎明前的黑暗,所以叫“paccūso”(黎明);语源学家说,“usa”一词加前缀“pati”时有“破除”之义,那个时刻就是夜后分所摄的一段特殊时间,就在那时。这句话说的是:在毗舍佉满月日的这样一天,在夜的后分。巴利
‘‘Kusinārāya’’ntiādinā bhagavato parinibbutadesakālavisesavacanaṃ ‘‘aparinibbuto bhagavā’’ti gāhassa micchābhāvadassanatthaṃ, loke jātasaṃvaddhādibhāvadassanatthañca. Tathā hi manussabhāvassa supākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ mahābodhisattā carimabhave dārapariggahādīnipi karontīti. Kusinārāyanti evaṃ nāmake nagare. Tañhi nagaraṃ kusahatthaṃ purisaṃ dassanaṭṭhāne māpitattā ‘‘kusināra’’nti vuccati, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Upavattane mallānaṃ sālavaneti tassa nagarassa upavattanabhūte mallarājūnaṃ sālavane. Tañhi sālavanaṃ nagaraṃ pavisitukāmā uyyānato upacca vattanti gacchanti etenāti upavattanaṃ. Yathā hi anurādhapurassa dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ thūpārāmo, evaṃ taṃ uyyānaṃ kusinārāya dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ hoti. Yathā ca thūpārāmato dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisanamaggo pācīnamukho gantvā uttarena nivattati, evaṃ uyyānato sālapanti pācīnamukhā gantvā uttarena nivattā, tasmā taṃ ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati. Apare pana ‘‘taṃ sālavanamupagantvā mittasuhajje apaloketvā nivattanato upavattananti pākaṭaṃ jātaṃ kirā’’ti vadanti. Yamakasālānamantareti yamakasālānaṃ vemajjhe. Tattha kira bhagavato paññattassa parinibbānamañcassa sīsabhāge ekā sālapanti hoti, pādabhāge ekā. Tatrāpi eko taruṇasālo sīsabhāgassa āsanno hoti, eko pādabhāgassa. Tasmā ‘‘yamakasālānamantare’’ti vuttaṃ. Apica ‘‘yamakasālā nāma mūlakkhandhaviṭapapattehi aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbetvā ṭhitasālā’’tipi mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mā iti cando vuccati tassa gatiyā divasassa minitabbato, tadā sabbakalāpāripūriyā puṇṇo eva māti puṇṇamā. Saddavidū pana ‘‘mo sivo candimā cevā’’ti vuttaṃ sakkatabhāsānayaṃ gahetvā okārantampi candimavācaka ma-saddamicchanti. Visākhāya yutto puṇṇamā yatthāti visākhāpuṇṇamo, soyeva divaso tathā, tasmiṃ. Paccūsati timiraṃ vināsetīti paccūso, pati-pubbo usa-saddo rujāyanti hi neruttikā, soyeva samayoti rattiyā pacchimayāmapariyāpanno kālaviseso vuccati, tasmiṃ. Visākhāpuṇṇamadivase īdise rattiyā pacchimasamayeti vuttaṃ hoti.
业与烦恼所执取的,称为“有执取”,也就是异熟蕴以及由业所生的色。然而,这“有执取”在摧破烦恼、行与死魔时还没有被舍弃,在这里,也就是在摧破蕴与死魔时,已经被舍弃、不再剩下,因此并没有这“有执取”的残余;或者说,“有执取”的残余已经不存在,所以称为“无余”。这里所说的“涅槃界”,指的只是寂灭本身;而涅槃因为保持自性,所以也称为“界”。因为寂灭的缘故,便以原因的同义语称之为“无为界”。这里的具格是用来表示“处于这种状态”的特征。也就是说,对于已经证得、已经达到、已经般涅槃的世尊,在名为“无余”的涅槃界这一特征上,用的是第三格(具格)。难道“无余”只是涅槃界的修饰语,而不是已经般涅槃的世尊的修饰语吗?那为什么又说世尊已经证得它呢?因为与涅槃界相伴。由于与它相伴,世尊也可以说已经证得了无余的状态。或者也可以这样说:对于已经证得以“无余状态”为特征的涅槃界,从认知作用上用的是第三格。“无余的涅槃界”意思就是成为无余的涅槃界。比如“由已证得少于五缚者”这句话,这里说的就是已经成为少于五缚者。再者,也可以理解为:对于涅槃界,成为无余、已经无余。正如《优陀那义注》中《难陀经》的注释说:“‘以剃了一半的头发’——这是在‘如此状态’的特征上用具格,意思是‘以剃了一半的头发为标记’。”在这类地方,就是这样的规则。“在分舍利之日”是指毗舍佉月的白分第五日等日子。这并不是“已聚集”的修饰语,而是“令生起勇猛”的修饰语,即“在分舍利之日,令比丘们生起勇猛”。因为令生起勇猛是就时间而言,所以这里有不同的主语和修饰关系。其实,在分舍利之日以前的日子里,比丘们也已经聚集了。或者,“已聚集”是指以身体和合而聚集,不是仅仅指来到一起。因此,“在分舍利之日”可以作为“已聚集”的修饰语,而这里也可以与“令比丘们生起勇猛”中的“比丘们”相连。僧团的长老就是僧团长老。那么这僧团有多少呢?回答说:“七十万比丘。”因为“僧团”这个词本身不能显示数量,所以这里再次说出,就是为了让人知道数量。然而善于言辞的人说:巴利
Upādīyate kammakilesehīti upādi, vipākakkhandhā, kaṭattā ca rūpaṃ. So pana upādi kilesābhisaṅkhāramāranimmathane anossaṭṭho, idha khandhamaccumāranimmathane ossaṭṭhona sesito, tasmā natthi etissā upādisaṅkhāto seso, upādissa vā sesoti katvā ‘‘anupādisesā’’ti vuccati. Nibbānadhātūti cettha nibbutimattaṃ adhippetaṃ, nibbānañca taṃ sabhāvadhāraṇato dhātu cāti katvā. Nibbutiyā hi kāraṇapariyāyena asaṅkhatadhātu tathā vuccati. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Anupādisesatāsaṅkhātaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ bhūtassa pattassa parinibbutassa bhagavato lakkhaṇe nibbānadhātusaṅkhāte atthe tatiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nanu ca ‘‘anupādisesāyā’’ti nibbānadhātuyāva visesanaṃ hoti, na parinibbutassa bhagavato, atha kasmā taṃ bhagavā pattoti vuttoti? Nibbānadhātuyā sahacaraṇato. Taṃsahacaraṇena hi bhagavāpi anupādisesabhāvaṃ pattoti vuccati. Atha vā anupādisesabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ pattāya nibbānadhātuyā lakkhaṇe sañjānanakiriyāya tatiyātipi vattuṃ yujjati. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti ca anupādisesanibbānadhātu hutvāti attho. ‘‘Ūnapañcabandhanena pattenā’’ti (pārā. 612). Ettha hi ūnapañcabandhanapatto hutvāti atthaṃ vadanti. Apica nibbānadhātuyā anupādisesāya anupādisesā hutvā bhūtāyātipi yujjati. Vuttañhi udānaṭṭhakathāya nandasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘upaḍḍhullikhitehi kesehīti itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ vippakatullikhitehi kesehi upalakkhitāti attho’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 22) esanayo īdisesu. Dhātubhājanadivaseti jeṭṭhamāsassa sukkapakkhapañcamīdivasaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tañca na ‘‘sannipatitāna’’nti etassa visesanaṃ, ‘‘ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti etassa pana visesanaṃ ‘‘dhātubhājanadivase bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti ussāhajananassa kālavasena bhinnādhikaraṇavisesanabhāvato. Dhātubhājanadivasato hi purimataradivasesupi bhikkhū sannipatitāti. Atha vā ‘‘sannipatitāna’’nti idaṃ kāyasāmaggivasena sannipatanameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na samāgamanamattena. Tasmā ‘‘dhātubhājanadivase’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sannipatitāna’’nti etassa visesanaṃ sambhavati, idañca bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti ettha ‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti etenapi sambajjhanīyaṃ . Saṅghassa thero saṅghatthero. So pana saṅgho kiṃ parimāṇoti āha ‘‘sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti. Saṅghasaddena hi aviññāyamānassa parimāṇassa viññāpanatthamevetaṃ puna vuttaṃ. Saddavidū pana vadanti –
复合词和派生词,在句子含义中起区分限定作用;
在已成名者当中,这只是通称,比如“油”和“善逝衣”。巴利
‘‘Samāso ca taddhito ca, vākyatthesu visesakā; Pasiddhiyantu sāmaññaṃ, telaṃ sugatacīvaraṃ.
所以,对于只是名义上的僧团长老,这里再次说到,正是为了作出区分;而在这一类情形中,因为总是带有依待关系,所以有复合词,比如“提婆达多的师家”。这里所说的总是带有依待关系,是指“僧团”一词虽然依待于“十万比丘”一词,但因为中间没有别的词,所以就像在句子里一样,能让所依待的意思被理解。因为“七十万比丘”和“僧团”一词之间,是整体与部分的关系;而它和“长老”一词之间,又是所属关系。这里说的“七十万比丘”,是特指那些为首的比丘。因为当时聚集的比丘有那么多,已经超出了计算的范围。就像从韦卢瓦村开始,由于镇伏了痛苦,听闻“世尊不久就要般涅槃”之后,从各处前来的比丘中,没有一个人离开。正如所说:巴利
Tasmā nāmamattabhūtassa saṅghattherassa visesanatthamevetaṃ puna vuttanti, niccasāpekkhatāya ca edisesu samāso yathā ‘‘devadattassa garukula’’nti. Niccasāpekkhatā cettha saṅghasaddassa bhikkhusatasahassasaddaṃ sāpekkhattepi aññapadantarābhāvena vākye viya apekkhitabbatthassa gamakattā. ‘‘Sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti hi etassa saṅghasadde avayavībhāvena sambandho, tassāpi sāmibhāvena therasaddeti. ‘‘Sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti ca gaṇapāmokkhabhikkhūyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadā hi sannipatitā bhikkhū ettakāti gaṇanapathamatikkantā. Tathā hi veḷuvagāme vedanāvikkhambhanato paṭṭhāya ‘‘nacireneva bhagavā parinibbāyissatī’’ti sutvā tato tato āgatesu bhikkhūsu ekabhikkhupi pakkanto nāma natthi. Yathāhu –
七十万人之中,那些为首的比丘们;
那时,僧团的长老就是大迦叶长老。巴利
‘‘Sattasatasahassāni , tesu pāmokkhabhikkhavo; Thero mahākassapova, saṅghatthero tadā ahū’’ti.
具寿大迦叶随念着、思量着、考虑着,然后激发了热忱;或者说,是随念着、思量着、考虑着的具寿大迦叶激发了热忱——这就是句子的关联。由于具足了广大戒蕴等功德,所以叫“大迦叶”,意思是“大”的迦叶。另外,“大迦叶”这个称呼,是相对于优楼频罗迦叶、那提迦叶、伽耶迦叶、童子迦叶这些年轻一辈的长老们而说的。那么,为什么具寿大迦叶要激发热忱呢?面对这个追问,为了阐明其中的原因,经文说“于般涅槃七日后”等等。“七日”就是把七个白天合在一起。“般涅槃七日后”的构词方式,就像“刚离开不久”“出生一个月后”那样,是词尾另接一个词的复合词,意思是“在那时”。也就是说,从世尊般涅槃那天算起,已经过了七天。这句话与“所说的话”相连,也与“由老年出家的须跋陀”相连。其中,“须跋陀”只是他的名字,因为是在年老时才出家,所以称“由老年出家者”,以此与须跋陀外道等人区分开来。“够了,贤友!”等语,就是显示他所说的话。事情是这样的:世尊般涅槃七天后,具寿大迦叶长老和大约五百位比丘一起从波婆前往拘尸那罗。途中,那些还没有离欲的比丘从一位邪命外道那里听说世尊已经般涅槃,就扔掉衣钵、高举双臂、种种哭泣哀号,那位老年出家的须跋陀看到后,便说了这番话。巴利
Āyasmā mahākassapo anussaranto maññamāno cintayanto hutvā ussāhaṃ janesi, anussaranto maññamāno cintayanto āyasmā mahākassapo ussāhaṃ janesīti vā sambandho. Mahantehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā mahanto kassapoti mahākassapo. Apica ‘‘mahākassapo’’ti uruvelakassapo nadīkassapo gayākassapo kumārakassapoti ime khuddānukhuddake there upādāya vuccati. Kasmā panāyasmā mahākassapo ussāhaṃ janesīti anuyoge sati taṃ kāraṇaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘sattāhaparinibbute’’tiādi. Satta ahāni samāhaṭāni sattāhaṃ. Sattāhaṃ parinibbutassa assāti tathā yathā ‘‘acirapakkanto, māsajāto’’ti, antatthaaññapadasamāsoyaṃ, tasmiṃ. Bhagavato parinibbānadivasato paṭṭhāya sattāhe vītivatteti vuttaṃ hoti, etassa ‘‘vuttavacana’’nti padena sambandho, tathā ‘‘subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitenā’’ti etassapi. Tattha subhaddoti tassa nāmamattaṃ, vuḍḍhakāle pana pabbajitattā ‘‘vuḍḍhapabbajitenā’’ti vuttaṃ, etena subhaddaparibbājakādīhi taṃ visesaṃ karoti. ‘‘Alaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā tena vuttavacanaṃ nidasseti. So hi sattāhaparinibbute bhagavati āyasmatā mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ pāvāya kusināraṃ addhānamaggapaṭipannesu pañcamattesu bhikkhusatesu avītarāge bhikkhū antarāmagge diṭṭhaājīvakassa santikā bhagavato parinibbānaṃ sutvā pattacīvarāni chaḍḍetvā bāhā paggayhaṃ nānappakāraṃ paridevante disvā evamāha.
他为什么这样说呢?因为他对世尊怀有嗔恨。据说,这位在犍度中提到、在阿头摩这件事里出现的人,名叫须跋陀,以前是理发师,年老才出家。当时世尊从拘尸那罗出发,带着一千二百五十位比丘前往阿头摩。他听说世尊来了,就说:等世尊到了,我要供养粥。于是他对两个还在做沙弥的儿子说:孩子们,听说世尊带着一千二百五十位比丘的大僧团要来阿头摩了。你们去吧,带上剃刀工具,用竹筒或布袋挨家挨户去收集盐、油、米和嚼食。等世尊到了,我要供养粥。他们照办了。后来世尊到了阿头摩,进入谷仓。须跋陀在傍晚时分来到村口,招呼人们说:请给我一些手工活。他求到手工活后,人们问:尊者,我们做什么?他就说:你们拿这个、拿那个。他让人取来各种用具,在精舍里砌起灶台,自己穿上一套黑色袈裟,又披上同样的一套,整夜指挥着做这个、做那个,花掉了十万钱,让人准备了食物粥和蜜丸。所谓食物粥,就是吃完饭后喝的粥,里面加入了酥油、蜜、糖浆、鱼、肉、花、果汁等一切可嚼食的东西。这种粥香气芬芳,适合想嬉戏的人涂在头上。巴利
Kasmā pana so evamāhāti? Bhagavati āghātena. Ayaṃ kireso khandhake āgate ātumāvatthusmiṃ (mahāva. 303) nahāpitapubbako vuḍḍhapabbajito bhagavati kusinārato nikkhamitvā aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ ātumaṃ gacchante ‘‘bhagavā āgacchatī’’ti sutvā ‘‘āgatakāleyāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhite dve putte etadavoca ‘‘bhagavā kira tātā ātumaṃ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi, gacchatha tumhe tātā, khurabhaṇḍaṃ ādāya nāḷiyā vā pasibbakena vā anugharakaṃ āhiṇḍatha, loṇampi telampi taṇḍulampi khādanīyampi saṃharatha, bhagavato āgatassa yāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Atha bhagavati ātumaṃ āgantvā bhusāgārakaṃ paviṭṭhe subhaddo sāyanhasamayaṃ gāmadvāraṃ gantvā manusse āmantetvā ‘‘hatthakammamattaṃ me dethā’’ti hatthakammaṃ yācitvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante karomā’’ti vutte ‘‘idañcidañca gaṇhathā’’ti sabbūpakaraṇāni gāhāpetvā vihāre uddhanāni kāretvā ekaṃ kāḷakaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā tādisameva pārupitvā ‘‘idaṃ karotha, idaṃ karothā’’ti sabbarattiṃ vicārento satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā bhojjayāguñca madhugoḷakañca paṭiyādāpesi. Bhojjayāgu nāma bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgu, tattha sappimadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsapupphaphalarasādi yaṃ kiñci khādanīyaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ pavisati. Kīḷitukāmānaṃ sīsamakkhanayoggā hoti sugandhagandhā.
那时,世尊清晨整理好身体后,在比丘僧团的围绕下,朝阿头摩村方向出发去乞食。有人便去告诉须跋陀:“世尊正进村乞食,你为谁准备了粥?”他穿着那套黑色袈裟,一手拿着汤匙和勺子,像梵天一样,右膝跪在地上,顶礼后说:“尊者世尊,请接受我的粥。”接着,世尊依照犍度中“如来虽知而故问”的记载,询问并听完之后,呵斥了那位老年出家的须跋陀,并以此事为因缘,制定了“非时受食学处”和“蓄剃刀器具学处”两条学处,然后说:“比丘们,无数劫以来,你们都是在寻求食物中度过的。但这对你们来说是不如法的,吃了这非法得来的食物,将在无数千生中堕入恶趣。走开,不要接受。”说完便朝乞食的方向走去,连一位比丘也没有接受任何东西。须跋陀心生不满,心想:“这个自称‘我什么都知道’的人到处游走。如果他不想接受,派人告诉我就好了。煮好的食物最多能放七天左右,而这足够我受用一辈子,全被他毁了。他对我心怀恶意。”于是他对世尊结下嗔恨,但在十力尊住世时,他什么也不敢说。据说他心里这样想:“这位是从高种姓出家的大人物,我若在他活着时说什么,只会被他呵斥。”巴利
Atha bhagavā kālasseva sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto piṇḍāya carituṃ ātumābhimukho pāyāsi. Atha tassa ārocesuṃ ‘‘bhagavā piṇḍāya gāmaṃ pavisati, tayā kassa yāgu paṭiyāditā’’ti. So yathānivatthapāruteheva tehi kāḷakakāsāvehi ekena hatthena dabbiñca kaṭacchuñca gahetvā brahmā viya dakkhiṇaṃ jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā vanditvā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā yāgu’’nti āha. Tato ‘‘jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantī’’ti khandhake (mahāva. 304) āgatanayena bhagavā pucchitvā ca sutvā ca taṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ vigarahitvā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ akappiyasamādānasikkhāpadaṃ, khurabhaṇḍapariharaṇasikkhāpadañcāti dve sikkhāpadāni paññapetvā ‘‘anekakappakoṭiyo bhikkhave bhojanaṃ pariyesanteheva vītināmitā , idaṃ pana tumhākaṃ akappiyaṃ, adhammena uppannaṃ bhojanaṃ imaṃ paribhuñjitvā anekāni attabhāvasahassāni apāyesveva nibbattissanti, apetha mā gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā bhikkhācārābhimukho agamāsi, ekabhikkhunāpi na kiñci gahitaṃ. Subhaddo anattamano hutvā ‘‘ayaṃ sabbaṃ jānāmī’’ti āhiṇḍati, sace na gahetukāmo pesetvā ārocetabbaṃ assa, pakkāhāro nāma sabbaciraṃ tiṭṭhanto sattāhamattaṃ tiṭṭheyya, idañca mama yāvajīvaṃ pariyattaṃ assa, sabbaṃ tena nāsitaṃ, ahitakāmo ayaṃ mayha’’nti bhagavati āghātaṃ bandhitvā dasabale dharamāne kiñci vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘ayaṃ uccā kulā pabbajito mahāpuriso, sace kiñci dharantassa vakkhāmi, mamaṃyeva santajjessatī’’ti.
今天,他与大迦叶长老同行时,听到“世尊已般涅槃”,就像卸下重担一样,欢喜踊跃地说了这番话。可是长老听后,觉得像心脏被击中,又像干雷劈到头顶一样,心中生起了法的警策:他想:“世尊般涅槃才七天,如今他的金色身体还留存着。世尊历经艰辛才成就的教法里,竟然这么快就冒出这么严重、恶劣、污秽的荆棘。如果这个恶人继续壮大,再找到其他同类作伴,就足以让教法衰败下去。”巴利
Svāyaṃ ajja mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ gacchanto ‘‘parinibbuto bhagavā’’ti sutvā laddhassāso viya haṭṭhatuṭṭho evamāha. Thero pana taṃ sutvā hadaye pahāraṃ viya, matthake patitasukkhāsaniṃ viya (sukkhāsani viya dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.232) maññi, dhammasaṃvego cassa uppajji ‘‘sattāhamattaparinibbuto bhagavā, ajjāpissa suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ dharatiyeva, dukkhena bhagavatā ārādhitasāsane nāma evaṃ lahuṃ mahantaṃ pāpaṃ kasaṭaṃ kaṇṭako uppanno, alaṃ kho panesa pāpo vaḍḍhamāno aññepi evarūpe sahāye labhitvā sāsanaṃ osakkāpetu’’nti.
这时,长老心想:“如果我现在就让这个老家伙穿着粪扫衣,在这里撒上灰烬,然后把他赶出去,人们就会说‘沙门乔达摩的遗体还在,弟子们就已经起争执了’,从而把过错归到我们头上。我先忍着吧。世尊所宣说的法,就像一堆没有用线串起来的花。风一吹,那些花就东飘西散。同样地,随着这类人的行为,时间一长,律藏里会有一两条学处消失,经藏里会有一两处问答分消失,论藏里会有一两处界差别消失。这样一步步下去,根本烂掉了,我们就会像鬼一样。所以我要把法和律结集起来。这样一来,法和律就会像用坚固的线串好的花堆一样,稳稳当当不会散。世尊正是为了这个,才亲自走三拘卢舍来迎接我,用三次教诫给我授具足戒,跟我交换袈裟,在空中挥手,讲月譬喻的修行法时以我为证,三次把整个教法宝藏托付给我。有我这样的比丘在,这个恶人就别想在教法里得势。只要非法还没张扬起来、正法还没被压下去,非律还没张扬起来、律还没被压下去,说非法的人还没占上风、说法的人还没被削弱,说非律的人还没占上风、说律的人还没被削弱,我就要把法和律诵结集起来。之后,比丘们各自按自己的能力去分辨什么是允许的、什么是不允许的。到那时,这个恶人自然就会受到制裁,再也抬不起头来,教法就会兴旺繁荣。”他这样想完之后,没有向任何人透露“我心里生起了这样的念头”,先安慰了比丘僧团,然后在后来分舍利的那一天,为了结集法和律,激发比丘们的热忱。因此才说“尊者大迦叶在世尊般涅槃七天后……为了结集法和律,激发比丘们的热忱”。巴利
Tato thero cintesi ‘‘sace kho panāhaṃ imaṃ mahallakaṃ idheva pilotikaṃ nivāsetvā chārikāya okirāpetvā nīharāpessāmi, manussā ‘samaṇassa gotamassa sarīre dharamāneyeva sāvakā vivadantī’ti amhākaṃ dosaṃ dassessanti, adhivāsemi tāva. Bhagavatā hi desitadhammo asaṅgahitapuppharāsisadiso, tattha yathā vātena pahaṭapupphāni yato vā tato vā gacchanti, evameva evarūpānaṃ vasena gacchante gacchante kāle vinaye ekaṃ dve sikkhāpadāni nassissanti, sutte eko dve pañhāvārā nassissanti, abhidhamme ekaṃ dve bhūmantarāni nassissanti, evaṃ anukkamena mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāma, tasmā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ karissāmi, evaṃ sati daḷhasuttena saṅgahitapupphāni viya ayaṃ dhammavinayo niccalo bhavissati. Etadatthañhi bhagavā mayhaṃ tīṇi gāvutāni paccuggamanaṃ akāsi, tīhi ovādehi (saṃ. ni. 2.149, 150, 151) upasampadaṃ akāsi, kāyato cīvaraparivattanaṃ akāsi, ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā candopamapaṭipadaṃ kathento maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā kathesi, tikkhattuṃ sakalasāsanaratanaṃ paṭicchāpesi, mādise bhikkhumhi tiṭṭhamāne ayaṃ pāpo sāsane vaḍḍhiṃ mā alattha, yāva adhammo na dippati, dhammo na paṭibāhiyyati, avinayo na dippati, vinayo na paṭibāhiyyati, adhammavādino na balavanto honti, dhammavādino na dubbalā honti, avinayavādino na balavanto honti, vinayavādino na dubbalā honti, tāva dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyissāmi, tato bhikkhū attano attano pahonakaṃ gahetvā kappiyākappiye kathessanti, athāyaṃ pāpo sayameva niggahaṃ pāpuṇissati, puna sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkhissati, sāsanaṃ iddhañceva phīttañca bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā so ‘‘evaṃ nāma mayhaṃ cittaṃ uppanna’’nti kassacipi anārocetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ samassāsetvā atha pacchā dhātubhājanadivase dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyasmā mahākassapo sattāhaparinibbute…pe… dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti.
在这段注释里,“ala”是表示遮止的词,意思是“不应如此”。“友”是在称呼那些悲叹的比丘。“不要悲伤”是说心里生起强烈忧恼时,不要忧愁。“不要哀叹”是说不要用言语发出哭号。因为说过“悲叹就是哭号”。接着用“善解脱”等来说明不忧愁等的原因。“由那位大沙门”是表示来源的作格,或者是“smā”这个词的异名。而“逼迫”这个词,则是以主动语态中第三格的方式相关联,这个词兼顾两者。若作“我们曾被逼迫”,这是依当时而言的现在时表达,省略了“当时”;或者是表过去意义的现在时,意思是“我们曾遭逼迫”。随念时,只是依法之悚惧的力量,而不是依嗔恚等。因为依止思惟法之自性而起的、有惭有愧的智,就是法之悚惧。这确实已经说过——巴利
Tattha alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ, na yuttanti attho. Āvusoti paridevante bhikkhū ālapati. Mā socitthāti citte uppannabalavasokena mā sokamakattha. Mā paridevitthāti vācāya mā vilāpamakattha. ‘‘Paridevanaṃ vilāpo’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Asocanādīnaṃ kāraṇamāha ‘‘sumuttā’’tiādinā. Tena mahāsamaṇenāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ, smāvacanassa vā nābyappadeso. ‘‘Upaddutā’’ti pade pana kattari tatiyāvasena sambandho. Ubhayāpekkhañhetaṃ padaṃ. Upaddutā ca homāti taṃkālāpekkhavattamānavacanaṃ, ‘‘tadā’’ti seso. Atītatthe vā vattamānavacanaṃ, ahumhāti attho. Anussaranto dhammasaṃvegavaseneva, na pana kodhādivasena. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena hi pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego. Vuttañhetaṃ –
在一切有为法中,安住于愧的形态。
被无明所迷惑、背负沉重烦恼的人,应当生起对法的警醒。巴利
‘‘Sabbasaṅkhatadhammesu, ottappākārasaṇṭhitaṃ; Ñāṇamohitabhārānaṃ, dhammasaṃvegasaññita’’nti. (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā);
为了说明另一种激发精进的原因,才说了“如此(īdisassa)”等话。这里“如此之僧众集会”,是指以七百千众为上首的僧团集会,也涵盖了超出这个数目的集会。“然而确实存在这种情况”等话,则是说明另一个原因。这里“情况(ṭhānaṃ)”指果依因成立,也就是指因。“确实(kho)”是限定词。“而(pana)”是语气词,意思是“这个因确实存在,并非不存在”。那是什么原因呢?于是说“那些恶比丘”等。“yaṃ”只是助词,或者表示原因,意思是“由于什么原因使他们消失,这个原因确实存在”。心怀恶劣、低劣欲望的比丘,就是恶比丘。这里“过去的导师”,或者指属于过去诸师,就像“多作者(bahukattuko)”那样。“殊胜之言”就是教法。“pā”在这里是助词,如同“pā eva vutyassā”等中的用法。或者这是一个前缀词,拉长音后就这样说,正如也有人讲“pāvadatī”。依附无惭者之党,就是依附无惭者的派系。“只要……”等话,则说明结集能使教法长久住世的原因,也说明其成就。应当补入“因此(tasmā)”一词,再与“应结集(saṅgāyeyya)”相连。巴利
Aññaṃ ussāhajananakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘īdisassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha īdisassa ca saṅghasannipātassāti sattasatasahassagaṇapāmokkhattherappamukhagaṇanapathātikkantasaṅghasannipātaṃ sandhāya vadati. ‘‘Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatī’’tiādināpi aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, hetu. Khoti avadhāraṇe. Panāti vacanālaṅkāre, etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjateva, no na vijjatīti attho. Kiṃ pana tanti āha ‘‘yaṃ pāpabhikkhū’’tiādi. Yanti nipātamattaṃ, kāraṇaniddeso vā, yena ṭhānena antaradhāpeyyuṃ, tadetaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatiyevāti. Pāpena lāmakena icchāvacarena samannāgatā bhikkhū pāpabhikkhū. Atīto satthā ettha, etassāti vā atītasatthukaṃ yathā ‘‘bahukattuko’’ti. Padhānaṃ vacanaṃ pāvacanaṃ. Pā-saddo cettha nipāto ‘‘pā eva vutyassā’’tiādīsu viya. Upasaggapadaṃ vā etaṃ, dīghaṃ katvā pana tathā vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘pāvadatī’’tipi vadanti. Pakkhanti alajjipakkhaṃ. ‘‘Yāva cā’’tiādinā saṅgītiyā sāsanaciraṭṭhitikabhāve kāraṇaṃ, sādhakañca dasseti. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti hi padamajjhāharitvā ‘‘saṅgāyeyya’’nti padena sambandhanīyaṃ.
在这里,“法与律住立多久”,是指法和律在有惭有愧的人当中还能住立多长时间。世尊躺在般涅槃床上时,在《大般涅槃经》(长部第2经第216节)里已经说过这个意思,所以这里说“这确实已经说过”等等。“hi”这个字表示依据传承而确认。“已开示、已施设”:法既已开示,也已施设。因为收摄在经和阿毗达摩中的法,把它充分说出来、令它觉醒,就是开示;按它的种种相状让人知道、把它安立在应当受调伏者的心相续中,就是施设。律也同样既已开示,也已施设。因为收摄在律典中的义理,把它充分说出来、令它觉醒,就是开示;按它的种种相状让人知道、使它不相混杂地安立,就是施设。因此应当知道,两种业也通过两种作用而相应,这是合理的。巴利
Tattha yāva ca dhammavinayo tiṭṭhatīti yattakaṃ kālaṃ dhammo ca vinayo ca lajjipuggalesu tiṭṭhati. Parinibbānamañcake nipannena bhagavatā mahāparinibbānasutte (dī. ni. 2.216) vuttaṃ sandhāya ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Hi-saddo āgamavasena daḷhijotako. Desito paññattoti dhammopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Suttābhidhammasaṅgahitassa hi dhammassa atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ vineyyasantāne ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ. Vinayopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Vinayatantisaṅgahitassa hi atthassa atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, tasmā kammadvayampi kiriyādvayena sambajjhanaṃ yujjatīti veditabbaṃ.
所谓“法”和“律”就是这两者。“我般涅槃后”,意思是在我灭度的时候。文法学者们说,这是用工具格来表示处所义。或者,工具格也可以表示原因,意思是:以我灭度为因,我将成为你们的导师。因为《大般涅槃经注》里说:“我般涅槃后,将为你们成办导师的职责。”这里表示特征的词,实际上是在说明原因,就像“当眼正生起时”那样。这段话的意思是:我还在世时,就已经宣说了——
“这是轻罪,这是重罪,这是可出罪的,这是不可出罪的,这是世间罪,这是制罪,这种罪在一个人面前出罪,这种罪在多人面前出罪,这种罪在僧团面前出罪”——
以不违越七种罪聚的方式,针对所犯的事,配合各篇、附随篇和两部分别,宣说了名为“大律”的教法。这整部律藏在我灭度后,将成办你们导师的职责,因为它教导你们“这是你们该做的,这是你们不该做的”,从而分辨应做与不应做。
我还在世时,就随顺所教化者的根性,以各种方式分别宣说了四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道这三十七菩提分法,宣说了经藏。这整部经藏在我灭度后,将成办你们导师的职责,因为它教导你们随顺各种修行法门而正确实践。
我还在世时,就分别宣说了五蕴、十二处、十八界、四谛、二十二根、九因、四食、七触、七受、七想、七思、七识;其中哪些法是欲界的,哪些法是色界的,哪些法是无色界的,哪些法是包含的,哪些法是不包含的,哪些法是世间的,哪些法是出世间的——这样分别宣说了这些法,宣说了论藏。这整部论藏在我灭度后,将成办你们导师的职责,因为通过蕴等分别而了知四谛,能带来正觉。
总之,从成道到般涅槃,四十五年间所说的一切——三藏、五部、九分教、八万四千法蕴——具有如此广大的分类。这八万四千法蕴住世,而我一个人将般涅槃;现在也只有我一个人在教导、在训诫;我灭度后,这八万四千法蕴将教导你们、训诫你们,完成教导和训诫的职责。巴利
Soti so dhammo ca vinayo ca. Mamaccayenāti mama accayakāle. ‘‘Bhummatthe karaṇaniddeso’’ti hi akkharacintakā vadanti. Hetvatthe vā karaṇavacanaṃ, mama accayahetu tumhākaṃ satthā nāma bhavissatīti attho. Vuttañhi mahāparinibbānasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.216). Lakkhaṇavacanañhettha hetvatthasādhakaṃ yathā ‘‘nette ujuṃ gate satī’’ti (a. ni. 4.70; netti. 10.90, 93). Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mayā vo ṭhiteneva ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garukaṃ, idaṃ satekicchaṃ, idaṃ atekicchaṃ, idaṃ lokavajjaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ayaṃ āpatti puggalassa santike vuṭṭhāti, ayaṃ gaṇassa, ayaṃ saṅghassa santike vuṭṭhātī’’ti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamanīyatāvasena otiṇṇavatthusmiṃ sakhandhakaparivāro ubhatovibhaṅgo mahāvinayo nāma desito, taṃ sakalampi vinayapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati ‘‘idaṃ vo kattabbaṃ, idaṃ vo na kattabba’’nti kattabbākattabbassa vibhāgena anusāsanato. Ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti tena tena vineyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena pakārena ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme vibhajitvā vibhajitvā suttantapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi suttantapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati taṃtaṃcariyānurūpaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā anusāsanato, ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.216), dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, cattāri saccāni, bāvīsatindriyāni, nava hetū, cattāro āhārā, satta phassā, satta vedanā, satta saññā, satta cetanā, satta cittāni. Tatrāpi ettakā dhammā kāmāvacarā, ettakā rūpāvacarā, ettakā arūpāvacarā, ettakā pariyāpannā, ettakā apariyāpannā, ettakā lokiyā, ettakā lokuttarā’’ti ime dhamme vibhajitvā vibhajitvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati khandhādivibhāgena ñāyamānaṃ catusaccasambodhāvahattā. Iti sabbampetaṃ abhisambodhito yāva parinibbānā pañcacattālīsa vassāni bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ ‘‘tīṇi piṭakāni, pañca nikāyā, navaṅgāni, caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti evaṃ mahappabhedaṃ hoti. Imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni tiṭṭhanti, ahaṃ ekova parinibbāyissāmi, ahañca panidāni ekova ovadāmi anusāsāmi, mayi parinibbute imāni caturāsīti buddhasahassāni tumhe ovadissanti anusāsissanti ovādānusāsanakiccassa nipphādanatoti.
教法,从教理、实践、证悟这三方面来说,可以分成三种;但严格来说,指的就是三十七菩提分法。能走远路,就是堪能远行,意思是能走长途、能耐受长途。这东西能长久住立,就是能长久存续。这里说的是:如果我以某种方式结集法与律,让这教法能走远路,也因此能长久存续,那真是太好了。巴利
Sāsananti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhampi sāsanaṃ, nippariyāyato pana sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Addhānaṃ gamitumalanti addhaniyaṃ, addhānagāmi addhānakkhamanti attho. Ciraṃ ṭhiti etassāti ciraṭṭhitikaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena pakārena idaṃ sāsanaṃ addhaniyaṃ, tatoyeva ca ciraṭṭhitikaṃ bhaveyya, tena pakārena dhammañca vinayañca yadi panāhaṃ saṅgāyeyyaṃ, sādhu vatāti.
现在,为了说明大迦叶尊者回忆起正自觉者(佛陀)对自己的殊胜摄受之后,内心思惟的方式,而说了“我曾被世尊……”等话。其中,“我曾被”与“摄受”“称赞”相关联。“Yaṃ”表示“由于”,或者是对动作的指代,因此在这里指代“摄受”和“称赞”中的摄受与称赞。而“你能持守吗”等话,是世尊坐在某棵树下大迦叶尊者敷设的粪扫衣上,用手掌边缘触摸那件如莲花色的粪扫衣时说的。这件事在《迦叶相应》中,正是大迦叶尊者对阿难尊者讲述的——巴利
Idāni sammāsambuddhena attano kataṃ anuggahavisesaṃ samanussaritvā cintanākārampi dassento ‘‘yañcāhaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘yañcāha’’nti etassa ‘‘anuggahito, pasaṃsito’’ti etehi sambandho. Yanti yasmā, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā etaṃ, tena ‘‘anuggahito, pasaṃsito’’ti ettha anuggahaṇaṃ, pasaṃsanañca parāmasati. ‘‘Dhāressasī’’tiādikaṃ pana vacanaṃ bhagavā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle mahākassapattherena paññattasaṅghāṭiyaṃ nisinno taṃ saṅghāṭiṃ padumapupphavaṇṇena pāṇinā antantena parāmasanto āha. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.154) mahākassapatthereneva ānandattheraṃ āmantetvā kathentena –
贤友,那时世尊离开道路,走到一棵树根下。贤友,我就把破布片做成的僧伽梨折成四层铺好,对世尊说:尊者,请世尊坐在这里,愿这对我长久带来利益和安乐。贤友,世尊就坐在铺好的座位上,坐下后对我说:迦叶,你这件破布片僧伽梨很柔软啊。尊者世尊,请出于悲悯,接受我这件破布片僧伽梨。迦叶,你愿意穿用我的旧麻布粪扫衣吗?尊者,我愿意穿用世尊的旧麻布粪扫衣。贤友,我就把那件破布片僧伽梨给了世尊,而我则穿用了世尊的旧麻布粪扫衣。巴利
‘‘Atha kho āvuso bhagavā maggā okkamma yena aññataraṃ rukkhamūlaṃ tenupasaṅkami, atha khvāhaṃ āvuso paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ catugguṇaṃ paññapetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavocaṃ ‘idha bhante bhagavā nisīdatu, yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’ti . Nisīdi kho āvuso bhagavā paññatte āsane, nisajja kho maṃ āvuso bhagavā etadavoca ‘mudukā kho tyāyaṃ kassapa paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭī’ti. Paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ anukampaṃ upādāyāti. Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapa sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānīti. Dhāressāmahaṃ bhante bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānīti. So khvāhaṃ āvuso paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ bhagavato pādāsiṃ, ahaṃ pana bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanāni paṭipajji’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
这里,“柔软啊,你这件”意思是“你这件确实很柔软”。世尊为什么这样说呢?因为想和这位长老交换衣服。为什么想交换呢?因为想把这位长老安置在自己的位置上。难道没有舍利弗和目犍连吗?有的,但世尊这样想:“他们不会住世太久,而迦叶能活到一百二十岁,在我般涅槃后,他会住在七叶窟,结集法与律,使我的教法延续五千年。”所以把他安置在自己的位置上,这样比丘们就会觉得“应当听从迦叶”。因此世尊这样说。而这位长老,因为当衣服或钵的功德被称赞时,说“请你们接受这个”只是一种惯常做法,所以他说:“尊者世尊,请接受我的。”巴利
Tattha mudukā kho tyāyanti mudukā kho te ayaṃ. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamāhāti? Therena saha cīvaraṃ parivattetukāmatāya. Kasmā parivattetukāmo jātoti? Theraṃ attano ṭhāne ṭhapetukāmatāya. Kiṃ sāriputtamoggallānā natthīti? Atthi, evaṃ panassa ahosi ‘‘ime na ciraṃ ṭhassanti, ‘kassapo pana vīsavassasatāyuko, so mayi parinibbute sattapaṇṇiguhāyaṃ vasitvā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ katvā mama sāsanaṃ pañcavassasahassaparimāṇakālaṃ pavattanakaṃ karissatī’’ti attano naṃ ṭhāne ṭhapesi, evaṃ bhikkhū kassapassa sussusitabbaṃ maññissantī’’ti tasmā evamāha. Thero pana yasmā cīvarassa vā pattassa vā vaṇṇe kathite ‘‘imaṃ tumhe gaṇhathā’’ti vacanaṃ cārittameva, tasmā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā’’ti āha.
“迦叶,你能穿得住我这些吗?”这是在说:“迦叶,你能穿用这些穿旧了的粪扫衣吗?”这并不是就体力而言,而是就圆满修行而言才这样说。这里的意思是:我披上这件名叫“满”的女仆所穿、被丢弃在荒坟间的衣服,走进坟场,那上面爬满了约一升容量的虫,我抖掉那些虫,立足于大圣种姓而取用了它。在我取用这件衣服的那一天,一万个世界的大地发出巨大的吼声而震动,虚空发出爆裂声,各轮围世界的天神都喝彩赞叹。领受这件衣服的比丘,应当成为从受戒起就持粪扫衣的人、从受戒起就住阿兰若的人、从受戒起就一座食的人、从受戒起就次第乞食的人。你能与这件衣服相称吗?长老自身虽然具有五头大象的力气,但他并不这样想,而是以精进心想着“我要圆满这项修行”,愿意与善逝的衣服相称,所以说:“尊者,我能持守。”“我遵行”意思是“我已照做”。这样交换衣服之后,世尊披上了长老穿过的衣服,长老披上了导师的衣服。那时,大地以水为边界,发出吼声而震动。巴利
Dhāressasipana me tvaṃ kassapāti kassapa tvaṃ imāni paribhogajiṇṇāni paṃsukūlāni pārupituṃ sakkhissasīti vadati. Tañca kho na kāyabalaṃ sandhāya, paṭipattipūraṇaṃ pana sandhāya evamāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ahaṃ imaṃ cīvaraṃ puṇṇaṃ nāma dāsiṃ pārupitvā āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ susānaṃ pavisitvā tumbamattehi pāṇakehi samparikiṇṇaṃ te pāṇake vidhunitvā mahāariyavaṃse ṭhatvā aggahesiṃ, tassa me imaṃ cīvaraṃ gahitadivase dasasahassacakkavāḷe mahāpathavī mahāviravaṃ viravamānā kampittha, ākāsaṃ taṭataṭāyi, cakkavāḷe devatā sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu, imaṃ cīvaraṃ gaṇhantena bhikkhunā jātipaṃsukūlikena jātiāraññikena jātiekāsanikena jātisapadānacārikena bhavituṃ vaṭṭati, tvaṃ imassa cīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātuṃ sakkhissasīti. Theropi attanā pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti, so taṃ atakkayitvā ‘‘ahametaṃ paṭipattiṃ pūressāmī’’ti ussāhena sugatacīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘dhāressāmahaṃ bhante’’ti āha. Paṭipajjinti paṭipannosiṃ. Evaṃ pana cīvaraparivattanaṃ katvā therena pārupitacīvaraṃ bhagavā pārupi, satthu cīvaraṃ thero. Tasmiṃ samaye mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā unnadantī kampittha.
“麻布粪扫衣”是指把包裹死尸后丢弃的布取来,抖掉约一升量的虫后拿到的、由麻纤维制成的粪扫衣。“穿旧的”是指已经完成了穿着的作用,也就是穿用旧了的意思。这里虽然说那只是一件衣,但因为由多个部分组成,所以用复数,这是《中部义释》里说的。在“以衣的共同受用”这句里,因为“以自己共同受用”这个意思可以被理解,而对于意思能被理解的词,在使用时可以有省略,所以没有说“自己”。因为经里说“迦叶,你能持守我这些麻布粪扫衣吗?”(相应部2.154),所以理解为“以自己共同受用”,而不是别人。并不是只靠字句就能在任何地方都确定意义,大多数情况下意义也要靠上下文等来确定。而阿阇梨法护长老对此这样说:“在‘以衣的共同受用’中,这里应引出‘自己’一词,安立为‘自己同等’,然后连接为‘以自己共同受用衣’。”巴利
Sāṇāni paṃsukūlānīti matakaḷevaraṃ pariveṭhetvā chaḍḍitāni tumbamatte kimī papphoṭetvā gahitāni sāṇavākamayāni paṃsukūlacīvarāni. Nibbasanānīti niṭṭhitavasanakiccāni, paribhogajiṇṇānīti attho. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ekameva taṃ cīvaraṃ, anekāvayavattā pana bahuvacanaṃ katanti majjhimagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti atthassa viññāyamānattā, viññāyamānatthassa ca saddassa payoge kāmācārattā ‘‘attanā’’ti na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapa sāṇāni paṃsukūlānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) hi vuttattā ‘‘attanāva sādhāraṇaparibhogenā’’ti viññāyati, nāññena. Na hi kevalaṃ saddatoyeva sabbattha atthanicchayo, atthapakaraṇādināpi yebhuyyena atthassa niyamitattā. Ācariyadhammapālattherena panettha evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha ‘attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenā’ti idha vuttaṃ attanā – saddamānetvā ‘cīvare attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenā’ti yojetabbaṃ.
某物和某物确实有联系,那么即使那物在远处,这联系也属于它。
从含义上来说,那些彼此不同的法,其邻近性并不是原因。巴利
Yassa yena hi sambandho, dūraṭṭhampi ca tassa taṃ; Atthato hyasamānānaṃ, āsannattamakāraṇanti.
或者也可以这样连接:世尊以共用受用的方式摄受了(大迦叶)。因为即使是一个具格的说明,也能表示与“一起”相连的主体意义。“共同持有”就是“共”,这样的受用就是“共用受用”,即是以此(共用受用)。以共用受用和同等安立而摄受,这就是它们之间的关联。巴利
Atha vā bhagavatā cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogena bhagavatā anuggahitoti yojanīyaṃ. Ekassāpi hi karaṇaniddesassa sahādiyogakattutthajotakattasambhavato’’ti. Samānaṃ dhāraṇametassāti sādhāraṇo, tādiso paribhogoti sādhāraṇaparibhogo, tena. Sādhāraṇaparibhogena ca samasamaṭṭhapanena ca anuggahitoti sambandho.
比丘们,我只要愿意,就能完全远离各种欲,远离各种不善的法,进入并安住在有寻有伺、由远离而生起喜乐的初禅中;比丘们,迦叶也只要愿意,就能完全远离各种欲,远离各种不善的法,进入并安住在有寻有伺、由远离而生起喜乐的初禅中。巴利
‘‘Ahaṃ bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi, kassapopi bhikkhave yāvade ākaṅkhati vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.152) –
世尊在《迦叶相应》(相应部2.151)中,为了把自己和迦叶放在同等地位而宣说了关于九次第定和六种神通分类的上人法。现在以省略的方式,并用“等”字概括,来显示这段经文,所以说“诸比丘,我……”等等。巴利
Navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāpabhede uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanatthāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ kassapasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.151) āgataṃ pāḷimimaṃ peyyālamukhena, ādiggahaṇena ca saṅkhipitvā dassento āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādi.
这里,“yāvade”就是“yāvadeva”,意思是:我想住多久,就住多久。正因为如此,《中部根本复注》和《小复注》里都写道:“所谓‘yāvade’,说的就是‘yāvadeva’。”《相应部义注》中也解释其含义为:“‘yāvade ākaṅkhāmi’就是‘yāvadeva icchāmi’(想多久就多久)。”同样,在那里,阿阇梨法护长老在《利义显明》中说:“‘yāvade’这个词和‘yāvadeva’意思相同。”不过,在某些写本中,看到的读法就是“yāvadeva”。此外还应知道:在等至方面,“yāvade”的意思是——我想入住多少等至住,就入住多少等至住;在神通方面,连同其余经文,意思是——我想运用多少神通作用,就运用多少神通作用。阿阇梨法护长老也为了按随宜方式显示同样的意思而说:“意思是:我想入住多少等至住,或运用多少神通作用,就入住并运用多少,迦叶也是如此。”另有一些人则说:“在等至处,应这样连接:‘我想初禅,就成就初禅而住’等等,所引出的‘彼’字是依业格;在神变通处,也依业格,而在其余神通处则依具格连接:‘我想天耳,就以那天耳听声’等等。”在“vivicceva kāmehi”中,“eva”这个词表示限定,两处都应连接。这里应当说明的内容,后面会清楚显现。巴利
Tattha yāvadeti yāvadeva, yattakaṃ kālaṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tattakaṃ kālaṃ viharāmīti attho. Tatoyeva hi majjhimagaṇṭhipade, cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘yāvadeti yāvadevāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. Saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘yāvade ākaṅkhāmīti yāvadeva icchāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2.152) attho vutto. Tathā hi tattha līnatthapakāsaniyaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘yāvadevāti iminā samānatthaṃ ‘yāvade’ti idaṃ pada’’nti vuttaṃ. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘yāvadevā’’ti ayameva pāṭho dissati. Api ca yāvadeti yattakaṃ samāpattivihāraṃ viharituṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tattakaṃ samāpattivihāraṃ viharāmīti samāpattiṭṭhāne, yattakaṃ abhiññāvohāraṃ voharituṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tattakaṃ abhiññāvohāraṃ voharāmīti abhiññāṭhāne ca saha pāṭhasesena attho veditabbo. Ācariyadhammapālattherenāpi tadevatthaṃ yathālābhanayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yattake samāpattivihāre, abhiññāvohāre vā ākaṅkhanto vihārāmi ceva voharāmi ca, tathā kassapopīti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘yāvadeti ‘yaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ ākaṅkhāmi, taṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja vihārāmī’tiādinā samāpattiṭṭhāne, iddhividhābhiññāṭhāne ca ajjhāharitassa ta-saddassa kammavasena ‘yaṃ dibbasotaṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tena dibbasotena sadde suṇāmī’tiādinā sesābhiññāṭhāne karaṇavasena yojanā vattabbā’’ti vadanti. Vivicceva kāmehīti ettha eva-saddo niyamattho, ubhayattha yojetabbo. Yamettha vattabbaṃ, tadupari āvi bhavissati.
在“九次第住与六神通分类”中,“九次第住”是指连同灭尽定在内的八种等至,因为必须按顺序依次进入,所以这样称呼。“六神通”是指连同漏尽智在内的五种神通。这里在某些抄本中还能看到“ādi”(开头的“等”字),但这个字并不被认可,因为按照上面所说的经文,需要把握的含义已经完整无缺了。
“上人法”是指:在人类当中、或者超越人类的人、或者上等人类——也就是禅修者和圣者——的法;或者说,超越人法的,就是上人法。在这里,十善业道不需要修习作意,人们自然就会生起,而且能带来人的存在,所以叫“人法”;而比这更高的禅那等,应当知道就是“上人法”。
“以同等安立”是指:这样使两者平等——“我住多长时间,或者住多少种等至,运用多少种神通,迦叶也是这样”。这是就多处安立来说的,或者是指对任何上人法都毫无保留地、完全平等地安立,所以说“以同等安立”。而且应当看到,这只是因为九次第住和六神通在体性上共通,而作的一种称赞。因为具寿大迦叶并不像世尊那样,每天进入二十四万亿之数的等至,也不以双神变等方式运用神通。在这里,“在上人法方面,把自己与迦叶同等安立”应当知道只是一个举例。正如:巴利
Navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhedeti ettha navānupubbavihārā nāma anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbattā evaṃsaññitā nirodhasamāpattiyā saha aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Chaḷabhiññā nāma āsavakkhayañāṇena saha pañcābhiññāyo. Katthaci potthake cettha ādisaddo dissati. So anadhippeto yathāvuttāya pāḷiyā gahetabbassa atthassa anavasesattā. Manussesu, manussānaṃ vā uttaribhūtānaṃ, uttarīnaṃ vā manussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammoti uttarimanussadhammo, manussadhammā vā uttarīti uttarimanussadhammo. Dasa kusalakammapathā cettha vinā bhāvanāmanasikārena pakatiyāva manussehi nibbattetabbato, manussattabhāvāvahanato ca manussadhammo nāma, tato uttari pana jhānādi uttarimanussadhammoti veditabbo. Samasamaṭṭhapanenāti ‘‘ahaṃ yattakaṃ kālaṃ, yattake vā samāpattivihāre, yattakā abhiññāyo ca vaḷañjemi , tathā kassapopī’’ti evaṃ samasamaṃ katvā ṭhapanena. Anekaṭṭhānesu ṭhapanaṃ, kassacipi uttarimanussadhammassa asesabhāvena ekantasamaṭṭhapanaṃ vā sandhāya ‘‘samasamaṭṭhapanenā’’ti vuttaṃ, idañca navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññābhāvasāmaññena pasaṃsāmattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi āyasmā mahākassapo bhagavā viya devasikaṃ catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, yamakapāṭihāriyādivasena ca abhiññāyo vaḷañjetīti. Ettha ca uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenā’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi –
迦叶,你去教导比丘们吧;迦叶,你为比丘们说法吧。迦叶,要么我来教导比丘们,要么你来;迦叶,要么我来为比丘们说法,要么你来。巴利
‘‘Ovada kassapa bhikkhū, karohi kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ, ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhū ovadeyyaṃ, tvaṃ vā. Ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kareyyaṃ, tvaṃ vā’’ti –
即使这样,他也确实把自己摆到了和对方完全平等的位置上。巴利
Evampi attanā samasamaṭṭhapanamakāsiyevāti.
“如此”是说:就像以摄取色法的方式受到摄受,也同样被称赞。关于“在空中摇手”:世尊亲自在空中摇手,因为心对诸家不执著,并以此作为根据,所以加以称赞,这就是其中的关联。或者,“因为心不执著”是处格用法,意思是:在空中摇手之后,以亲近诸家的比丘之心不执著的状态——也就是因为他适合对诸家保持心不执著——便仿佛亲自作证一般地加以称赞。正如所说:巴利
Tathāti rūpūpasaṃhāro yathā anuggahito, tathā pasaṃsitoti. Ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvāti bhagavatā attanoyeva pāṇiṃ ākāse cāletvā kulesu alaggacittatāya ceva karaṇabhūtāya pasaṃsitoti sambandho. Alaggacittatāyāti vā ādhāre bhummaṃ, ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā kulūpakassa bhikkhuno alaggacittatāya kulesu alagganacittena bhavituṃ yuttatāya ceva maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā pasaṃsitoti attho. Yathāha –
那时,世尊在空中摇动手臂。比丘们,就像这只手在空中不黏着、不被抓住、不被系缚;同样地,比丘们,任何比丘前往俗家时,在俗家中其心不黏着、不被抓住、不被系缚,心想:愿想要利养的人得到利养,愿想要福德的人做福德。就像因自己的利养而满意、欢喜,也同样因他人的利养而满意、欢喜。比丘们,这样的比丘才值得前往俗家。比丘们,迦叶前往俗家时,在俗家中其心不黏着、不被抓住、不被系缚,心想:愿想要利养的人得到利养,愿想要福德的人做福德。就像因自己的利养而满意、欢喜,也同样因他人的利养而满意、欢喜。巴利
‘‘Atha kho bhagavā ākāse pāṇiṃ cālesi seyyathāpi bhikkhave, ayaṃ ākāse pāṇi na sajjati na gayhati na bajjhati, evameva kho bhikkhave yassa kassaci bhikkhuno kulāni upasaṅkamato kulesu cittaṃ na sajjati na gayhati na bajjhati ‘labhantu lābhakāmā, puññakāmā karontu puññānī’ti. Yathā sakena lābhena attamano hoti sumano, evaṃ paresaṃ lābhena attamano hoti sumano. Evarūpo kho bhikkhave bhikkhu arahati kulāni upasaṅkamituṃ. Kassapassa bhikkhave kulāni upasaṅkamato kulesu cittaṃ na sajjati na gayhati na bajjhati ‘labhantu lābhakāmā, puññakāmā karontu puññānī’ti. Yathā sakena lābhena attamano hoti sumano, evaṃ paresaṃ lābhena attamano hoti sumano’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.146).
这里,“在空中摇动手臂”是说:就像在蓝色的天空中挥动一道闪电一样,他在下方、上方和两边摇动手臂。而在三藏佛语中,这叫做“不混杂之句”。“喜悦”是指内心满意,不是被忧恼打断而执取的心。“欢喜”是指满足的心。现在,如果有志向下劣、行于邪道的人这样说:“正自觉者说‘以不黏着之心,像空中摇手那样,前往俗家’,这是把人放在不可能的位置上,强加无法承受的负担,让人去做做不到的事。”为了断除他的论调,并说明“这件事可以做得到,有这样的比丘”,世尊便举出大迦叶尊者作为见证,说道:“诸比丘,迦叶……”等语。巴利
Tattha ākāse pāṇiṃ cālesīti nīle gaganantare yamakavijjukaṃ sañcālayamāno viya heṭṭhābhāge , uparibhāge, ubhato ca passesu pāṇiṃ sañcālesi, idañca pana tepiṭake buddhavacane asambhinnapadaṃ nāma. Attamanoti sakamano, na domanassena pacchinditvā gahitamano. Sumanoti tuṭṭhamano, idāni yo hīnādhimuttiko micchāpaṭipanno evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘sammāsambuddho ‘alaggacittatāya ākāse cālitapāṇūpamā kulāni upasaṅkamathā’ti vadanto aṭṭhāne ṭhapeti, asayhabhāraṃ āropeti, yaṃ na sakkā kātuṃ, taṃ kārehī’’ti, tassa vādapathaṃ pacchinditvā ‘‘sakkā ca kho evaṃ kātuṃ, atthi evarūpo bhikkhū’’ti āyasmantaṃ mahākassapattherameva sakkhiṃ katvā dassento ‘‘kassapassa bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
他又说了另一种赞叹:“以如月之行道。”意思是:因为以如月之行道而行、以此行为依据而受到赞叹;或者说,正是以那如月之行道为基础,把他本人作为见证来赞叹。正如所说的:巴利
Aññampi pasaṃsanamāha ‘‘candopamapaṭipadāya cā’’ti, candapaṭibhāgāya paṭipadāya ca karaṇabhūtāya pasaṃsito, tassaṃ vā ādhārabhūtāya maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā pasaṃsitoti attho. Yathāha –
比丘们,你们去俗家时,要像月亮一样:身体要收敛,心也要收敛,在俗家中始终把自己当作新来的人,不要放肆。
比丘们,就像一个人看古井、山崖险处或河流的断崖时,身体会收敛,心也会收敛;同样地,比丘们,你们去俗家时,要像月亮一样:身体要收敛,心也要收敛,在俗家中始终把自己当作新来的人,不要放肆。
比丘们,迦叶去俗家时,就像月亮一样:身体收敛,心收敛,在俗家中始终把自己当作新来的人,不放肆。巴利
‘‘Candūpamā bhikkhave kulāni upasaṅkamatha apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ niccanavakā kulesu appagabbhā. Seyyathāpi bhikkhave puriso jarudapānaṃ vā olokeyya pabbatavisamaṃ vā nadīviduggaṃ vā apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ, evameva kho bhikkhave candūpamā kulāni upasaṅkamatha apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ niccanavakā kulesu appagabbhā. Kassapo bhikkhave candūpamo kulāni upasaṅkamati apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ niccanavako kulesu appagabbho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.146).
这里,“如月般”是指像月亮一样。是因为形状圆满相似吗?不是。而是说,就像月亮在天空中运行时,不和任何人建立亲密、贪恋、执著、爱乐、希求或缠缚,却仍然是大众所亲爱、悦意的;你们也要这样,不和任何人建立亲密等关系,成为大众所亲爱、悦意的如月者,然后前往刹帝利家等四种家族。另外,就像月亮驱散黑暗、遍放光明,你们也要通过驱散烦恼的黑暗、遍放智慧的光明而成为如月者。应当通过这些以及其他方式理解这里的含义。巴利
Tattha candūpamāti candasadisā hutvā. Kiṃ parimaṇḍalatāya sadisāti? No, apica kho yathā cando gaganatalaṃ pakkhandamāno na kenaci saddhiṃ santhavaṃ vā sinehaṃ vā ālayaṃ vā nikantiṃ vā patthanaṃ vā pariyuṭṭhānaṃ vā karoti, na ca na hoti mahājanassa piyo manāpo, tumhepi evaṃ kenaci saddhiṃ santhavādīnaṃ akaraṇena bahujanassa piyā manāpā candūpamā hutvā khattiyakulādīni cattāri kulāni upasaṅkamathāti attho. Apica yathā cando andhakāraṃ vidhamati, ālokaṃ pharati, evaṃ kilesandhakāravidhamanena, ñāṇālokapharaṇena ca candūpamā hutvāti evamādīhipi nayehi attho daṭṭhabbo.
把身体收回来,把心收回来,意思是:正是靠着不跟人建立亲密关系等做法,把身体和心都收回来,不拉扯、不攀附,让它们远离。常如新来者,意思是:始终像刚来的人一样,像客人一样。因为客人按顺序走进一户人家,如果主人看见他,心生怜悯,想:我们远游在外的儿子、兄弟,也是这样四处漂泊的吧,于是请他坐下,供养食物;他吃完就说:把你们的钵收好,然后起身离开,不跟他们建立亲密关系,也不帮他们处理事务。这就说明:你们也要依次进入所到之俗家,接受生起净信的人们所给与的供养,拿了之后便离开,断绝亲密关系,不操办他们的家务事务。不鲁莽——不骄慢,远离由八种因缘所起的身骄慢、由四种因缘所起的语骄慢,以及由多种因缘所起的心骄慢,前往俗家。巴利
Apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittanti teneva santhavādīnamakaraṇena kāyañca cittañca apakassitvā, akaḍḍhitvā apanetvāti attho. Niccanavakāti niccaṃ navikāva, āgantukasadisā eva hutvāti attho. Āgantuko hi paṭipāṭiyā sampattagehaṃ pavisitvā sace naṃ gharasāmikā disvā ‘‘amhākaṃ puttabhātaropi vippavāsagatā evaṃ vicariṃsū’’ti anukampamānā nisīdāpetvā bhojenti, bhuttamattoyeva ‘‘tumhākaṃ bhājanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti uṭṭhāya pakkamati, na tehi saddhiṃ santhavaṃ vā karoti, kiccakaraṇīyāni vā saṃvidahati, evaṃ tumhepi paṭipāṭiyā sampattagharaṃ pavisitvā yaṃ iriyāpathesu pasannā manussā denti, taṃ gahetvā pacchinnasanthavā tesaṃ kiccakaraṇīye abyāvaṭā hutvā nikkhamathāti dīpeti. Appagabbhāti na pagabbhā, aṭṭhaṭṭhānena kāyapāgabbhiyena, catuṭṭhānena vacīpāgabbhiyena, anekaṭṭhānena manopāgabbhiyena ca virahitā kulāni upasaṅkamathāti attho.
“古井”是指破旧的井。“山间险处”是指山中不平坦的悬崖坠落处。“河岸断崖”是指河边断崖崩落处。“同样地”在这里是譬喻的对应:古井等就像四种俗家,观望的人就像比丘。正如一个身心没有收摄的人,观望那些地方时会掉进去;同样,一个不以身等防护而接近俗家的比丘,会被俗家系缚,因此遭受种种破戒、断足等灾祸。反过来,正如身心收摄的人不会掉进去;同样,以防护的身、防护的语、防护的心、善安立的念,成为身心收摄的人而接近俗家的比丘,不会被俗家系缚,他那以戒、信、定、慧为本质的足、手、腹、头不会破损,贪等荆棘不会刺伤他,他安乐地前往从未到过的涅槃方向。为了截断志向低劣、行于邪道者的论路,世尊举出大迦叶尊者本人作为见证,说道:“诸比丘,迦叶……”等语。如此,在这里的义理中,世尊以称为“不黏着之心”的如月行道作为原因而赞叹他,或者以那如月行道为基础,举出他本人作为见证而加以赞叹。若是如此,“唯”字和“而”字就不应使用,因为两句是同位关系。这一含义与读法似乎更为合理,因为在《般涅槃经注》中说:“在空中挥动手臂,宣说如月行道时,是举出我作为身证而说的。”巴利
Jarudapānanti jiṇṇakūpaṃ. Pabbatavisamanti pabbate visamaṃ papātaṭṭhānaṃ. Nadīvidugganti nadiyā viduggaṃ chinnataṭaṭṭhānaṃ. Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – jarudapānādayo viya hi cattāri kulāni, olokanapuriso viya bhikkhu, yathā pana anapakaṭṭhakāyacitto tāni olokento puriso tattha patati, evaṃ arakkhitehi kāyādīhi kulāni upasaṅkamanto bhikkhu kulesu bajjhati, tato nānappakāraṃ sīlapādabhañjanādikaṃ anatthaṃ pāpuṇāti. Yathā pana apakaṭṭhakāyacitto puriso tattha na patati, evaṃ rakkhiteneva kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya, rakkhitehi cittehi, sūpaṭṭhitāya satiyā apakaṭṭhakāyacitto hutvā kulāni upasaṅkamanto bhikkhu kulesu na bajjhati, athassa sīlasaddhāsamādhipaññāsaṅkhātāni pādahatthakucchisīsāni na bhañjanti, rāgakaṇṭakādayo na vijjhanti, sukhito yenakāmaṃ agatapubbaṃ nibbānadisaṃ gacchati, evarūpo ayaṃ mahākassapoti hīnādhimuttikassa micchāpaṭipannassa vādapathapacchindanatthaṃ mahākassapattheraṃ eva sakkhiṃ katvā dassento ‘‘kassapo bhikkhave’’tiādimāhāti. Evampettha atthamicchantialaggacittatāsaṅkhātāya candopamapaṭipadāya karaṇabhūtāya pasaṃsito, tassaṃ vā ādhārabhūtāya maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā pasaṃsitoti, evaṃ sati ceva-saddo, ca-saddo ca na payujjitabbo dvinnaṃ padānaṃ tulyādhikaraṇattā, ayameva attho pāṭho ca yuttataro viya dissati parinibbānasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā candūpamaṃ paṭipadaṃ kathento maṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā kathesī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.232) vuttattāti.
他的意思是:除了结集法与律,还能有什么别的无债状态呢?这里“他的”一词,在表示原因时补上“因此”,意思是“因此,我的”;但在指代动作时,则是指“他的那种护念、那种称赞”。有些抄本中也见有“我的那种”的读法,若是这样,在指代动作时就还得另外补一个“它的”。“没有债务的人”就是无债者,其状态就是无债。除了结集法与律,还能有什么可称为他的无债状态呢?根本不会有。接着以“世尊不是对我……”等语,用譬喻来说(这里所说的“铠甲”,是指胸甲,用来遮护胸部,此处是借衣服作比喻而取这个意思)。“确立家族统绪者”,即确立家族血统传承者。由于“我”一词恒常相待,所以是“确立正法统绪者”的复合词。此中所述如下:譬如国王以摧伏敌众、为确立自身家族统绪,而授予自己的铠甲与王位给确立家族统绪之子;世尊也如此,以摧伏教法之敌众、为确立正法统绪,以施衣及平等安置所摄之此不共摄受,摄受了我,不是么?并且以这殊胜的称赞称赞了我,不是么?如是思惟。这里“如是”一词,显示“他们可能令隐没、我当结集、还能有什么别的无债状态”这一以言说为先导的,以及“然而此事有可能性”等三句。巴利
Tassakimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissati, aññatra dhammavinayasaṅgāyanāti adhippāyo. Tattha tassāti yaṃ-saddassa kāraṇanidassane ‘‘tasmā’’ti ajjhāharitvā tassa meti attho, kiriyāparāmasane pana tassa anuggahaṇassa, pasaṃsanassa cāti. Potthakesupi katthaci ‘‘tassa me’’ti pāṭho dissati, evaṃ sati kiriyāparāmasane ‘‘tassā’’ti aparaṃ padamajjhāharitabbaṃ. Natthi iṇaṃ yassāti aṇaṇo, tassa bhāvo āṇaṇyaṃ. Dhammavinayasaṅgāyanaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ kiṃ nāma tassa iṇavirahitattaṃ bhavissati, na bhavissati evāti attho. ‘‘Nanu maṃ bhagavā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ upamāvasena vibhāveti. Sakakavacaissariyānuppadānenāti ettha kavaco nāma uracchado, yena uro chādīyate, tassa ca cīvaranidassanena gahaṇaṃ, issariyassa pana abhiññāsamāpattinidassanenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakanti kulavaṃsassa kulapaveṇiyā patiṭṭhāpakaṃ. ‘‘Me’’ti padassa niccasāpekkhattā saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakoti samāso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sattusaṅghanimmaddanena attano kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ sakakavacaissariyānuppadānena kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakaṃ puttaṃ rājā viya bhagavāpi maṃ dīghadassī ‘‘saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpako me ayaṃ bhavissatī’’ti mantvā sāsanapaccatthikagaṇanimmaddanena saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ cīvaradānasamasamaṭṭhapanasaṅkhātena iminā asādhāraṇānuggahena anuggahesi nanu, imāya ca uḷārāya pasaṃsāya pasaṃsi nanūti. Iti cintayantoti ettha itisaddena ‘‘antaradhāpeyyuṃ, saṅgāyeyyaṃ, kimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissatī’’ti vacanapubbaṅgamaṃ, ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi vākyattayaṃ nidasseti.
现在,为了用结集犍度的巴利经文来证明前面所说的义理,他说了“如所说”等话。其中,“如所说”是什么意思呢?意思是:对我所说的义理,他引了什么来证明?或者,意思是:我以某种方式说的,在巴利经文里也以那种方式说了。或者,意思是:巴利经文里说了什么话,就用那句话来和我所说的话对照、吻合,就像可以说“用恒河水对照耶牟那河水”一样。因为引巴利经文为证这件事本身就是现量可知的,而对于已知意义的词句,在使用上是可以灵活运用的。因为义理的贯通,本来就是为了阐明意趣。或者,意思是:他以某种方式激发了比丘们为结集法与律而精勤,在巴利经文里也以那种方式说了。诸如此类。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ saṅgītikkhandhakapāḷiyā sādhento āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Tattha yathāhāti kiṃ āha, mayā vuttassa atthassa sādhakaṃ kiṃ āhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathā vā yena pakārena mayā vuttaṃ, tathā tena pakārena pāḷiyampi āhāti attho. Yathā vā yaṃ vacanaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āha, tathā tena vacanena mayā vuttavacanaṃ saṃsandati ceva sameti ca yathā taṃ gaṅgodakena yamunodakantipi vattabbo pāḷiyā sādhanatthaṃ udāharitabhāvassa paccakkhato viññāyamānattā, viññāyamānatthassa ca saddassa payoge kāmācārattā. Adhippāyavibhāvanatthā hi atthayojanā. Yathā vā yena pakārena dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesi, tathā tena pakārena pāḷiyampi āhāti attho. Evamīdisesu.
关于“Ekamidāhaṃ”这句,“idaṃ”只是个虚词。“Ekaṃ samayaṃ”是依处格意义而用的业格,意思是“在一个时候”。“Pāvāya”指从波婆城,在那里乞食之后,他踏上了前往拘尸那罗的旅途,这就是所说的意思。“Addhānamagga”就是长路,这里“addhāna”一词是长途的同义词。“Mahatā”指因功德之大和数量之多而称为大。“以大约五百位”等,显示了数量的巨大,“matta”一词是表示概量的词,就像在“于食知节量”等中的用法。为了证成“激发为结集法与律而精勤”这一义理而引用的“那时……”等巴利经文,并不能证成前文所说的义理。因为其中并未提到激发精勤的方式。为了避开这样的难问,他说:“应详知整个须跋陀品”。即便如此,难问依然如故,因此说了“从那以后,他说……”等。再者,由于能证成前文所说义理的巴利经文篇幅较长,为了避免著作过于沉重,他以中间省略的方式,只出示首尾的巴利经文,而说:“应详知整个须跋陀品”。由此,他指示了从“那时,贤友,我离开道路,坐在某棵树下”这句巴利经文开始,直到“我们不想要的,就不会去做”这句巴利经文为止的整个须跋陀品。巴利
Ekamidāhanti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti ca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, ekasmiṃ samayeti attho. Pāvāyāti pāvānagarato, tattha piṇḍāya caritvā ‘‘kusināraṃ gamissāmī’’ti addhānamaggappaṭipannoti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhānamaggoti ca dīghamaggo vuccati, dīghapariyāyo hettha addhānasaddo. Mahatāti guṇamahattenapi saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. ‘‘Pañcamattehī’’tiādinā saṅkhyāmahattaṃ dasseti, mattasaddo ca pamāṇavacano ‘‘bhojane mattaññutā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.16) viya. ‘‘Dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti etassatthassa sādhanatthaṃ āhatā ‘‘atha kho’’tiādikā pāḷi yathāvuttamatthaṃ na sādheti . Na hettha ussāhajananappakāro āgatoti codanaṃ pariharitumāha ‘‘sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabba’’nti. Evampesā codanā tadavatthāyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tato paraṃ āhā’’tiādi. Apica yathāvuttatthasādhikā pāḷi mahatarāti ganthagarutāpariharaṇatthaṃ majjhe peyyālamukhena ādiantameva pāḷiṃ dassento ‘‘sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabba’’nti āha. Tena hi ‘‘atha khvāhaṃ āvuso maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdī’’ti (cūḷava. 437) vuttapāḷito paṭṭhāya ‘‘yaṃ na icchissāma, na taṃ karissāmā’’ti (cūḷava. 437) vuttapāḷipariyosānaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ dasseti.
从“从那以后”等语句开始,剩下的部分就是“来吧,贤友们”等一段展示激发精勤方式的巴利经文。因此,在“tasmā tato paraṃ āhā”这一句中,应当理解为:从那之后,也就是从须跋陀品之后,他讲述了展示激发精勤方式的话。《大结节注》里也是这么说的。阿阇梨舍利弗长老也是同样的意思。不过,阿阇梨法护长老说:“‘tato paraṃ’是指从激发比丘们精勤之后”,这个说法需要斟酌,因为在前面的巴利经文里并没有提到激发精勤的方式。因为,正是“来吧,贤友们,在非法尚未炽盛之前,让我们结集法与律吧”等这些话,才是激发精勤的方式。如果有人因为须跋陀品展示了由须跋陀所说、能成为激发精勤之因的话,就说它就是激发精勤,那这里也就没什么可斟酌的了。在“在非法尚未炽盛之前”这一句中,“非法”指的是与十善业道相反的非法。或者,由于为了结集法与律而激发精勤,不结集所导致的过失聚也可能出现,正如所说“说非法的人强盛,说法的人弱小”,所以以戒行败坏等为因的恶欲等过失聚,也被称为“非法”。“pure dippati”就是“将会炽盛”的意思。因为“pure”这个词与表示未来的语境结合时,会用现在时来表达未来的意义,就像“天快要下雨了”那样。巴利
‘‘Tato para’’ntiādinā pana tadavasesaṃ ‘‘handa mayaṃ āvuso’’tiādikaṃ ussāhajananappakāradassanapāḷiṃ. Tasmā tato paraṃ āhāti ettha subhaddakaṇḍato paraṃ ussāhajananappakāradassanavacanamāhāti attho veditabbo. Mahāgaṇṭhipadepi hi soyevattho vutto. Ācariyasāriputtattherenāpi (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) tatheva adhippeto. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘tato paranti tato bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananato parato’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ vicāretabbaṃ heṭṭhā ussāhajananappakārassa pāḷiyaṃ avuttattā. Ayameva hi ussāhajananappakāro yadidaṃ ‘‘handa mayaṃ āvuso dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāma, pure adhammo dippatī’’tiādi. Yadi pana subhaddakaṇḍameva ussāhajananahetubhūtassa subhaddena vuttavacanassa pakāsanattā ussāhajanananti vadeyya, natthevettha vicāretabbatāti. Pure adhammo dippatīti ettha adhammo nāma dasakusalakammapathapaṭipakkhabhūto adhammo. Dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ ussāhajananappasaṅgattā vā tadasaṅgāyanahetuko dosagaṇopi sambhavati, ‘‘adhammavādino balavanto honti, dhammavādino dubbalā hontī’’ti vuttattā sīlavipattiādihetuko pāpicchatādidosagaṇo adhammotipi vadanti. Pure dippatīti api nāma dippati. Saṃsayatthe hi pure-saddo. Atha vā yāva adhammo dhammaṃ paṭibāhituṃ samattho hoti, tato puretaramevāti attho. Āsanne hi anadhippete ayaṃ pure-saddo. Dippatīti dippissati, pure-saddayogena hi anāgatatthe ayaṃ vattamānapayogo yathā ‘‘purā vassati devo’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
在未来决意时,同样在过去久远时;
诗人们在两种时间上都会使用“pure”这个词。
在前与后的搭配用法上,是始终如此,还是偶尔、何时才这样?巴利
‘‘Anāgate sannicchaye, tathātīte ciratane; Kāladvayepi kavīhi, puresaddo payujjate’’ti. (vajira. ṭī. bāhiranidānakathāvaṇṇanā); ‘‘Pureyāvapurāyoge , niccaṃ vā karahi kadā;
就算这样说,现在时又怎么能成立呢?巴利
Lacchāyamapi kiṃ vutte, vattamānā bhavissatī’’ti ca.
有些论师在这里这样解释:pure 是指后来、未来。就像走路的人,他要走的那条路被称为“前方”,同样地,这里也按照行路的方式,把未来时间称为 pure。这样一来,这里就可以依那个时间来用现在时。在“法被驳斥”这一句里,也要结合 pure 这个词,按上面说的方式理解它的意思;同样,“法”也可以按与非法相反的方式来理解,从这里往后也是同样的道理。“非律”是指与断除律和防护律相对立的非律。“持律者变得无力”这句里,经文用的是 iti 这个词,它应当和后面“tato paraṃ āha”里的 āha 连起来理解。巴利
Keci panettha evaṃ vaṇṇayanti – pureti pacchā anāgate, yathā addhānaṃ gacchantassa gantabbamaggo ‘‘pure’’ti vuccati, tathā idhāpi maggagamananayena anāgatakālo ‘‘pure’’ti vuccatīti. Evaṃ sati taṃkālāpekkhāya cettha vattamānapayogo sambhavati. Dhammo paṭibāhiyyatīti etthāpi pure-saddena yojetvā vuttanayena attho veditabbo, tathā dhammopi adhammaviparītavasena, ito parampi eseva nayo. Avinayoti pahānavinayasaṃvaravinayānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūto avinayo. Vinayavādino dubbalā hontīti evaṃ iti-saddena pāṭho, so ‘‘tato paraṃ āhā’’ti ettha āha-saddena sambajjhitabbo.
“Tena hi”是一个表示催促的虚词。在挑选比丘的时候,他们催促大迦叶长老,这样说:“请挑选比丘。”意思是:请选出适合结集的比丘,审查之后录取。“他掌握了全部……”这句话,说明即使是前面所说的那些人,从凡夫一直到以干观而漏尽的比丘为止,虽然他们也可能具备教理与证悟,但那些具足无碍解、三明等功德的人,其教理与证悟的成就是最殊胜的,因此对结集有很大的帮助。所谓“全部九分教”,是指经、应颂等九分教属于这里或存在于这里,所以叫“全部九分教”;而大师世尊的教法叫“大师教法”,因为依此而受到教化,所以得此名,两者合起来就是“全部九分教的大师教法”。另一种解释:经、应颂等九支在这里或属于这里,所以叫“九分教”,那正是大师教法,而且是全部而非一部分,所以这样说。想要获得利益的人应当学透、修学,或者说能够实现现法利益等人生目标的教法,就叫“教法”,也就是三藏。持守这被称为“全部九分教大师教法”的教法的人,就是所说的那样,意思就是这样的人。凡夫……中略……干观漏尽比丘,在这里——巴利
Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Uccinane uyyojentā hi mahākassapattheraṃ evamāhaṃsu ‘‘bhikkhū uccinatū’’ti, saṅgītiyā anurūpe bhikkhū uccinitvā upadhāretvā gaṇhātūti attho. ‘‘Sakala…pe… pariggahesī’’ti etena sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavapariyantānaṃ yathāvuttapuggalānaṃ satipi āgamādhigamasambhave saha paṭisambhidāhi pana tevijjādiguṇayuttānaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiyā ukkaṃsagatattā saṅgītiyā bahūpakārataṃ dasseti. Sakalaṃ suttageyyādikaṃ navaṅgaṃ ettha, etassāti vā sakalanavaṅgaṃ, satthu bhagavato sāsanaṃ satthusāsanaṃ sāsīyati etenāti katvā, tadeva satthusāsananti sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanaṃ. Nava vā suttageyyādīni aṅgāni ettha, etassāti vā navaṅgaṃ, tameva satthusāsanaṃ, tañca sakalameva, na ekadesanti tathā. Atthakāmena pariyāpuṇitabbā sikkhitabbā, diṭṭhadhammikādipurisatthaṃ vā nipphādetuṃ pariyattā samatthāti pariyatti, tīṇi piṭakāni, sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanasaṅkhātā pariyatti, taṃ dhārentīti tathā, tādiseti attho. Puthujjana…pe… sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavabhikkhūti ettha –
太阳族的佛陀宣说了两种凡夫。
一种是盲凡夫,一种是善凡夫。巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.61; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.51; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 88; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.130); –
在所说的(两种凡夫)当中,所指的正是善凡夫,因为即使通过邻近词语的关联,也能了知意义上的差别。由于缺乏止修习的滋润,他们的观是干涩的、粗糙的、不润泽的,所以他们是“干观者”;他们就是漏尽者,因此这样说。而“比丘”一词,在一切处都应结合理解。正如所说:巴利
Vuttesu kalyāṇaputhujjanāva adhippetā saddantarasannidhānenapi atthavisesassa viññātabbattā. Samathabhāvanāsinehābhāvena sukkhā lūkhā asiniddhā vipassanā etesanti sukkhavipassakā, teyeva khīṇāsavāti tathā. ‘‘Bhikkhū’’ti pana sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Vuttañhi –
凡是从义理上或从声音的残余部分而听闻到的,
他各自随所得而在某个时候证得。巴利
‘‘Yañcatthavato saddekasesato vāpi suyyate; Taṃ sambajjhate paccekaṃ, yathālābhaṃ kadācipī’’ti.
受持三藏一切教法类别者:这里,三藏的集合就是“三藏”,受持那被称为三藏、按九分教等分为无数类别的一切教法类别的人,就是这样,是那样的人。一再随著那具足者修习、增长,就是“随力”,那本身就是“威力”“势力”;那些有大威力的人,就是“大威力者”。“诸比丘,这是最上”——因为这句话是依据世尊所说而流传下来的,所以“最上”这个词是随顺而立的名称,就像“yevāpanaka”一样;依其威力,紧接着所说的那个位置,这里就是“最上”,意思是安立其上。说这位比丘是最上,这样安立也可以。为了显示即使没有特别安立,他们也因为具备其余功德而被选出、存在于其中,所以说“大多”。三明就是三种明,以它们为首的六神通等,就是“三明等”;那些有多种类别的人,就是“三明等类别”。或者,这位漏尽者具有三明,所以是“三明者”,以它为首的六神通等就是“三明等”,那些就是类别,所以是“三明等类别”。意思是说,以三明、六神通等方式分为多种类别的漏尽比丘。针对他们而说,就是针对那些比丘,在结集犍度中说了“那时”等话。由此可知,虽然经文表面上是笼统而说,但实际上特别是针对如前所说的漏尽比丘而说的,这样来与经文相印证。巴利
Tipiṭakasabbapariyattippabhedadhareti ettha tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ samāhāro tipiṭakaṃ, taṃsaṅkhātaṃ navaṅgādivasena anekabhedabhinnaṃ sabbaṃ pariyattippabhedaṃ dhārentīti tathā, tādise. Anu anu taṃ samaṅginaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti anubhāvo, soyeva ānubhāvo, pabhāvo, mahanto ānubhāvo yesaṃ te mahānubhāvā. ‘‘Etadaggaṃ bhikkhave’’ti bhagavatā vuttavacanamupādāya pavattattā ‘‘etadagga’’nti padaṃ anukaraṇajanāmaṃ nāma yathā ‘‘yevāpanaka’’nti, tabbasena vuttaṭṭhānantaramidha etadaggaṃ, tamāropiteti attho. Etadaggaṃ eso bhikkhu aggoti vā āropitepi vaṭṭati. Tadanāropitāpi avasesaguṇasampannattā uccinitā tattha santīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tisso vijjā tevijjā, tā ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnanti tevijjādayo, te bhedā anekappakārā yesanti tevijjādibhedā. Atha vā tisso vijjā assa khīṇāsavassāti tevijjo, so ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnanti tevijjādayo, teyeva bhedā yesanti tevijjādibhedā. Tevijjachaḷabhiññādivasena anekabhedabhinne khīṇāsavabhikkhūyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ye sandhāya vuttanti ye bhikkhū sandhāya idaṃ ‘‘atha kho’’tiādivacanaṃ saṅgītikkhandhake vuttaṃ. Iminā kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ avisesatova vuttaṃ, tathāpi visesena yathāvuttakhīṇāsavabhikkhūyeva sandhāya vuttanti pāḷiyā saṃsandanaṃ karoti.
难道持守全部九分教与大师教法的漏尽者,不是有数百、数千位吗?为什么长老只选了不足五百位?提出这一问难后,为了通过显示特别理由来消除它,而说了“kissa panā”等。其中,“kissa”意为“为何”。“pana”是表示另一方的语气词。“为了给与机会”是指:以给与机会为因由、为理由。因为“attha”一词,如同在“为节日故,出城登杂山”等句中,是表示原因的词语;又如在“因何故”等中,是处格表原因义。正如他们所解释:“为节日故,即是以节日为因、以节日为理由。”如此,问与答便相应,这在此类情形中是通例。巴利
Nanu ca sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidharā khīṇāsavā anekasatā, anekasahassā ca, kasmā thero ekenūnamakāsīti codanaṃ uddharitvā visesakāraṇadassanena taṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘kissa panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kissāti kasmā. Pakkhantarajotako pana-saddo. Okāsakaraṇatthanti okāsakaraṇanimittaṃ okāsakaraṇahetu. Attha-saddo hi ‘‘chaṇatthañca nagarato nikkhamitvā missakapabbataṃ abhiruhatū’’tiādīsu viya kāraṇavacano, ‘‘kissa hetū’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.238) viya ca hetvatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Tathā hi vaṇṇayanti ‘‘chaṇatthanti chaṇanimittaṃ chaṇahetūti attho’’ti. Evañca sati pucchāsabhāgatāvissajjanāya hoti, esa nayo īdisesu.
为什么给他机会呢?所以接着说了“tena”等话。这里的“hi”是表示原因的词。从“So hāyasmā”等话开始,是针对“无论在一起还是分开都不可能”这个说法,逐一说明各自的原因。不过有些人说“tamatthaṃ vivarati”(它揭示了那个意思),这并不恰当,因为已经显示了“tasmā”这样表达原因的语句。在“tasmā”等显示原因的地方,“hi”这个词正是用来点明原因的。那些只表示标记、像树枝折断的比喻一样的不变词,就是用在这样的场合。
正在修学的人,就是“有学”;或者,所修学的就是“学”,那学本身就是他的戒,所以叫“有学”。因为他还没有完成修学,又一心倾向于它,所以完全是以修学为本性——不像无学那样已经完成修学、在这方面已经止息了努力,也不像放逸的凡夫那样对修学没有倾向,就像欺诈者一样。这里依照派生词的用法,取“以彼为本性”的意思,比如“kāruṇiko”(有悲悯本性的人)。或者,依圣者的种姓,已经在三种修学中出生,或者存在于其中,所以叫“有学”。再者,依此而见,就是“见”,即道与果的正见;与见俱在,所以叫“有学”。由于上三道的作用还没有完成,所以叫“有应作”。“Assa”就是“anena”,和“appaccakkhaṃ nāma”这句话相连。或者,“assa”在这里是“natthi”这个动词的接受语。因为已经熟练现起的缘故,所以不存在所谓“不现前”。不过《律藏注》中说“没有所谓不从面前接受的”,那是就“两千位比丘”这句话而说的,意思是:从世尊面前接受的才算数。同样,弟子所说的经也被称为“佛说”。巴利
Kasmā panassa okāsamakāsīti āha ‘‘tenā’’tiādi. Hi-saddo kāraṇatthe. ‘‘So hāyasmā’’tiādinā ‘‘sahāpi vināpi na sakkā’’ti vuttavacane paccekaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Keci pana ‘‘tamatthaṃ vivaratī’’ti vadanti, tadayuttaṃ ‘‘tasmā’’ti kāraṇavacanadassanato. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā hi kāraṇadassanaṭṭhāne kāraṇajotakoyeva hi-saddo. Saññāṇamattajotakā sākhābhaṅgopamā hi nipātāti, evamīdisesu. Sikkhatīti sekkho, sikkhanaṃ vā sikkhā, sāyeva tassa sīlanti sekkho. So hi apariyositasikkhattā, tadadhimuttattā ca ekantena sikkhanasīlo, na asekkho viya pariniṭṭhitasikkho tattha paṭippassaddhussāho, nāpi vissaṭṭhasikkho pacurajano viya tattha anadhimutto, kitavasena viya ca taddhitavasenidha tappakatiyattho gayhati yathā ‘‘kāruṇiko’’ti. Atha vā ariyāya jātiyā tīsupi sikkhāsu jāto, tattha vā bhavoti sekkho. Apica ikkhati etāyāti ikkhā, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi, saha ikkhāyāti sekkho. Uparimaggattayakiccassa apariyositattā saha karaṇīyenāti sakaraṇīyo. Assāti anena, ‘‘appaccakkhaṃ nāmā’’ti etena sambandho. Assāti vā ‘‘natthī’’ti ettha kiriyāpaṭiggahakavacanaṃ. Paguṇappavattibhāvato appaccakkhaṃ nāma natthi. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘asammukhā paṭiggahitaṃ nāma natthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ, taṃ’’ dve sahassāni bhikkhuto’’ti vuttampi bhagavato santike paṭiggahitameva nāmāti katvā vuttaṃ. Tathā hi sāvakabhāsitampi suttaṃ ‘‘buddhabhāsita’’nti vuccatīti.
“正如所说”等句,是尊者阿难用自己说过的那首偈颂来证明这一点。这首偈颂,是尊者在《瞿波迦目犍连经》中,回答一位名叫瞿波迦目犍连的婆罗门所问——“你在佛陀的教法中以多闻著称,大师说了多少法、你又记住了多少”——时所说的;也是在《长老偈》中,为了展示自己的功德而说的。这里的简要意思是:我从佛陀、大师那里领受并掌握了八万二千法蕴;又从比丘——法将舍利弗等比丘那里领受了二千法蕴。凡是存在于我舌尖上、心中,熟练且能随口诵出的法,这些法合起来就是八万四千法蕴。不过有些人说:“这里的‘yeme’应当拆解为‘ye ime’,然后这样连接:凡是这些属于佛陀和比丘们所宣说、所流传的法,在这些法中,我从佛陀那里领受了八万二千,从比丘那里领受了二千,如此就是八万四千法蕴。”这种连接方式,由于无法确定“法蕴就只有这个数量”,所以只算是一家之说。巴利
‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā āyasmatā ānandena vuttagāthameva sādhakabhāvena dasseti. Ayañhi gāthā gopakamoggallānena nāma brāhmaṇena ‘‘buddhasāsane tvaṃ bahussutoti pākaṭo, kittakā dhammā te satthārā bhāsitā, tayā ca dhāritā’’ti pucchitena tassa paṭivacanaṃ dentena āyasmatā ānandeneva gopakamoggallānasutte, attano guṇadassanavasena vā theragāthāyampi bhāsitā. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – buddhato satthu santikā dvāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni ahaṃ gaṇhiṃ adhigaṇhiṃ, dve dhammakkhandhasahassāni bhikkhuto dhammasenāpatiādīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santikā gaṇhiṃ. Ye dhammā me jivhāgge, hadaye vā pavattino paguṇā vācuggatā, te dhammā tadubhayaṃ sampiṇḍetvā caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānīti. Keci pana ‘‘yemeti ettha ‘ye ime’ti padacchedaṃ katvā ye ime dhammā buddhassa, bhikkhūnañca pavattino pavattitā, tesu dhammesu buddhato dvāsīti sahassāni ahaṃ gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto gaṇhiṃ, evaṃ caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti sambandhaṃ vadanti, ayañca sambandho ‘‘ettakāyeva dhammakkhandhā’’ti sanniṭṭhānassa aviññāyamānattā kecivādo nāma kato.
“即使在一起也不能”,这个应当说的理由,比“即使离开也不能”这个应当说的理由更有力,因为结集有许多作用。所以,在那里先指出问难,再加以回应,说了“yadi evaṃ”等话。其中,“yadi evaṃ”的意思是:如果像这样,离开就不能,若是那样的话。“Sekkhopi samānoti”:即使是有学之人。“māna”这个词在这里表示特征。“Bahukārattā”:因为有许多饶益。“kāra”这个词是表示饶益的意思,就像“appakampi kataṃ kāraṃ, puññaṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ”等句子里那样。“Assāti”:应当是。“Atha”这个词用于提问。他们在问句里举出“atha tvaṃ kena vaṇṇenā”这样的用法。不过,应当说它的意思是“evaṃ sante”(如果这样的话)。“Parūpavādavivajjanato”:因为想要避免那些不知道上述理由的人把诽谤加在别人身上。他用“thero hi”等话阐明这一点。“Ativiya vissattho”:极其信赖。怎么知道呢?所以说“tathā hi”等话。或者,这句话是为了使其坚固。通达声韵的人说:“vuttañhi, tathā hi iccete daḷhīkaraṇatthe”。“Naṃ”:指阿难长老。用“ovadatī”这个词来连接。阿难长老的许多新学众大多还俗时,大迦叶长老说:“na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī”。就像这样,世尊般涅槃后,大迦叶长老在世尊般涅槃时聚集的比丘僧众中间坐下,为了结集法和律,选出五百位比丘,说:“诸位,我们在王舍城安居,结集法和律。你们在安居前,先处理好自己的障碍,然后到王舍城集合。”说完,他自己去了王舍城。巴利
‘‘Sahāpi na sakkā’’ti vattabbahetuto ‘‘vināpi na sakkā’’ti vattabbahetuyeva balavataro saṅgītiyā bahukārattā. Tasmā tattha codanaṃ dassetvā pariharituṃ ‘‘yadi eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yadi evanti evaṃ vinā yadi na sakkā, tathā satīti attho. Sekkhopi samānoti sekkhapuggalo samānopi. Māna-saddo hettha lakkhaṇe. Bahukārattāti bahūpakārattā. Upakāravacano hi kāra-saddo ‘‘appakampi kataṃ kāraṃ, puññaṃ hoti mahapphala’’ntiādīsu viya. Assāti bhaveyya. Atha-saddo pucchāyaṃ. Pañhe ‘‘atha tvaṃ kena vaṇṇenā’’ti hi payogamudāharanti. ‘‘Evaṃ sante’’ti pana attho vattabbo. Parūpavādavivajjanatoti yathāvuttakāraṇaṃ ajānantānaṃ paresaṃ āropitaupavādato vivajjitukāmattā. Taṃ vivarati ‘‘thero hī’’tiādinā. Ativiya vissatthoti atirekaṃ vissāsiko. Kena viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi. Daḷhīkaraṇaṃ vā etaṃ vacanaṃ. ‘‘Vuttañhi, tathā hi iccete daḷhīkaraṇatthe’’ti hi vadanti saddavidū. Nanti ānandattheraṃ. ‘‘Ovadatī’’ti iminā sambandho. Ānandattherassa yebhuyyena navakāya parisāya vibbhamane mahākassapatthero ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) āha. Tathā hi parinibbute bhagavati mahākassapatthero bhagavato parinibbāne sannipatitassa bhikkhusaṅghassa majjhe nisīditvā dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ pañcasate bhikkhū uccinitvā ‘‘rājagahe āvuso vassaṃ vasantā dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyissāma, tumhe pure vassūpanāyikāya attano attano palibodhaṃ pacchinditvā rājagahe sannipatathā’’ti vatvā attanā rājagahaṃ gato.
阿难尊者也是拿着世尊的衣钵,一路劝导大众,先到了舍卫城,又从那里出发前往王舍城,途中在南山一带游化。那时候,阿难尊者身边大约有三十个同住弟子,大多是少年,有的是出家才一两年的比丘,有的还没受具足戒,他们全都舍戒还俗了。他们当初为什么出家,后来又为什么还俗呢?据说,他们的父母这样想过:“阿难尊者是世尊信任的人,他求得了八种恩许,才能随侍世尊,想让世尊去哪个地方,他都能请得动。我们把孩子交给他出家,这样他就能请世尊过来。世尊来了,我们就能得到大供养。”就是因为这个缘故,他们的亲属才让他们出家。可是世尊般涅槃之后,他们这个愿望就断了,于是没过一天,他们就都被劝还俗了。那时,大迦叶尊者看到阿难尊者结束南山的游化,回到王舍城,便这样对他说。这在《迦叶相应》里是有记载的:巴利
Ānandattheropi bhagavato pattacīvaramādāya mahājanaṃ saññāpento sāvatthiṃ gantvā tato nikkhamma rājagahaṃ gacchanto dakkhiṇāgirismiṃ cārikaṃ cari. Tasmiṃ samaye ānandattherassa tiṃsamattā saddhivihārikā yebhuyyena kumārakā ekavassikaduvassikabhikkhū ceva anupasampannā ca vibbhamiṃsu. Kasmā panete pabbajitā, kasmā ca vibbhamiṃsūti? Tesaṃ kira mātāpitaro cintesuṃ ‘‘ānandatthero satthuvissāsiko aṭṭha vare yācitvā upaṭṭhahati, icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃ satthāraṃ gahetvā gantuṃ sakkoti, amhākaṃ dārake etassa santike pabbajeyyāma, evaṃ so satthāraṃ gahetvā āgamissati, tasmiṃ āgate mayaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ kātuṃ labhissāmā’’ti. Iminā tāva kāraṇena nesaṃ ñātakā te pabbājesuṃ, satthari pana parinibbute tesaṃ sā patthanā upacchinnā, atha ne ekadivaseneva uppabbājesuṃ. Atha ānandattheraṃ dakkhiṇāgirismiṃ cārikaṃ caritvā rājagahamāgataṃ disvā mahākassapatthero evamāhāti. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte –
那么,贤友阿难,你到底为什么还跟这些新比丘一起四处游行呢?他们不守护诸根之门,吃东西不知节制,也不勤修警醒。我看你简直是在糟蹋庄稼,我看你简直是在毁坏信众的家门。贤友阿难,你的徒众正在散坏;贤友阿难,你那些新入道的嫩苗正在凋落。这个年轻人真是不知分寸啊。巴利
‘‘Atha kiñcarahi tvaṃ āvuso ānanda imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te āvuso ānanda parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti.
尊者迦叶,我头上已经长出白发了,可我们今天还是摆脱不了被大迦叶尊者叫作“童子”啊。阿难贤友,正因为这样,你才和这些新比丘一起四处游方——他们不守护诸根,吃东西不知节制,也不勤于修行警醒。我看你简直是在糟蹋庄稼,我看你简直是在毁坏信众的家门。阿难贤友,你的随众正在散坏;阿难贤友,你那些新来的小辈正在垮掉。这个小子真是不知分寸啊。巴利
Api me bhante kassapa sirasmiṃ palitāni jātāni, atha ca pana mayaṃ ajjāpi āyasmato mahākassapassa kumārakavādā na muccāmāti. Tathā hi pana tvaṃ āvuso ānanda imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te āvuso ānanda parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
在这里,“依我看,你这是在糟蹋庄稼”意思是:你像在毁坏庄稼一样到处游荡。“依我看,你这是在毁坏信众”意思是:你像在损害信众一样到处游荡。“瓦解”就是崩溃、破裂。“贤友,你的新众正在崩溃”:贤友阿难,这些主要由你所养育的新众,大多是刚受具足戒一两年、年纪还轻的比丘和沙弥,他们正在崩溃。“这童子不知分寸”:意思是这童子根本不知道自己的分量,这是长老在呵责他。“不能摆脱被叫作童子”:就是摆脱不了“童子”这个称呼。“正因如此”:这是为了说明他应该被这样说的理由。这里的意思是:正因你和这些缺乏根律仪、饮食不知量的新比丘一起游方,所以你和童子们同行,就活该被叫作“童子”。巴利
Tattha sassaghātaṃ maññe carasīti sassaṃ ghātento viya āhiṇḍasi. Kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasīti kulāni upaghātento viya āhiṇḍasi. Olujjatīti palujjati bhijjati. Palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyāti āvuso ānanda ete tuyhaṃ pāyena yebhuyyena navakā ekavassikaduvassikadaharā ceva sāmaṇerā ca palujjanti. Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānātīti theraṃ tajjento āha. Kumārakavādā na muccāmāti kumārakavādato na muccāma. Tathā hi pana tvanti idamassa evaṃ vattabbatāya kāraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yasmā tvaṃ imehi navehi indriyasaṃvaravirahitehi bhojane amattaññūhi saddhiṃ vicarasi, tasmā kumārakehi saddhiṃ vicaranto ‘‘kumārako’’ti vattabbataṃ arahasīti.
“这小孩不懂分寸”这句话里,“vā”这个字是用来补足音节的。因为“vā”这个字可以在比喻、并列、疑问、排除、选择、补足音节等多种含义中出现。比如在“他也许因此就是个智者”(法句经63)这类句子里,它出现在比喻中,意思是“相似”。在“智者们和牟尼们也知道它”(经集213)这类句子里,它是并列。在“谁呢?这是谁的呢?”(波罗夷296)这类句子里,它是疑问。在“这些沙门婆罗门中,这个人是全愚全痴”(长部181)这类句子里,它是排除。在“诸比丘,凡任何沙门或婆罗门”(中部1.170;相应部2.13)这类句子里,也是选择。在“我不吃叶子,这不是我的食物”这类句子里,它是补足音节。这里也应看作补足音节。正因如此,法护长老在解释“vā”这个字的含义时说:“‘这小孩不懂分寸’这类句子里,是补足音节。”相应部注里也这样说:“‘这小孩不懂分寸’——这个小孩不知道自己的限度,这是长老在责备他。”(相应部注2.154)这里也是因为“vata”这个词听起来顺口才说的。把“na vāyaṃ”拆成“na ve ayaṃ”,为了说明“ve”这个字的含义,就说成“vata”。语法学家们也是这样,把“ve”字当作决定义,直接引用巴利原文来举例。不过金刚觉长老这样说:“这里的‘na vāyanti’中,‘vā’是‘或者说’的意思,就是‘不知其他,也不知其他’。”(金刚觉疏·初大结集篇解说)这只是他个人的看法,因为相应部注里并没有那样说。这是一个会引来别人批评的地方,应该用“其中,有些人……”等来会通。巴利
Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ettha vā-saddo padapūraṇe. Vā-saddo hi upamānasamuccayasaṃsayavissaggavikappapadapūraṇādīsu bahūsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamāne dissati, sadisabhāveti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muni vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 213) samuccaye. ‘‘Ke vā ime kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsaye. ‘‘Ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 181) vavassagge. ‘‘Ye hi keci bhikkhave samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsupi (ma. ni. 1.170; saṃ. ni. 2.13) vikappe. ‘‘Na vāhaṃ paṇṇaṃ bhuñjāmi, na hetaṃ mayha bhojana’’ntiādīsu padapūraṇe. Idhāpi padapūraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Teneva ca ācariyadhammapālattherena vā-saddassa atthuddhāraṃ karontena vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’tiādīsu padapūraṇe’’ti. Saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyampi idameva vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānāsīti theraṃ tajjento āhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.154). Etthāpi ‘‘vatā’’ti vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na vāya’’nti etassa vā ‘‘na ve aya’’nti padacchedaṃ katvā ve-saddassatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘vatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ve-saddassa ekaṃsatthabhāve tadeva pāḷiṃ payogaṃ katvā udāharanti neruttikā. Vajirabuddhitthero pana evaṃ vadati ‘‘na vāyanti ettha ca vāti vibhāsā, aññāsipi na aññāsipī’’ti, (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) taṃ tassa matimattaṃ saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāya tathā avuttattā. Idamekaṃ parūpavādasambhavakāraṇaṃ ‘‘tattha kecī’’tiādinā sambajjhitabbaṃ.
他又说了另一个原因:“具寿是释迦族出身。”具寿阿难生于释迦族,或者因为释迦族身份而广为人知。其中……中略……应当呵责,这样连接起来。他又说了另一个原因:“是如来的弟弟,是叔父之子。”这里说的“弟弟”,是依叔父之子的身份而说的幼弟,并不是按年龄来说的同生兄弟。巴利
Aññampi kāraṇamāha ‘‘sakyakulappasuto cāyasmā’’ti. Sākiyakule jāto, sākiyakulabhāvena vā pākaṭo ca āyasmā ānando. Tattha…pe… upavadeyyunti sambandho. Aññampi kāraṇaṃ vadati ‘‘tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto’’ti. Bhātāti cettha kaniṭṭhabhātā cūḷapituputtabhāvena, na pana vayasā sahajātabhāvato.
净饭、澡饭,释迦饭、白饭和甘露饭,
这些是五个,那些是两个,也就是“阿米塔、帕利塔”等。巴利
‘‘Suddhodano dhotodano, sakkasukkāmitodanā; Amitā pālitā cāti, ime pañca imā duve’’ti.
在刚才提到的那些人当中,甘露饭王最年幼的儿子就是具寿阿难。确实,《满足希求》中也这样说:巴利
Vuttesu hi sabbakaniṭṭhassa amitodanasakkassa putto āyasmā ānando. Vuttañhi manorathapūraṇiyaṃ –
在十万劫里一直行布施的时候,他和我们的菩萨一起生在兜率天;从那里命终后,又投生在甘露饭王的家里。因为他出生时让所有亲族都满心欢喜、兴高采烈,所以大家就给他取名叫“阿难”。巴利
‘‘Kappasatasahassaṃ pana dānaṃ dadamāno amhākaṃ bodhisattena saddhiṃ tusitapure nibbattitvā tato cuto amitodanasakkassa gehe nibbatti, athassa sabbe ñātake ānandite pamodite karonto jātoti ‘ānando’tveva nāmamakaṃsū’’ti.
同样地,在《破除痴网》中也这样说:巴利
Tathāyeva vuttaṃ papañcasūdaniyampi –
不过另有一些人说:阿难尊者并不是和世尊同时出生的,从年龄来说,又因为是叔父的儿子,所以他其实是世尊的弟弟。因为这样,在《满足希求》第一品的注释里,计算同生者时并没有把他算进去。巴利
‘‘Aññe pana vadanti – nāyasmā ānando bhagavatā sahajāto, vayasā ca cūḷapituputtatāya ca bhagavato kaniṭṭhabhātāyeva. Tathā hi manorathapūraṇiyaṃ ekanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ sahajātagaṇane so na vuto’’ti.
凡是被称为“所说”的,就应当执取。“此处”是指在那种放逸等的状态存在时。这里说的是:极度放逸的释迦族出身者、作为如来兄弟的状态。因为以状态来表达状态的特征时,有时会成立原因的含义。正如法护长老阿阇梨在《指导论注》中解释“若牛群正匆忙而行”这首偈颂时所说:巴利
Yaṃ vuccati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ vissatthādibhāve sati. Ativissatthasakyakulappasutatathāgatabhātubhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe hi katthaci hetvattho sampajjati. Tathā hi ācariyadhammapālattherena nettiṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘gunnañce taramānāna’’nti gāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ –
所有那些牛都走歪了,意思是:所有那些母牛都只是弯着走。为什么呢?因为导绳歪了,因为导绳弯了,由于导绳弯曲的缘故——这就是它的含义。巴利
‘‘Sabbā tā jimhaṃ gacchantīti sabbā tā gāviyo kuṭilameva gacchanti, kasmā? Nette jimhagate sati nette kuṭilaṃ gate sati, nettassa kuṭilaṃ gatattāti attho’’ti.
在《优陀那注》解释“此有故彼有”这句经文的地方,也说到:“应当知道,处格是用来表示原因的,它以原因的身份,标示出果与它不相离的状态。”那里说的“此处”,意思是在那作为征相的放逸等状态中;也有人把“tasmiṃ uccinane”说成“于彼收集”。“chandāgamanaṃ viyā”这个地方,应该拆成“chandā āgamanaṃ viya”来理解。“chandā”是表示原因的从格,意思是“由欲而来、由欲而转起”,也就是说“因为欲而做不该做的事”。或者,“chandāgamanaṃ”也可以理解为“以相应之力趣向于欲”,这样转起的,就是趋向恶趣的不善心生起。另一种解释是:不适当的趣行就是“非趣行”,由欲而起的非趣行就是“chandāgamanaṃ”,意思是:由欲、由爱著而生起的不适当趣行与转起,就像做不该做的事一样。无学者的无碍解,或者已经证得那种无碍解,所以这样说;或者,他们既是无学者又已证得无碍解,就属于这一类。在“有学已证得无碍解”这句里,道理也是一样。“回避”这个词里的“anta”是原因的意思,就是“以回避为原因”。“随顺”就是允许、请求,这是所说的意思。巴利
Udānaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘iti imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti suttapadavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘hetuatthatā bhummavacanassa kāraṇassa bhāvena tadavinābhāvī phalassa bhāvo lakkhīyatīti veditabbā’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 1.1). Tatthāti vā nimittabhūte vissatthādimhīti attho, tasmiṃ uccinanetipi vadanti. Chandāgamanaṃ viyāti ettha chandā āgamanaṃ viyāti padacchedo. Chandāti ca hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ, chandena āgamanaṃ pavattanaṃ viyāti attho, chandena akattabbakaraṇamivāti vuttaṃ hoti, chandaṃ vā āgacchati sampayogavasenāti chandāgamanaṃ, tathā pavatto apāyagamanīyo akusalacittuppādo. Atha vā ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ agamanaṃ. Chandena agamanaṃ chandāgamanaṃ, chandena sinehena ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ pavattanaṃ viya akattabbakaraṇaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Asekkhabhūtā paṭisambhidā, taṃpattāti tathā, asekkhā ca te paṭisambhidāppattā cāti vā tathā, tādise. Sekkhapaṭisambhidāppattanti etthāpi esa nayo. Parivajjentoti hetvatthe antasaddo, parivajjanahetūti attho. Anumatiyāti anuññāya, yācanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“虽然是有学”这句话,是因为只推选了无学者才说的,并不是说因为有学还可能走上非道。因为四种非道之行在初道就已经被断除了,所以说,虽然他是“有学”,长老仍然说“请推选具寿阿难”——这就是其中的关联。但并不是说“虽然是有学,却仍然不能走上非道”。而用“不能”等话,是在法的结集中显示他的阿拉汉境界,讲说他当下具备的功德,借此表明:当结集对法和律作出裁决时,他不会因为贪欲等原因而说成别的样子,必定会如实而(“通晓”:已通达、已领受)巴利
‘‘Kiñcāpi sekkho’’ti idaṃ asekkhānaṃyeva uccinitattā vuttaṃ, na sekkhānaṃ agatigamanasambhavena. Paṭhamamaggeneva hi cattāri agatigamanāni pahīyanti, tasmā kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi thero āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ uccinatūti sambandho. Na pana kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi abhabbo agatiṃ gantunti. ‘‘Abhabbo’’tiādinā pana dhammasaṅgītiyā tassa arahabhāvaṃ dassento vijjamānaguṇe katheti, tena saṅgītiyā dhammavinayavinicchaye sampatte chandādivasena aññathā akathetvā yathābhūtameva kathessatīti dasseti. Na gantabbā, ananurūpā vā gatīti agati, taṃ. Pariyattoti adhigato uggahito.
“如是”等语,是在显示确定的人数。“已收集”是指经过推选而取定的。另外,“如是……收集”是总结语;而“由那位具寿”等语,他们说也是在显示确定的人数。巴利
‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā sanniṭṭhānagaṇanaṃ dasseti. Uccinitenāti uccinitvā gahitena. Apica evaṃ…pe… uccinīti nigamanaṃ, ‘‘tenāyasmatā’’tiādi pana sanniṭṭhānagaṇanadassanantipi vadanti.
这样展示了结集者筛选的方式之后,为了说明结集的其他方面,也就是选择地点等种种方式,便说了“那时”等话。其中,“他生起了这个念头”是指他生起了这样的思虑。“nu”这个字是用来表示思虑的。“王舍城”,《结句释》中说:“这是取王舍城的近郊而说的。”牛群在这里行走觅食,所以叫“行处”,也就是牛群觅食的地方;同样,比丘们行走觅食的地方,也叫“行处”。那个地方很大,或者说那里有很大的行处,所以叫“大行处”。因为那里有十八座大寺院,所以床座等资具很丰富。巴利
Evaṃ saṅgāyakavicinanappakāraṃ dassetvā aññampi saṅgāyanatthaṃ desavicinanādippakāraṃ dassento ‘‘atha kho’’tiādimāha. Tattha etadahosīti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Nu-saddena hi parivitakkanaṃ dasseti. Rājagahanti ‘‘rājagahasāmantaṃ gahetvā vutta’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vadanti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gunnaṃ caraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, so viyāti gocaro, bhikkhūnaṃ caraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, mahanto so assa, etthāti vā mahāgocaraṃ. Aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvihārānampi atthitāya pahūtasenāsanaṃ.
“坚固业”就是长久持续的业。“异类人”就像须跋陀那样的人。“可能破坏”就是可能遮止。“iti”这个词是“这样”的意思,整句是说:以这个作意为因,他生起了这样的念头。为了让人生起尊重,他用白二羯磨告知僧团,而不是只用征求同意式的白羯磨——这就是这段话的意旨。巴利
Thāvarakammanti ciraṭṭhāyikammaṃ. Visabhāgapuggalo subhaddasadiso. Ukkoṭeyyāti nivāreyya. Iti-saddo idamatthe, iminā manasikārena hetubhūtena etadahosīti attho. Garubhāvajananatthaṃ ñattidutiyena kammena saṅghaṃ sāvesi, na apalokanañattikammamattenāti adhippāyo.
那么,这是什么时候造的呢?对此回答说“这个嘛……”等等。接着,通过“因为世尊……”等话,说明由这种计数可以知道它是这样造出来的。“atha”是表示紧接着的不变词,意思是就在般涅槃之后。“七日”是把般涅槃当天也算进去才这么说的。“assa”指世尊,和“舍利”这个词相关联。一再称说能激发厌离的事,唱诵与无常想相应的歌,以供养的方式娱乐,所以这些日子是美好的娱乐日,叫“善戏日”;或者,以能成就自他利益的意义而被称为“善”的善士们,一再称说能激发厌离的事而娱乐的日子,这样也说得通。而在前面的七日里,只做了一部分善戏。特别是在供养舍利等日子才做。正如《大般涅槃经注》中所说——巴利
Kadā panāyaṃ katāti āha ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādi. Evaṃ katabhāvo ca imāya gaṇanāya viññāyatīti dasseti ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādinā. Athāti anantaratthe nipāto, parinibbānantaramevāti attho. Sattāhanti hi parinibbānadivasampi saṅgaṇhitvā vuttaṃ. Assāti bhagavato, ‘‘sarīra’’nti iminā sambandho. Saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā aniccatāpaṭisaññuttāni gītāni gāyitvā pūjāvasena kīḷanato sundaraṃ kīḷanadivasā sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma, saparahitasādhanaṭṭhena vā sādhūti vuttānaṃ sappurisānaṃ saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā kīḷanadivasātipi yujjati. Imasmiñca purimasattāhe ekadeseneva sādhukīḷanamakaṃsu. Visesato pana dhātupūjādivasesuyeva. Tathā hi vuttaṃ mahāparinibbānasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.235) –
在这之前的两个七日里,那些比丘忙着为僧团安排住处和座位、准备嚼食和啖食,没找到时间好好玩乐。于是他们想:这个七日我们要好好玩一玩。不过,确实有可能有人发觉我们放逸了,跑来拿走舍利。所以我们先设好守卫,再玩乐。他们就这样做了。巴利
‘‘Ito purimesu hi dvīsu sattāhesu te bhikkhū saṅghassa ṭhānanisajjokāsaṃ karontā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ saṃvidahantā sādhukīḷikāya okāsaṃ na labhiṃsu, tato nesaṃ ahosi ‘imaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷissāma, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ amhākaṃ pamattabhāvaṃ ñatvā kocideva āgantvā dhātuyo gaṇheyya, tasmā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā kīḷissāmā’ti, tena te evamakaṃsū’’ti.
不过,他们因为也做了舍利供养,所以就有了舍利供养日等名称。正因为对世尊来说,除了这些特殊之事以外,再没有别的应当做的,所以即使只是部分地做了,也因这善戏而被称为“善戏日”。因此说:“像这样,这七天就名为善戏日。”巴利
Tathāpi te dhātupūjāyapi katattā dhātupūjādivasā nāma. Imeyeva visesena bhagavati kattabbassa aññassa abhāvato ekadesena katampi sādhukīḷanaṃ upādāya ‘‘sādhukīḷanadivasā’’ti pākaṭā jātāti āha ‘‘evaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma ahesu’’nti.
所谓“火葬堆”,是指用二十肘高的栴檀木堆成的火葬堆。说“以精勤事之力,火葬堆被火烧了七日”,并不是说整整七天不间断地被火烧,因为实际上只有最后一天才在燃烧,所以应该理解为“在七日之内”。因为在前后两个七日之间的那七日里,不论哪一天燃烧,都可以说“在七日中燃烧”。正如所说——巴利
Citakāyāti vīsasataratanuccāya candanadārucitakāya, padhānakiccavaseneva ca sattāhaṃ citakāyaṃ agginā jhāyīti vuttaṃ. Na hi accantasaṃyogavasena nirantaraṃ sattāhameva agginā jhāyi tattha pacchimadivaseyeva jhāyitattā, tasmā sattāhasminti attho veditabbo. Purimapacchimānañhi dvinnaṃ sattāhānamantare sattāhe yattha katthacipi divase jhāyamāne sati ‘‘sattāhe jhāyī’’ti vattuṃ yujjati. Yathāha –
那时,有四位末罗族首领,已经洗过头、穿上新衣,心想:“我们要去点燃世尊的火葬堆。”却没办法点燃。巴利
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena cattāro mallapāmokkhā sīsaṃ nhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā ‘mayaṃ bhagavato citakaṃ āḷimpessāmā’ti na sakkonti āḷimpetu’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.233).
“作矛栅”这句话,是从外观特征上来说的:末罗族的国王们让手持矛、剑等武器的人守护世尊的舍利。因为手持矛的人挥舞矛的样子,就像“枪在挥动”,他们从四面守护,看起来像栅栏一样,所以叫“矛栅”。“会议厅”是国王们的一座大讲堂。因为在出征等时候,国王们站在那里安排、划定界限:“这么多人走前面,这么多人走后面,这么多人走两边,这么多人骑象,这么多人骑马,这么多人乘车”,所以那个地方叫“会议厅”。另外,从出征的地方回来后,直到在各家各户做完涂抹湿牛粪等事的两三天里,国王们在那里停留、休息、消除疲劳,所以也叫“会议厅”;或者,国王们共同商议事务的房屋,把“ha”变成“dha”,并插入随韵,所以叫“会议厅”;或者,因为国王们聚集在那里,用“这个时候应该耕田,这个时候应该播种”等方式商议在家的事务,在那里维持着或断或续的在家生活,所以也叫“会议厅”。从毗舍佉月满月日算起,到毗舍佉月的黑月分,按僧伽罗人的习惯算作十六天;再加上逝瑟吒牟拉月白分中的五天,所以说“这样已经过了二十一天”。他们是在最后一天才分配舍利,而这次羯磨语也是在同一天说的。因此说“逝瑟吒牟拉月白分第五日”等等。其中,逝瑟吒星宿或牟拉星宿在该月满月日与月亮相应,所以该月叫“逝瑟吒牟拉月”。“非行”就是上面所说的非行。巴利
Sattipañjaraṃkatvāti sattikhaggādihatthehi purisehi mallarājūnaṃ bhagavato dhātuārakkhakaraṇaṃ upalakkhaṇavasenāha. Sattihatthā purisā hi sattiyo yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti, tāhi samantato rakkhāpanavasena pañjarapaṭibhāgattā sattipañjaraṃ. Sandhāgāraṃ nāma rājūnaṃ ekā mahāsālā. Uyyogakālādīsu hi rājāno tattha ṭhatvā ‘‘ettakā purato gacchantu, ettakā pacchato, ettakā ubhohi passehi, ettakā hatthīsu abhiruhantu, ettakā assesu, ettakā rathesū’’ti evaṃ sandhiṃ karonti mariyādaṃ bandhanti, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ ‘‘sandhāgāra’’nti vuccati. Apica uyyogaṭṭhānato āgantvāpi yāva gehesu allagomayaparibhaṇḍādīni karonti, tāva dve tīṇi divasāni rājāno tattha santhambhanti vissamanti parissayaṃ vinodentītipi sandhāgāraṃ, rājūnaṃ vā saha atthānusāsanaṃ agārantipi sandhāgāraṃ ha-kārassa dha-kāraṃ, anusarāgamañca katvā, yasmā vā rājāno tattha sannipatitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle kasituṃ vaṭṭati, imasmiṃ kāle vapitu’’nti evamādinā nayena gharāvāsakiccāni sammantayanti, tasmā chinnavicchinnaṃ gharāvāsaṃ tattha sandhārentītipi sandhāgāraṃ. Visākhapuṇṇamito paṭṭhāya yāva visākhamāsassa amāvāsī, tāva soḷasa divasā sīhaḷavohāravasena gahitattā, jeṭṭhamūlamāsassa sukkapakkhe ca pañca divasāti āha ‘‘iti ekavīsati divasā gatā’’ti. Tattha carimadivaseyeva dhātuyo bhājayiṃsu, tasmiṃyeva ca divase ayaṃ kammavācā katā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhapañcamiya’’ntiādi. Tattha jeṭṭhanakkhattaṃ vā mūlanakkhattaṃ vā tassa māsassa puṇṇamiyaṃ candena yuttaṃ, tasmā so māso ‘‘jeṭṭhamūlamāso’’ti vuccati. Anācāranti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ anācāraṃ.
如果是这样,为什么在《律藏义注》和《吉祥经义注》中说“在七个善戏日和七个舍利供养日过去之后”呢?因为一旦计入七个舍利供养日,由于它们不相分离,中间火葬堆燃烧的七天也就已经被计入,所以看起来就没有单独再说。如果是这样,为什么又说“半个月已过,还有一个半月剩余”呢?这并没有错。因为少许的不足或超出不计入总数,所以即使超出半个月五天,也说“半个月已过”,就像在八十二蕴行处中某处说“八十蕴行处”一样;同样,即使不足一个半月五天,也说“一个半月剩余”,就像在《念处分别义注》中,不足六个月半个月,也说“应诵习六个月”一样,否则各义注之间就会互相矛盾。再者,依照长部诵者的意见,以三个七天计算,这里说“已过二十一天”。而在《律藏》《经集》《小诵》的义注中,则依照小部诵者的意见,把燃烧日算作一天,以其余两个七天计算,说“半个月已过,还有一个半月剩余”。应当理解,就像在第一次结集佛语等中一样,义注中也因各位诵者的意见而有说法差异。对此,他们这样说:从般涅槃之日起,最初只有四个善戏日;之后是三个善戏日兼火葬堆燃烧日;之后只有一个火葬堆燃烧日;之后是三个火葬堆燃烧日兼舍利供养日;之后只有四个舍利供养日。这样,依照各项事务相应的计算方式,三个七天圆满;而依照未计入的算法,则正好是半个月。这里所说“已过二十一天”也是依照各项事务相应的计算方式。这样,四部义注中的说法就能一致,应当审察后理解。然而,金刚觉长老说:“所谓‘半个月已过’,这里少了一天,那是月生日的次日,名叫喧闹日,所以这里没有计入。”这种说法不妥,因为在《般涅槃经》中,是从月生日的次日开始说七天的;在义注中,也是连同般涅槃日一起计算三个七天。确实,连同般涅槃日一起计算三个七天,逝瑟吒月白分第五日就是第二十一天。巴利
Yadi evaṃ kasmā vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) maṅgalasuttaṭṭhakathāyañca (khu. pā. aṭṭha. maṅgalasuttavaṇṇanā) ‘‘sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesu, sattasu ca dhātupūjādivasesu vītivattesū’’ti vuttanti? Sattasu dhātupūjādivasesu gahitesu tadavinābhāvato majjhe citakāya jhāyanasattāhampi gahitamevāti katvā visuṃ na vuttaṃ viya dissati. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Appakañhi ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hoti, tasmā appakena adhikopi samudāyo anadhiko viya hotīti katvā aḍḍhamāsato adhikepi pañcadivase ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto’’ti vuttaṃ dvāsītikhandhakavattānaṃ katthaci ‘‘asīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vacanaṃ viya, tathā appakena ūnopi samudāyo anūno viya hotīti katvā diyaḍḍhamāsato ūnepi pañcadivase ‘‘diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti vuttaṃ satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. 356) chamāsato ūnepi aḍḍhamāse ‘‘chamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabbo’’ti vacanaṃ viya, aññathā aṭṭhakathānaṃ aññamaññavirodho siyā. Apica dīghabhāṇakānaṃ matena tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ vasena ‘‘ekavīsati divasā gatā’’ti idha vuttaṃ. Vinayasuttanipātakhuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāsu pana khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena ekameva jhāyanadivasaṃ katvā tadavasesānaṃ dvinnaṃ sattāhānaṃ vasena ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Paṭhamabuddhavacanādīsu viya taṃ taṃ bhāṇakānaṃ matena aṭṭhakathāsupi vacanabhedo hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Evampettha vadanti – parinibbānadivasato paṭṭhāya ādimhi cattāro sādhukīḷanadivasāyeva, tato paraṃ tayo sādhukīḷanadivasā ceva citakajhāyanadivasā ca, tato paraṃ eko citakajhāyanadivasoyeva, tato paraṃ tayo citakajhāyanadivasā ceva dhātupūjādivasā ca, tato paraṃ cattāro dhātupūjādivasāyeva, iti taṃ taṃ kiccānurūpagaṇanavasena tīṇi sattāhāni paripūrenti, agahitaggahaṇena pana aḍḍhamāsova hoti. ‘‘Ekavīsati divasā gatā’’ti idha vuttavacanañca taṃ taṃ kiccānurūpagaṇaneneva. Evañhi catūsupi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttavacanaṃ sametīti vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Vajirabuddhittherena pana vuttaṃ ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkantoti ettha eko divaso naṭṭho, so pāṭipadadivaso, kolāhaladivaso nāma so, tasmā idha na gahito’’ti, (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) taṃ na sundaraṃ parinibbānasuttantapāḷiyaṃ (dī. ni. 2.227) pāṭipadadivasatoyeva paṭṭhāya sattāhassa vuttattā, aṭṭhakathāyañca parinibbānadivasena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gaṇitattā. Tathā hi parinibbānadivasena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gaṇaneneva jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhapañcamī ekavīsatimo divaso hoti.
“四十天”是从胜月白分第六天算起,一直到阿沙荼月满月为止,这样计算出来的。“在此期间”就是在这四十天之内。疾病本身就是疾病的障碍。对导师和戒师应尽的义务,就是导师和戒师的障碍;对父母的障碍也是这样。“障碍”是指阻碍、遮止想要做的事或想要达成的目的,使它不能进行;这是把 ra 音变成 la 音来说的。断除这些障碍之后,就去做应当做的事;也就是说,结集者应当断除这一切障碍,然后去做那件名为“法与律结集”的应做之事。巴利
Cattālīsa divasāti jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhachaṭṭhadivasato yāva āsaḷhī puṇṇamī, tāva gaṇetvā vuttaṃ. Etthantareti cattālīsadivasabbhantare. Rogo eva rogapalibodho. Ācariyupajjhāyesu kattabbakiccameva ācariyupajjhāyapalibodho, tathā mātāpitupalibodho. Yathādhippetaṃ atthaṃ, kammaṃ vā paribundheti uparodheti pavattituṃ na detīti palibodho ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā. Taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā taṃ karaṇīyaṃ karotūti saṅgāhakena chinditabbaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā dhammavinayasaṅgāyanasaṅkhātaṃ tadeva karaṇīyaṃ karotu.
“其他大长老”是指阿那律长老等人。“被忧箭所击中”是指被名为忧的箭射入、刺穿。由于无明与渴爱的随眠尚未断尽,众生以无明和渴爱所造作的业,在有、生处、趣、众生居处之中,产生、令生起名为五蕴的自身,所以叫“生者”。或者说,使烦恼生起、已生起、将来生起,所以叫“生者”,也就是广大的众生。“一批又一批”是指来了又来的,就像“一个一个”那样。这里可能会有人问:“这里说‘长老由自己的五百随众围绕前往王舍城,其他大长老也各自带领自己的随从,为了安慰被忧箭所中的大众,而前往各个方向’,这和《一切善见》中所说‘大迦叶长老说:贤友,我们去王舍城吧,带领一半比丘僧走一条路,阿那律长老也带领一半走一条路’的话,岂不是互相矛盾?因为这里的意思是大迦叶长老等人各自只和自己的随从比丘前往各个方向,而那里却说大迦叶长老和阿那律长老各带一半僧众分别走一条路。”回答说:这两种说法并不矛盾,因为义理上是相合的。这里说的是诸长老各自前往,那里则是按理趣来显示;这里说的是与各自的随众前往,那里说的是与一半僧众前往。所谓“一半僧众”,其实是指各自随众所组成的比丘群,因为“一半”这个词也可以用在并不相等的部分上。如果认为“一半僧众”是指在僧众集合时与一半僧众一起,那就不合理了,因为僧众的数量根本无法计算。如果认为“一半僧众”是指在为结集而选出的五百比丘中与一半一起,那也不合理,因为那些人是各自团体的首领,是各自独立的小团体。正如所说:“七十万之中,那些是首领比丘。”因此,因为义理上是相合的,这两种说法并不互相矛盾。也有人说,这是按照各个持诵者的意见这样说的。巴利
Aññepi mahātherāti anuruddhattherādayo. Sokasallasamappitanti sokasaṅkhātena sallena anupaviṭṭhaṃ paṭividdhaṃ. Asamucchinnaavijjātaṇhānusayattā avijjātaṇhābhisaṅkhātena kammunā bhavayonigatiṭṭhitisattāvāsesu khandhapañcakasaṅkhātaṃ attabhāvaṃ janeti abhinibbattetīti jano. Kilese janeti, ajani, janissatīti vā jano, mahanto jano tathā, taṃ. Āgatāgatanti āgatamāgataṃ yathā ‘‘ekeko’’ti. Ettha siyā – ‘‘thero attano pañcasatāya parisāya parivutto rājagahaṃ gato, aññepi mahātherā attano attano parivāre gahetvā sokasallasamappitaṃ mahājanaṃ assāsetukāmā taṃ taṃ disaṃ pakkantā’’ti idha vuttavacanaṃ samantapāsādikāya ‘‘mahākassapatthero ‘rājagahaṃ āvuso gacchāmā’ti upaḍḍhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ gahetvā ekaṃ maggaṃ gato, anuruddhattheropi upaḍḍhaṃ gahetvā ekaṃ maggaṃ gato’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttavacanañca aññamaññaṃ viruddhaṃ hoti. Idha hi mahākassapattherādayo attano attano parivārabhikkhūhiyeva saddhiṃ taṃ taṃ disaṃ gatāti attho āpajjati, tattha pana mahākassapattheraanuruddhattherāyeva paccekamupaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhiṃ ekekaṃ maggaṃ gatāti? Vuccate – tadubhayampi hi vacanaṃ na virujjhati atthato saṃsandanattā. Idha hi niravasesena therānaṃ paccekagamanavacanameva tattha nayavasena dasseti, idha attano attano parisāya gamanavacanañca tattha upaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhiṃ gamanavacanena. Upaḍḍhasaṅghoti hi sakasakaparisābhūto bhikkhugaṇo gayhati upaḍḍhasaddassa asamepi bhāge pavattattā. Yadi hi sannipatite saṅghe upaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhinti atthaṃ gaṇheyya, tadā saṅghassa gaṇanapathamatītattā na yujjateva , yadi ca saṅgāyanatthaṃ uccinitānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ majjhe upaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhinti atthaṃ gaṇheyya, evampi tesaṃ gaṇapāmokkhānaṃyeva uccinitattā na yujjateva. Paccekagaṇino hete. Vuttañhi ‘‘sattasatasahassāni, tesu pāmokkhabhikkhavo’’ti , iti atthato saṃsandanattā tadetaṃ ubhayampi vacanaṃ aññamaññaṃ na virujjhatīti. Taṃtaṃbhāṇakānaṃ matenevaṃ vuttantipi vadanti.
应该和“世尊尚未般涅槃时”等语句连接起来理解。这里的“持衣钵”,意思是取了四大天王所献的石钵和善逝衣。这个钵正是世尊一直使用的。正如《平等行经注》中所说:“为了说明即使过了二十年安居之后,这个钵仍然是世尊所用,清晨整理身体后,整齐地穿好下衣,披上善逝衣,拿着石钵,由比丘僧众围绕,从南门进入城中乞食……”他们手中拿着香、花鬘等物,也就是手执香、花鬘等。巴利
‘‘Aparinibbutassa bhagavato’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Pattacīvaramādāyāti ettha catumahārājadattiyaselamayapattaṃ, sugatacīvarañca gaṇhitvāti attho. Soyeva hi patto bhagavatā sadā paribhutto. Vuttañhi samacittapaṭipadāsuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘vassaṃvutthānusārena atirekavīsativassakālepi tasseva paribhuttabhāvaṃ dīpetukāmena pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā sunivatthanivāsano sugatacīvaraṃ pārupitvā selamayapattamādāya bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisitvā piṇḍāya caranto’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.37) gandhamālādayo nesaṃ hattheti gandhamālādihatthā.
“在那里”指在舍卫城。“suda”只是语气助词。“与无常等相关的”,是指与“诸行无常”等无常本性相连的。“与法相应,或者适合法的,就叫做法随的”,即那样的法谈。“令了知”是指令其清楚明白,“令安稳”是所说的意思。“所住的香室”是因为常常期待而构成的复合词。由于是受用支提,所以说“礼敬香室后”。“礼敬后”和“打开后”在这里表示先发生的动作。正如阿阇梨舍利弗长老所说:“‘打开香室之门’应当理解为:由于是受用支提,礼敬香室后,再打开香室之门。”枯萎的花环,那本身就是垃圾,或者枯萎的花环名为垃圾,也是如此。“移开后”是指先移到所放置之处的前方。“置于原处”是指不越过先所放置之处,就放在原来所站之处。“世尊站立之时,做了应做的一切义务”,这是就住处应做的义务而说的。“正在做”是指正在做那一切义务。因为这里的“慢”一词是在相的意义上。清扫浴室以及在那里备水,凡有这些等法谈、教诫等者,其时间,如是之意。狮子、兽王的卧处是狮子卧,依派生词,或者依相似的说法,世尊的卧处也称为“狮子卧”。由于是精勤、勇猛、威仪之行,或者是殊胜的卧处,就此而说:“那时,世尊以右胁作狮子卧,足与足相叠,具念正知。”那就是。设想的时间,即应作的时间,不是吗?应当这样连接。巴利
Tatrāti tissaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāyāti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 277) aniccasabhāvapaṭisaññuttāya. Dhammena yuttā, dhammassa vā patirūpāti dhammī, tādisāya. Saññāpetvāti suṭṭhu jānāpetvā, samassāsetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vasitagandhakuṭinti niccasāpekkhattā samāso. Paribhogacetiyabhāvato ‘‘gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vanditvā’’ti ca ‘‘vivaritvā’’ti ettha pubbakālakiriyā. Tathā hi ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivaritvāti paribhogacetiyabhāvato gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivarīti veditabba’’nti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) milātā mālā, sāyeva kacavaraṃ, milātaṃ vā mālāsaṅkhātaṃ kacavaraṃ tathā. Atiharitvāti paṭhamaṃ ṭhapitaṭṭhānamabhimukhaṃ haritvā. Yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvāti paṭhamaṃ ṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ anatikkamitvā yathāṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapetvā. Bhagavato ṭhitakāle karaṇīyaṃ vattaṃ sabbamakāsīti senāsane kattabbavattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kurumāno cāti taṃ sabbaṃ vattaṃ karonto ca. Lakkhaṇe hi ayaṃ māna-saddo. Nhānakoṭṭhakassa sammajjanañca tasmiṃ udakassa upaṭṭhāpanañca, tāni ādīni yesaṃ dhammadesanāovādādīnanti tathā, tesaṃ kālesūti attho. Sīhassa migarājassa seyyā sīhaseyyā, taddhitavasena, sadisavohārena vā bhagavato seyyāpi ‘‘sīhaseyyā’’ti vuccati. Tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā vā, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṃ kappesi pāde pādaṃ accādhāya sato sampajāno’’ti, (dī. ni. 2.198) taṃ. Kappanakālo karaṇakālo nanūti yojetabbaṃ.
“就像那样”等语,是用譬喻把前面所说的道理显示出来。这里说:就像其他对世尊……已安立敬爱、又是漏尽者、对众多……因生起感恩之心而心意柔软的人所做的那样,同样,尊者阿难也对世尊的功德……成为心意柔软者而做了,这就是句子的连接方式。“ti”只是一个小品词。此外,这里也借此显示这样做的原因:就像其他人具有前面所说的那种性质而做了,同样,尊者阿难也因对世尊……安立敬爱、因是漏尽者、对众多……因生起感恩之心而心意柔软,所以这样做了,因为原因的含义是可以得到的。这些词句确实含有原因,因为正是这个意思成为这样做的原因。这里应当用《调伏护财象本生》《金蟹本生》《小鹅本生》《大鹅本生》等来阐明。功德的聚集,因为与能产生甘露的滋味相似,所以就是甘露味。因为了知它的本性,这是“安立”一词的原因。“感恩……柔软”,是指因先前受过恩惠而正确生起的心变得柔软。为了显示“他也因为这个理由而忍受”,说了“tamena”等语。其中,“tamena”指那位尊者阿难。“eta”这个词只是文句上的装饰,因为语言的常态就是这样:在两个代词中,只有前一个词有实际意义。“令悚惧”,正如法护阿阇梨长老所说:“世尊不是早已说过‘一切所爱所喜者,皆当别离、当离散’等语吗?”这样令生起悚惧。若如此,则应以“大德……请你们安心”等先说的文句一起连接。然而,若依字面及最初的含义,以“iti”一词作“以如是等语令悚惧”的连接,也是成立的。因为无论以什么话语令人悚惧,那一切都能够成为令悚惧的作用。“安定后”,是指以不悲泣等而约束自己、安立自己。“增盛界”,是指已积聚的胆、痰等病。因为依胆、痰、风而言,此处三界是指适合作为药用的,即世间所说的“病、垢”,又依地、水、火、风、空而各有五种。巴利
‘‘Yathā ta’’ntiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya āvi karoti. Tattha yathā aññopi bhagavato…pe… patiṭṭhitapemo ceva akhīṇāsavo ca anekesu…pe… upakārasañjanitacittamaddavo ca akāsi, evaṃ āyasmāpi ānando bhagavato guṇa…pe… maddavo ca hutvā akāsīti yojanā. Nti nipātamattaṃ. Apica etena tathākaraṇahetuṃ dasseti, yathā aññepi yathāvuttasabhāvā akaṃsu, tathā āyasmāpi ānando bhagavato…pe… patiṭṭhitapemattā ceva akhīṇāsavattā ca anekesu…pe… upakārasañjanitacittamaddavattā cāti hetuatthassa labbhamānattā. Hetugabbhāni hi etāni padāni tadatthasseva tathākaraṇahetubhāvato. Dhanapāladamana (cūḷava. 342), suvaṇṇakakkaṭa (jā. 1.5.94), cūḷahaṃsa (jā. 1.15.133) -mahāhaṃsajātakādīhi (jā. 2.21.89) cettha vibhāvetabbo. Guṇānaṃ gaṇo, soyeva amatanipphādakarasasadisatāya amataraso. Taṃ jānanapakatitāyāti patiṭṭhitapade hetu. Upakāra…pe… maddavoti upakārapubbabhāvena sammājanitacittamuduko. Evampi so iminā kāraṇena adhivāsesīti dassento ‘‘tamena’’ntiādimāha. Tattha tamenanti taṃ āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ. Eta-saddo hi padālaṅkāramattaṃ. Ayañhi saddapakati, yadidaṃ dvīsu sabbanāmesu pubbapadasseva atthapadatā. Saṃvejesīti ‘‘nanu bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṃ ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.183; saṃ. ni. 5.379; a. ni. 10.48) saṃvegaṃ janesī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati ‘‘bhante…pe… assāsessathāti paṭhamaṃ vatvā’’ti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā assa. Yathārutato pana ādyatthena iti-saddena ‘‘evamādinā saṃvejesī’’ti yojanāpi yujjateva. Yena kenaci hi vacanena saṃvegaṃ janesi, taṃ sabbampi saṃvejanassa karaṇaṃ sambhavatīti. Santhambhitvāti paridevanādivirahena attānaṃ paṭibandhetvā patiṭṭhāpetvā. Ussannadhātukanti upacitapittasemhādidosaṃ. Pittasemhavātavasena hi tisso dhātuyo idha bhesajjakaraṇayogyatāya adhippetā, yā ‘‘dosā, malā’’ti ca loke vuccanti, pathavī āpo tejo vāyo ākāsoti ca bhedena paccekaṃ pañcavidhā. Vuttañhi –
风、胆汁、痰是过失,界和污垢也同样如此;
在那里也同样分为五种,各自维持身体。
病素是损害身体的过失,污垢是让身体变脏的东西;
诸界即是受持,他们依此义而被称为如此。巴利
‘‘Vāyupittakaphā dosā, dhātavo ca malā tathā; Tatthāpi pañcadhākhyātā, paccekaṃ dehadhāraṇā. Sarīradūsanā dosā, malīnakaraṇā malā; Dhāraṇā dhātavo te tu, itthamanvatthasaññakā’’ti.
“令安稳”就是令满足。是在天神使(他)心生警醒的那一天之后,或者进入祇园精舍那一天之后的第二天。“由此而泻下”,所以叫泻药;用药物调制过的牛奶本身就是泻药,也是这样。“所指的”,是指那种药饮。“以肢体各部分而庄严”,所以叫“净”(subha);摩奴之子叫“摩纳婆”(mānava),但把 na 音换成 ṇa 音,就成了“摩纳婆”(māṇava)。所谓“摩奴”,是在最初劫时,处在人类父母位置上的人,在教法里被称为“大选出王”。因为他能了知整个世间的利益和心意,所以叫“摩奴”。在这里,有人这样说:带齿音 na 的 mānava 一词,是一切众生通用的称呼;而带顶音 ṇa 的 māṇava 一词,则是卑劣、愚痴之子的称呼。在《小业分别经注》里,也解释了带顶音 ṇa 的 māṇava 一词的含义。它的复注里,阿阇梨们说:凡是卑劣或愚痴之子,世间就称之为 māṇava;而众生大多数在年幼时都是愚痴的,所以那里就是阐明这个意思。别处说,二十岁以内的青年叫摩纳婆;但这里依照这种习惯用法,年长的人也可以这样称呼。正如《小业分别经释》所说:“摩纳婆,是他们在年轻时的称呼,到了年老时,也还是用这个称呼来称他。”意思是,因为名为“净”而得到了“摩纳婆”这个称呼。他听说“导师已经般涅槃了,据说阿难长老拿着他的衣钵来了,大众都去见他”,于是想:“如果去精舍,在大众当中很难轻松地应酬,也很难听法;不如等他来到我家时,再轻松地应酬。而且我还有一个疑问,也要问他。”这样想后,就派了一个年轻人去。针对这件事,所以说“已派遣年轻人”。这里 khuddake 是表示小称的词尾。“说了这番话”,就是阿难长老说了“不是时候”等这些话。巴利
Samassāsetunti santappetuṃ. Devatāya saṃvejitadivasato, jetavanavihāraṃ paviṭṭhadivasato vā dutiyadivase. Viriccati etenāti virecanaṃ, osadhaparibhāvitaṃ khīrameva virecanaṃ tathā. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ bhesajjapānaṃ sandhāya. Aṅgapaccaṅgena sobhatīti subho, manuno apaccaṃ mānavo, na-kārassa pana ṇa-kāre kate māṇavo. Manūti hi paṭhamakappikakāle manussānaṃ mātāpituṭṭhāne ṭhito puriso, yo sāsane ‘‘mahāsammatarājā’’ti vutto. So hi sakalalokassa hitaṃ manabhi jānātīti manūti vuccati. Evampettha vadanti ‘‘dantaja na-kārasahito mānavasaddo sabbasattasādhāraṇavacano, muddhaja ṇa-kārasahito pana māṇavasaddo kucchitamūḷhāpaccavacano’’ti. Cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttaṭṭhakathāyampi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.289) hi muddhaja ṇa-kārasahitasseva māṇavasaddassa attho vaṇṇito. Taṭṭīkāyampi ‘‘yaṃ apaccaṃ kucchitaṃ mūḷhaṃ vā, tattha loke māṇavavohāro, yebhuyyena ca sattā daharakāle mūḷhadhātukā hontīti tassevattho pakāsito’’ti vadanti ācariyā. Aññattha ca vīsativassabbhantaro yuvā māṇavo, idha pana tabbohārena mahallakopi. Vuttañhi cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘māṇavoti pana taṃ taruṇakāle vohariṃsu, so mahallakakālepi teneva vohārena voharīyatī’’ti, (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.289) subhanāmakena laddhamāṇavavohārenāti attho. So pana ‘‘satthā parinibbuto, ānandatthero kirassa pattacīvaramādāya āgato, mahājano taṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamatī’’ti sutvā ‘‘vihāraṃ kho pana gantvā mahājanamajjhe na sakkā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ vā kātuṃ, dhammakathaṃ vā sotuṃ, gehamāgataṃyeva naṃ disvā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ karissāmi , ekā ca me kaṅkhā atthi, tampi naṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā ekaṃ māṇavakaṃ pesesi, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘pahitaṃ māṇavaka’’nti khuddake cettha kapaccayo. Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘akālo’’tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ ānandatthero avoca.
“不是时候”是指今天不适合去。为什么这么说呢?因为下面说了“我有……”等话。“药量”是指少量的药。这里“量”这个字表示“少”的意思,就像“量于乐舍”等句子里的用法一样。“已饮”是指已经喝下。“明日也”这里,“api”这个字表示期望、思量、允许——这是跋耆罗觉长老说的。他的意思是:如果只是用“或许”来表达疑惑,那“允许”的意思就成立不了,所以为了成立这个意思才说“api”,借此表达这样的含义:“或许明天我们能去拜访,如果有能力去拜访,我们就会去。”巴利
Akāloti ajja gantuṃ ayuttakālo. Kasmāti ce ‘‘atthi me’’tiādimāha. Bhesajjamattāti appakaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Appattho hettha mattāsaddo ‘‘mattā sukhapariccāgā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 290) viya. Pītāti pivitā. Svepīti ettha ‘‘api-saddo apekkho mantā nuññāyā’’ti (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vajirabuddhittherena vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ pana tassādhippāyo – ‘‘appeva nāmā’’ti saṃsayamatte vutte anuññātabhāvo na siddho, tasmā taṃ sādhanatthaṃ ‘‘apī’’ti vuttaṃ, tena imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘appeva nāma sve mayaṃ upasaṅkameyyāma, upasaṅkamituṃ paṭibalā samānā upasaṅkamissāma cā’’ti.
第二天,是指喝了催乳泻药那一天之后的第二天。由制多长老,也就是因为出生在制多国而得名“制多”的长老。作为随行沙门,就是跟在后面的沙门。这里的“亲手”是表示动作进行的格。被善贤青年问,就是他这样想:“乔达摩尊者在这个世间安立的那些法,在他去世以后是消失了,还是仍然存在?如果还存在,阿难尊者应该知道,我去问他吧。”于是他这样问:“乔达摩尊者曾称赞哪些法?又曾劝导、安顿、确立大众于哪些法中?阿难尊者,乔达摩尊者曾称赞哪些法?”等等。那时,长老把三藏用戒蕴等三蕴来统摄并开示,说:“青年,世尊称赞三蕴……”等等,在这里的戒蕴品中宣说了第十经。就是针对这件事而说“在此……宣说了”。巴利
Dutiyadivaseti khīravirecanapītadivasato dutiyadivase. Cetakattherenāti cetiyaraṭṭhe jātattā cetakoti evaṃ laddhanāmena therena. Pacchāsamaṇenāti pacchānugatena samaṇena. Sahatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Subhena māṇavena puṭṭhoti ‘‘yesu dhammesu bhavaṃ gotamo imaṃ lokaṃ patiṭṭhapesi, te tassa accayena naṭṭhā nu kho, dharanti nu kho, sace dharanti, bhavaṃ (natthi dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.448) ānando jānissati, handa naṃ pucchāmī’’ti evaṃ cintetvā ‘‘yesaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo dhammānaṃ vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṃ janataṃ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi, katamesānaṃ kho bho ānanda dhammānaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.448) puṭṭho, athassa thero tīṇi piṭakāni sīlakkhandhādīhi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ kho māṇava khandhānaṃ so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.449) idha sīlakkhandhavagge dasamaṃ suttamabhāsi, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imasmiṃ…pe… mabhāsī’’ti.
“破损”是指断裂。“破裂”是指裂开,或者指苔藓、菌类等蔓延开来。对它们进行修复,也就是妥善恢复原状,或者说重新修补。“临近”是指接近。在这里入雨安居,就是进入此处,所以叫“入雨安居日”,指入雨安居的时节,用这个来指称。在结集圣典(《小品》440)中,虽然是以通称来说的,但那句话其实正是针对这种情况而说的;为了与之对应或成立这一点,所以说了“如此……”等话。巴利
Khaṇḍanti chinnaṃ. Phullanti bhinnaṃ, sevālāhichattakādivikassanaṃ vā, tesaṃ paṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ sammā pākatikakaraṇaṃ, abhinavapaṭikaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Upakaṭṭhāyāti āsannāya. Vassaṃ upanenti upagacchanti etthāti vassūpanāyikā, vassūpagatakālo, tāya. Saṅgītipāḷiyaṃ (cūḷava. 440) sāmaññena vuttampi vacanaṃ evaṃ gateyeva sandhāya vuttanti saṃsandetuṃ sādhetuṃ vā āha ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi.
“围绕王舍城”这句话,是就住在城外的情况说的。“丢弃、散落、污秽”是指丢弃的、散落的和污秽的。这里要表达的意思是:那些前往世尊般涅槃处的比丘们所丢弃、抛下的东西,又因为被白蚁等啃食而从这边那边散落,又因为没人清扫而堆满垃圾,所以说是污秽。为了说明这个意思,就用“因为世尊……”等话来阐明。“污秽”是指腐败变质,这是把“uklāpo”中的“tha”音换成“la”音;或者被丢弃的一堆堆杂物就叫“污秽”。这是依照音韵结合的方式这样说的,就像“随烦恼”“爱”等词一样,与此相应。“精舍”是指因划分界限而显现出来的院落。“正在做”是指想要做。因为世尊制定了关于住所的义务,而且在《住所犍度》中也说了许多与住所相关的话,所以修补住所也就是对世尊的供养,因此说“为了供养世尊的教法”。“第一个月”是指雨安居的第一个月。这里是持续关系中的业格。为了让“也为了脱离外道言论”这个已说的意思更加清楚,就说了“因为外道……”等话。巴利
Rājagahaṃ parivāretvāti bahinagare ṭhitabhāvena vuttaṃ. Chaḍḍitapatitauklāpāti chaḍḍitā ca patitā ca uklāpā ca. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhagavato parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ gacchantehi bhikkhūhi chaḍḍitā vissaṭṭhā, tatoyeva ca upacikādīhi khāditattā ito cito ca patitā, sammajjanābhāvena ākiṇṇakacavarattā uklāpā cāti. Tadevatthaṃ ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādinā vibhāveti. Avakuthi pūtibhāvamagamāsīti uklāpo tha-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā, ujjhiṭṭho vā kalāposamūhoti uklāpo, vaṇṇasaṅgamanavasenevaṃ vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘upakleso, sneho’’ – iccādi, tena yuttāti tathā. Paricchedavasena veṇīyanti dissantīti pariveṇā. Kurumānāti kattukāmā. Senāsanavattānaṃ paññattattā, senāsanakkhandhake ca senāsanapaṭibaddhānaṃ bahūnampi vacanānaṃ vuttattā senāsanapaṭisaṅkharaṇampi tassa pūjāyeva nāmāti āha ‘‘bhagavato vacanapūjanattha’’nti. Paṭhamaṃ māsanti vassānassa paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Titthiyavādaparimocanatthañcā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘titthiyā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“Yanti”说的是制定公约。在这类场合里,yaṃ这个词不需要搭配taṃ,因为它本身就足以把意思表达完整。或者,它是指着那项公约而说“那时……”等等,意思是:那也正是我所说的。这个道理同样适用于“世尊……称赞”等语句,也就是在制定住所义务时,在《住所犍度》(《小品》308)中讲述与住所相关的话语时所称赞的。在“我们将结集”这句里,iti这个词和“被说”相关联,两处都是如此;或者也可以说,其中一个iti被省略了。巴利
Yanti katikavattakaraṇaṃ. Edisesu hi ṭhānesu yaṃ-saddo taṃ-saddānapekkho teneva atthassa paripuṇṇattā. Yaṃ vā katikavattaṃ sandhāya ‘‘atha kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tadeva mayāpi vuttanti attho. Esa nayo īdisesu bhagavatā…pe… vaṇṇitanti senāsanavattaṃ paññapentena senāsanakkhandhake (cūḷava. 308) ca senāsanapaṭibaddhavacanaṃ kathentena vaṇṇitaṃ. Saṅgāyissāmāti ettha iti-saddassa ‘‘vuttaṃ ahosī’’ti ca ubhayattha sambandho, ekassa vā iti-saddassa lopo.
“第二天”是指这样思考的那一天的第二天,而那正好是入雨安居日的第二天。因为长老们是在阿沙利月圆日之后的新月初日聚集起来,进入雨安居,然后才这样想的。“在王宫门口”指在王宫的大门处。“手工”指手上的活计,说的就是做手工活。“禀报”指告知。“放心”指心里没有顾虑。“轮”是因为像教令一样无碍运转,所以叫“教令轮”。同样,法本身就是轮,所以叫“法轮”;这里按说法智和证悟智两方面来理解都说得通,因为结集正是靠这两者才运转起来的。注释书里确实说过:“‘法轮’既是说法智的名称,也是证悟智的名称。”(相应部注2.3.78)“集会处”指聚在一起坐着的地方。“七叶”指有七片叶子的树,也就是被叫做“伞叶树”“异色叶树”的那种,意思是长在它洞门口的那棵树。巴利
Dutiyadivaseti evaṃ cintitadivasato dutiyadivase, so ca kho vassūpanāyikadivasato dutiyadivasova. Therā hi āsaḷhipuṇṇamito pāṭipadadivaseyeva sannipatitvā vassamupagantvā evaṃ cintesunti. Rājadvāreti rājagehadvāre. Hatthakammanti hatthakiriyaṃ, hatthakammassa karaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭivedesunti jānāpesuṃ. Visaṭṭhāti nirāsaṅkacittā. Āṇāyeva appaṭihatavuttiyā pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti āṇācakkaṃ. Tathā dhammoyeva cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ, taṃ panidha desanāñāṇapaṭivedhañāṇavasena duvidhampi yujjati tadubhayeneva saṅgītiyā pavattanato. ‘‘Dhammacakkanti cetaṃ desanāñāṇassāpi nāmaṃ, paṭivedhañāṇassāpī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.78) hi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Sannisajjaṭṭhānanti sannipatitvā nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ. Satta paṇṇāni yassāti sattapaṇṇī, yo ‘‘chattapaṇṇo, visamacchado’’ tipi vuccati, tassa jātaguhadvāreti attho.
“由毗首羯磨”这句话,是就帝释天——诸天之主——那位负责种种工巧造作的天子而说的。“墙壁、柱子、阶梯都划分得很匀称”这里,因为“划分匀称”这个词出现在复合词之前,所以它和前面所有的复合词都有关联;在“种种……庄严”等地方也是这样。“王宫的华丽”指王宫的富丽,或者王宫的光彩。“好像在嘲笑”就是好像在开玩笑的样子。“以吉祥”指以那叫做光辉的吉祥天女。“像住处一样”就是像居住的地方一样,也有“像火焰一样”的意思。就像飞鸟一同落在一处饮水处那样,一切人的眼睛也都落在殿堂上,因此说“一落……诸鸟”。“眼鸟”就是称为眼睛的鸟。“如同世间一切可爱之物聚集一处”是说,若将世间存在的一切可爱之物都取来聚集一处,则如同那样。“应见心髓”是说,如同无皮材的木心,又如离垢的清净,在值得观看的诸物中为心髓、为清净。“应见”是可看、可观的意思,“心髓”为殊胜,“庄严”为装饰,即以此为庄严,故为“应见心髓庄严”。“殿堂”是说遮挡太阳光线,或保护一切人的清净心髓,或因适合装饰而饮。巴利
Vissakammunāti sakkassa devānamindassa kammākammavidhāyakaṃ devaputtaṃ sandhāyāha. Suvibhattabhittithambhasopānanti ettha suvibhattapadassa dvandato pubbe suyyamānattā sabbehi dvandapadehi sambandho, tathā ‘‘nānāvidha…pe… vicitta’’ntiādīsupi. Rājabhavanavibhūtinti rājabhavanasampattiṃ, rājabhavanasobhaṃ vā. Avahasantamivāti avahāsaṃ kurumānaṃ viya. Siriyāti sobhāsaṅkhātāya lakkhiyā. Niketanamivāti vasanaṭṭhānamiva, ‘‘jalantamivā’’tipi pāṭho. Ekasmiṃyeva pānīyatitthe nipatantā pakkhino viya sabbesampi janānaṃ cakkhūni maṇḍapeyeva nipatantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekanipāta…pe… vihaṅgāna’’nti. Nayanavihaṅgānanti nayanasaṅkhātavihaṅgānaṃ. Lokarāmaṇeyyakamiva sampiṇḍitanti yadi loke vijjamānaṃ rāmaṇeyyakaṃ sabbameva ānetvā ekattha sampiṇḍitaṃ siyā, taṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti, yaṃ yaṃ vā loke ramitumarahati, taṃ sabbaṃ sampiṇḍitamivātipi attho. Daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍanti pheggurahitaṃ sāraṃ viya, kasaṭavinimuttaṃ pasannaṃ viya ca daṭṭhumaraharūpesu sārabhūtaṃ, pasannabhūtañca. Apica daṭṭhabbo dassanīyo sārabhūto visiṭṭhataro maṇḍo maṇḍanaṃ alaṅkāro etassāti daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍo, taṃ. Maṇḍaṃ sūriyarasmiṃ pāti nivāreti, sabbesaṃ vā janānaṃ maṇḍaṃ pasannaṃ pāti rakkhati, maṇḍanamalaṅkāraṃ vā pāti pivati alaṅkarituṃ yuttabhāvenāti maṇḍapo, taṃ.
那些既是花环串又是垂挂下来的装饰,就叫作“花环串垂饰”。这里修饰语放在后面,就像“agyāhito”那个词的用法一样。正是各种各样的花环串垂饰,它们仿佛在滴落、在喷洒、在涌出一般,这里有美妙悦目的华盖,所以这样说。用锤子捣打使地面平整的,叫作“捣固地”;同样质地的宝石,就叫“宝石捣固地”,也就是用各种宝石装饰的宝石捣固地面。或者也可以说,因为是把宝石捣碎后铺成地面的,所以由宝石捣固而成,那就是“宝石捣固地”;那地面本身,就是用各种宝石装饰的宝石捣固地面,正是如此。而它就像用各种花鬘装饰、地面工艺做得极为精致一样——文意应当这样连接起来。供花就是献花鬘。这里应当理解:提到“用各种宝石装饰”,是为了说明“用各种花鬘装饰”的情形;提到“宝石捣固地面”,是为了说明“地面工艺做得极为精致”的情形。“Naṃ”指的是凉亭。如同梵天宫殿一般——这是修饰用的中性表达,意思是:像梵天宫殿那样庄严,这样装饰起来。“特别值得尊敬”的,就是“宫殿”。不过精通声明的学者们说:“vihe ākāse māyanti gacchanti devā yenāti vimānaṃ”——诸天以种种方式在空中行进、前往,因此称为“宫殿”。或者说,以特别的善行而度量、建造出来的,就是“宫殿”;或者“vī”是指鸟,以那种形状度量、建造出来的,就是“宫殿”等等,也应当这样说。然而在《宫殿义注》中说:“因为具有一由旬、二由旬等大小的差别,又因为具有殊胜庄严,所以特别值得尊敬,因此称为‘宫殿’。”没有价值可衡量它们的,就是“无价的”,也就是价值不可估量、无法估价的,这就是所说的意思。适合的,或者各自应当铺开的,就是“铺具”,那些有百数之多,也是如此。朝向北方的,就是面向北方。法也是导师,因为能成办导师的职责,所以说“为佛陀世尊铺设适合坐的法的座位”。正如所说:“谁……在我灭度后,应作为导师”等等,如来所宣说的法的说法者,或者能带来导师职责,因此适合坐在那样的座位上,为了显示这一点也这样说了。适合坐的,就是适合坐下的。法的座位,就是说法者的座位,或者适合说法的座位。用象牙镶嵌的,就是用象牙镶嵌的,也就是用象牙做成的,这是所说的意思。因为说过:“所谓‘danto’,就是象牙。”在这里,就是在这法的座位上。我的职责,就是我的事,或者是我应当做的。巴利
Kusumadāmāni ca tāni olambakāni ceti kusumadāmolambakāni. Visesanassa cettha paranipāto yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti. Vividhāniyeva kusumadāmolambakāni tathā, tāni viniggalantaṃ visesena vamentaṃ nikkhāmentamiva cāru sobhanaṃ vitānaṃ etthāti tathā. Kuṭṭena gahito samaṃ katoti kuṭṭimo, koṭṭimo vā, tādisoyeva maṇīti maṇikoṭṭimo, nānāratanehi vicitto maṇikoṭṭimo, tassa talaṃ tathā. Atha vā maṇiyo koṭṭetvā katatalattā maṇikoṭṭena nipphattanti maṇikoṭṭimaṃ, tameva talaṃ, nānāratanavicittaṃ maṇikoṭṭimatalaṃ tathā. Tamiva ca nānāpupphūpahāravicittaṃ supariniṭṭhitabhūmikammanti sambandho. Pupphapūjā pupphūpahāro. Ettha hi nānāratanavicittaggahaṇaṃ nānāpupphūpahāravicittatāyanidassanaṃ, maṇikoṭṭimatalaggahaṇaṃ supariniṭṭhitabhūmikammatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nanti maṇḍapaṃ. Brahmavimānasadisanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, yathā brahmavimānaṃ sobhati, tathā alaṅkaritvāti attho. Visesena mānetabbanti vimānaṃ. Saddavidū pana ‘‘vihe ākāse māyanti gacchanti devā yenāti vimāna’’nti vadanti. Visesena vā sucaritakammunā mīyati nimmīyatīti vimānaṃ, vīti vā sakuṇo vuccati, taṃ saṇṭhānena mīyati nimmīyatīti vimānantiādināpi vattabbo. Vimānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ekayojanadviyojanādibhāvena pamāṇavisesayuttatāya, sobhātisayayogena ca visesato mānanīyatāya vimāna’’nti (vi. va. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) vuttaṃ. Natthi agghametesanti anagghāni, aparimāṇagghāni agghitumasakkuṇeyyānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Patirūpaṃ, paccekaṃ vā attharitabbānīti paccattharaṇāni, tesaṃ satāni tathā. Uttarābhimukhanti uttaradisābhimukhaṃ. Dhammopi satthāyeva satthukiccanipphādanatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato āsanārahaṃ dhammāsanaṃ paññapetvā’’ti. Yathāha ‘‘yo kho…pe… mamaccayena satthā’’tiādi, (dī. ni. 2.216) tathāgatappaveditadhammadesakassa vā satthukiccāvahattā tathārūpe āsane nisīditumarahatīti dassetumpi evaṃ vuttaṃ. Āsanārahanti nisīdanārahaṃ. Dhammāsananti dhammadesakāsanaṃ, dhammaṃ vā kathetuṃ yuttāsanaṃ. Dantakhacitanti dantehi khacitaṃ, hatthidantehi katanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Danto nāma hatthidanto vuccatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ dhammāsane. Mama kiccanti mama kammaṃ, mayā vā karaṇīyaṃ.
现在,为了说明尊者阿难进入无学地,说了“在那一天……”等话。其中,“在那一天”是指国王这样通报的那一天,也就是萨瓦那月黑分第四天。因为会带来伤害、像毒一样可怕,所以烦恼就是毒;由于他不是漏尽者,那种名为“变易”的能力就是气味。正因如此,他在世尊般涅槃等场合做出悲泣等举动。再者,因为与能散发毒的花等的气味相似,能引发种种苦因行为的烦恼就被称为“毒气”。正如所说:“‘带来毒’所以是贪欲,‘毒根’所以是贪欲,‘毒果’所以是贪欲,‘受用毒’所以是贪欲。”另外,所谓“毒气”,是指腐肉等难闻的气味,因为与它相似,所以指烦恼。《阿毗达摩注》中说:“‘vissa’这个词,意思是丑陋。”确实地,就是决定地。悚惧,就是对法的悚惧。因为“已放下重担者”等,主要是就精进说的。然而在这些场合,其他相关的法也同样是指对法的悚惧。正如《珠鬘天宫注》中说:“所谓悚惧,就是与愧俱的智,它在见到那位世尊时生起。”而那位当时还未了知教法、尚未证得果位。否则,如果只是以心恐惧而生的嗔,那就会变成悚惧;若如此,它就不能成为他进入无学地的决定原因。而这样的悚惧在这里根本不该说,所以不必再作多余赘述。因此,因为第二天有僧团集会,或者因为还有有学应当做的事。那些不合适,就是说对你不合适,或者你去参加集会不合适。巴利
Idāni āyasmato ānandassa asekkhabhūmisamāpajjanaṃ dassento ‘‘tasmiñca panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tasmiñca pana divasaeti tathā raññā ārocāpitadivase, sāvaṇamāsassakāḷapakkhacatutthadivaseti vuttaṃ hoti. Anatthajananato visasaṅkāsatāya kileso visaṃ, tassa khīṇāsavabhāvato aññathābhāvasaṅkhātā satti gandho. Tathā hi so bhagavato parinibbānādīsu vilāpādimakāsi. Apica visajananakapupphādigandhapaṭibhāgatāya nānāvidhadukkhahetukiriyājananako kilesova ‘‘visagandho’’ti vuccati. Tathā hi so ‘‘visaṃ haratīti visattikā, visamūlāti visattikā, visaphalāti visattikā, visaparibhogāti visattikā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 3) vuttoti. Apica visagandhonāma virūpo maṃsādigandho, taṃsadisatāya pana kileso. ‘‘Vissasaddo hi virūpe’’ti (dha. sa. ṭī. 624) abhidhammaṭīkāyaṃvuttaṃ. Addhāti ekaṃsato. Saṃveganti dhammasaṃvegaṃ. ‘‘Ohitabhārāna’’nti hi yebhuyyena, padhānena ca vuttaṃ. Edisesu pana ṭhānesu tadaññesampi dhammasaṃvegoyeva adhippeto. Tathā hi ‘‘saṃvego nāma sahottappaṃ ñāṇaṃ, so tassā bhagavato dassane uppajjī’’ti (vi. va. aṭṭha. 838) rajjumālāvimānavaṇṇanāyaṃvuttaṃ, sā ca tadā aviññātasāsanā anāgataphalāti. Itarathā hi cittutrāsavasena dosoyeva saṃvegoti āpajjati, evañca sati so tassa asekkhabhūmisamāpajjanassa ekaṃsakāraṇaṃ na siyā. Evamabhūto ca so idha na vattabboyevāti alamatipapañcena. Tenāti tasmā sve saṅghasannipātassa vattamānattā, sekkhasakaraṇīyattā vā. Te na yuttanti tava na yuttaṃ, tayā vā sannipātaṃ gantuṃ na patirūpaṃ.
“我的此行”,意思是我这一次前往。“Yvāhaṃ”就是“yo ahaṃ”(我);或者“yaṃ”是指称动作,所以在“gaccheyya”(若去)这里,它指称前往的动作。而指称动作时,“yaṃ、taṃ”这类词的自然用法,就是与中性、单数相应,因为到处都能看到这种情况。精通语言的人确实认为,动作从自性上说就是中性和单数。他转向,就是他把心投向。已解脱,就是已经被解开。尚未到达的,就是还没去到,意思是还没放到枕头上。在这中间,就是在这段间隙里;用这两个词,是指所显示的时间的中间那一刹那,或者说,是指所显示的两个时间段之间的空隙。巴利
Metanti mama etaṃ gamanaṃ. Yvāhanti yo ahaṃ, yanti vā kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tena ‘‘gaccheyya’’nti ettha gamanakiriyaṃ parāmasati, kiriyāparāmasanassa ca yaṃ taṃ-saddassa ayaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgena, ekavacanena ca yogyatā tathāyeva tattha tattha dassanato. Kiriyāya hi sabhāvato napuṃsakattamekattañca icchanti saddavidū. Āvajjesīti upanāmesi. Muttāti muccitā. Appattañcāti agatañca, bimbohane na tāva ṭhapitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etasmiṃ antareti etthantare, iminā padadvayena dassitakālānaṃ vemajjhakkhaṇe, tathādassitakāladvayassa vā vivareti vuttaṃ hoti.
在因上,在心识上,也在刹那和间隙上;
对于中间这类含义,“antarā”这个词被用来表达“其间”的意思。巴利
‘‘Kāraṇe ceva citte ca, khaṇasmiṃ vivarepi ca; Vemajjhādīsu atthesu ‘antarā’ti ravo gato’’ti.
确实,这话说得对。“无取着”是指:不因为渴爱和邪见而执取任何法,也不执取那些使人解脱的烦恼的一丝一毫。“从诸漏”是指:从有的范围直到有顶天,从法的范围直到种姓智,从听闻和生起而被称为漏的诸烦恼中。这只是一种标示性的说法。因为与它们同处一境的缘故,心确实从一切烦恼、一切恶法中解脱出来。“心解脱”是指:心在阿罗汉道的刹那正在从诸漏中解脱,在阿罗汉果的刹那已经解脱。为了阐明这个含义,用“此即”等话展开说。“经行”指经行之动作。“殊胜”指由自所得之道果而殊胜之道果。以所作、所积之福而为“作福者”,即为证阿罗汉而作所作,这是其义。“专勤精勤”即策励精进,是说作证阿罗汉之修习,即“你应作”。“你应成为”即你将成。“论之过”指论之虚妄性。“极已发勤”指极度已发勤。“掉举”指高扬的状态。“来”是放舍之语。因此我现在就这样配置,而我并不作戏论,他如此作放舍。“我策励精进平等”指因经行之精进过强,为令其不退减而与定平等,我策励精进之平等(均等状态);或者,以精进配置称为止的定,也有此义。因为两种读法都可见。“我将休息”指我将得息。现在,为了显示他殊胜值得赞叹的状态,说“由是”等语。“由是”指因缺乏四威仪之理由。“未卧”等语是现在时之语。即使已般涅槃,他也只在虚空中般涅槃。因此,长老的烦恼般涅槃与蕴般涅槃,殊胜值得赞叹,实为希有未曾有。巴利
Hi vuttaṃ. Anupādāyāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kañci dhammaṃ aggahetvā, yehi vā kilesehi muccati, tesaṃ lesamattampi aggahetvā. Āsavehīti bhavato ā bhavaggaṃ, dhammato ca ā gotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato āsavasaññitehi kilesehi. Upalakkhaṇavacanamattañcetaṃ. Tadekaṭṭhatāya hi sabbehipi kilesehi sabbehipi pāpadhammehi cittaṃ vimuccatiyeva. Cittaṃ vimuccīti cittaṃ arahattamaggakkhaṇe āsavehi vimuccamānaṃ hutvā arahattaphalakkhaṇe vimucci. Tadatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādinā. Caṅkamenāti caṅkamanakiriyāya. Visesanti attanā laddhamaggaphalato visesamaggaphalaṃ. Vivaṭṭūpanissayabhūtaṃ kataṃ upacitaṃ puññaṃ yenāti katapuñño, arahattādhigamāya katādhikāroti attho. Padhānamanuyuñjāti vīriyamanuyuñjāhi, arahattasamāpattiyā anuyogaṃ karohīti vuttaṃ hoti. Hohisīti bhavissasi. Kathādosoti kathāya doso vitathabhāvo. Accāraddhanti ativiya āraddhaṃ. Uddhaccāyāti uddhatabhāvāya. Handāti vossaggavacanaṃ. Tena hi adhunāyeva yojemi, na panāhaṃ papañcaṃ karomīti vossaggaṃ karoti. Vīriyasamataṃ yojemīti caṅkamanavīriyassa adhimattattā tassa hāpanavasena samādhinā samatāpādanena vīriyassa samataṃ samabhāvaṃ yojemi, vīriyena vā samathasaṅkhātaṃ samādhiṃ yojemītipi attho. Dvidhāpi hi pāṭho dissati. Vissamissāmīti assasissāmi. Idāni tassa visesato pasaṃsanārahabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāti catuiriyāpathavirahitatākāraṇena. ‘‘Anipanno’’tiādīni paccuppannavacanāneva. Parinibbutopi so ākāseyeva parinibbāyi. Tasmā therassa kilesaparinibbānaṃ, khandhaparinibbānañca visesena pasaṃsārahaṃ acchariyabbhutamevāti.
“第二日”是指从长老证得阿拉汉果那天算起的第二天。“第五日”是就观察星宿来说的,和“第二日”指的是同一件事。因为即使词性不同,也可以看到意义相同的词,比如“功德是标准,二十种心”等等。“黑分”是指沙瓦那月的黑分。因为第一个月,他们做了修补破损的工作,而初月之分是按照中部地区的说法。在那里,从上一个满月到下一个满月,就算作一个月。之后三天,国王搭建了帐篷;之后第二天,长老证得阿拉汉果;第三天,长老们集会诵出了结集,因此,从阿沙离月的黑分初一至沙瓦那月的黑分初五,这期间是一个月多五天。正在生起是指正在产生。心欢喜愉悦是指极其喜悦的心,或者因欢喜而欢喜,因喜而满足。一边是指一个部分,意思是左边。同样,在《婆耆舍经》的义注中这样说——巴利
Dutiyadivaseti therena arahattapattadivasato dutiyadivase. Pañcamiyanti tithīpekkhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘dutiyadivase’’ti iminā tulyādhikaraṇaṃ. Bhinnaliṅgampi hi tulyatthapadaṃ dissati yathā ‘‘guṇo pamāṇaṃ, vīsati cittāni’’ iccādi. Kāḷapakkhassāti sāvaṇamāsakāḷapakkhassa. Paṭhamañhi māsaṃ khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇamakaṃsu, paṭhamamāsabhāvo ca majjhimappadesavohārena. Tattha hi purimapuṇṇamito yāva aparā puṇṇamī, tāva eko māsoti voharanti. Tato tīṇi divasāni rājā maṇḍapamakāsi, tato dutiyadivase thero arahattaṃ sacchākāsi, tatiyadivase pana sannipatitvā therā saṅgītimakaṃsu, tasmā āsaḷhimāsakāḷapakkhapāṭipadato yāva sāvaṇamāsakāḷapakkhapañcamī , tāva pañcadivasādhiko ekamāso hoti. Samānoti uppajjamāno. Haṭṭhatuṭṭhacittoti ativiya somanassacitto, pāmojjena vā haṭṭhacitto pītiyā tuṭṭhacitto. Ekaṃsanti ekasmiṃ aṃse, vāmaṃseti attho. Tathā hi vaṅgīsasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ –
“一肩衣”在这里是就穿着方式而说的;“一肩”是指把衣披在左肩上站着的人的说法。也就是说,应当理解为:像把衣披在左肩上站着时那样把衣整理好。巴利
‘‘Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaranti ettha puna saṇṭhāpanavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ, ekaṃsanti ca vāmaṃsaṃ pārupitvā ṭhitassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yato yathā vāmaṃsaṃ pārupitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, tathā cīvaraṃ katvāti evamassattho veditabbo’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.345).
像从果蒂上脱落的熟透的多罗果……像放在白黄毛毯上、闪着白黄光泽的天然宝珠——这里用“天然”一词排除了人造的。像升起的满月……像在白分第十五布萨日升起的、十六分圆满的月亮。像被初升太阳的光芒照触而绽放、含着金色花粉的红莲……“Piñjara这个词是金色的同义词”,这是《显扬心要疏》1.22中所说的。极明净:就是极为光洁清净。具光耀:就是兼具色身的光耀和戒德的光耀。具威光:就是具有身相庄严等威光,极其最上面:由于上述的庄严而居于最上。虽然他没有宣称“我已证得阿罗汉果”,但由于他以如此殊胜的威仪而行,见到他的人全都知道这件事,因此他就像在宣说一样,所以说“像在宣说自己证得阿罗汉果一样而去”。巴利
Bandha…pe… viyāti vaṇṭato pavuttasuparipakkatālaphalamiva. Paṇḍu…pe… viyāti sitapītapabhāyuttapaṇḍuromajakambale ṭhapito jātimā maṇi viya, jātivacanena cettha kuttimaṃ nivatteti. Samuggatapuṇṇacando viyāti juṇhapakkhapannarasuposathe samuggato soḷasakalāparipuṇṇo cando viya. Bālā…pe… viyāti taruṇasūriyapabhāsamphassena phullitasuvaṇṇavaṇṇaparāgagabbhaṃ satapattapaddhaṃ viya. ‘‘Piñjarasaddo hi hemavaṇṇapariyāyo’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.22) sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vutto. Pariyodātenāti pabhassarena. Sappabhenāti vaṇṇappabhāya, sīlappabhāya ca samannāgatena. Sassirikenāti sarīrasobhaggādisaṅkhātāya siriyā ativiya sirimatā. Mukhavarenāti yathāvuttasobhāsamalaṅkatattā uttamamukhena. Kāmaṃ ‘‘ahamasmi arahattaṃ patto’’ti nārocesi, tathārūpāya pana uttamalīḷāya gamanato passantā sabbepi tamatthaṃ jānanti, tasmā ārocento viya hotīti āha ‘‘attano arahattappattiṃ ārocayamāno viya agamāsī’’ti.
那么,他为什么像是要宣告一样地前往呢?这里说:他想到“世尊赞叹不把他人所证记在自己身上”,又想到“虽然以有学之身,我本来不适合参与法与律的结集,但因为多闻,我还是会参与”,于是为了让已经坐下的长老们通过知道他证得阿罗汉果而生起欢喜,也为了说明世尊“不要放逸”的教诫确实有成果,所以他才像是要宣告一样地前往。具寿大迦叶也这样想:由于前面所说的理由,以平等安立等方式,他与导师相合。“将持”:就是将会持有。“贤友阿难,你证得阿罗汉果实在太好了”等等,他这样给予了赞叹。这是长部诵者的说法。在小部诵者、经集诵者和小诵诵者当中,这个说法也说得通,因为他们的注释里也这样说过。巴利
Kimatthaṃ panāyaṃ evamārocayamāno viya agamāsīti? Vuccate – so hi ‘‘attupanāyikaṃ akatvā aññabyākaraṇaṃ bhagavatā saṃvaṇṇita’’nti manasi karitvā ‘‘sekkhatāya dhammavinayasaṅgītiyā gahetumayuttampi bahussutattā gaṇhissāmā’’ti nisinnānaṃ therānaṃ arahattappattivijānanena somanassuppādanatthaṃ, ‘‘appamatto hohī’’ti bhagavatā dinnaovādassa ca saphalatādīpanatthaṃ evamārocayamāno viya agamāsīti. Āyasmatomahākassapassaetadahosi samasamaṭṭhapanādinā yathāvuttakāraṇena satthukappattā. Dhareyyāti vijjamāno bhaveyya. ‘‘Sobhati vata te āvuso ānanda arahattasamadhigamatā’’tiādinā sādhukāramadāsi. Ayamidha dīghabhāṇakānaṃ vādo. Khuddakabhāṇakesu ca suttanipātakhuddakapāṭhabhāṇakānaṃ vādotipi yujjati tadaṭṭhakathāsupi tathā vuttattā.
有些老师属于中诵者一系,他们用音调诵持《中部》,并以此得名。所谓“依长幼”,就是按照戒腊高低排定的次序,也不越过这个次序。“于彼处”指在那个比丘僧团里。“这是阿难的座位”,这是句子的前后关联。“于彼时”就是在那样交谈的时候。长老心里想:“如果别人问‘他去了哪里’,我就直接现身,那未免太显眼了。”这也是中诵者中一部分人的说法,所以接着就说“因此也有些长老这样说”。另一些人则说:他是从空中飞来,直接在自己的座位上现身。因为在阳性词中用“eke”时,到处都应理解为“一部分人”的意思。在这三种说法里,除了各诵师各自传下来的说法本身之外,并没有别的什么特别理由。因为这场法与律的结集历时七个月,有时说他是平常地走来,有时说他是从地里沉入而来,有时说他是从空中飞来,人们只是根据他当时到来的方式,才作出这样那样的说法。还有人说:在结集的第一天,他先是平常地前来,然后腾空而起,到了大众跟前时又从空中降下,为了不挤到比丘的队伍,就从地里沉入,再在自己的座位上现身。不管他是怎样来的,来的方式本身并不重要;重要的是他来了以后,尊者大迦叶给予赞同,这才是关键。因为世尊正是以应当给予的赞同,来说明证得阿罗汉果这件事,也让其他人知道。世尊还在世时,长老就已经接受了应当受到的称赞。所以,为了说明这个意思,经文才说“无论以何种方式”等等。“一切处”就是指那三种说法全都包括在内。巴利
Majjhimaṃ nikāyaṃ bhaṇanti sīlenāti majjhimabhāṇakā, tappaguṇā ācariyā. Yathāvuḍḍhanti vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiṃ, tadanatikkamitvā vā. Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe. Ānandassa etamāsananti sambandho. Tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ evaṃkathanasamaye. Thero cintesi ‘‘kuhiṃ gato’’ti pucchantānaṃ attānaṃ dassente ativiya pākaṭabhāvena bhavissamānattā, ayampi majjhimabhāṇakesveva ekaccānaṃ vādo, tasmā itipi eke vadantīti sambandho. Ākāsena āgantvā attano āsaneyeva attānaṃ dassesītipi tesameva ekacce vadanti. Pulliṅgavisaye hi ‘‘eke’’ti vutte sabbattha ‘‘ekacce’’ti attho veditabbo. Tīsupi cettha vādesu tesaṃ tesaṃ bhāṇakānaṃ tena tenākārena āgatamattaṃ ṭhapetvā visuṃ visuṃ vacane aññaṃ visesakāraṇaṃ natthi. Sattamāsaṃ katāya hi dhammavinayasaṅgītiyā kadāci pakatiyāva, kadāci pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā, kadāci ākāsena āgatattā taṃ tadāgamanamupādāya tathā tathā vadanti. Apica saṅgītiyā ādidivaseyeva paṭhamaṃ pakatiyā āgantvā tato paraṃ ākāsamabbhuggantvā parisaṃ pattakāle tato otaritvā bhikkhupantiṃ apīḷento pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā āsane attānaṃ dassesītipi vadanti. Yathā vā tathā vā āgacchatu, āgamanākāramattaṃ na pamāṇaṃ, āgantvā gatakāle āyasmato mahākassapassa sādhukāradānameva pamāṇaṃ satthārā dātabbasādhukāradāneneva arahattappattiyā aññesampi ñāpitattā, bhagavati dharamāne paṭiggahetabbāya ca pasaṃsāya therassa paṭiggahitattā. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā vā’’tiādimāha. Sabbatthāpīti sabbesupi tīsu vādesu.
世尊招呼比丘们说“比丘们”,这里的“招呼”就是“呼唤”的意思。不过,在其他地方,“招呼”也出现在“告知”的用法中,比如“比丘们,我告诉你们,我向你们宣说”;也出现在“召唤”的用法中,比如“来,比丘,以我的话去叫舍利弗来”;还出现在“呼唤”的用法中,比如“那时,世尊招呼比丘们说:‘比丘们!’”。这里同样是“呼唤”的意思,《心义灯》中就是这样说的。但是,因为这里并不只是单纯的呼唤,而是与“我们先结集什么”等所表达的应知内容一起出现,所以理解为“告知”才合适。因此,“招呼”应当解释为“宣示、告知”。因为在“那时,世尊招呼比丘们说:‘比丘们!’‘尊者!’那些比丘回应世尊”等句子中,只看到单纯的呼唤,并没有另一个应被了知的内容,而那个内容是以“比丘们,从前……”等另行开始的。所以,只有在那样单纯的呼唤中,才适用“呼唤”的解释,这是我的看法。然而,通晓声明的学者们说:就像“招呼了天王之后,对有大神通的毗首羯磨”等句中那样,“manta”一词是秘密言说的意思,因此“āmantesi”的意思是“商议”。“贤友们”等,是显示招呼方式的词。“法或律”中的“或”字表示选择,由此显示“我们先结集其中哪一个?”为什么说“寿”?回答说“于律住立”等。应当补上“因为……所以……”来连接。因此,由于与“寿”相似。头目,即最上的。并非不能,而是完全能够。双重否定,正是连同强调一起显示肯定意义的。巴利
Bhikkhū āmantesīti bhikkhū ālapīti ayamettha attho, aññatra pana ñāpanepi dissati yathā ‘‘āmantayāmi vo bhikkhave, (dī. ni. 2.218) paṭivedayāmi vo bhikkhave’’ti (a. ni. 7.72) pakkosanepi dissati yathā ‘‘ehi tvaṃ bhikkhu mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11) ālapanepi dissati yathā ‘‘tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘bhikkhavo’ti’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.249), idhāpi ālapaneti sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Ālapanamattassa pana abhāvato ‘‘kiṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’tiādinā vuttena viññāpiyamānatthantarena ca sahacaraṇato ñāpaneva vaṭṭati, tasmā āmantesīti paṭivedesi viññāpesīti attho vattabbo. ‘‘Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘bhikkhavo’ti, ‘bhaddante’ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.249) hi ālapanamattameva dissati, na viññāpiyamānatthantaraṃ, taṃ pana ‘‘bhūtapubbaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.249) paccekameva āraddhaṃ. Tasmā tādisesveva ālapane vaṭṭatīti no takko. Saddavidū pana vadanti ‘‘āmantayitvā devindo, vissakammaṃ mahiddhika’ntiādīsu (cariyā. 107) viya mantasaddo guttabhāsane. Tasmā ‘āmantesī’ti etassa sammantayīti attho’’ti. ‘‘Āvuso’’tiādi āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Dhammaṃ vā vinayaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo vikappane, tena ‘‘kimekaṃ tesu paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti dasseti. Kasmā āyūti āha ‘‘vinaye ṭhite’’tiādi. ‘‘Yasmā, tasmā’’ti ca ajjhāharitvā yojetabbaṃ. Tasmāti tāya āyusarikkhatāya . Dhuranti jeṭṭhakaṃ. No nappahotīti pahotiyeva. Dvipaṭisedho hi saha atisayena pakatyatthadīpako.
“这是最上”的意思就是“这是最高的”。这里是用性别转换的方式来说的。“即”这个说法,可以接成“这个就是”,也可以接成“即五蕴”。这样一来,“这是最上”就按字面原本的性别来理解。而“即”这个词的性质是:对于应当说到的各种含义,要依照它对应的性别,接成“这个就是”“这个就是”或“这就是”,它在各处都是这样显示的。“于持律比丘中”是表示简别的属格说法。巴利
Etadagganti eso aggo. Liṅgavipallāsena hi ayaṃ niddeso. Yadidanti ca yo ayaṃ, yadidaṃ khandhapañcakanti vā yojetabbaṃ. Evañhi sati ‘‘etadagga’’nti yathārutaliṅgameva. ‘‘Yadida’’nti padassa ca ayaṃ sabhāvo, yā tassa tassa atthassa vattabbassa liṅgānurūpena ‘‘yo aya’’nti vā ‘‘yā aya’’nti vā ‘‘yaṃ ida’’nti vā yojetabbatā tathāyevassa tattha tattha dassitattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharānanti niddhāraṇachaṭṭhīniddeso.
他自己选定自己,意思就是他自己让自己被选定。这里“自己”是具格的一个限定词,它排除了由别人来选定的情况;或者,“自己”是一个形式上像有格尾、实际上是不变词词干。不过有些人说:“在表达词义时,具格已经体现了行为主体。”这种说法并不恰当,因为“长老”这个行为主体本来就存在。为了回答提问,应当这样连接:他自己选定自己。由于“问”这个动词词根可以带两个宾语,所以说“向优波离问律”时提到了两个宾语。巴利
Attanāva attānaṃ sammannīti sayameva attānaṃ sammataṃ akāsi. ‘‘Attanā’’ti hi idaṃ tatiyāvisesanaṃ bhavati, tañca parehi sammannanaṃ nivatteti, ‘‘attanā’’ti vā ayaṃ vibhatyantapatirūpako abyayasaddo . Keci pana ‘‘liṅgatthe tatiyā abhihitakattubhāvato’’ti vadanti. Tadayuttameva ‘‘thero’’ti kattuno vijjamānattā. Vissajjanatthāya attanāva attānaṃ sammannīti yojetabbaṃ. Pucchadhātussa dvikammikattā ‘‘upāliṃ vinaya’’nti kammadvayaṃ vuttaṃ.
“拿起扇子”这里应当知道,拿扇子是说法的法师们的惯例。因为说法的人用这把扇子遮住听众中手上的小动作、面部表情变化等。而世尊拿起一把精致的扇子,正是为了显示说法者的这一惯例。否则,作为整个世间的庄严、达到最高境界的学处与调御、诸佛的面容如满月般的圆轮,就不应该被遮住了。为什么说“贤友优波离,第一条波罗夷是在哪里制定的”?难道在结集之前,它的“第一”就不成立吗?并非不成立,因为按照世尊制定的顺序,以及按照诵波罗提木叉的顺序,“第一”是成立的。事实上,三藏大多数都是在世尊还在世时,就按照他安立的顺序结集了,尤其是律藏和论藏,应当这样理解。“在什么事上”以及“在淫欲法上”,这里的处格是表示所缘的意思。为了把“在哪里制定”等所显示的内容,连同其余还没说到的部分一起收进来显示,所以说“也问了事由”等等。巴利
Bījaniṃ gahetvāti ettha bījanīgahaṇaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatāti veditabbaṃ. Tāya hi dhammakathikānaṃ parisāya hatthakukkuccamukhavikārādi paṭicchādīyati. Bhagavā ca dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatādassanatthameva vicitrabījaniṃ gaṇhāti. Aññathā hi sabbassapi lokassa alaṅkārabhūtaṃ paramukkaṃsagatasikkhāsaṃyamānaṃ buddhānaṃ mukhacandamaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetabbaṃ na siyā. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ āvuso upāli pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tassa saṅgītiyā purimakāle paṭhamabhāvo na yuttoti? No na yutto bhagavatā paññattānukkamena, pātimokkhuddesānukkamena ca paṭhamabhāvassa siddhattā. Yebhuyyena hi tīṇi piṭakāni bhagavato dharamānakāle ṭhitānukkameneva saṅgītāni, visesato vinayābhidhammapiṭakānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kismiṃ vatthusminti, methunadhammeti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ. ‘‘Kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā dassitena saha tadavasiṭṭhampi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘vatthumpi pucchī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
是为了消除这样的疑虑——“这到底是混入了结集者的话,还是纯粹的佛语?”——并且为了显示只有按照结集本身才是标准,他先提出质问,然后解答,说了“但在这里……”等话。这里说的“初波罗夷”,是指在那样结集而成的初波罗夷经文里。因此他说:“因为如来连一个音节也不会说没有意义的话。”“应当去除的”,是指因为多余而没有意义、或者因为虚假不实而不恰当,所以应当舍弃的话。“应当补入的”,是指因为不完整而应当加进去的话。为什么?他说:“因为确实不……”等等。而“在弟子或天人所说话中”,是就世尊以提问、赞叹等方式所说的话而说的。“即使在一切处”,是指在世尊、弟子和天人所说的一切话中。然而那种补入只是关联性的语句,并不是在实质意义上成立的;为了显示这一点,他用“但那个……”等话来说明,“仅仅是关联性的语句”,就是只是承接上下文的语句。他们确定“这是初波罗夷”之后,就以这个读诵方式把它安立下来,为了完成学习、持诵等任务,并且正是为了这个目的而进行了团体共诵:“他……中略……安住。”据说在开始共诵的时候,大地就震动了;为了让人知道这大地震动是由于长老们诵法的威力,所以说“犹如在给予随喜赞叹”。水界边际,是指支撑大地的水界边际。因为那水界一旦动摇,大地也就动摇,以此排除局部大地的震动。巴利
Saṅgītikārakavacanasammissaṃ vā nu kho, suddhaṃ vā buddhavacananti āsaṅkāpariharaṇatthaṃ, yathāsaṅgītasseva pamāṇabhāvaṃ dassanatthañca pucchaṃ samuddharitvā vissajjento ‘‘kiṃ panetthā’’tiādimāha. Ettha paṭhamapārājiketi etissaṃ tathāsaṅgītāya paṭhamapārājikapāḷiyaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi tathāgatā ekabyañjanampi niratthakaṃ vadantī’’ti. Apanetabbanti atirekabhāvena niratthakatāya, vitathabhāvena vā ayuttatāya chaḍḍetabbavacanaṃ. Pakkhipitabbanti asampuṇṇatāya upanetabbavacanaṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Sāvakānaṃ pana devatānaṃ vā bhāsiteti bhagavato pucchāthomanādivasena bhāsitaṃ sandhāyāha. Sabbatthāpīti bhagavato sāvakānaṃ devatānañca bhāsitepi. Taṃ pana pakkhipanaṃ sambandhavacanamattasseva, na sabhāvāyuttiyā atthassāti dasseti ‘‘kiṃ pana ta’’ntiādinā sambandhavacanamattanti pubbāparasambandhavacanameva. Idaṃ paṭhamapārājikanti vavatthapetvā ṭhapesuṃ imināva vācanāmaggena uggahaṇadhāraṇādikiccanipphādanatthaṃ, tadatthameva ca gaṇasajjhāyamakaṃsu ‘‘tena…pe… viharatī’’ti. Sajjhāyārambhakāleyeva pathavī akampitthāti vadanti, tadidaṃ pana pathavīkampanaṃ therānaṃ dhammasajjhāyānubhāvenāti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Udakapariyantanti pathavīsandhārakaudakapariyantaṃ. Tasmiñhi caliteyeva sāpi calati, etena ca padesapathavīkampanaṃ nivatteti.
虽然巴利原文里没有计数,但为了说明结集收录的就只有这么多,所以说了“七十五学处”。用“依照前面的方式”这句话,是在表达“就像在给予赞同认可”的意思。为了显示不只是按学处篇章分别的方式,还按数量标准来定,所以说了“六十四诵分”。在这里,诵分是指——巴利
Kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ gaṇanā natthi, saṅgītimāropitāni pana ettakānevāti dīpetuṃ ‘‘pañcasattati sikkhāpadānī’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘purimanayenevā’’ti etena sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viyāti atthamāha. Na kevalaṃ sikkhāpadakaṇḍavibhaṅganiyameneva, atha kho pamāṇaniyamenāpīti dassetuṃ ‘‘catusaṭṭhibhāṇavārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca bhāṇavāroti –
八个音节算一句,一首偈颂有四句;
一个偈颂是一个结集单位,一个结集单位有三十二个字。
三十二个音节的文句为一品,而总共是二百五十个。
一个诵分已经结束,共八千个字母。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhakkharā ekapadaṃ, ekagāthā catuppadaṃ; Gāthā cekā mato gantho, gantho bāttiṃsatakkharo. Bāttiṃsakkharaganthānaṃ, paññāsadvisataṃ pana; Bhāṇavāro mato eko, svaṭṭhakkharasahassako’’ti.
像这样,一篇有八千个音节的文本,就叫做一诵分。因为应当被诵出来的部分,就叫诵分,意思是按一种读诵方式应当讲说的部分。犍度,就是大品和小品。从蕴的聚集来说,或者从阐明的角度来说,就叫犍度。这里说的“蕴”,指的是出家、受具足戒等律仪事务,以及关于应行和不应行的学处这些制定。因为出家等事是世尊制定的,所以叫制定。在“制定”这个词上,也能看到“蕴”这个词的用法,比如“木蕴”“火蕴”“水蕴”等。另外,这些制定按部分、按集合来分类,所以用部分和集合的意思来说也完全说得通。为了让这部律藏由诵者们守护、保护,按照结集时收录的方式长久住世而不消失,他们把这部律交付给具寿优波离长老:“贤友,请把这个教给你所摄受的弟子们。”巴利
Evaṃ aṭṭhakkharasahassaparimāṇo pāṭho vuccati. Bhaṇitabbo vāro yassāti hi bhāṇavāro, ekena sajjhāyanamaggena kathetabbavāroti attho. Khandhakanti mahāvaggacūḷavaggaṃ. Khandhānaṃ samūhato, pakāsanato vā khandhakoti hi vuccati, khandhāti cettha pabbajjūpasampadādivinayakammasaṅkhātā, cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā paññattiyoti vuccanti. Paññattiyañca khandhasaddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho, (a. ni. 6.41) aggikkhandho (a. ni. 7.72), udakakkhandho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.45; 6.37) viya. Apica bhāgarāsaṭṭhatāpi yujjatiyeva tāsaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgato, rāsito ca vibhattattā, taṃ pana vinayapiṭakaṃ bhāṇakehi rakkhitaṃ gopitaṃ saṅgahāruḷhanayeneva cirakālaṃ anassamānaṃ hutvā patiṭṭhahissatīti āyasmantaṃ upālittheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso imaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti.
“想要结集法”是指想要进行经藏和论藏的结集,因为就像“法与律已被宣说、制定”等语句那样,以排除的方式来看,“法”这个词只适用于经藏和论藏。这个含义在后面会变得清楚。巴利
Dhammaṃ saṅgāyitukāmoti suttantābhidhammasaṅgītiṃ kattukāmo ‘‘dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.216) viya pārisesanayena dhammasaddassa suttantābhidhammesveva pavattanato. Ayamattho upari āvi bhavissati.
“告知僧团”在这里要按前面说过的方式来理解。“贤友,是哪一部藏?”意思是在律藏之外的两部藏当中,是哪一部藏。因为律藏和论藏也属于“小结集”的范围,所以在这中间说“经藏中有四次结集”。而所谓“结集”,是指在结集的时候,按长部等分别确定下来、共同诵出,因此就称为“部”,所以说“长结集”等等。为了表明只是把经汇集起来之后,按分品的方式分成三品,而不是别的,所以说“三十四经,三品”。因此,三十四经有三品,或者说三十四部经,按分品的方式分成三品,即在这三品当中,应当这样连接。若问:“有一部名为《梵网经》,我们首先结集它”,为什么?由于有这样的责难,所以说“以三种戒庄严”等。这些是有因由的。以小品、中品、大品戒的方式显示三种戒,因此以它庄严、装饰;同样,它摧毁种种邪命之类的诡诈、谄媚等,因此是摧毁种种邪命、诡诈、谄媚等。其中,“诡诈”是指欺骗,也就是以三种事——资具受用、周边暗示、威仪路——使人惊异,这就是它的意思。“谄媚”是指见到来寺院的人后,说:“诸位来此有何事?是要邀请比丘吗?若是如此,请先回去,我随后便带比丘们来”等语。以“等”字包括花施等,以及占相之类。而且在这里,以“邪命”一词包括诡诈、谄媚之外的其余不正当求取。以“等”字则应当看到,其余的多欲等及破戒。六十二见,正以缠缚之义、如网之相,称为网;解开它,就是不缠缚。巴利
Saṅghaṃ ñāpesīti ettha heṭṭhā vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Kataraṃ āvuso piṭakanti vinayāvasesesu dvīsu piṭakesu kataraṃ piṭakaṃ. Vinayābhidhammānampi khuddakasaṅgītipariyāpannattā tamantarena vuttaṃ ‘‘suttantapiṭake catasso saṅgītiyo’’ti. Saṅgītiyoti ca saṅgāyanakāle dīghādivasena visuṃ visuṃ niyametvā saṅgayhamānattā nikāyāva vuccanti. Tenāha ‘‘dīghasaṅgīti’’ntiādi. Suttāneva sampiṇḍetvā vaggakaraṇavasena tayo vaggā, nāññānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘catuttiṃsa suttāni tayo vaggā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā catuttisaṃ suttāni tayo vaggā honti, suttāni vā catuttiṃsa, tesaṃ vaggakaraṇavasena tayo vaggā, tesu tīsu vaggesūti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Brahmajālasuttaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti vutte kasmāti codanāsambhavato ‘‘tividhasīlālaṅkata’’ntiādimāha. Hetugabbhāni hi etāni. Cūḷamajjhimamahāsīlavasena tividhassāpi sīlassa pakāsanattā tena alaṅkataṃ vibhūsitaṃ tathā nānāvidhe micchājīvabhūte kuhanalapanādayo viddhaṃsetīti nānāvidhamicchājīvakuhanalapanādividdhaṃsanaṃ. Tattha kuhanāti kuhāyanā, paccayapaṭisevanasāmantajappanairiyāpathasannissitasaṅkhātena tividhena vatthunā vimhāpanāti attho. Lapanāti vihāraṃ āgate manusse disvā ‘‘kimatthāya bhonto āgatā, kiṃ bhikkhū nimantetuṃ. Yadi evaṃ gacchatha, ahaṃ pacchato bhikkhū gahetvā āgacchāmī’’ti evamādinā bhāsanā. Ādisaddena pupphadānādayo, nemittikatādayo ca saṅgaṇhāti. Apicettha micchājīvasaddena kuhanalapanāhi sesaṃ anesanaṃ gaṇhāti. Ādisaddena pana tadavasesaṃ mahicchatādikaṃ dussilyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo eva paliveṭhanaṭṭhena jālasarikkhatāya jālaṃ, tassa viniveṭhanaṃ apaliveṭhakaraṇaṃ tathā.
“尊者,在王舍城与那烂陀之间”:这里的“之间”一词,是用来表示空隙的,就像“诸比丘,这个从多波达两大地狱之间的缝隙中出来”等说法那样。所以,应该理解为“在王舍城与那烂陀之间的空隙处”。不过,因为和“之间”这个词搭配,所以用了业格。在这类地方,文法家们只用单一的“之间”一词,比如“在村子和河流之间行走”,这个词也必须和第二个词连接起来。如果不连接,业格就不能成立,因为如果换成属格,和“之间”搭配时,需要的正是业格。其中,为了国王娱乐而建造的、有各种巧妙心思和彩绘的楼阁,叫做“王阁”,就在那里。“芒果苗圃”是国王的园林。据说在那座园林的门附近,有一棵幼小的芒果树,人们叫它“芒果苗圃”,因为园林靠近那棵树,所以这座园林也就以“芒果苗圃”这个名字著称了,就像“伐楼那城”那样。因此,意思是:在名叫芒果苗圃、里面有王阁的园林中。之所以说出这两个地点,是为了让不明白的人明白。或者说,“王阁”就是有王阁的园林,意思是:在有王阁的芒果苗圃园林中。有些人说:“即使性相不同,修饰词也是可以存在的。”如果这样,那“王阁”就不是地点的修饰语了。金刚觉长老说:“‘王阁’就是在这样命名的园林中,据说有值得娱乐的王阁。在那里,因为什么缘故得到这个名字呢?”照这样说,“在芒果苗圃”是以近处的幼芒果树来区分,“王阁”则是以名称来说园林;这样一来,意思就成立了,但前面说的过失也还是存在。
“及须卑那游行僧”:名叫须卑那的,是散若耶的弟子,以及阐那游行僧。“及梵授青年”:这里“青年”一词用来指年轻人,就像“阿摩昼青年、盎伽青年”等经文中那样。所以,意思是“名为梵授的年轻男子”。“誉与毁”:就是称赞和指责。或者,功德是“誉”,没有功德是“毁”;说这两者的时候,省略了后一个词,所以这样说,就像“色有”说成“色”一样。巴利
Antarā ca bhante rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandanti ettha antarāsaddo vivare ‘‘apicāyaṃ bhikkhave tapodādvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) viya. Tasmā rājagahassa ca nāḷandassa ca vivareti attho daṭṭhabbo. Antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti. Ayojiyamāne hi upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarāsaddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Tattha rañño kīḷanatthaṃ paṭibhānacittavicitraagāramakaṃsu, taṃ ‘‘rājāgāraka’’nti vuccati, tasmiṃ. Ambalaṭṭhikāti rañño uyyānaṃ. Tassa kira dvārasamīpe taruṇo ambarukkho atthi, taṃ ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikā’’ti vadanti, tassa samīpe pavattattā uyyānampi ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikā’’ tveva saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ yathā ‘‘varuṇanagara’’nti, tasmā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ nāma uyyāne rājāgāraketi attho. Aviññāyamānassa hi viññāpanatthaṃ etaṃ ādhāradvayaṃ vuttaṃ rājāgārametassāti vā rājāgārakaṃ, uyyānaṃ, rājāgāravati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ nāma uyyāneti attho. Bhinnaliṅgampi hi visesanapadamatthī’’ti keci vadanti, evaṃ sati rājāgāraṃ ādhāro na siyā. ‘‘Rājāgāraketi evaṃnāmake uyyāne abhiramanārahaṃ kira rājāgārampi. Tattha, yassa vasenetaṃ evaṃ nāmaṃ labhatī’’ti (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vajirabuddhitthero. Evaṃ sati ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikāya’’nti āsannataruṇambarukkhena visesetvā ‘‘rājāgārake’’ti uyyānameva nāmavasena vuttanti attho āpajjati, tathā ca vuttadosova siyā. Suppiyañca paribbājakanti suppiyaṃ nāma sañcayassa antevāsiṃ channaparibbājakañca. Brahmadattañca māṇavanti ettha taruṇo ‘‘māṇavo’’ti vutto ‘‘ambaṭṭho māṇavo, aṅgako māṇavo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.259, 211) viya, tasmā brahmadattaṃ nāma taruṇapurisañca ārabbhāti attho. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇeti pasaṃsāya ceva garahāya ca. Atha vā guṇo vaṇṇo, aguṇo avaṇṇo, tesaṃ bhāsanaṃ uttarapadalopena tathā vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘rūpabhavo rūpa’’nti.
“此后”这一段话的叙述次第是这样的:贤友阿难,《沙门果经》是在哪里说的?尊者,在王舍城耆婆庵罗林。和谁一起说的?和韦提希子阿阇世一起说的。于是,具寿大迦叶向具寿阿难问了《沙门果经》的缘起,也问了相关的人物。这里不说“是关于谁”,而应该说“是和谁一起”。为什么呢?因为这部经并不是只由世尊一个人说的,国王也说了“正如这些种种技艺处……”等一些内容,所以就应该这样说。应当知道,按照这个道理,在一切地方,或者根据情况说“是关于谁”,或者说“是和谁一起”,然后进行结集。“经”:是指按经与品的合集而确定的圣典。这样,“三品所摄、三十四经所庄严”这个说法才成立。“护持”:就是以受持、读诵等方式持守。此后紧接着结集,文句就是这样衔接的。巴利
‘‘Tato para’’ntiādimhi ayaṃ vacanakkamo – sāmaññaphalaṃ panāvuso ānanda kattha bhāsitanti? Rājagahe bhante jīvakambavaneti. Kena saddhinti? Ajātasattunā vedehiputtena saddhinti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sāmaññaphalassa nidānampi pucchi, puggalampi pucchīti. Ettha hi ‘‘kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti avatvā ‘‘kena saddhi’’nti vattabbaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Na bhagavatā eva etaṃ suttaṃ bhāsitaṃ, raññāpi ‘‘yathā nu kho imāni puthusippāyatanānī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.163) kiñci kiñci vuttamatthi, tasmā evameva vattabbanti. Imināva nayena sabbattha ‘‘kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti vā ‘‘kena saddhi’’nti vā yathārahaṃ vatvā saṅgītimakāsīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tantinti suttavaggasamudāyavasena vavatthitaṃ pāḷiṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘tivaggasaṅgahaṃ catuttiṃsasuttapaṭimaṇḍita’’nti vacanaṃ upapannaṃ hoti. Pariharathāti uggahaṇavācanādivasena dhāretha. Tato anantaraṃ saṅgāyitvāti sambandho.
“以及法集”等,这是复合词的略说方式。意思是:这是古德们所注释的内容。由此,先破斥了异端论者的主张——“与《大法心》或《大界论》一起,七论名为阿毗达摩藏”,然后显示同派论者的主张——“只与《论事》一起”。因为这是细智的境界,或者说,是具细智者们的境界,所以是微细智所行的领域。巴利
‘‘Dhammasaṅgaho cā’’tiādinā samāso. Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇitaṃ porāṇakehīti attho. Etena ‘‘mahādhammahadayena, mahādhātukathāya vā saddhiṃ sattappakaraṇaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ vitaṇḍavādimataṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘kathāvatthunāva saddhi’’nti vuttaṃ samānavādimataṃ dasseti. Saṇhañāṇassa, saṇhañāṇavantānaṃ vā visayabhāvato sukhumañāṇagocaraṃ.
小义释和大义释这两种,就是“义释”。长部诵者说:像本生这类属于小部经典、而且大多数是解释法义的经典,应该归入阿毗达摩藏,而不是归入长部等那样的经藏,也不是归入以施设解释为体的律藏;所以他们主张本生等归入阿毗达摩藏。这里没有收《行藏》和《佛种姓》,因为它们的性质属于本生;也没有收《导论》《藏释》等,因为它们的性质属于义释和无碍解道。但中部诵者说:像本生这类依因缘而说的经典,因为其说法方式随顺,应该归入经藏,而不是归入以自性法解释为体、如法教诫的阿毗达摩藏,也不是归入以施设解释为体、如罪教诫的律藏;所以他们主张本生等属于经藏。对此应当审察之后,合理地取舍。巴利
Cūḷaniddesamahāniddesavasena duvidhopi niddeso. Jātakādike khuddakanikāyapariyāpanne, yebhuyyena ca dhammaniddesabhūte tādise abhidhammapiṭakeva saṅgaṇhituṃ yuttaṃ, na pana dīghanikāyādippakāre suttantapiṭake, nāpi paññattiniddesabhūte vinayapiṭaketi dīghabhāṇakā jātakādīnaṃ abhidhammapiṭake saṅgahaṃ vadanti. Cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsānañcettha aggahaṇaṃ jātakagatikattā, nettipeṭakopadesādīnañca niddesapaṭisambhidāmaggagatikattā. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana aṭṭhuppattivasena desitānaṃ jātakādīnaṃ yathānulomadesanābhāvato tādise suttantapiṭake saṅgaho yutto, na pana sabhāvadhammaniddesabhūte yathādhammasāsane abhidhammapiṭake, nāpi paññattiniddesabhūte yathāparādhasāsane vinayapiṭaketi jātakādīnaṃ suttantapiṭakapariyāpannataṃ vadanti. Yuttamettha vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ.
像这样,先用特征、目的、时间、地点、作者和方式这些方面说明了第一次结集,现在为了显示在其中确定下来的法和律里种种善巧的差别——也就是一种等分类——而说了“evametaṃ”等话。其中,“evaṃ”这个词,通过“eta”这个词所指代的内容,指示了前面所说的结集方式。“yaṃ hi”等是详细展开。“无上正等正觉”指以无碍智为直接基础的道智,以及以道智为直接基础的无碍智。“于此中间”指正觉与般涅槃之间的间隔。“这四十五年”是按时间来确定。“以观察者”是指依优陀那等方式而转起的法。“所说的这一切话”是连接。那是什么呢?回答说“就是解脱味”,意思是并非其他味。“已解脱”就是解脱,“应尝、应品味”就是味——因为具有解脱之味,所以是解脱味,也就是阿罗汉果的滋味。这是阿阇梨舍利弗长老的意见(《心义疏·第一大结集语释》)。阿阇梨法护长老则把它作为一种说法,这样解释此义:“已解脱、已解脱故为解脱,随其所应即是道与果。味就是功德,或者成就的作用,按前面所说的方式构成复合词。也就是解脱的功德,或者由成就道果而具有的解脱成就,或者由彻底解脱烦恼而成就的解脱作用”(《长部疏·第一大结集语释》)。不过在《增支部注释》中说:“在义味、法味等当中,义味就是四种沙门果,法味就是四种道,解脱味就是不死涅槃。”巴利
Evaṃ nimittapayojanakāladesakārakakaraṇappakārehi paṭhamaṃ saṅgītiṃ dassetvā idāni tattha vavatthāpitesu dhammavinayesu nānappakārakosallatthaṃ ekavidhādibhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evameta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘eva’’nti iminā etasaddena parāmasitabbaṃ yathāvuttasaṅgītippakāraṃ nidasseti. ‘‘Yañhī’’tiādi vitthāro. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ. Etthantareti abhisambujjhanassa, parinibbāyanassa ca vivare. Tadetaṃ pañcacattālīsa vassānīti kālavasena niyameti. Paccavekkhantena vāti udānādivasena pavattadhammaṃ sandhāyāha. Yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ tanti sambandho. Kiṃ panetanti āha ‘‘vimuttirasamevā’’ti, na tadaññarasanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vimuccitthāti vimutti, rasitabbaṃ assādetabbanti rasaṃ, vimuttisaṅkhātaṃ rasametassāti vimuttirasaṃ, arahattaphalassādanti attho. Ayaṃ ācariyasāriputtattherassa mati (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā). Ācariyadhammapālatthero pana taṃ kecivādaṃ katvā imamatthamāha ‘‘vimuccati vimuccitthāti vimutti, yathārahaṃ maggo phalañca. Rasanti guṇo, sampattikiccaṃ vā , vuttanayena samāso. Vimuttānisaṃsaṃ, vimuttisampattikaṃ vā maggaphalanipphādanato, vimuttikiccaṃ vā kilesānamaccantavimuttisampādanatoti attho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā). Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘attharasassādīsu attharaso nāma cattāri sāmaññaphalāni, dhammaraso nāma cattāro maggā, vimuttiraso nāma amatanibbāna’’nti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.335) vuttaṃ.
虽然从共通层面来说,一切佛语都因为能调伏烦恼而属于律,对于按照教导修行的人来说,又因为能令他不堕入恶趣等而具有任持的作用,所以也是法,但在这里,为了随顺所特指的法与律的用语意趣,要从它们各自的具体内容上明确区分出来,所以才说“其中,律藏”等等。其余的佛语则是法,因为多数是从蕴等角度来宣说自性之法的。或者也可以说,虽然律本身也是法,因为它属于教法等的范畴,但当“律”这个词出现时,由于所依据的事项不同,所用的“法”这个词就恰恰显示的是与律相对的法藏,就像“福德与智资粮,牛与黄牛”这样的例子一样。为了通过实际用法来显示这个意思,所以说“因此他说”等等。意思是:因为律……法,所以在《结集犍度》(《小品》347)中说明了它们如此的性质。巴利
Kiñcāpi avisesena sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ kilesavinayanena vinayo, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyapatanādito dhāraṇena dhammo ca hoti, tathāpi idhādhippeteyeva dhammavinaye vatticchāvasena sarūpato niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha vinayapiṭaka’’ntiādimāha. Avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhammo khandhādivasena sabhāvadhammadesanābāhullato. Atha vā yadipi vinayo ca dhammoyeva pariyattiyādibhāvato, tathāpi vinayasaddasannidhāne bhinnādhikaraṇabhāvena payutto dhammasaddo vinayatanti viparītaṃ tantimeva dīpeti yathā ‘‘puññañāṇasambhārā, gobalībadda’’nti. Payogavasena taṃ dassentena ‘‘tenevāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena vinaya…pe… dhammo, teneva tesaṃ tathābhāvaṃ saṅgītikkhandhake (cūḷava. 347) āhāti attho.
“多生轮回”这首偈颂,是世尊在回顾自己以一切知智为直接基础而证得阿罗汉果时,在第十九种回顾智之后紧接着说出的,因此被称为“第一佛语”。据说这是诸佛都不曾舍离的优陀那。它的简要含义是:我为了寻找这个被称为有身之家的建造者——那个像木匠一样的渴爱,以能够看见它的智慧,也就是菩提智为目标,在燃灯佛足下发下誓愿,此后经过那么长的时间,在多生轮回、数以百千生计的轮回流转中,一直找不到、得不到那个智慧,就这样不断奔走、不断轮回。因为生夹杂着老、病、死,所以这个所谓的生一次又一次地到来,是苦;而在没有看见那个建造者之前,这苦就不会停止,所以为了寻找它而不断奔走。现在,被称为有身之家的建造者——像木匠一样的渴爱啊,你已经被证得一切知智的我看见了。你不会再建造我这个被称为有身之家的房子了。你所有的残余烦恼,那些肋骨,已经被我打碎、摧毁了。由你所造的这座被称为有身之家的房子,它的屋顶、也就是被称为无明的顶盖,已经被拆散、摧毁了。现在,我的心已经以无为涅槃为所缘而进入其中。而我已经证得了被称为渴爱灭尽的阿罗汉道,或者阿罗汉果。不过在《义释》里则说:那颗趣向无为的心本身,就是证得了被称为渴爱灭尽的阿罗汉道,或者阿罗汉果。巴利
‘‘Anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti ayaṃ gāthā bhagavatā attano sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ arahattappattiṃ paccavekkhantena ekūnavīsatimassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa anantaraṃ bhāsitā, tasmā ‘‘paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti vuttā. Idaṃ kira sabbabuddhehi avijahitaṃ udānaṃ. Ayamassa saṅkhepattho – ahaṃ imassa attabhāvasaṅkhātassa gehassa kārakaṃ taṇhāvaḍḍhakiṃ gavesanto yena ñāṇena taṃ daṭṭhuṃ sakkā, tassa bodhiñāṇassatthāya dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhāro ettakaṃ kālaṃ anekajātisaṃsāraṃ anekajātisatasahassasaṅkhyaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ anibbisaṃ anibbisanto taṃ ñāṇaṃ avindanto alabhantoyeva sandhāvissaṃ saṃsariṃ. Yasmā jarābyādhimaraṇamissatāya jāti nāmesā punappunaṃ upagantuṃ dukkhā, na ca sā tasmiṃ adiṭṭhe nivattati, tasmā taṃ gavesanto sandhāvissanti attho. Idāni bho attabhāvasaṅkhātassa gehassa kāraka taṇhāvaḍḍhaki tvaṃ mayā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhantena diṭṭho asi. Puna imaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ mama gehaṃ na kāhasi na karissasi. Tava sabbā avasesakilesa phāsukā mayā bhaggā bhañjitā . Imassa tayā katassa attabhāvasaṅkhātassa gehassa kūṭaṃ avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ kaṇṇikamaṇḍalaṃ visaṅkhataṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ. Idāni mama cittaṃ visaṅkhāraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gataṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Ahañca taṇhānaṃ khaya saṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigato pattosmīti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana visaṅkhāragataṃ cittameva taṇhānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigatanti attho vutto.
关于“sandhāvissaṃ”这个词,此处语词学家说:“在这首偈颂里,这个词是过去时的意思。”有些人则说:“按照时态所表达的心愿,在过去时里也可以表达未来。”“punappunaṃ”是表示“屡屡”意思的助词。“phāsu”是把pa音变成pha音,意思是应当饮用、应当守护;或者也可以说phāsu是“应当触”的意思,它本身就是phāsukā。“ajjhagā”这个词,他们说:“这是今天的意思,或者是过去的意思。”如果以心为作者,那就只是过去时。据说世尊是以内心自语的方式说出“anekajātisaṃsāra”这两首偈颂的,所以这是由意所转起的法的开端。而“yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā”这一首,他们说是由语所转起的法。巴利
‘‘Sandhāvissa’’nti ettha ca ‘‘gāthāyamatītatthe imissa’’nti neruttikā. ‘‘Taṃkālavacanicchāyamatītepi bhavissantī’’ti keci. Punappunanti abhiṇhatthe nipāto. Pātabbā rakkhitabbāti phāsu pa-kārassa pha-kāraṃ katvā, phusitabbāti vā phāsu, sāyeva phāsukā. Ajjhagāti ca ‘‘ajjataniyamāttamiṃ vā aṃ vā’’ti vadanti. Yadi pana cittameva kattā, tadā parokkhāyeva. Antojappanavasena kira bhagavā ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti gāthādvayamāha, tasmā esā manasā pavattitadhammānamādi. ‘‘Yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’ti ayaṃ pana vācāya pavattitadhammānanti vadanti.
有些持诵《犍度》的人这样说。不过,先说的是持诵《法句》者的主张。在“Yadā…pe…dhammā”这一段里,“iti”这个词是省略的说法,既有举例的意思,也有起始的意思。因为如果没有举例、也就是没有限定性的说明,光靠那些颠倒词义的人,意思是不能完整的。在那里,只取“iti”的起始义,所以“iti”这个词表示起始,正如阿阇梨舍利弗长老在《心义疏·第一结集语释》中所说:“由此,‘iti’这个词统摄了以‘tena ātāpino…pe…sahetudhamma’等为首的三首偈颂。”所谓“Khandhaka”,是指《大品》。所谓“Udānagāthā”,是按类别说的单数;在这里也应理解为只取第一首偈颂来说。巴利
Kecīti khandhakabhāṇakā. Paṭhamaṃ vutto pana dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ vādo. Yadā…pe… dhammāti ettha nidassanattho, ādyattho ca iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Nidassanena hi mariyādavacanena vinā padatthavipallāsakārināva attho paripuṇṇo na hoti. Tattha ādyatthameva iti-saddaṃ gahetvā iti-saddo ādiattho, ‘‘tena ātāpino…pe… sahetudhamma’ntiādigāthāttayaṃ saṅgaṇhātī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ. Khandhaketi mahāvagge. Udānagāthanti jātiyā ekavacanaṃ, tatthāpi vā paṭhamagāthameva gahetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,持诵《犍度》的人这样说:“持诵《法句》者的偈颂只是以意门宣说的,所以当时没有给广大人群带来利益;而我们的偈颂是发出言语来宣说的,所以当时给听闻的诸天和梵天带来了利益,因此这才是最初的佛语。”但持诵《法句》的人则说:“宣说对人群有没有利益,并不能作为判定是不是最初佛语的标准。因为这是世尊最初以意门宣说的,所以这才是最初的佛语。”因此应当知道,两种说法从各自的角度都能成立。有人问:如果“anekajātisaṃsāra”这首偈颂只是以意门宣说的,那为什么在《法句注》里说“导师坐在菩提树下,以自说语的方式诵出‘anekajātisaṃsāra’这一佛法开示,后来被阿难长老问起才讲述”呢?回答:那是按照义理来理解的。因为在那里也应当理解为“以意门自说”。正如开示有“以意门自说”和“以言语自说”两种,自说也同样有这两种。如果这是以言语自说,就应该被收入《自说经》中;所以,正因为没有被收入《自说经》,就应当看出:这不是以言语自说,而是以意门自说的理由。“成道之时”这一说法,不应和“证得一切知智之时”联系在一起,而应和“观察缘起时生起的”联系在一起。因为世尊正是在毗舍佉月满月日的黎明时分证得一切知智的。虽然在世俗的时间观念里也可以这样搭配,但不能因此就把它当作教法时间来看待。喜悦本身就是喜悦所成的,就像说“布施所成、持戒所成”一样,这里的意思是“与那喜悦相应的智”。或者也可以说,是由与喜悦俱生等力量所造就的,也就是那样的智。巴利
Ettha ca khandhakabhāṇakā evaṃ vadanti ‘‘dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ gāthā manasāva desitattā tadā mahato janassa upakārāya nāhosi, amhākaṃ pana gāthā vacībhedaṃ katvā desitattā tadā suṇantānaṃ devabrahmānaṃ upakārāya ahosi, tasmā idameva paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti. Dhammapadabhāṇakā pana ‘‘desanāya janassa upakārānupakārabhāvo paṭhamabhāve lakkhaṇaṃ na hoti, bhagavatā manasā paṭhamaṃ desitattā idameva paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti vadanti . Tasmā ubhayampi ubhayathā yujjatīti veditabbaṃ. Nanu ca yadi ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti gāthā manasāva desitā, atha kasmā dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’nti imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ satthā bodhirukkhamūle nisinno udānavasena udānetvā aparabhāge ānandattherena puṭṭho kathesī’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.152 udānavatthu) vuttanti? Atthavasena tathāyeva gahetabbattā. Tatthāpi hi manasā udānetvāti atthoyeva gahetabbo. Desanā viya hi udānampi manasā udānaṃ, vacasā udānanti dvidhā viññāyati. Yadi cāyaṃ vacasā udānaṃ siyā, udānapāḷiyamāruḷhā bhaveyya , tasmā udānapāḷiyamanāruḷhabhāvoyeva vacasā anudānetvā manasā udānabhāve kāraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Pāṭipadadivase’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sabbaññubhāvappattassā’’ti etena na sambajjhitabbaṃ, ‘‘paccavekkhantassa uppannā’’ti etena pana sambajjhitabbaṃ. Visākhapuṇṇamāyameva hi bhagavā paccūsasamaye sabbaññutaṃ patto. Lokiyasamaye pana evampi sambajjhanaṃ bhavati, tathāpi nesa sāsanasamayoti na gahetabbaṃ. Somanassameva somanassamayaṃ yathā ‘‘dānamayaṃ, sīlamaya’’nti, (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 34) taṃsampayuttañāṇenāti attho. Somanassena vā sahajātādisattiyā pakataṃ, tādisena ñāṇenātipi vaṭṭati.
“Handā”这个词是表示催促的虚词。因为“iṅgha sampādetha”就是催促的意思。“Āmantayāmi”是告知、让人知道,“vo”则是“āmantayāmi”这个动词的宾语。文字学家们说“在称呼的用法里只用第二格,不用第四格”,并拿这个作为例子。“Vayadhammā”是通过无常相,同时也阐明了诸行的苦相和无我相,因为经中说:“凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无我。”应当知道,正是以阐明三相的方式,开示了以这三相为所缘的观智,从而揭示了不为一切外道所触及、唯佛独有的、以四谛为业处基础的、无颠倒的、趣向涅槃的修行道路。现在,用“appamādena sampādetha”劝导人投入这正确的修行,意思是:以不放逸去成就那以四谛为业处基础、无颠倒、趣向涅槃的修行道路。此外,先用“vayadhammā saṅkhārā”简略地激发起悚惧感,再用“appamādena sampādetha”同样简略地开示了完整无余的正行道。因为“不放逸”这个词统摄了三学,涵盖了完整圆满的教法;意思是:以不放逸去成就那统摄三学、完整圆满、名为教法的正行道。“Ubhinnamantare”是指在两句话之间、中间。这里也应当知道,因为不放逸与时机不可分离,所以也顺带显示了时机。巴利
Handāti codanatthe nipāto. Iṅgha sampādethāti hi codeti. Āmantayāmīti paṭivedayāmi, bodhemīti attho. Voti pana ‘‘āmantayāmī’’ti etassa kammapadaṃ. ‘‘Āmantanatthe dutiyāyeva, na catutthī’’ti hi vatvā tamevudāharanti akkharacintakā. Vayadhammāti aniccalakkhaṇamukhena saṅkhārānaṃ dukkhānattalakkhaṇampi vibhāveti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15, 45, 76, 77; 2.3.1, 4; paṭi. ma. 2.10) vacanato. Lakkhaṇattayavibhāvananayeneva ca tadārammaṇaṃ vipassanaṃ dassento sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ buddhāveṇikaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānaṃ aviparītaṃ nibbānagāminipaṭipadaṃ pakāsetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idāni tattha sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojeti ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti, tāya catusaccakammaṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānāya aviparītanibbānagāminipaṭipadāya appamādena sampādethāti attho. Apica ‘‘vayadhammā saṅkhārā’’ti etena saṅkhepena saṃvejetvā ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti saṅkhepeneva niravasesaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti . Appamādapadañhi sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ sāsanaṃ pariyādiyitvā tiṭṭhati, sikkhattayasaṅgahitāya kevalaparipuṇṇāya sāsanasaṅkhātāya sammāpaṭipattiyā appamādena sampādethāti attho. Ubhinnamantareti dvinnaṃ vacanānamantarāḷe vemajjhe. Ettha hi kālavatā kālopi nidassito tadavinābhāvittāti veditabbo.
“经藏”这个词里,“经”本身就是“经藏”,就像“kammanta、vananta”那样的构词方式。“已结集的和未结集的”则是总说一切种类。“未结集的”指的是在结集中被归入犍度、论事等的内容。不过有些人说“《须跋经》在第一次结集时没有被结集”,这说不通。因为法护长老在《长部注·第一次结集解说》里说:“《须跋经》早在第一次结集之前,就已经由住在祇园精舍的具寿阿难长老为须跋青年说过了。”而《须跋经》确实是以“如是我闻:一时,具寿阿难住在舍卫城祇园,世尊般涅槃后不久……”这样的方式开头的。那么问题来了:在第一次结集时,由具寿阿难长老亲口说出“如是我闻”这样的话,是不合适的。因为阿难长老不可能自己宣说了《须跋经》,然后又来说“如是我闻”等等。他应该这样说才对:“一时,我住在舍卫城祇园……”等等。所以看起来,是第二次、第三次结集的参与者们用“如是我闻”这样的开头,把《须跋经》编入了结集。不过,法护长老的意思可能是这样的:“即使《须跋经》是阿难长老所说的,那些想把这部经编入第一次结集、确立为圣典的大迦叶长老等人,也是按照其他经里出现的方式,用‘如是我闻’等语句把它确立为圣典的。”这样解释就说得通了。或者也可以这样理解:具寿阿难在亲自宣说《须跋经》时,也是按照世尊在沙门果等经中的说法方式来说的,因为他依据的是从世尊面前得到的教法,所以并没有把世尊所说的法当作自己的东西,而是说“如是我闻”等等——即使持这种看法,也同样说得通。也有写成“anusaṅgītañca”的读法。在第二次、第三次结集中再次结集,从意义上来说并没有区别。把以上内容归纳起来,应当知道这就是“律藏”;经……乃至……应当知道这就是“论藏”。巴利
Suttantapiṭakanti ettha suttameva suttantaṃ yathā ‘‘kammantaṃ, vananta’’nti. Saṅgītañca asaṅgītañcāti sabbasarūpamāha. ‘‘Asaṅgītanti ca saṅgītikkhandhakakathāvatthuppakaraṇādi. Keci pana ‘subhasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 1.444) paṭhamasaṅgītiyamasaṅgīta’nti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. Paṭhamasaṅgītito puretarameva hi āyasmatā ānandattherena jetavane viharantena subhassa māṇavassa bhāsita’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Subhasuttaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ me suttaṃ ekaṃ samayaṃ āyasmā ānando sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme aciraparinibbute bhagavatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.444) āgataṃ. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādivacanaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ āyasmatā ānandatthereneva vattuṃ yuttarūpaṃ na hoti. Na hi ānandatthero sayameva subhasuttaṃ desetvā ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādīni vadati. Evaṃ pana vattabbaṃ siyā ‘‘ekamidāhaṃ bhante samayaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ viharāmi jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’tiādi. Tasmā dutiyatatiyasaṅgītikārakehi ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā subhasuttaṃ saṅgītimāropitaṃ viya dissati. Athācariyadhammapālattherassa evamadhippāyo siyā ‘‘ānandatthereneva vuttampi subhasuttaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītimāropetvā tantiṃ ṭhapetukāmehi mahākassapattherādīhi aññesu suttesu āgatanayeneva ‘evaṃ me suta’ntiādinā tanti ṭhapitā’’ti. Evaṃ sati yujjeyya. Atha vā āyasmā ānando subhasuttaṃ sayaṃ desentopi sāmaññaphalādīsu bhagavatā desitanayeneva desesīti bhagavato sammukhā laddhanaye ṭhatvā desitattā bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ attani adahanto ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādimāhāti evamadhippāyepi sati yujjateva. ‘‘Anusaṅgītañcā’’tipi pāṭho. Dutiyatatiyasaṅgītīsu puna saṅgītañcāti atthavasena ninnānākaraṇameva. Samodhānetvā vinayapiṭakaṃ nāma veditabbaṃ, sutta…pe… abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāma veditabbanti yojanā.
按比丘和比丘尼的波罗提木叉来说,有两部波罗提木叉。按比丘分别和比丘尼分别来说,有两部分别。在大品和小品中出现的,有二十二个犍度。因为每一个都以十六种方式加以区分,所以说为“十六附随”。在《附随》的巴利文本中,大分别里有十六种方式,比丘尼分别里也有十六种方式,一共出现三十二种方式。不过,在某些写本中只见到“附随”这个词而已,但在许多写本、律藏注释和阿毗达摩注释中,都同样见到“十六附随”的说法,所以这种读法也不能排斥,因此按这个意思来解释。“如是”是指出前面所说的佛语之后,用“此”来指代它。或者,“iti”这个词用于“此”的意思,“idaṃ”只是言辞上的顺适搭配;或者“iti idaṃ”这两个同义词都用于“此”的意思,就像“如今现在存在”这类说法中那样。在这类地方,道理也是这样。梵网等三十四部经收录在这里面,或者以这个收摄它们,或者它们的收摄和计数属于这个,所以叫“梵网等三十四经的收摄”。其余地方也是这样。在前面所说的长部诵者和中部诵者的主张中,因为中部诵者的主张更为合理,所以把《小诵》等也收进经藏来显示,说“小诵……中略……名为经藏”。其中,因为有人说“谛听已修习者的偈颂,它们是导向义利的”(《长老偈·序偈》),所以“长老偈、长老尼偈”这种读法是合理的。巴利
Bhikkhubhikkhunīpātimokkhavasena ubhayāni pātimokkhāni. Bhikkhubhikkhunīvibhaṅgavasena dve vibhaṅgā. Mahāvaggacūḷavaggesu āgatā dvāvīsati khandhakā. Paccekaṃ soḷasahi vārehi upalakkhitattā soḷasa parivārāti vuttaṃ. Parivārapāḷiyañhi mahāvibhaṅge soḷasa vārā, bhikkhunīvibhaṅge soḷasa vārā cāti bāttiṃsa vārā āgatā. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘parivārā’’ti ettakameva dissati, bahūsu pana potthakesu vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘soḷasa parivārā’’ti evameva dissamānattā ayampi pāṭho na sakkā paṭibāhitunti tassevattho vutto. ‘‘Itī’’ti yathāvuttaṃ buddhavacanaṃ nidassetvā ‘‘ida’’nti taṃ parāmasati. Iti-saddo vā idamatthe, idanti vacanasiliṭṭhatāmattaṃ, iti idanti vā pariyāyadvayaṃ idamattheyeva vattati ‘‘idānetarahi vijjatī’’tiādīsu viya. Esa nayo īdisesu. Brahmajālādīni catuttiṃsa suttāni saṅgayhanti ettha, etena vā, tesaṃ vā saṅgaho gaṇanā etassāti brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho. Evamitaresupi. Heṭṭhā vuttesu dīghabhāṇakamajjhimabhāṇakānaṃ vādesu majjhimabhāṇakānaññeva vādassa yuttatarattā khuddakapāṭhādayopi suttantapiṭakeyeva saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘khuddaka…pe… suttantapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti āha. Tattha ‘‘suṇātha bhāvitattānaṃ, gāthā atthūpanāyikāti (theragā. nidānagāthā) vuttattā ‘‘theragāthā therīgāthā’’ti ca pāṭho yutto.
像这样按自身形态确定三藏之后,现在为了说明词源解释,说了“其中”等话。“其中”,就是指那三种藏当中。由于种种不同的理趣,就是由于种种理趣,以及由于特别的理趣。由于调伏,就是从调伏的状态来说;这里是以状态为重点的说明,或者是省略了状态。否则,如果以实物本身为重点,那么具有调伏状态这一功德的调伏实物本身就会作为原因而被称为“律”,而不是因为调伏状态这一功德才得名,这样就会导致非预期的含义。这个道理在类似情况下也适用。或者,“被调伏”就是调伏,意思是“由彼故”。这个“律”是意义层面的施设,属于概念的“此”,就是律。被称为“律”的,则是声音层面的施设,属于名称的“律”这个名,即被说示。实际上,针对意义施设而阐明名称施设,这就是词源解释。巴利
Evaṃ sarūpato piṭakattayaṃ niyametvā idāni nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu tibbidhesu piṭakesu. Vividhavisesanayattāti vividhanayattā, visesanayattā ca. Vinayanatoti vinayanabhāvato, bhāvappadhānaniddesoyaṃ, bhāvalopo vā, itarathā dabbameva padhānaṃ siyā, tathā ca sati vinayanatāguṇasamaṅginā vinayadabbeneva hetubhūtena vinayoti akkhāto, na pana vinayanatāguṇenāti anadhippetatthappasaṅgo bhaveyya. Ayaṃ nayo edisesu. Vinīyate vā vinayanaṃ, tatoti attho. Ayaṃ vinayoti atthapaññattibhūto saññīsaṅkhāto ayaṃ tanti vinayo. Vinayoti akkhātoti saddapaññattibhūto saññāsaṅkhāto vinayo nāmāti kathito. Atthapaññattiyā hi nāmapaññattivibhāvanaṃ nibbacananti.
现在,为了解释这首偈颂的含义,他说出了“种种”等话。应当按“这里面的理趣有多种,因此由于具有种种理趣,所以被称为律”这样的方式去连接理解。他用“五种”等说法,从本身的样子来显示“种种”这一性质;同样,也用“坚固业”等说法来显示其差别。对于涉及世间罪的学处,坚固业是必要的;对于涉及施设罪的学处,放宽则是必要的。超越了防护界限而发生的举止,就是违越行,也就是违犯;这种行为发生在身体和言语上,而对它的遮止也正是如此,因此,这种遮止本身在方便说的意义上,就被称为对身语的调伏。说了“因此”之后,为了从多方面说明它,又说“由于种种理趣”等。为了表明所说的偈颂正是为了阐明这样的词义解释,所以说了“由此”等。“由此”,是指以种种理趣等作为原因,用的是工具格的含义。也有人说:为了显示“种种”等句子中所说的功德,而说“由此”等,这也是一种连接方式。如果是这样,那么“由此”就是以种种理趣等作为原因的意思。或者还有人说:为了与“这首偈颂是古德依据所说的话而说”这一说法相呼应,而说“由此”等,这时“由此”一词的意思和第二种理解相同。“此”指的是偈颂的话。“此”指的是“律”这个词,与“词义”一词相连。虽然已经说了“词之义”的连接,但为了显示这个词在一般共相中的特殊差别,所以再次说“此”。而语源学者们则认为,在复合词和派生词已经成立的情况下,由于共相和名词性,对于这类情形,他们希望用另一个词来显示其差别。巴利
Idāni imissā gāthāya atthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘vividhā hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Vividhā ettha nayā, tasmā vividhanayattā vinayoti akkhāto’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Vividhattaṃ sarūpato dasseti ‘‘pañcavidhā’’tiādinā, tathā visesattampi ‘‘daḷhīkammā’’tiādinā. Lokavajjesu sikkhāpadesu daḷhīkammapayojanā, paṇṇattivajjesu sithilakaraṇapayojanā. Saññamavelaṃ abhibhavitvā pavatto ācāro ajjhācāro, vītikkamo, kāye, vācāya ca pavatto so, tassa nisedhanaṃ tathā, tena tathānisedhanameva pariyāyena kāyavācāvinayanaṃ nāmāti dasseti. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti vatvā tassānekadhā parāmasanamāha ‘‘vividhanayattā’’tiādi. Yathāvuttā ca gāthā īdisassa nibbacanassa pakāsanatthaṃ vuttāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāti vividhanayattādihetunā karaṇabhūtenāti vadanti. Apica ‘‘vividhā hī’’tiādivākyassa yathāvuttassa guṇaṃ dassento ‘‘tenā’’tiādimāhātipi sambandhaṃ vadanti. Evaṃ sati tenāti vividhanayattādinā hetubhūtenāti attho. Atha vā yathāvuttavacanameva sandhāya porāṇehi ayaṃ gāthā vuttāti saṃsandetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttantipi vadanti, dutiyanaye viya ‘‘tenā’’ti padassa attho. Etanti gāthāvacanaṃ. Etassāti vinayasaddassa, ‘‘vacanatthā’’ti padena sambandho. ‘‘Vacanassa attho’’ti hi sambandhe vuttepi tassa vacanasāmaññato visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘etassā’’ti puna vuttaṃ. Neruttikā pana samāsataddhitesu siddhesu sāmaññattā, nāmasaddattā ca edisesu saddantarena visesitabhāvaṃ icchanti.
“义”这个词,应当根据上下文,与“由指示……乃至……诸经”这些词按它们与业的关联来搭配。接着用“即彼……”等话来阐明这个意思。在自利、他利等种种不同的义当中,凡是读诵、听闻、教人、思惟、宣说这部经的人,由经所包含的戒等义也属于他自己,因为由此能使他获得成就,所以也属于他人——这部经指示、显明了这两方面。同样地,对于现法义、后世义、世间义、出世间义等种种不同的义,用“等”字来统括。而且这个“义”字是“利益”的同义词,并不是“所说的义”的意思。如果是“所说的义”,那么说“经指示自己所说的义,也指示他人”就成了不合理的说法。因为由经所显明的义,只属于那能显明的经本身,所以它并不指示他人的义;由于没有它应当指示、应当排除的他人的义,也就不应当把自利拿来说。又因为没有离开自利、他利之外的“所说的义”,所以也不应当用“等”字来统括。因此,由于所说的“利益”这个同义词的义在经中并不存在,所以就依持经的人来说自利和他利。巴利
‘‘Atthāna’’nti padaṃ ‘‘sūcanato…pe… suttāṇā’’ti padehi yathārahaṃ kammasambandhavasena yojetabbaṃ. Tamatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘tañhī’’tiādinā. Attatthaparatthādibhede attheti yo taṃ suttaṃ sajjhāyati, suṇāti, vāceti, cinteti, deseti ca, suttena saṅgahito sīlādiattho tassapi hoti, tena parassa sādhetabbato parassapīti tadubhayaṃ taṃ suttaṃ sūceti dīpeti, tathā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthe lokiyalokuttaratthe cāti evamādibhede atthe ādi-saddena saṅgaṇhāti. Atthasaddo cāyaṃ hitapariyāyo, na bhāsitatthavacano. Yadi siyā, suttaṃ attanopi bhāsitatthaṃ sūceti, parassapīti ayamanadhippetattho vutto siyā. Suttena hi yo attho pakāsito, so tasseva pakāsakassa suttassa hoti, tasmā na tena parattho sūcito, tena sūcetabbassa paratthassa nivattetabbassa abhāvā attatthaggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ. Attatthaparatthavinimuttassa bhāsitatthassa abhāvā ādiggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttassa hitapariyāyassa atthassa sutte asambhavato suttādhārassa puggalassa vasena attatthaparatthā vuttā.
或者,不依赖经文,在解释“不为他利,唯赞自利”这句话时(《大义释》63),提到了自利、他利、俱利、现法利、来世利、浅显利、甚深利、隐秘利、覆蔽利、应引利、已引利、无过利、无垢利、清净利、究竟利等种种利益类别,这里要指示的就是这些利益类别——应当这样理解其含义。虽然不依赖经文而说自利等,因为没有以经文之义来说明,所以这些利益类别中,哪怕任何一个,也没有超出必须由经文来阐明的范围。在这样抉择“义”的时候,“义”这个字也可以作为“言说之义”的同义词。因为在这里,前面五种利益类别是“利益”的同义词,其后六种是“言说之义”的类别,最后四种则兼具两种性质。其中,因为容易理解、显了而不深奥,所以是“浅显利”;因为难以证得、显了而深奥,所以是“甚深利”;未曾开显的是“隐秘利”;像树根、水等被泥土等遮蔽那样,被字句组合等所隐匿,所以是“覆蔽利”;须加以引出而告知的,是“应引利”;依文即可解的是“已引利”。无过、无垢、清净,是依同义表达而说,或者依善、异熟、唯作诸法的次第分别配属。究竟利就是涅槃,或者就是诸法不颠倒的自性。巴利
Atha vā suttaṃ anapekkhitvā ye attatthādayo atthappabhedā ‘‘na ha’ññadattha’tthi pasaṃsalābhā’’ti etassa padassa niddese (mahāni. 63) vuttā ‘‘attattho, parattho, ubhayattho, diṭṭhadhammiko attho, samparāyiko attho, uttāno attho, gambhīro attho, gūḷho attho, paṭicchanno attho, neyyo attho, nīto attho, anavajjo attho, nikkileso attho, vodāno attho, paramattho’’ti, (mahāni. 63) te atthappabhede sūcetīti attho gahetabbo. Kiñcāpi hi suttanirapekkhaṃ attatthādayo vuttā suttatthabhāvena aniddiṭṭhattā, tesu pana ekopi atthappabhedo suttena dīpetabbataṃ nātivattatīti. Imasmiñca atthavikappe atthasaddo bhāsitatthapariyāyopi hoti. Ettha hi purimakā pañca atthappabhedā hitapariyāyā, tato pare cha bhāsitatthappabhedā, pacchimakā cattāro ubhayasabhāvā. Tattha suviññeyyatāya vibhāvena anagādhabhāvo uttāno. Duradhigamatāya vibhāvena agādhabhāvo gambhīro. Avivaṭo gūḷho. Mūludakādayo viya paṃsunā akkharasannivesādinā tirohito paṭicchanno. Niddhāretvā ñāpetabbo neyyo. Yathārutavasena veditabbo nīto. Anavajjanikkilesavodānā pariyāyavasena vuttā, kusalavipākakiriyādhammavasena vā yathākkamaṃ yojetabbā. Paramattho nibbānaṃ, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo eva vā.
或者,“自己少欲”是指自利,“讲说少欲之语并令他人少欲”是指他利。这样,“自己远离杀生,也劝导他人远离杀生”等经文就应该按这个方式配属理解。不过另有一些论师说:“按事物本来的样子所说的,是自利;富兰那迦叶等外道的教义,是他利。或者,属于经所收摄的是自利,随顺经的是他利;或者,属于经部义的是自利,属于律与阿毗达摩义的是他利。”而且,应当以律和阿毗达摩来区分,说明“经”这个词的含义。因此,随所化众生的意乐而展开的教说,明显开示了自利、他利等,因为这是它的主要内容;而不是依命令与法的自性而展开的。正因如此,才说“因为指示种种义,所以是经”。这里“sūca”(指示)一词是短音。“这样做了之后,在自己的宗义中说‘这是那位世尊经中所出、经所摄的’,以及‘五百经’等,在这些说法中,‘经’一词应理解为引申用法”——这是阿阇梨舍利弗长老说的。其他人则说,依照上面同样的词源解释,“经”一词也可以用来指称律和阿毗达摩。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘attanā ca appiccho hotī’’ti attatthaṃ, ‘‘appicchakathañca paresaṃ kattā hotī’’ti paratthaṃ sūceti. Evaṃ ‘‘attanā ca pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, parañca pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā samādapetī’’tiādisuttāni (a. ni. 4.99, 265) yojetabbāni. Apare pana ‘‘yathāsabhāvaṃ bhāsitaṃ attatthaṃ, pūraṇakassapādīnamaññatitthiyānaṃ samayabhūtaṃ paratthaṃ sūceti, suttena vā saṅgahitaṃ attatthaṃ, suttānulomabhūtaṃ paratthaṃ, suttantanayabhūtaṃ vā attatthaṃ, vinayābhidhammanayabhūtaṃ paratthaṃ sūcetī’’tipi vadanti. Vinayābhidhammehi ca visesetvā suttasaddassa attho vattabbo, tasmā veneyyajjhāsayavasappavattāya desanāya sātisayaṃ attahitaparahitādīni pakāsitāni honti tappadhānabhāvato, na pana āṇādhammasabhāva-vasappavattāyāti idameva ‘‘atthānaṃ sūcanato sutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Sūca-saddassa cettha rasso. ‘‘Evañca katvā ‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpanna’nti (pāci. 655, 1242) ca sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’ti (aṭṭhasā. nidānakathā, kathā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ca evamādīsu suttasaddo upacaritoti gahetabbo’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ. Aññe pana yathāvuttasadiseneva nibbacanena suttasaddassa vinayābhidhammānampi vācakattaṃ vadanti.
在经里,教法本身的性质会随顺所化弟子的意乐;不像在律和阿毗达摩里那样,所化弟子的意乐要随顺教法本身的性质。所以,经的教说能引导所化弟子获得绝对的利益,因此说“此处之义善说”等等。“经的教说能引导所化弟子获得绝对的利益”这句话,也是在说经的教说成就所化弟子利益时,它本身就是主要因素。而它之所以是主要因素,应当理解为它随顺所化弟子的意乐。所以他才说“因为是随顺所化弟子意乐而说的”。按这个道理,难道律和阿毗达摩不也是善说的吗?那为什么唯独这样说呢?他回应了这个诘难。巴利
Sutte ca āṇādhammasabhāvo veneyyajjhāsayamanuvattati, na vinayābhidhammesu viya veneyyajjhāsayo āṇādhammasabhāve, tasmā veneyyānaṃ ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanāti āha ‘‘suvuttā cettha atthā’’tiādi. ‘‘Ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanā’’ti idampi veneyyānaṃ hitasampādane suttantadesanāya tapparabhāvameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tapparabhāvo ca veneyyajjhāsayānulomato daṭṭhabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘veneyyajjhāsayānulomena vuttattā’’ti. Etena ca hetunā nanu vinayābhidhammāpi suvuttā, atha kasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti anuyogaṃ pariharati.
为了说明依照循序渐进的学习等方式、经过一段时间才能成就利益,所以说了“如谷之果”。这段话的意思是:就像谷物并不是在播种、栽种的那一刻就结果,而是要经过逐步培育等,过一段时间才结果;同样,这个法也不是在听闻、受持的那一刻就产生利益,而是要依照循序渐进的学习等方式,过一段时间才产生。所谓“产生”,就是结果、就是成就,因为成就本身就是结果。为了说明只有具备方法的人才能成就利益,所以说了“如牛之乳”。这里的意趣是:就像母牛在适当的时候产下牛犊后,抓住乳房挤奶,只有具备方法的人才能让乳汁流出来,不是在不适当的时候、没有产犊的时候。即使时候适当,如果抓住牛角等不是该抓的地方来挤,没有方法的人也挤不出奶;同样,这个法以出离等为前行,只有具备方法的人听闻、受持,才能让戒等利益流出来,而不是像抓蛇那样,听闻、受持却没有方法的人所能做到。即使把“sūdatī”解释为“沸腾”或“流注”,由于它是及物动词的词根,所以按照使役用法,意思是“使流出”,就像“taratī”的意思是“使落下”一样。对于“suttāṇā”,他解释为“善妙地保护他们”。ne是指义。巴利
Anupubbasikkhādivasena kālantarena atthābhinipphattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sassamiva phala’’nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā sassaṃ nāma vapanaropanādikkhaṇeyeva phalaṃ na pasavati, anupubbajagganādivasena kālantareneva pasavati, tathā idampi savanadhāraṇādikkhaṇeyeva atthe na pasavati, anupubbasikkhādivasena kālantareneva pasavatīti. Pasavatīti ca phalati, abhinipphādetīti attho. Abhinipphādanameva hi phalanaṃ. Upāyasamaṅgīnaññeva atthābhinipphattiṃ dassento ‘‘dhenu viya khīra’’nti āha. Ayamettha adhippāyo – yathā dhenu nāma kāle jātavacchā thanaṃ gahetvā duhataṃ upāyavantānameva khīraṃ paggharāpeti, na akāle ajātavacchā. Kālepi vā visāṇādikaṃ gahetvā duhataṃ anupāyavantānaṃ, tathā idampi nissaraṇādinā savanadhāraṇādīni kurutaṃ upāyavantānameva sīlādiatthe paggharāpeti, na alagaddūpamāya savanadhāraṇādīni kurutaṃ anupāyavantānanti. Yadipi ‘‘sūdatī’’ti etassa gharati siñcatīti attho, tathāpi sakammikadhātuttā paggharāpetīti kāritavasena attho vutto yathā ‘‘taratī’’ti etassa nipātetīti attho’’ti. ‘‘Suttāṇā’’ti etassa atthamāha ‘‘suṭṭhu ca ne tāyatī’’ti. Neti atthe.
“与经同类”是指和经相似。通过“正如……”等语句来说明这种状态。木匠的线,就是木匠用的黑线。因为它被用来作为削切的标准,所以它是标准。这里要表达的是:就像拉出黑线、做好标记之后,什么该取、什么该舍就清楚了,所以它是木匠的标准;同样,当争论发生时,一经引用经典,“这个该取,这个该舍”就变得清楚,争论因此平息,所以经典是智者的标准。现在,为了从另一个角度说明与经同类的性质,又说了“又如……”等话。所谓“以线”,就是用任何结实的线把花穿起来。“被摄持”是指好好地、整齐地拿住,也就是被穿起来的意思。“不散落”是说不会到处散开,“不毁坏”是说不会断裂破碎。这里的意旨是:就像用结实的线穿起来的花不会被风吹散、不会毁坏,同样,以经典摄持的义理不会被邪说散乱、不会被邪说毁坏。而且,由于教说是随顺所化众生的根性而展开的,在自利、利他等方面有特别殊胜的阐明,所以从教令和法性等方面区别于律与阿毗达摩,而唯独说这是与经同类。在“因此……”等语句中,应按照前面所说的方式,随宜说明其关联和含义。这里,虽然前面已经说了“经藏”,但没有用“anta(藏)”这个词,是为了显示它没有单独的含义,因为它是依彼而说的。因为,不提及伴随词“saha”,就表明其余部分与它同格,或者表明它没有意义。巴利
Suttasabhāganti suttasadisaṃ. Tabbhāvaṃ dasseti ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādinā. Tacchakānaṃ suttanti vaḍḍhakīnaṃ kāḷasuttaṃ. Pamāṇaṃ hoti tadanusārena tacchanato. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā kāḷasuttaṃ pasāretvā saññāṇe kate gahetabbaṃ, vissajjetabbañca paññāyati, tasmā taṃ tacchakānaṃ pamāṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ vivādesu uppannesu sutte ānītamatte ‘‘idaṃ gahetabbaṃ, idaṃ vissajjetabba’’nti pākaṭattā vivādo vūpasammati, tasmā etaṃ viññūnaṃ pamāṇanti. Idāni aññathāpi suttasabhāgataṃ vibhāvento ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādimāha. Suttenāti pupphāvutena yena kenaci thirasuttena. Saṅgahitānīti suṭṭhu, samaṃ vā gahitāni, āvutānīti attho. Na vikiriyantīti ito cito ca vippakiṇṇābhāvamāha, na viddhaṃsīyantīti chejjabhejjābhāvaṃ. Ayametthādhippāyo – yathā thirasuttena saṅgahitāni pupphāni vātena na vikiriyanti na viddhaṃsīyanti, evaṃ suttena saṅgahitā atthā micchāvādena na vikiriyanti na viddhaṃsīyantīti. Veneyyajjhāsayavasappavattāya ca desanāya attatthaparatthādīnaṃ sātisayappakāsanato āṇādhammasabhāvehi vinayābhidhammehi visesetvā imasseva suttasabhāgatā vuttā. ‘‘Tenā’’tiādīsu vuttanayānusārena sambandho ceva attho ca yathārahaṃ vattabbo. Ettha ca ‘‘suttantapiṭaka’’nti heṭṭhā vuttepi antasaddassa avacanaṃ tassa visuṃ atthābhāvadassanatthaṃ tabbhāvavuttito. Sahayogassa hi saddassa avacanena sesatā tassa tulyādhikaraṇataṃ, anatthakataṃ vā ñāpeti.
这里,“Yanti”这个不变词表示原因,意思是“由于那个”。在这里,在阿毗达摩中,那些有增长的法被说示,因此它被称为阿毗达摩,应当这样逐一结合理解。根据“abhi”这个前缀的含义而有这种分类,为了显示它依此义而转起并成立此义,所以说了“因为此……”等话。“abhi”这个前缀在动作行为中,表示被称为增长的超越之义,所以说“在‘abhikkamanti(前进)’等词中,它用于增长义”。“Abhiññātā(被善知)”是通过半月等某种标记而被认知,意思是已被了知、已被显明。因为通过月相的特征而产生认知:“因为是半月,所以是初八;因为是月缺,所以是十四;因为是月满,所以是十五。”“Abhilakkhitā(被善标记)”中也应知道同样的意思,不过在《根本五十篇·怖畏经》中,“abhilakkhita”这个词是“abhiññāta”的同义词,所以说“在‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’等中,用于标记义”。如果这样,既然“lakkhita”这个词本身就显示标记义,“abhi”这个前缀岂不是没有意义了吗?不应这样看,因为它也阐明了那个意思。当有表义的词存在时,前缀和不变词只是那个意思的阐明者;因此,由“lakkhita”一词以表义的方式所显示的标记义,再由“abhi”前缀以阐明的方式加以显示,所以说“abhi”前缀也转起于标记义中,应当这样理解。“Rājābhirājā(王中之王)”意思是值得被其他诸王供养的王。“Pūjite(被供养)”意思是值得供养。这在《经集·塞罗经》中。巴利
Yanti esa nipāto kāraṇe, yenāti attho. Ettha abhidhamme vuḍḍhimanto dhammā yena vuttā, tena abhidhammo nāma akkhātoti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Abhi-saddassa atthavasenāyaṃ pabhedoti tassa tadatthappavattatādassanena tamatthaṃ sādhento ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādimāha. Abhi-saddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvasaṅkhātamatirekatthaṃ dīpetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhikkamantītiādīsu vuḍḍhiyaṃ āgato’’ti. Abhiññātāti aḍḍhacandādinā kenaci saññāṇena ñātā, paññātā pākaṭāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aḍḍhacandādibhāvo hi rattiyā upalakkhaṇavasena paññāṇaṃ hoti ‘‘yasmā aḍḍho, tasmā aṭṭhamī. Yasmā ūno, tasmā cātuddasī. Yasmā puṇṇo, tasmā pannarasī’’ti. Abhilakkhitāti etthāpi ayamevattho veditabbo, idaṃ pana mūlapaṇṇāsake bhayabheravasutte (ma. ni. 1.34) abhilakkhitasaddapariyāyo abhiññātasaddoti āha ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitātiādīsu lakkhaṇe’’ti. Yajjevaṃ lakkhitasaddasseva lakkhaṇatthadīpanato abhi-saddo anatthakova siyāti? Nevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ tassāpi tadatthajotanato. Vācakasaddasannidhāne hi upasagganipātā tadatthajotakamattāti lakkhitasaddena vācakabhāvena pakāsitassa lakkhaṇatthasseva jotakabhāvena pakāsanato abhi-saddopi lakkhaṇe pavattatīti vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Rājābhirājāti parehi rājūhi pūjitumaraho rājā. Pūjiteti pūjārahe. Idaṃ pana suttanipāte selasutte (su. ni. 553 ādayo).
在阿毗达摩中,指的是远离与律制混杂的法,比如“即使在梦中遗精也无犯,但仍有不善思”这类说法。由于前后没有矛盾,所说的这些法本身彼此不混杂,所以也说它们是“彼此不混杂的法”。或者说,在“杀生是不善”这类说法中,意图使人死亡、并生起断绝命根之加行的思是不善,而被称为“有情”的命根之断绝本身并不叫“杀”。同样,“取走不属于自己的他人财物,称为‘不与取’的表色是无记法,而生起那表色的偷盗思是不善法”,如此等等,也应理解为“彼此不混杂的法”这个意思。而在“阿毗律”中,说“不应接受金银”,这是在律中教导;说“这样接受就犯波逸提,那样则犯恶作”,这是在阿毗律中教导。因此,以盗心拿取他人金银的人,随具体情况,犯波罗夷、偷兰遮或恶作中的某一种;以库官身份拿取的,犯波逸提;为自己拿取的,犯舍堕波逸提;仅仅因为贪玩而拿取的,犯不可触恶作;被认可为弃钱者的,则不犯。如此,在彼此不混杂的律中也能教导,应知这就是这里的意思。为了从自性上简要显示其限定性,所以说“彼此不……成为……”。巴利
Abhidhammeti ‘‘supinantena sukkavisaṭṭhiyā anāpattibhāvepi akusalacetanā upalabbhatī’’tiādinā (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vinayapaññattiyā saṅkaravirahite dhamme. Pubbāparavirodhābhāvena yathāvuttadhammānameva aññamaññasaṅkaravirahato aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhammetipi vadanti. ‘‘Pāṇātipāto akusala’’nti (ma. ni. 2.192) evamādīsu vā maraṇādhippāyassa jīvitindriyupacchedakapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā akusalo, na pāṇasaṅkhātajīvitindriyassa upacchedasaṅkhāto atipāto. Tathā ‘‘adinnassa parasantakassa ādānasaṅkhātā viññatti abyākato dhammo, taṃviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā akusalo dhammo’’ti evamādināpi aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhammeti attho veditabbo. Abhivinayeti ettha pana ‘‘jātarūparajataṃ na paṭiggahetabba’’nti vadanto vinaye vineti nāma. Ettha ca ‘‘evaṃ paṭiggaṇhato pācittiyaṃ, evaṃ pana dukkaṭa’’nti vadanto abhivinaye vineti nāmāti vadanti. Tasmā jātarūparajataṃ parasantakaṃ theyyacittena gaṇhantassa yathāvatthuṃ pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭesu aññataraṃ, bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena gaṇhantassa pācittiyaṃ, attano atthāya gaṇhantassa nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, kevalaṃ lolatāya gaṇhantassa anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ, rūpiyachaḍḍakasammatassa anāpattīti evaṃ aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite vinayepi paṭibalo vinetunti attho daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ pana paricchinnataṃ sarūpato saṅkhepeneva dassento ‘‘aññamañña…pe… hotī’’ti āha.
在“Abhikkantena”这个词里,abhi-这个前缀表达的是“殊胜”即“增上”的意思,所以说成“增上”。不过,在“abhikkamantī”里,abhi-表示行进动作的增长和超越;在“abhiññātā abhilakkhitā”里,表示智与相这两种动作极其明显、殊胜;在“abhikkantena”里,表示殊胜的增上、殊胜的状态——这样说才合理,因为前缀是动作的差别限定者。语法论典里确实说过:“动词与动作相连时,前缀也与之相连。”可是在“abhirājā, abhivinaye”里,abhi-用在被尊敬、被限定的王和律上,这又怎么说得通呢?因为一个不表示实体的词,不可能成为表示实体的词。这并没有过失,因为它也表示了尊敬、限定这些动作,而且由于这些动作,它也适用于与这些动作相关的王和律。也就是说,以“被殊胜尊敬的王”这个意思,以动作与作者的关系为着眼点,abhi-主要说的是作为业所成的王这个实体,而尊敬这个动作则是次要的。同样,以“被殊胜限定的律”这个意思,以动作与作者的关系为着眼点,abhi-主要说的是作为业所成的律这个实体,而限定这个动作则是次要的。所以,就像“atimāla”等词里的ati-一样,这里的abhi-是和它所带的对象一起表达动作的,因此“abhirāja”“abhivinaya”这些词都是带前缀的复合词,这是成立的。同样,在“abhidhamma”这个词里,abhi-也是和它所带的对象一起表达增长等动作的——应当知道,这个意思已经显示出来了。巴利
Abhikkantenāti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ abhi-saddo dīpetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘adhike’’ti. Nanu ca ‘‘abhikkamantī’’ti ettha abhi-saddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvaṃ atirekattaṃ dīpeti, ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’’ti ettha ñāṇalakkhaṇakiriyānaṃ supākaṭataṃ visesaṃ, ‘‘abhikkantenā’’ti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ visiṭṭhabhāvaṃ dīpetīti idaṃ tāva yuttaṃ kiriyāvisesakattā upasaggassa. ‘‘Pādayo kiriyāyoge upasaggā’’ti hi saddasatthe vuttaṃ. ‘‘Abhirājā, abhivinaye’’ti pana pūjitaparicchinnesu rājavinayesu abhi-saddo vattatīti kathametaṃ yujjeyya. Na hi asatvavācī saddo satvavācako sambhavatīti? Natthi atra doso pūjanaparicchedanakiriyānampi dīpanato, tāhi ca kiriyāhi yuttesu rājavinayesupi pavattattā. Abhipūjito rājāti hi atthena kiriyākārakasambandhaṃ nimittaṃ katvā kammasādhanabhūtaṃ rājadabbaṃ abhi-saddo padhānato vadati, pūjanakiriyaṃ pana appadhānato. Tathā abhiparicchinno vinayoti atthena kiriyākārakasambandhaṃ nimittaṃ katvā kammasādhanabhūtaṃ vinayadabbaṃ abhi-saddo padhānato vadati, paricchindanakiriyaṃ pana appadhānato. Tasmā atimālādīsu ati-saddo viya abhi-saddo ettha saha sādhanena kiriyaṃ vadatīti abhirājaabhivinayasaddā sopasaggāva siddhā. Evaṃ abhidhammasaddepi abhisaddo saha sādhanena vuḍḍhiyādikiriyaṃ vadatīti ayamattho dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
就算“abhi-”这个前缀在上述那些义项里成立,可是这样一来,由“dhamma”一词所表示的、具有增长等性质的法,在这里不就没被说到吗?这个意思要怎么讲得通呢?面对这个追问,论师为了回应,说了“ettha ca”等话。其中,“ettha”是指在阿毗达摩这里;“ca”是引介词。“bhāveti”说的是心的增长,“pharitvā”说的是所缘的增长,所以意思是:由于这些修习和遍满的增长,具有增长的法也被说到了。就“ārammaṇādīhi”而言,是指所缘、相应、业、门、行道等;由于唯有出世间法才完全值得供养,所以以“sekkhā dhammā”等语说明正是这些才值得供养。“值得供养”一语排除了作者等造词法、过去等时态,以及能力等义。因为诸法本就值得供养,所以这里说它们值得供养,是不受时态限定而显示的意趣。由于以自性限定,即以触等自性限定。由于比欲界法广大,所以广大法更殊胜;由于没有比它更上的,所以显示为无上法,即以“mahaggatā”等语说明。以“tena”一语,即以“vuḍḍhimanto”等语为工具因或原因。巴利
Hotu abhi-saddo yathāvuttesu atthesu, tappayogena pana dhammasaddena dīpitā vuḍḍhimantādayo dhammā ettha vuttā na bhaveyyuṃ, kathaṃ ayamattho yujjeyyāti anuyoge sati taṃ pariharanto ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha etthāti etasmiṃ abhidhamme. Upanyāse ca-saddo. Bhāvetīti cittassa vaḍḍhanaṃ vuttaṃ, pharitvāti ārammaṇassa vaḍḍhanaṃ, tasmā tāhi bhāvanāpharaṇavuḍḍhīhi vuḍḍhimantopi dhammā vuttāti attho . Ārammaṇādīhīti ārammaṇasampayuttakammadvārapaṭipadādīhi. Ekantato lokuttaradhammānaññeva pūjārahattā ‘‘sekkhā dhammā’’tiādinā teyeva pūjitāti dassitā. ‘‘Pūjārahā’’ti etena kattādisādhanaṃ, atītādikālaṃ, sakkuṇeyyatthaṃ vā nivatteti. Pūjitabbāyeva hi dhammā kālavisesaniyamarahitā pūjārahā ettha vuttāti adhippāyo dassito. Sabhāvaparicchinnattāti phusanādisabhāvena paricchinnattā. Kāmāvacarehi mahantabhāvato mahaggatā dhammā adhikā, tatopi uttaravirahato anuttarā dhammāti dasseti ‘‘mahaggatā’’tiādinā. Tenāti ‘‘vuḍḍhimanto’’tiādinā vacanena karaṇabhūtena, hetubhūtena vā.
那么,这里“yaṃ panettha”的意思是:在律等这三种彼此有区别的当中,那个没有区别而共通的部分,就是“藏”的意思。因为“律”等三个词彼此不共通,所以叫做“有区别”;而“藏”这个词和这三者都共通,所以被称为“没有区别”。“Pariyattibbhājanatthato”是指以应当学取之义、安立之义作为工具因,或者作为限定因。另外,也可以理解为:从应当学取之义、分别之义,所以说“pariyattibhājanattha”。因为语尾“-to”表示“关于此义”,需要用“iti”来指明。由“iti”所指示的“-to”语尾,正如语法学家所认可的,例如“aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantī”(从无常、从苦、从无我而观)。由此显示:从应当学取,从彼彼之义的分別,所以名为“藏”。这是一个尚未完成的语基词。不过,通晓声论的人说“piṭa”有声音、集合之义,并引用这里所说的用法,所以依照他们的观点,应当作这样的词源解释:因为piṭīyati(被宣说、被学取),所以是piṭaka;或者因为piṭīyati(被集合),彼彼之义在此中,所以是piṭaka。接着用“tena”等语来展示复合词。巴利
Yaṃ panetthāti etesu vinayādīsu tīsu aññamaññavisiṭṭhesu yaṃ avisiṭṭhaṃ samānaṃ, taṃ piṭakanti attho. Vinayādayo hi tayo saddā aññamaññāsādhāraṇattā visiṭṭhā nāma, piṭakasaddo pana tehi tīhipi sādhāraṇattā ‘‘avisiṭṭho’’ti vuccati. Pariyattibbhājanatthatoti pariyāpuṇitabbatthapatiṭṭhānatthehi karaṇabhūtehi, visesanabhūtehi vā. Apica pariyattibbhājanatthato pariyattibhājanatthanti āhūti attho daṭṭhabbo. Paccattatthe hi to-saddo iti-saddena niddisitabbattā. Itinā niddisitabbehito – saddamicchanti neruttikā yathā ‘‘aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.406, 408, 411) etena pariyāpuṇitabbato, taṃtadatthānaṃ bhājanato ca piṭakaṃ nāmāti dasseti. Anipphannapāṭipadikapadañhetaṃ. Saddavidū pana ‘‘piṭa saddasaṅghāṭesū’’ti vatvā idha vuttameva payogamudāharanti, tasmā tesaṃ matena piṭīyati saddīyati pariyāpuṇīyatīti piṭakaṃ, piṭīyati vā saṅghāṭīyati taṃtadattho etthāti piṭakanti nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Tenā’’tiādinā samāsaṃ dasseti.
“不要因为经典传承”这句话,是引用了《卡拉玛经》(增支部3.66)和《萨罗经》(增支部3.67)里的经文。它的注释书里解释说:“意思是:不要因为‘这和我们的藏经传统相符’就执取。”不过,阿阇梨舍利弗长老说:“不要因为经文传承就执取。”(《心义疏·第一大结集语释》)“拿着锄头和篮子”是指带着锄头和篮子。“ku”指大地,因为能破地、裂地,所以一种铁制工具就叫“kudāla”(锄头)。又因为它是盛放各种物品的容器,用棕榈叶、藤条等编成的容器就叫“piṭaka”(篮子)。这段出自《根本五十篇·锯喻经》(中部1.227)。巴利
Māpiṭakasampadānenāti kālāmasutte, (a. ni. 3.66) sāḷhasutte (a. ni. 3.67) ca āgataṃ pāḷimāha. Tadaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘amhākaṃ piṭakatantiyā saddhiṃ sametīti mā gaṇhitthā’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.66) attho vutto. Ācariyasāriputtattherena pana ‘‘pāḷisampadānavasena mā gaṇhathā’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Kudālapiṭakamādāyāti kudālañca piṭakañca ādāya. Ku vuccati pathavī, tassā dālanato vidālanato ayomayaupakaraṇaviseso kudālaṃ nāma. Tesaṃ tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ bhājanabhāvato tālapaṇṇavettalatādīhi kato bhājanaviseso piṭakaṃ nāma. Idaṃ pana mūlapaṇṇāsake kakacūpamasutte (ma. ni. 1.227).
引出“tena…pe…ñeyyā”这个偈句后,用“tena”等语来加以解说。由“一切”等一切代词所表达的词,或者取它的性,或者取正在被说的词的性;但这里因为是随顺说话意图而说的,所以就取了它的性,因此说“vinayo ca so piṭakañca”。用“依如前所说的方式”这一句,把“evaṃ duvidhatthena…pe…katvā”以及“pariyattibhāvato, tassa tassa atthassa bhājanato cā”所说的这一切都总摄起来了。“tayopi”这里的“api”一词,或者说“pi”一词,是总括部分的意思。因为不说“apī”而说“pī”,这就表明:像“api”一词一样,“pi”一词也是一个独立的助词。巴利
‘‘Tena…pe… ñeyyā’’ti gāthāpadaṃ ulliṅgetvā ‘‘tenā’’tiādinā vivarati. Sabbādīhi sabbanāmehi vuttassa vā liṅgamādiyate, vuccamānassa vā, idha pana vatticchāya vuttassevāti katvā ‘‘vinayo ca so piṭakañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathāvutteneva nayenā’’ti iminā ‘‘evaṃ duvidhatthena…pe… katvā’’ti ca ‘‘pariyattibhāvato, tassa tassa atthassa bhājanato cā’’ti ca vuttaṃ sabbamatidisati. Tayopīti ettha apisaddo, pi-saddo vā avayavasampiṇḍanattho. ‘‘Apī’’ti avatvā ‘‘pī’’ti vadanto hi api-saddo viya pi-saddopi visuṃ nipāto atthīti dasseti.
对应当被宣说的义理,以说法者的身份,通过教令等方式加以开示、令其觉悟,这就是“开示”。对应当被教诫的人,根据其犯过失等具体情况而进行教诫、调伏,这就是“教诫”。对所应宣说的义理,如防护与非防护等,通过言语加以讲述、使它与言语相连,这就是“论说”。这里说的是:相对于说法的世尊而言,是“开示”;相对于应被教诫的人而言,是“教诫”;相对于所应宣说的义理而言,是“论说”。应当知道,它们之间有这样的差别。在这里,虽然开示等并非不观待所应宣说等内容,但教令等特别依赖于说法者等,因此依据各自不同的关联而说开示等的区分。正如教令的制定特别依赖于堪受教令的人以及对此的善巧相应,同样,世俗与胜义的安立也依赖于安立者,所以说教令等方式依赖于说法者。又如随顺犯过失与意乐,教诫也特别随顺于法,同时也观待应被调伏的人,因此依据应被教诫的人而说“教诫”。又如针对防护与非防护、名与色,以及应被解开的邪见而进行论说,当有言语所依时便存在,没有言语所依时便不存在,因此特别依赖于它,所以依据所应宣说的义理而说“论说”。在此还有:巴利
Kathetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ desakāyattena āṇādividhinā atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādisāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ vinayanaṃ sāsanaṃ. Kathetabbassa saṃvarāsaṃvarādino atthassa kathanaṃ vacanapaṭibaddhatākaraṇaṃ kathā, idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – desitāraṃ bhagavantamapekkhitvā desanā, sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ, kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathāti evamimesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbanti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi desanādayo desetabbādinirapekkhā na honti, āṇādayo pana visesato desakādiadhīnāti taṃ taṃ visesayogavasena desanādīnaṃ bhedo vutto. Yathā hi āṇāvidhānaṃ visesato āṇārahādhīnaṃ tattha kosallayogato, evaṃ vohāraparamatthavidhānāni ca vidhāyakādhīnānīti āṇādividhino desakāyattatā vuttā. Aparādhajjhāsayānurūpaṃ viya ca dhammānurūpampi sāsanaṃ visesato, tathā vinetabbapuggalāpekkhanti sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṃvarāsaṃvaranāmarūpānaṃ viya ca vinibbeṭhetabbāya diṭṭhiyā kathanaṃ sati vācāvatthusmiṃ, nāsatīti visesato tadadhīnaṃ, tasmā kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathā vuttā. Honti cettha –
开示要依说法者来理解,这里说的“开示”就是指三藏。
从应当教导的对象这个角度来说,这就叫作“教导”。
按照应当解说的含义,也可以叫作论说。
应当这样阐明说法、教诫和论说这三者的区分。巴利
‘‘Desakassa vasenettha, desanā piṭakattayaṃ; Sāsitabbavasenetaṃ, sāsananti pavuccati. Kathetabbassa atthassa, vasenāpi kathāti ca; Desanāsāsanakathā-bhedampevaṃ pakāsaye’’ti.
把这三个词合在一起,作为“它们的区分”之后,由于“区分”一词是在相违释复合词之后单独出现的,所以应当分别搭配,即:应当随宜阐明说法的区分、教诫的区分和论说的区分。所谓“区分”,就是差异或特殊性。在三藏中,修学、断除以及甚深性,也应当随宜阐明。巴利
Padattayampetaṃ samodhānetvā tāsaṃ bhedoti katvā bhedasaddo visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo dvandapadato paraṃ suyyamānattā ‘‘desanābhedaṃ, sāsanabhedaṃ, kathābhedañca yathārahaṃ paridīpaye’’ti. Bhedanti ca nānattaṃ, visesaṃ vā. Tesu piṭakesu. Sikkhā ca pahānañca gambhīrabhāvo ca, tañca yathārahaṃ paridīpaye.
第二首偈颂要阐明教法的分类、学习的方式以及其中的差别。在律藏等藏中,比丘怎样获得成就和遭遇失败,同样也要在那里把这一切都阐明清楚——这就是前后文的关联。或者也可以这样连接:比丘在那里以什么方式获得教法的分类、成就和失败,同样也要在那里把这一切都阐明清楚。所谓“以什么方式”,就是指以谴责等原因、以学习等方式,也就是以谴责、出离、法、守护库藏为原因的学习,以及善行和恶行这些方式。虽然其他人也能同样获得,但因为比丘是其中最尊贵、最上等、最亲近、最常随伴的,而且因为依照教导正确修行、以法为依止,所以这里说的是“比丘”。巴利
Dutiyagāthāya pariyattibhedaṃ pariyāpuṇanassa pakāraṃ, visesañca vibhāvaye. Yahiṃ vinayādike piṭake. Yaṃ sampattiṃ, vipattiñca yathā bhikkhu pāpuṇāti, tathā tampi sabbaṃ tahiṃ vibhāvayeti sambandho. Atha vā yaṃ pariyattibhedaṃ sampattiṃ, vipattiñca yahiṃ yathā bhikkhu pāpuṇāti, tathā tampi sabbaṃ tahiṃ vibhāvayeti yojetabbaṃ. Yathāti ca yehi upārambhādihetupariyāpuṇanādippakārehi, upārambhanissaraṇadhammakosarakkhaṇahetupariyāpuṇanaṃ suppaṭipattiduppaṭipattīti etehi pakārehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Santesupi ca aññesu tathā pāpuṇantesu jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ sammāpaṭipajjanena dhammādhiṭṭhānabhāvato ca bhikkhūti vuttaṃ.
“其中”是指在那些偈颂当中。“此”是现在将要说的内容。“阐明”意思是全面地开示,也就是毫无遗漏地分别解说,这就是这里要表达的意思。“显了”是说即使已经这样阐明了,仍不把它弄成隐晦、遮蔽的状态,而是以让听者容易理解的方式呈现出来。也有人这样说:简略地开示叫“阐明”,详细地开示叫“显了”。另外,这两个词是依照前面所说的方式来讲的,但从含义上说其实是同一个意思。因此,应当把“阐明”对应第一首偈颂,把“显了”对应第二首偈颂。“ca”这个词把这两者互相结合起来。为什么这样说呢?所以才说“在此”等话。“Hi”是表示原因的虚词,就像在“由于字母的错误”等语句中那样。它的意思是“因为”,或者说是“何以故”。有资格颁布教令的人,就叫“堪能教令者”。因为世尊是正自觉者,而且由于大悲心,能作不颠倒的利益教导,所以他的言教堪为准量,因此是“堪能教令的世尊”——这就是这里的含义。因为世俗谛和胜义谛的法也都包含在其中,所以说“以教令为主”,这是显示大致的理趣。在这之后也是如此。能特别地吸引众生的心,所以叫“世俗”,也就是施设,善于此者,就是由此。巴利
Tatrāti tāsu gāthāsu. Ayanti adhunā vakkhamānā kathā. Paridīpanāti samantato pakāsanā, kiñcimattampi asesetvā vibhajanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vibhāvanāti evaṃ paridīpanāyapi sati gūḷhaṃ paṭicchannamakatvā sotūnaṃ suviññeyyabhāvena āvibhāvanā. Saṅkhepena paridīpanā, vitthārena vibhāvanātipi vadanti. Apica etaṃ padadvayaṃ heṭṭhā vuttānurūpato kathitaṃ, atthato pana ekameva. Tasmā paridīpanā paṭhamagāthāya, vibhāvanā dutiyagāthāyāti yojetabbaṃ. Ca-saddena ubhayatthaṃ aññamaññaṃ samucceti. Kasmā, vuccantīti āha ‘‘ettha hī’’tiādi. Hīti kāraṇe nipāto ‘‘akkharavipattiyaṃ hī’’tiādīsu viya. Yasmā, kasmāti vā attho. Āṇaṃ paṇetuṃ [ṭhapetuṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā)] arahatīti āṇāraho, sammāsambuddhattā, mahākāruṇikatāya ca aviparītahitopadesakabhāvena pamāṇavacanattā āṇārahena bhagavatāti attho. Vohāraparamatthadhammānampi tattha sabbhāvato ‘‘āṇābāhullato’’ti vuttaṃ, tena yebhuyyanayaṃ dasseti. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Visesena sattānaṃ manaṃ avaharatīti vohāro, paññatti, tasmiṃ kusalo, tena.
那些有很多过失、很多罪过、很多违犯的人,就叫“多过失者”,比如Seyyasaka长老等人。“随顺过失”,就是与过失相应。在“种种意乐”等话里,“意乐”就是“阿阇耶”,从含义上说,就是见和智,但从分类上说,则有四种。正如经中所说:巴利
Pacuro bahulo aparādho doso vītikkamo yesaṃ te pacurāparādhā, seyyasakattherādayo. Yathāparādhanti dosānurūpaṃ. ‘‘Anekajjhāsayā’’tiādīsu āsayova ajjhāsayo, so atthato diṭṭhi, ñāṇañca, pabhedato pana catubbidho hoti. Vuttañca –
常见与断见,以及随顺忍。
如实了知的那个智,就是这里说的意乐。巴利
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti.
在这里,因为一切见都被常见和断见所涵盖,所以一切执持邪见的有情都依附于这两种见。正如经中所说:“迦旃延,这个世间大多数都依止于两种边见:有和无。”(相应部2.15)所谓“有”,指的是执取常见;所谓“无”,指的是执取断见。这是随顺轮回的凡夫的意乐倾向。而随顺还灭的清净有情的意乐倾向则有两种:随顺忍和如实智。其中,随顺忍就是观智;如实智则是业自性智。这四种合起来就是意乐倾向。有情住在这里,或者心依止这里而安住,所以叫意乐倾向,就像野兽的栖息处一样。比如野兽出去觅食后又回到那片树林里躺下,那个地方就被称为它的栖息处;同样,心即使以其他方式活动之后,又回到某处安住下来,那里就是它的意乐倾向。欲贪等七种随眠烦恼,就像老鼠的毒一样,在遇到因缘时就会生起,不论未来、过去还是现在,都因为其自性如此而这样称呼。因为诸法的自性并不会因为时间的差别而有所不同。行,指的是贪行等六种根本行,按中间的细分有很多种,按交往方式来分则有六十三种。或者,行也可以按善行和恶行分为两种。这在《分别论》的行分别部分中已经说明过了。巴利
Tattha sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepi diṭṭhigatikā sattā imā eva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā. Yathāha ‘‘dvayanissito kho panāyaṃ kaccāna loko yebhuyyena atthitañca natthitañcā’’ti, (saṃ. ni. 2.15) atthitāti hi sassataggāho adhippeto, natthitāti ucchedaggāho. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ āsayo. Vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ pana suddhasattānaṃ anulomikā khanti, yathābhūtañāṇanti duvidho āsayo. Tattha ca anulomikā khanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇaṃ pana kammasakatāñāṇaṃ. Catubbidho peso āsayanti sattā ettha nivasanti, cittaṃ vā āgamma seti etthāti āsayo migāsayo viya. Yathā migo gocarāya gantvāpi paccāgantvā tattheva vanagahane sayatīti taṃ tassa ‘‘āsayo’’ti vuccati, tathā cittaṃ aññathāpi pavattitvā yattha paccāgamma seti, tassa so ‘‘āsayo’’ti. Kāmarāgādayo satta anusayā. Mūsikavisaṃ viya kāraṇalābhe uppajjamānārahā anāgatā, atītā, paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedoti. Cariyāti rāgacariyādikā cha mūlacariyā, antarabhedena anekavidhā, saṃsaggavasena pana tesaṭṭhi honti. Atha vā cariyāti sucaritaduccaritavasena duvidhaṃ caritaṃ. Tañhi vibhaṅge caritaniddese niddiṭṭhaṃ.
关于“胜解”,《义集》中说:所谓胜解,就是像“我今天就要出家,今天就要证得阿罗汉果”这样,以倾向于该目标的心态生起的决定。不过,阿阇梨法护长老说:所谓胜解,是众生由于过去的行为习惯而产生的意乐,它分为低劣和殊胜两种。也就是说,具有低劣胜解的众生,只亲近具有低劣胜解的众生;具有殊胜胜解的众生,也只亲近具有殊胜胜解的众生。如果戒师和依止师不持戒,而同住弟子持戒,那些弟子就不会去亲近自己的戒师和依止师,只会去亲近与自己相应、相合的比丘。如果戒师和依止师是相应、相合的比丘,而其他人不相应,他们也不会去亲近戒师和依止师,只会去亲近与自己同类的不相应的比丘。这个道理应当依据《界相应》等来阐明。因此,这种决定了低劣胜解者等互相亲近等的意乐,即意乐界,应当理解为“胜解”。他们具有种种意乐等,或者说种种意乐等属于他们,就像说“多作者、多河者”一样。随顺,就是不违背意乐等,或者说,以种种随顺的意乐等,依彼彼而行,这就是其含义。也有人把随顺意乐等说为随顺或适合。由于未能破除密集,依见、慢、爱而生起“我、我所”想的有情。如法,就是“这里没有我,也没有我所,唯有法而已”这样,随顺法的自性,这就是其含义。巴利
‘‘Adhimutti nāma ‘ajjeva pabbajissāmi, ajjeva arahattaṃ gaṇhissāmī’tiādinā tanninnabhāvena pavattamānaṃ sanniṭṭhāna’’nti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘adhimutti nāma sattānaṃ pubbacariyavasena abhiruci, sā duvidhā hīnapaṇītabhedenā’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Tathā hi yāya hīnādhimuttikā sattā hīnādhimuttikeyeva satte sevanti, paṇītādhimuttikā paṇītādhimuttikeyeva . Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā sīlavanto na honti, saddhivihārikā sīlavanto, te attano ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise sāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sace ācariyupajjhāyā sāruppabhikkhū, itare asāruppā, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise asāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Dhātusaṃyuttavasena (saṃ. ni. 2.85 ādayo) cesa attho dīpetabbo. Evamayaṃ hīnādhimuttikādīnaṃ aññamañño pasevanādiniyamitā abhiruci ajjhāsayadhātu ‘‘adhimuttī’’ti veditabbā. Anekā ajjhāsayādayo te yesaṃ atthi, anekā vā ajjhāsayādayo yesanti tathā yathā ‘‘bahukattuko, bahunadiko’’ti. Yathānulomanti ajjhāsayādīnaṃ anulomaṃ anatikkamma, ye ye vā ajjhāsayādayo anulomā, tehi tehīti attho. Āsayādīnaṃ anulomassa vā anurūpantipi vadanti. Ghanavinibbhogābhāvato diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena ‘‘ahaṃ mama santaka’’nti evaṃ pavattasaññino. Yathādhammanti ‘‘natthettha attā, attaniyaṃ vā, kevalaṃ dhammamattameveta’’nti evamādinā dhammasabhāvānurūpanti attho.
防护就是律仪,也就是以身和语不违犯。大的防护则是“非律仪”。因为这里的“a-”这个前缀是增长的意思,就像“无学诸法”那样;而当它与那层含义结合时,小的防护依剩余等方式也可称为防护,所以这里的意思是:既是小的,也是大的防护。因此说“律仪即律仪”等。见之解缠,就是从见解中解脱;从义理上说,它指的是与那见解正相对治的正见等法。同样也说“是六十二种邪见的正对治”。对名、对色、对名色的分别,就是名色分别;而依照“是贪等的正对治”这一说法,它指的就是这样生起的智。巴利
Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Mahanto saṃvaro asaṃvaro. Vuḍḍhiattho hi ayaṃ a-kāro yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 21) taṃyogatāya ca khuddako saṃvaro pārisesādinayena saṃvaro, tasmā khuddako, mahanto ca saṃvaroti attho. Tenāha ‘‘saṃvarā saṃvaro’’tiādi. Diṭṭhiviniveṭhanāti diṭṭhiyā vimocanaṃ, atthato pana tassa ujuvipaccanikā sammādiṭṭhiādayo dhammā. Tathā cāha ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhipaṭipakkhabhūtā’’ti. Nāmassa, rūpassa, nāmarūpassa ca paricchindanaṃ nāmarūpaparicchedo, so pana ‘‘rāgādipaṭipakkhabhūto’’ti vacanato tathāpavattameva ñāṇaṃ.
“在三者中也有”等语,是开示后半部分。因为这三者都有说到的可能,所以特别这样说。这个道理应当贯通到一切处。其中,依照“这增上戒学,就是此处所说的学”这一说法,所以说“律藏中的增上戒学”。在经藏里,因为“远离欲贪……”等文大量开示定,所以说“经藏中的增上心学”。由于名色分别(即对名、色、名色的区分)是增上慧的近因,而且为了增上慧而宣说其余的名色诸法,所以说“阿毗达摩藏中的增上慧学”。巴利
‘‘Tīsupī’’tiādinā aparaḍḍhaṃ vivarati. Tīsupi tāsaṃ vacanasambhavato ‘‘visesenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadetaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Tatra ‘‘yāyaṃ adhisīlasikkhā, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā sikkhā’’ti vacanato āha ‘‘vinayapiṭake adhisīlasikkhā’’ti. Suttantapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 1.152; a. ni. 4.123) samādhidesanābāhullato ‘‘suttanta piṭake adhicittasikkhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nāmarūpaparicchedassa adhipaññāpadaṭṭhānato, adhipaññāya ca atthāya tadavasesanāmarūpadhammakathanato āha ‘‘abhidhammapiṭake adhipaññāsikkhā’’ti.
“诸烦恼”指杂染法,或者指业与烦恼。这里同时涉及这两种,因为文中说“通过身门和语门违犯烦恼,其断除是因为它是那(违犯)的对立面”,又说“戒的”。这里“违犯”与“对立面”之间是依格(作格)关系,而“戒的”则是依格(从格)关系。一切处都应这样理解。随眠状态下在相续中随转的烦恼,即使遇到因缘而现起,也因为害怕戒被破坏而不能违犯,所以说“戒是违犯的对立面”。以执取机会的方式,烦恼在心中生起并夺取善法的运作,这就是缠缚;它的断除,就是依心中相续生起之力而断除烦恼的缠缚,这就是这里所说的意思。“诸烦恼”是总说,而断除缠缚是依心一境性而成就,所以说“定是缠缚的对立面”。以未断除的状态在相续中随眠、遇到适合的因缘就能生起、已具有力量的欲贪等七种烦恼,就是随眠;它们的断除,唯有依圣道之慧才能彻底断除,所以说“慧是随眠的对立面”。巴利
Kilesānanti saṃklesadhammānaṃ, kammakilesānaṃ vā, ubhayāpekkhañcetaṃ ‘‘yo kāyavacīdvārehi kilesānaṃ vītikkamo, tassa pahānaṃ, tassa paṭipakkhattā’’ti ca. ‘‘Vītikkamo’’ti ayaṃ ‘‘paṭipakkha’’nti bhāvayoge sambandho, ‘‘sīlassā’’ti pana bhāvapaccaye. Evaṃ sabbattha. Anusayavasena santāne anuvattantā kilesā kāraṇalābhe pariyuṭṭhitāpi sīlabhedabhayavasena vītikkamituṃ na labhantīti āha ‘‘vītikkamapaṭipakkhattā sīlassā’’ti. Okāsādānavasena kilesānaṃ citte kusalappavattiṃ pariyādiyitvā uṭṭhānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ, tassa pahānaṃ, cittasantāne uppattivasena kilesānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānassa pahānanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Kilesāna’’nti hi adhikāro, taṃ pana pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ cittasamādahanavasena bhavatīti āha ‘‘pariyuṭṭhānapaṭipakkhattā samādhissā’’ti. Appahīnabhāvena santāne anu anu sayanakā anurūpakāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahā thāmagatā kāmarāgādayo satta kilesā anusayā, tesaṃ pahānaṃ, te pana sabbaso ariyamaggapaññāya pahīyantīti āha ‘‘anusayapaṭipakkhattā paññāyā’’ti.
就像用灯光驱散黑暗一样,依靠布施等福德行所包含的各种善的成分,来断除各种不善,这就是“彼分断”。不过在这里,因为讲的是增上戒学的范围,所以应该理解为:依靠各种善戒的成分,来断除各种恶戒的成分,这叫作“彼分断”。依靠近行定和安止定等不同的定,通过阻止生起来压伏诸盖等法,就像用木棍打散水面上的藻类一样,以压伏的方式断除,这就是“镇伏断”。由于修习了四种圣道,在每一位道者的心相续中,以彻底断除的方式断除属于集谛的烦恼群,令它们永远不再生起,这就是“正断”。恶行,就是被烦恼染污的行为;它在哪里生起,就会真正染污、损害、恼害那个心相续,所以叫染污。对它的断除,以身、语恶行所起的染污,以彼分断的方式断除,这已经说过了,因为戒是恶行的对治。应该依照三学的次第来理解这个道理。渴爱,就是“它渴求”的意思,按照前面说的方式,它就是染污;对它以镇伏的方式断除,这已经说过了,因为定是欲贪的对治。邪见本身按照前面说的方式就是染污;对它以正断的方式断除,这已经说过了,因为慧能开显远离我、我所等自性的法。巴利
Dīpālokena viya tamassa dānādipuññakiriyavatthugatena tena tena kusalaṅgena tassa tassa akusalassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ. Idha pana adhisīlasikkhāya vuttaṭṭhānattā tena tena susīlyaṅgena tassa tassa dussīlyaṅgassa pahānaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgappahāna’’nti gahetabbaṃ. Upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattinivāraṇena ghaṭappahārena viya jalatale sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena pahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃ taṃ maggavato santāne samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantamappavattisaṅkhāta samucchindanavasena pahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ. Duṭṭhu caritaṃ, saṃkilesehi vā dūsitaṃ caritaṃ duccaritaṃ. Tadeva yattha uppannaṃ, taṃ santānaṃ sammā kilisati vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti saṃkileso, tassa pahānaṃ. Kāyavacīduccaritavasena pavattasaṃkilesassa tadaṅgavasena pahānaṃ vuttaṃ sīlassa duccaritapaṭipakkhattā. Sikkhattayānusārena hi attho veditabbo. Tasatīti taṇhā, sāva vuttanayena saṃkileso, tassa vikkhambhanavasena pahānaṃ vuttaṃ samādhissa kāmacchandapaṭipakkhattā. Diṭṭhiyeva yathāvuttanayena saṃkileso, tassa samucchedavasena pahānaṃ vuttaṃ paññāya attādivinimuttasabhāva dhammappakāsanato.
这里“在每一者中”的意思是:在这三藏当中的每一藏里。“ca”这个字用在句子开头,或者表示另一方面。“pi”这个字,或者“api”这个字,是用来把各个部分合在一起,因此它统摄了:不只是四种甚深性本身,而且它们各自的部分也是甚深的。这个道理在类似的情形中都一样。现在为了显示它们的具体情形,就说了“其中”等话。其中,“经”就是巴利圣典。因为它能让增上戒等殊胜之义被人了解,具有自性词源的性质,又由佛陀等所宣说,是殊胜言语的排列、相续,所以称为“巴利”。巴利
Ekamekasmiñcetthāti etesu tīsu piṭakesu ekamekasmiṃ piṭake, ca-saddo vākyārambhe, pakkhantare vā. Pi-saddo, api-saddo vā avayavasampiṇḍane, tena na kevalaṃ catubbidhasseva gambhīrabhāvo, atha kho paccekaṃ tadavayavānampīti sampiṇḍanaṃ karoti. Esa nayo īdisesu. Idāni te sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tantīti pāḷi. Sā hi ukkaṭṭhānaṃ sīlādiatthānaṃ bodhanato, sabhāvaniruttibhāvato, buddhādīhi bhāsitattā ca pakaṭṭhānaṃ vacanānaṃ āḷi pantīti ‘‘pāḷī’’ti vuccati.
在这里,依照律藏复注师等声论派的观点,先前由心确定下来的、作为胜义音声组合的经典,就叫做法。因为“iti”这个词是用来表示“名为”的意思,或者也可以说它“被称为法”。“即彼之”就是指前面所说的那部经典本身的意思。“由心确定”是指由通过诵习、忆持等方式运作的心先前所确定的、如前所说的、作为胜义音声组合的那部经典。“开示”则是指后来为了让他人理解而进行的开示,它本质上仍然是那部作为胜义音声组合的经典。再者,如前所说的、被称为经典的、能生起音声的心生起,就是开示。对于经典以及经典之义,即对于如前所说的两种经典,以及对于其义如实地理解,这就是其意思。那些(声论派)人说:能显示世尊所说之义与言说的音声本身,才叫做经典。那么,在他们的主张中,法也是以音声为自性的,法的开示与法之间又有什么差别呢?回答:以能令那些那些义被了知,以及以诵习等方式先前由心确定下来的胜义音声组合为法;后来为了让他人理解而运作的、能阐明那相应之义的音声为开示,这就是它们之间的差别。或者,如前所说的、能生起音声的心生起就是开示,因为音声是由它生起的,所以就像妄语等一样,在那里,能生起妄语等的思也被以妄语等音声来称呼。虽然成为文字排列的只是施设音声,它才是了知义的,但尽管如此,从根本因的角度来说,就像“从文字而了知”等说法中那样,它本身就是义,因此应当看到,胜义音声本身是以了知义的方式而被说的。“即彼经典的开示”也是以类似的言说方式而说的,就像“已生起的善法增长、广大”一样。巴利
Idha pana vinayagaṇṭhipadakārādīnaṃ saddavādīnaṃ matena pubbe vavatthāpitā paramatthasaddappabandhabhūtā tanti dhammo nāma. Iti-saddo hi nāmatthe, ‘‘dhammo’’ti vā vuccati. Tassāyevāti tassā yathāvuttāya eva tantiyā attho. Manasā vavatthāpitāyāti uggahaṇa-dhāraṇādivasappavattena manasā pubbe vavatthāpitāya yathāvuttāya paramatthasaddappabandhabhūtāya tassā tantiyā. Desanāti pacchā paresamavabodhanatthaṃ desanāsaṅkhātā paramatthasaddappabandhabhūtā tantiyeva. Apica yathāvuttatanti saṅkhātasaddasamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo desanā. Tantiyā, tantiatthassa cāti yathāvuttāya duvidhāyapi tantiyā, tadatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodhoti attho veditabbo. Te hi bhagavatā vuccamānassa atthassa, vohārassa ca dīpako saddoyeva tanti nāmāti vadanti. Tesaṃ pana vāde dhammassāpi saddasabhāvattā dhammadesanānaṃ ko visesoti ce? Tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ bodhakabhāvena ñāto, uggahaṇādivasena ca pubbe vavatthāpito paramatthasaddappabandho dhammo, pacchā paresaṃ avabodhanatthaṃ pavattito taṃ tadatthappakāsako saddo desanāti ayamimesaṃ visesoti. Atha vā yathāvuttasaddasamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo desanā desīyati samuṭṭhāpīyati saddo etenāti katvā musāvādādayo viya tatthāpi hi musāvādādisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādādisaddehi voharīyatīti. Kiñcāpi akkharāvalibhūto paññattisaddoyeva atthassa ñāpako, tathāpi mūlakāraṇabhāvato ‘‘akkharasaññāto’’tiādīsu viya tassāyeva atthoti paramatthasaddoyeva atthassa ñāpakabhāvena vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tassā tantiyā desanā’’ti ca sadisavohārena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘uppannā ca kusalādhammā bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya saṃvattantī’’ti.
不过,依照阿毗达摩复注师等施设论派的主张,以与世俗谛和胜义谛之区分相应、能够表达该意义的说法,在胜义语词中,由世尊以心完全确定下来的、作为名称施设之相续的经典,就叫作“法”,或者被称为“法”。“即彼之”的意思是:那作为名称施设的经典本身之义。“以心确定”的意思是:以与世俗谛和胜义谛之区分相应、能够表达该意义的说法,在胜义语词中,由世尊以心确定下来的、作为名称施设之相续的那部经典。“说法”则是通过让他人觉悟而施设,或者以言语开示,也就是作为语表、作为胜义语词相续的经典。对于“经典与经典之义”,应当理解为:对如上所说的两种经典,以及它们的意义,如实地通达。因为他们这样说:与自性之义和自性之称谓相应,由世尊以心确定下来的施设,在这里就叫作“经典”。如果按照声论派的主张,只有声音在这里才叫经典,那么经典和说法就应当有差别;可是,除了把以心确定的经典变成语表之外,说法和经典并没有差别。因为,在说明说法时,说“以心确定的经典的说法”,就是除了变成语表之外,说法和经典被说成没有差别。而且,下文说“说法就是施设”,因此,以和说法没有差别的方式,也就说明了经典也是施设。巴利
Abhidhammagaṇṭhipadakārādīnaṃ pana paṇṇattivādīnaṃ matena sammutiparamatthabhedassa atthassa anurūpavācakabhāvena paramatthasaddesu ekantena bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā nāmapaññattipabandhabhūtā tanti dhammo nāma, ‘‘dhammo’’ti vā vuccati. Tassāyevāti tassā nāmapaññattibhūtāya tantiyā eva attho. Manasā vavatthāpitāyāti sammutiparamatthabhedassa atthassānurūpavācakabhāvena paramatthasaddesu bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitāya nāmapaṇṇattipabandhabhūtāya tassā tantiyā. Desanāti paresaṃ pabodhanena atisajjanā vācāya pakāsanā vacībhedabhūtā paramatthasaddappabandhasaṅkhātā tanti. Tantiyā, tantiatthassa cāti yathāvuttāya dubbidhāyapi tantiyā, tadatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodhoti attho. Te hi evaṃ vadanti – sabhāvatthassa, sabhāvavohārassa ca anurūpavaseneva bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā paṇṇatti idha ‘‘tantī’’ti vuccati. Yadi ca saddavādīnaṃ matena saddoyeva idha tanti nāma siyā. Tantiyā, desanāya ca nānattena bhavitabbaṃ, manasā vavatthāpitāya ca tantiyā vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ ṭhapetvā desanāya nānattaṃ natthi. Tathā hi desanaṃ dassentena manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanāti vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ vinā tantiyā saha desanāya anaññatā vuttā. Tathā ca upari ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti vuttattā desanāya anaññabhāvena tantiyāpi paṇṇattibhāvo kathito hoti.
不过,如果开示真的和圣典完全不同,那就应该说成“对圣典、圣典之义以及开示的如实了知”。但他没有这样说,而是说“对圣典及圣典之义的如实了知”,因此就显示出开示与圣典并无不同。这样说来,下文说“开示就是施设”,也就是在说明:因为开示与圣典无别,所以圣典本身就是施设。而且,这两者在胜义上就只是声音,因为离开了胜义的世俗根本不存在。有些老师抓住这个道理,就说“法和开示在胜义上就只是声音”,他们这样说也没有过失。就像欲界结生的果报被称为“小所缘”一样,这里也应该这样理解。因为欲界结生的果报不能说“它只以已生起的胜义为所缘”,它也能以先前经过思量男女等形象的贪等不善法,以及慈等善法为所缘而生起。不过,由于那种分别是以胜义法为基础的,所以还是可以安立它“以胜义为所缘”,这里也应该这样看待。就算让施设论派持这种观点吧,而在声论派的观点中,法和开示的差别,法护长老也已经按照前面所说的方式阐明了。这里有一首偈颂:巴利
Apica yadi tantiyā aññāyeva desanā siyā, ‘‘tantiyā ca tantiatthassa ca desanāya ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Evaṃ pana avatvā ‘‘tantiyā ca tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vuttattā tantiyā, desanāya ca anaññabhāvo dassito hoti. Evañca katvā upari ‘‘desanā nāma paññattī’’ti dassentena desanāya anaññabhāvato tantiyā paṇṇattibhāvo kathito hotīti. Tadubhayampi pana paramatthato saddoyeva paramatthavinimuttāya sammutiyā abhāvā, imameva ca nayaṃ gahetvā keci ācariyā ‘‘dhammo ca desanā ca paramatthato saddo evā’’ti voharanti, tepi anupavajjāyeva. Yathā kāmāvacarapaṭisandhivipākā ‘‘parittārammaṇā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi kāmāvacarapaṭisandhivipākā ‘‘nibbattitaparamatthavisayāyevā’’ti sakkā vattuṃ itthipurisādiākāraparivitakkapubbakānaṃ rāgādiakusalānaṃ, mettādikusalānañca ārammaṇaṃ gahetvāpi samuppajjanato. Paramatthadhammamūlakattā panassa parikappassa paramatthavisayatā sakkā paññapetuṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbanti ca. Evampi paṇṇattivādīnaṃ mataṃ hotu, saddavādīnaṃ matepi dhammadesanānaṃ nānattaṃ vuttanayeneva ācariyadhammapālattherā dīhi pakāsitanti. Hoti cettha –
有些长老说:声音就是法,开示也是法。
法就是施设,声音则是开示——另一些人这样说。巴利
‘‘Saddo dhammo desanā ca, iccāhu apare garū; Dhammo paṇṇatti saddo tu, desanā vāti cāpare’’ti.
在这三句当中,“这些是法、义、教示的通达”这一句里,圣典之义、圣典之教示、圣典之通达,这三者都是圣典的领域。因此,说律藏等以义之通达和教示之通达为依托,是合理的。可是,诸藏本身就是圣典,那么它们以法为依托又怎么说得通呢?因为作为圣典整体的组成部分,各分支圣典就是依托。就像说“树上有枝”一样,整体只是依于部分而假立为依托。在这里,由于法等极难把握,律藏等因为那些法而深奥,所以律藏等的四种深奥性已经说过了。因此,正因为法等极难把握,法才是深奥的,并不是律藏等本身深奥——不应这样直接质疑。因为深奥性是就所缘和能缘两方面,唯独针对律藏等而说的。法,其实就是律藏等,并无区别。它们的所缘是义,因为作为能诠的它们本身就是以义为所诠;能缘则是教示和通达,它们以法和义为所缘。其中,由于通达法义极为困难,由于教示之智极难生起,应知教示极难把握;由于通达无法生起,以及证得其境的智慧极难生起,应知通达也极难把握。因为法、义、教示深奥,所以以其为领域的通达也深奥,就像要测量深水的水量,必须用长尺一样。金刚智长老说:“应当如此了知。”当作为藏之分支的法等被称为深奥时,作为其整体的藏也被说为深奥,因此不应那样质疑。不过,这件事还应再考察,因为一切人的那些藏之分支都不存在。大海是难入的,犹如不得立足处一样,这是关联。因为根据义而分别格、语、性之变化。以困难而进入,或者难入即是进入其中,因此是难入。不得者,即不可得,那本身就是不可得;或者被得为得,那不配得,因此是不可得。他们在此处安住,即处所,是立足处;或者安住即是立足处,于彼等不可得,因此是不可得的立足处。为了显示即使以部分进入的钝慧者也不可能获得立足处,所以再次说此。以“如是”等为总结。巴利
Tīsupi cetesu ete dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhāti ettha tantiattho, tantidesanā, tantiatthapaṭivedho cāti ime tayo tantivisayā hontīti vinayapiṭakādīnaṃ atthadesanāpaṭivedhādhārabhāvo yutto, piṭakāni pana tantiyevāti tesaṃ dhammādhārabhāvo kathaṃ yujjeyyāti? Tantisamudāyassa avayavatantiyā ādhārabhāvato. Samudāyo hi avayavassa parikappanāmattasiddhena ādhārabhāvena vuccati yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Ettha ca dhammādīnaṃ dukkhogāhabhāvato tehi dhammādīhi vinayādayo gambhīrāti vinayādīnampi catubbidho gambhīrabhāvo vuttoyeva, tasmā dhammādayo eva dukkhogāhattā gambhīrā, na vinayādayoti na codetabbametaṃ samukhena, visayavisayīmukhena ca vinayādīnaññeva gambhīrabhāvassa vuttattā. Dhammo hi vinayādayo eva abhinnattā. Tesaṃ visayo attho vācakabhūtānaṃ tesameva vāccabhāvato, visayino desanāpaṭivedhā dhammatthavisayabhāvatoti. Tattha paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya ca dukkhogāhabhāvo veditabbo, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Dhammatthadesanānaṃ gambhīrabhāvato tabbisayo paṭivedhopi gambhīro yathā taṃ gambhīrassa udakassa pamāṇaggahaṇe dīghena pamāṇena bhavitabbaṃ, evaṃsampadamidanti (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vajirabuddhitthero. Piṭakāvayavānaṃ dhammādīnaṃ vuccamāno gambhīrabhāvo taṃsamudāyassa piṭakassāpi vuttoyeva, tasmā tathā na codetabbantipi vadanti, vicāretabbametaṃ sabbesampi tesaṃ piṭakāvayavāsambhavato. Mahāsamuddo dukkhogāho, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho viya cāti sambandho. Atthavasā hi vibhattivacanaliṅgapariṇāmoti. Dukkhena ogayhanti, dukkho vā ogāho anto pavisanametesūti dukkhogāhā. Na labhitabboti alabbhanīyo, soyeva alabbhaneyyo, labhīyate vā labbhanaṃ, taṃ nārahatīti alabbhaneyyo. Patiṭṭhahanti ettha okāseti patiṭṭho, patiṭṭhahanaṃ vā patiṭṭho, alabbhaneyyo so yesu te alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā. Ekadesena ogāhantehipi mandabuddhīhi patiṭṭhā laddhuṃ na sakkāyevāti dassetuṃ etaṃ puna vuttaṃ. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi nigamanaṃ.
现在,为了说明因、因果等层面也是深奥的,他接着说了“另一种理路”等话。其中,“因”就是缘。它把自己的果执持、安立下来,所以叫“法”,这是把 da 音节变成了 dha 音节。那么,在这里怎么知道“法”这个词有“因”的意思呢?他说了“所谓已说”等话。这在《无碍解分别》(Vibha. 718)中已经说过。不过,从“知因是法无碍解”这句话,怎么知道“法”就是“因”呢?因为这是在解释“法无碍解”这个复合词的各组成部分的含义时,说了“知因”。在“于法无碍解是法无碍解”中,解释“于法”的含义时说的是“于因”,解释“无碍解”的含义时说的是“智”。因此,“因”和“法”两个词同义,“智”和“无碍解”两个词也同义。说这个道理的人,就成立了“法就是因”。同样,从“知因果是义无碍解”这句话,应该知道成立了“义就是因果”。因的果就是“因果”,那随顺于因而被通达、被证得的,就叫做“义”。巴利
Idāni hetuhetuphalādīnampi vasena gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādimāha. Tattha hetūti paccayo. So ca attano phalaṃ dahati vidahatīti dhammo da-kārassa dha-kāraṃ katvā. Dhammasaddassa cettha hetupariyāyatā kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāvibhaṅge (vibha. 718). Nanu ca ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena dhammassa hetubhāvo kathaṃ viññāyatīti? ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etassa samāsapadassa avayavapadatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇa’’nti vuttattā. ‘‘Dhamme paṭisambhidā dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti ettha hi ‘‘dhamme’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘paṭisambhidā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti. Tasmā hetudhammasaddā ekatthā, ñāṇapaṭisambhidā saddā cāti imamatthaṃ vadantena sādhito dhammassa hetubhāvoti. Tathā ‘‘hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena sādhito atthassa hetuphalabhāvoti daṭṭhabbo. Hetuno phalaṃ hetuphalaṃ, tañca hetuanusārena arīyati adhigamīyatīti atthoti vuccati.
在“开示、施设”这个说法里,依声论者的主张,具备义与文、是无颠倒的言说、属于法的词源、被称为胜义音声相续的经教,就叫做“开示”;或者意思是“名为开示”。因为通过它,义理被宣说,所以是开示。通过某种方式,义理被令知,或者它从方式上令知,所以是施设。为了从它自身的样貌来显示这一点,所以说“意思是如法之法说”。在“如法”这里,“法”这个词涵盖了因,也涵盖了因与果的一切。因为这个“法”字是表达自性的,不是表达教理、因等之类的,所以意思是:无论哪一种无明、行等法,就在那一种、那一种当中。或者,与那一种、那一种无明、行等法相应,就是“如法”。因为开示也像证悟一样,由于显示无颠倒的境界,所以随顺法而运转,正因如此,才被称为无颠倒的言说。所谓“法说”,就是具备义与文、无颠倒的言说、成为法的词源、被称为经教的胜义音声相续。因为它被说出、被发出,所以是言说;法,即无颠倒、自性所成的言说,就叫做“法说”。以此显示《分别论》中“在那里,对于法之词源、言说的智,是词无碍解”所说的法之词源,因为开示以音声为自性。同样,在《无碍解分别》的巴利中,也说到了词无碍解以有限所缘等为状态。它的注释书里则用“以那自性词源之声为所缘”等说法,显示了它以声为所缘。因为先确定了“这个义以这个声为能诠”的能诠与所诠之义,然后依显示那那能诠义的作用而运转的音声,就叫做“开示”。用“意趣”这个词,显示“开示即施设”这句话是就法之词源、言说而说的,不是就脱离这个之外的另一施设而说的,因为在多种义理都可能的情况下,只说了自己所意趣的义理。以上就是依声论者主张作出的判定。巴利
Desanātipaññattīti ettha saddavādīnaṃ vāde atthabyañjanakā aviparītābhilāpadhammaniruttibhūtā paramatthasaddappabandhasaṅkhātā tanti ‘‘desanā’’ti vuccati, desanā nāmāti vā attho. Desīyati attho etāyāti hi desanā. Pakārena ñāpīyati attho etāya, pakārato vā ñāpetīti paññatti. Tameva sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathādhammanti ettha pana dhammasaddo hetuṃ, hetuphalañca sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabhāvavācako hesa dhammasaddo, na pariyattihetuādivācako, tasmā yo yo avijjāsaṅkhārādidhammo, tasmiṃ tasminti attho. Tesaṃ tesaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārādidhammānaṃ anurūpaṃ vā yathādhammaṃ. Desanāpi hi paṭivedho viya aviparītasavisayavibhāvanato dhammānurūpaṃ pavattati, tatoyeva ca aviparītābhilāpoti vuccati. Dhammābhilāpoti hi atthabyañjanako aviparītābhilāpo dhammaniruttibhūto tantisaṅkhāto paramatthasaddappabandho. So hi abhilappati uccārīyatīti abhilāpo, dhammo aviparīto sabhāvabhūto abhilāpo dhammābhilāpoti vuccati, etena ‘‘tatra dhammaniruttābhilāpe ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 718) ettha vuttaṃ dhammaniruttiṃ dasseti saddasabhāvattā desanāya. Tathā hi niruttipaṭisambhidāya parittārammaṇādibhāvo paṭisambhidāvibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 718) vutto. Tadaṭṭhakathāya ca ‘‘taṃ sabhāvaniruttiṃ saddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’tiādinā (vibha. aṭṭha. 718) tassā saddārammaṇatā dassitā. ‘‘Imassa atthassa ayaṃ saddo vācako’’ti hi vacanavacanatthe vavatthapetvā taṃ taṃ vacanatthavibhāvanavasena pavattito saddo ‘‘desanā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Adhippāyo’’ti etena ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ dhammaniruttābhilāpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tato vinimuttaṃ paññattiṃ sandhāyāti dasseti anekadhā atthasambhave attanā adhippetatthasseva vuttattāti ayaṃ saddavādīnaṃ vādato vinicchayo.
在施设论者的主张里,对于随顺于世俗与胜义之区分这一义理、能表达该义理的胜义音声,世尊以意安立了名为经教的名施设,这就是开示,或者被称为“开示”,这是它的意思。为了通过显示作为根本因的音声来表明它,借助因的转喻而说“意趣是如法地称述法”。因为虽然在“称述法”中,被称述、被发出的称为“称述”,指的是音声,而不是施设,但当音声被说出时,取用与它相应的惯用语,由于能了知以那惯用语所表达的义理,所以当音声被讲述时,与它相应的施设也通过因的转喻而被说到了。再者,由于没有说“称述法是义”,而说“称述法是意趣”,就已经表明开示并不是音声。因此,仅仅以根本因音声的方式说了意趣而已,不应在这里把“开示”执取为这个词的含义。以上是依施设论者主张作出的判定。接着说了另一种含义:“随顺……宣说”,以此显示前面所说的令开示生起的心念。因为通过它,义理被宣说,所以是“宣说”。以“等”字,摄取了所引导、应引导等巴利语源,以及一性等、欢喜转起等依止于巴利的理趣。巴利
Paññattivādīnaṃ vāde pana sammutiparamatthabhedassa atthassānurūpavācakabhāvena paramatthasaddesu bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā tantisaṅkhātā nāmapaññatti desanā nāma, ‘‘desanā’’ti vā vuccatīti attho. Tadeva mūlakāraṇabhūtassa saddassa dassanavasena kāraṇūpacārena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi ‘‘dhammābhilāpo’’ti ettha abhilappati uccārīyatīti abhilāpoti saddo vuccati, na paṇṇatti, tathāpi sadde vuccamāne tadanurūpaṃ vohāraṃ gahetvā tena vohārena dīpitassa atthassa jānanato sadde kathite tadanurūpā paṇṇattipi kāraṇūpacārena kathitāyeva hoti. Apica ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti attho’’ti avatvā ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttattā desanā nāma saddo na hotīti dīpitameva. Tena hi adhippāyamattameva mūlakāraṇasaddavasena kathitaṃ, na idha gahetabbo ‘‘desanā’’ti etassa atthoti ayaṃ paññattivādīnaṃ vādato vinicchayo. Atthantaramāha ‘‘anuloma…pe… kathana’’nti, etena heṭṭhā vuttaṃ desanāsamuṭṭhāpakaṃ cittuppādaṃ dasseti. Kathīyati attho etenāti hi kathanaṃ. Ādisaddena nītaneyyādikā pāḷigatiyo, ekattādinandiyāvattādikā pāḷinissitā ca nayā saṅgahitā.
他亲自通达,或者通过它而通达,所以叫通达,也就是智。他亲自现观,或者通过它而现观,所以也称为现观。现在,为了从现观的分类、现观的行相、所缘和自性这几个方面把这种通达讲清楚,就说了“而此……”等话。其中,按世间和出世间的分类,按境域和不错乱的行相,按诸法、诸义、诸施设的所缘,按随顺于义、随顺于法、随顺于施设之路的自性,来把它讲清楚。在那里,从境域来说,随顺于义等而对诸法等通达,就是以无明等法为所缘、以行等义为所缘、以这两者的施设为所缘的世间现观。从不错乱来说,随顺于义等而对诸法等通达,就是以涅槃为所缘、与道相应、破除对前面所说的法、义、施设的迷惑的出世间现观。就像这样说:“这是因,这是它的果,这是随顺于这两者的说法”,如此以所缘的方式,世间智从境域方面通达;而出世间智则因为已经用智断除了对因、因果等的迷惑,所以从不错乱方面通达。不过也有些人说:出世间的通达,从境域方面说是涅槃,从不错乱方面说是其余的。巴利
Sayameva paṭivijjhati, etena vā paṭivijjhantīti paṭivedho, ñāṇaṃ. Tadeva abhisameti, etena vā abhisamentīti abhisamayotipi vuccati. Idāni taṃ paṭivedhaṃ abhisamayappabhedato, abhisamayākārato, ārammaṇato, sabhāvato ca pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘so cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hi lokiyalokuttaroti pabhedato, visayato, asammohatoti ākārato, dhammesu, atthesu, paññattīsūti ārammaṇato, atthānurūpaṃ, dhammānurūpaṃ, paññattipathānurūpanti sabhāvato ca pākaṭaṃ karoti. Tattha visayato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho nāma avijjādidhammārammaṇo, saṅkhārādiatthārammaṇo, tadubhayapaññāpanārammaṇo ca lokiyo abhisamayo. Asammohato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho nāma nibbānārammaṇo maggasampayutto yathāvuttadhammatthapaññattīsu sammohaviddhaṃsano lokuttaro abhisamayo. Tathā hi ‘‘ayaṃ hetu, idamassa phalaṃ, ayaṃ tadubhayānurūpo vohāro’’ti evaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena lokiyañāṇaṃ visayato paṭivijjhati, lokuttarañāṇaṃ pana tesu hetuhetuphalādīsu sammohassañāṇena samucchinnattā asammohato paṭivijjhati. Lokuttaro pana paṭivedho visayato nibbānassa, asammohato ca itarassātipi vadanti eke.
“随顺于义而于诸法中”的意思是:像“无明是因,诸行是由因所生的,无明使诸行生起”这样,随顺于果而于诸因中。或者,也有这样的意思:像“在福行、非福行、不动行这三者中,无明对非福行是相应缘,对其余的则各随其宜”等等,随顺于果而于诸因中的证悟。“随顺于法而于诸义中”的意思是:像“以无明为缘而有诸行”等等,随顺于因而于诸果中。六种施设的道路就是施设之路,随顺于它,也就是随顺于施设所说的法而于诸施设中的通达,这是其义。为了显示从现观来说还有另一种证悟之义,所以说“他们……”等。因为被证悟,所以叫证悟,这是指彼彼色等诸法的不颠倒的自性。“于彼彼处”:即于彼彼藏中,或于巴利语段中。“名为自相”:即名为恼坏、感知、触等各自的自相。巴利
Atthānurūpaṃ dhammesūti ‘‘avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, saṅkhāre uppādeti avijjā’’ti evaṃ kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesūti attho. Atha vā ‘‘puññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhāresu tīsu apuññābhisaṅkhārassa avijjā sampayuttapaccayo, itaresaṃ yathānurūpa’’ntiādinā kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesu paṭivedhotipi attho. Dhammānurūpaṃ atthesūti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) kāraṇānurūpaṃ kāriyesu. Chabbidhāya paññattiyā patho paññattipatho, tassa anurūpaṃ tathā, paññattiyā vuccamānadhammānurūpaṃ paññattīsu avabodhoti attho. Abhisamayato aññampi paṭivedhatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādimāha. Paṭivijjhīyatīti paṭivedhoti hi taṃtaṃrūpādidhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo vuccati. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ piṭake, pāḷipadese vā. Salakkhaṇasaṅkhātoti ruppananamanaphusanādisakasakalakkhaṇasaṅkhāto.
为了通过前面所说的那些法等等,来显示诸藏的深奥,说了“现在”等话。“法生”是指原因的类别,或者就是原因本身。“义生”是指结果的类别,或者就是结果本身。“而此宣说”是连接语。以了知那个含义的方式,它成为现前的。“此处所说的通达”,是指在那些各自藏中所说的法与义的宣说中的通达,也是指在这些藏中那些法的无颠倒自性,这就是它的意思。因为应当积集,所以善本身就是资粮;那些正确地积集了这资粮的人,就是“未积集善资粮者”的反面,也就是从这一点来说的劣慧者、无慧者,这就是意思。因为对于有慧的人来说,或者对于慧本身来说,恶劣的状态和被染污的状态都不可能存在;所以正是因为无慧,才成为劣慧,就像说“恶戒者”一样。在这里,应当知道:由于无明、行等法与义难以通达,所以难以深入;由于说明它们是难事,所以那宣说难以深入;由于无法把称为现观的通达作为生起的对象,以及由于称为无颠倒自性的通达难以了知,所以难以深入。“也这样”中的“也”字,把前面所说的另一种方式总合起来。为了显示如此在第一首偈中已经无缺、圆满地阐明了意义,说了“至此”等话。因为“在已经成立的情况下,再开始是为了说明别的意义,或者是为了确定”,通过这再次开始的话,显示已经无缺、圆满地阐明了意义。“至此”是表示界限的虚词,意思是“以这么多话语次第”。“这个就是它的量”,因此是“这么多”,意思是以这个量的话语次第。他们说:“声音说出来的同时,它的意义也就说出来了。”说了、解释了的义,就是“所说之义”。巴利
Yathāvuttehi dhammādīhi piṭakānaṃ gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idānī’’tiādimāha. Dhammajātanti kāraṇappabhedo, kāraṇameva vā. Atthajātanti kāriyappabhedo, kāriyameva vā. Yā cāyaṃ desanāti sambandho. Tadatthavijānanavasena abhimukho hoti. Yo cetthāti yo etāsu taṃ taṃ piṭakāgatāsu dhammatthadesanāsu paṭivedho, yo ca etesu piṭakesu tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvoti attho. Sambharitabbato kusalameva sambhāro, so sammā anupacito yehi te anupacitakusalasambhārā, tatova duppaññehi, nippaññehīti attho. Na hi paññavato, paññāya vā duṭṭhubhāvo dūsitabhāvo ca sambhavatīti nippaññattāyeva duppaññā yathā ‘‘dussīlo’’ti (a. ni. 5.213; 10.75; pārā. 295; dha. pa. 308). Ettha ca avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ dhammatthānaṃ duppaṭivijjhatāya dukkhogāhatā, tesaṃ paññāpanassa dukkarabhāvato taṃdesanāya, abhisamayasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa uppādanavisayīkaraṇānaṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, aviparītasabhāvasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa dubbiññeyyatāya dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Evampīti pi-saddo pubbe vuttaṃ pakārantaraṃ sampiṇḍeti. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya anūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ paridīpitatthabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Siddhe hi satyārambho atthantaraviññāpanāya vā hoti, niyamāya vā’’ti iminā punārambhavacanena anūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ paridīpitatthabhāvaṃ dasseti. Ettāvatāti paricchedatthe nipāto, ettakena vacanakkamenāti attho. Etaṃ vā parimāṇaṃ yassāti ettāvaṃ, tena, etaparimāṇavatā saddatthakkamenāti attho. ‘‘Sadde hi vutte tadatthopi vuttoyeva nāmā’’ti vadanti. Vutto saṃvaṇṇito attho yassāti vuttatthā.
这里“在此”是指在这首偈颂里。意思是:所谓“义”或者“抉择”,就是剩下的部分。“在三藏中”这里说的“各各”,应当从增补语或从上下文来理解,因为前面已经说过“在此各各中”。或者,因为语言表达本身有先后次序,这里不想作出区分,所以只指出了所依之处。在这里不应该责难说:“难道不是只应说‘在三藏中,可见三种教说分类’吗?”因为即使是按整体来说的句子,也可能意在其中的部分。就像“让婆罗门等人吃饭”这类说法中,可以看到部分句义的成立一样。所以不必再多费口舌,应当以不违背义理的方式来理解。一切地方都应这样。“教说分类”中的“教说”,就是学习。这里“教说”这个词是表示学习的行为,而不是圣典的同义词,所以意思是学习的方式。或者,应当以三种方式来学习的圣典本身,也被称为“教说”。《阿毗达摩注释》的锡兰古注里也是这么说的。正因为如此,也可以根据它与“蛇喻学习”的关系,把这部圣典称为“蛇喻教说”。这样说来,后面解释中“被恶持的、为了指责等目的而学习的蛇喻”这句话也就说得通了,因为在这里,把圣典本身说成“被恶持的”“被学习的”,才恰如其分。巴利
Etthāti etissā gāthāya. Evaṃ attho, vinicchayoti vā seso. Tīsu piṭakesūti ettha ‘‘ekekasmi’’nti adhikārato, pakaraṇato vā veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekamekasmiñcetthā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) hi heṭṭhā vuttaṃ. Atha vā vatticchānupubbikattā saddapaṭipattiyā niddhāraṇamidha avattukāmena ādhāroyeva vutto. Na cettha codetabbaṃ ‘‘tīsuyeva piṭakesu tividho pariyattibhedo daṭṭhabbo siyā’’ti samudāyavasena vuttassāpi vākyassa avayavādhippāyasambhavato. Dissati hi avayavavākyanipphatti ‘‘brāhmaṇādayo bhuñjantū’’tiādīsu, tasmā alamatipapañcena. Yathā attho na virujjhati, tathāyeva gahetabboti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Pariyattibhedoti pariyāpuṇanaṃ pariyatti. Pariyāpuṇanavācako hettha pariyattisaddo, na pana pāḷipariyāyo, tasmā pariyāpuṇanappakāroti attho. Atha vā tīhi pakārehi pariyāpuṇitabbā pāḷiyo eva ‘‘pariyattī’’ti vuccanti. Tathā ceva abhidhammaṭṭhakathāya sīhaḷagaṇṭhipade vuttanti vadanti. Evampi hi alagaddūpamāpariyāpuṇanayogato ‘‘alagaddūpamā pariyattī’’ti pāḷipi sakkā vattuṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamā’’ti parato niddesavacanampi upapannaṃ hoti. Tattha hi pāḷiyeva ‘‘duggahitā, pariyāpuṭā’’ti ca vattuṃ yuttā.
蛇喻这个名称,是因为抓蛇这件事被拿来作比喻。这里要明白,抓蛇是用“蛇”这个词来表达的。就像“饼”这个词表达的是吃饼,“琴”这个词表达的是弹琴一样。这里是用抓蛇来比喻教理的学习,而不是用蛇来比喻。本来应该说“抓蛇喻”,但省略了中间的词,就说成了“蛇喻”,就像“唇口”这类说法一样。而所谓“蛇”,指的是毒蛇。“毒”是毒的名称,因为那条蛇具足圆满的毒,所以叫“具足圆满之毒者”,也就是蛇,这里省略了一个鼻音并插入了“da”音;或者,拥有足以夺人性命的毒,所以叫蛇,按照前面说的方式理解。以从轮回之苦中出离为意义、为目的,所以叫“以出离为目的”。被委任守护库藏的人就是库藏官,如同守护国王宝物的人;同样,守护法宝的漏尽者也是如此。不顾虑其他意义,唯独像库藏官一样取用,这样的教理就是库藏官教理。巴利
Alagaddo alagaddaggahaṇaṃ upamā etissāti alagaddūpamā. Alagaddassa gahaṇañhettha alagaddasaddena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āpūpikoti ettha āpūpa-saddena āpūpakhādanaṃ viya, veṇikoti ettha vīṇāsaddena vīṇāvādanaggahaṇaṃ viya ca. Alagaddaggahaṇena hi pariyatti upamīyati , na alagaddena. ‘‘Alagaddaggahaṇūpamā’’ti vā vattabbe majjhepadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘oṭṭhamukho’’tiādīsu viya. Alagaddoti ca āsīviso vuccati. Gadoti hi visassa nāmaṃ, tañca tassa alaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ atthi, tasmā alaṃ pariyatto paripuṇṇo gado assāti alagaddo anunāsikalopaṃ, da-kārāgamañca katvā, alaṃ vā jīvitaharaṇe samattho gado yassāti alagaddo vuttanayena. Vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇaṃ attho payojanametissāti nissaraṇatthā. Bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto bhaṇḍāgāriko, rājaratanānupālako, so viyāti tathā, dhammaratanānupālako khīṇāsavo. Aññamatthamanapekkhitvā bhaṇḍāgārikasseva sato pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti.
“被恶取”就是被错误地执取。为了从它本身的性质来确定这一点,论中说“为了指责等目的而学习”,意思是为了指责、争论、逃脱等目的而学习。应当知道,为了利养、恭敬等目的而学习,也包含在这里面。这在《蛇喻经注》中已经说过。巴利
Duggahitāti duṭṭhu gahitā. Tadeva sarūpato niyametuṃ ‘‘upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā’’ti āha, upārambhaitivādappamokkhādihetu uggahitāti attho. Lābhasakkārādihetu pariyāpuṇanampi ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ alagaddasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
如果有人学了佛语之后,心里想“这样我就能得到衣服等物品,或者能在四众当中被人知道”,于是为了利养和恭敬去学习,他这种学习就叫蛇喻式的学习。因为像这样去学习,还不如不学佛语,干脆默默地离开更好。巴利
‘‘Yo buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā ‘evaṃ cīvarādīni vā labhissāmi, catuparisamajjhe vā maṃ jānissantī’ti lābhasakkārahetu pariyāpuṇāti, tassa sā pariyatti alagaddapariyatti nāma. Evaṃ pariyāpuṇanato hi buddhavacanaṃ apariyāpuṇitvā niddokkamanaṃ varatara’’nti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.239).
难道抓蛇喻的教说不就是被称为“蛇喻”吗?如果是这样,那么善持的教说也应该可以称为“蛇喻”,因为经中也以抓蛇作为譬喻来说了。这话确实说过:巴利
Nanu ca alagaddaggahaṇūpamā pariyatti ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuccati, evañca sati suggahitāpi pariyatti ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati tatthāpi alagaddaggahaṇassa upamābhāvena pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,就像有个男人想要蛇、寻找蛇,四处找蛇。他看见一条大蛇,就用带山羊蹄形状的棍子把它牢牢按住,用带山羊蹄形状的棍子牢牢按住后,紧紧抓住它的脖子。比丘们,即使那条蛇用身体缠住那个男人的手、手臂或别的什么肢体,他也不会因此而死,或者遭受接近死亡的痛苦。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为那条蛇被牢牢抓住了。同样地,比丘们,在这里,有些善男子学习法——契经、应颂……等等。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko alagaddagavesī alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramāno, so passeyya mahantaṃ alagaddaṃ, tamenaṃ ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇheyya , ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggahitvā gīvāya suggahitaṃ gaṇheyya. Kiñcāpi so bhikkhave, alagaddo tassa purisassa hatthaṃ vā bāhaṃ vā aññataraṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ bhogehi paliveṭheyya . Atha kho so neva tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetu, suggahitattā bhikkhave, alagaddassa. Evameva kho bhikkhave, idhekacce kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti suttaṃ geyya’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.239).
所以在这里,为什么能知道“错学的教理就是蛇喻”这个区别呢?也就是说,因为错学是出于指责等理由而学来的,所以被称为“蛇喻”,这是怎么知道的呢?确实如此,不过应当看到,这是依照“其余”的方式来说的。因为“出离利益的宝藏教理”是另外单独执取的,所以依照“其余”的方式,只有教理中“错误抓蛇”的比喻,才被理解为“蛇喻”。而教理中“正确抓蛇”的比喻,则是出离利益的教理,或者是宝藏教理。因此,这句“错学……教理”说得很对。现在,为了用巴利原文来证明这个含义,说了“yaṃ sandhāya”等话。其中,“yaṃ”指的是那种对教理的错学。这是世尊在《中部·根本五十篇·蛇喻经》中说的。巴利
Tasmā idha duggahitā eva pariyatti alagaddūpamāti ayaṃ viseso kuto viññāyati, yena duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuccatīti? Saccametaṃ, idaṃ pana pārisesañāyena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi nissaraṇatthabhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīnaṃ visuṃ gahitattā pārisesato alagaddassa duggahaṇūpamāyeva pariyatti ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti viññāyati. Alagaddassa suggahaṇūpamā hi pariyatti nissaraṇatthā vā hoti, bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti vā. Tasmā suvuttametaṃ ‘‘duggahitā…pe… pariyattī’’ti. Idāni tamatthaṃ pāḷiyā sādhento ‘‘yaṃ sandhāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yanti yaṃ pariyattiduggahaṇaṃ. Majjhimanikāye mūlapaṇṇāsake alagaddasutte (ma. ni. 1.239) bhagavatā vuttaṃ.
想要蛇的人,就是需要毒蛇,或者对毒蛇有需求,于是为了得到蛇而到处寻找、搜寻——这种人就叫“寻蛇者”。“正在四处搜寻蛇”,意思是为了找到毒蛇而四处奔走。这里的词是就目的而说的主格用法,或者是对格用法,也可以理解为“在搜寻蛇的地方行走”。因为人们在那里寻找蛇,所以那个地方就叫“搜寻蛇之处”。“那条”,指的就是那条蛇。“身体”,指蛇的躯体。因为经里说过:“蛇的躯体,就是它的身体。”它被弯曲、被扭卷,所以叫“身体”。“他的”,指那个人的。“在手上或手臂上”,这是两者的关联。从手腕到指尖这一段叫“手”。连同大臂在内的其余部分叫“手臂”。不过在有些地方,从肘部到指尖也叫“手”,因为那时“手臂”没有单独提出来。除了上面所说的手和手臂之外,身体其余的部分就叫“肢节”。“因此”,就是以此为由、以此作因的意思。在手上等处被咬,就是那种结果——死亡或濒死之苦——的因、缘故。本来应该说“以此为因”,却说成“因此”,这是把前一个词作具格义,省略了它的音,再用从格来表达,并且用来表示原因。也有人把这里当作表示原因的虚词。另外,这里的“因此”,就像前面所说的那样,是用来修饰“死亡或濒死之苦”的。“那是什么原因呢?”——前面说的在手上等处被咬,以及由此而来的死亡等遭遇,那到底是什么原因、什么缘由呢?是因为那个人对蛇抓取错了。巴利
Alagaddatthikoti āsīvisena, āsīvisaṃ vā atthiko, alagaddaṃ gavesati pariyesati sīlenāti alagaddagavesī. Alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramānoti āsīvisapariyesanatthaṃ caramāno. Tadatthe hetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, upayogavacanaṃ vā, alagaddapariyesanaṭṭhānaṃ vā caramāno. Alagaddaṃ pariyesanti etthāti hi alagaddapariyesanaṃ. Tamenanti taṃ alagaddaṃ. Bhogeti sarīre. ‘‘Bhogo tu phaṇino tanū’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Bhujīyati kuṭilaṃ karīyatīti bhogo. Tassāti purisassa. Hatthe vā bāhāya vāti sambandho. Maṇibandhato paṭṭhāya yāva agganakhā hattho. Saddhiṃ aggabāhāya avasesā bāhā, katthaci pana kapparato paṭṭhāya yāva agganakhā ‘‘hattho’’ti vuttaṃ bāhāya visuṃ anāgatattā. Vuttalakkhaṇaṃ hatthañca bāhañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sarīraṃ aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ. Tatonidānanti tannidānaṃ, taṃkāraṇāti attho. Taṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti ‘‘tannidāna’’nti hi vattabbe ‘‘tatonidāna’’nti purimapade paccattatthe nissakkavacanaṃ katvā, tassa ca lopamakatvā niddeso, hetvatthe ca paccattavacanaṃ. Kāraṇatthe nipātapadametantipi vadanti. Apica ‘‘tatonidāna’’nti etaṃ ‘‘maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkha’’nti ettha vuttanayena visesanaṃ. Taṃkissa hetūti yaṃ vuttaṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ, tannidānañca maraṇādiupagamanaṃ , taṃ kissa hetu kena kāraṇenāti ce? Tassa purisassa alagaddassa duggahitattā.
这里说的“在此”,是指在这样的教法之中。“愚人”是指因为缺乏功德的精华而空虚的人。“法”是指巴利圣典中的法。“学习”就是掌握,也就是反复诵读并让它熟记于心、持守不忘,这就是这句话的意思。用“经”等等来说明“法”的具体形态,因为除了经等九分教之外,并没有别的法。正如所说的“那些法”。“义”在这里是关联性的说明,“义”是指如实所说的意义和目的意义,这是用总括说明或省略的方式来说的。凡是某个词通过音声的共通性以多种方式显示意义,应当知道在一切处都是用总括说明或省略的方式。“不审察”就是不把握、不简择。因为“见”这个词在“见”等含义中,这里只取“见”的意思;而在“把握”和“眼”中,只取“把握”的意思;这又以简择和遍取分为两种,这里只取“简择”,而简择就是审察。所谓审察,就是对所说的话语的审察和对目的意义的审察,这里指的就是这两种。他们不作这样的审察:“在这个地方说的是戒,在这个地方说的是定,在这个地方说的是慧,我们要圆满它们”——这是对所说的话语的审察;也不作“戒是定的因,定是观的因”等等对目的意义的审察,这就是意思。“不审察”是指那些不审察的愚人。“不堪忍洞察”就是不能承受无余地观察的智慧。这里“jhā”这个音只取“见”的意思,不是“思惟”或“燃烧”的意思,而且只是智见,不是眼见,或者只是对所缘的审察,不是对相的审察。因此应当知道,意思是:不能以智慧见后、认可后而把握。因为无余地观察、见,所以叫“洞察”。依照连声规则,随韵脱落,成为“不堪忍洞察”,也有读作“堪忍洞察”的,以此显示这个意思:“由于他们不以智慧审察意义,那些法不现前,不能这样了知:此处说戒、定、观、道、流转、还灭。”巴利
Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Moghapurisāti guṇasārarahitatāya tucchapurisā. Dhammanti pāḷidhammaṃ. Pariyāpuṇantīti uggaṇhanti, sajjhāyanti ceva vācuggataṃ karontā dhārenti cāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Dhamma’’nti sāmaññato vuttameva sarūpena dasseti ‘‘sutta’’ntiādinā. Na hi suttādinavaṅgato añño dhammo nāma atthi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ dhammāna’’nti. Atthanti cettha sambandhīniddeso eso, atthanti ca yathābhūtaṃ bhāsitatthaṃ, payojanatthañca sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā vuttaṃ. Yañhi padaṃ sutisāmaññena anekadhā atthaṃ dīpeti, taṃ sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vāti sabbattha veditabbaṃ. Na upaparikkhantīti na pariggaṇhanti na vicārenti. Ikkhasaddassa hi dassanaṅkesu idha dassanameva attho, tassa ca pariggaṇhanacakkhulocanesu pariggaṇhanameva, tañca vicāraṇā pariyādānavasena dubbidhesu vicāraṇāyeva, sā ca vīmaṃsāyeva, na vicāro, vīmaṃsā ca nāmesā bhāsitatthavīmaṃsā, payojanatthavīmaṃsā cāti idha dubbidhāva adhippetā, tāsu ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, imasmiṃ samādhi, imasmiṃ paññā, mayañca taṃ pūressāmā’’ti evaṃ bhāsitatthavīmaṃsañceva ‘‘sīlaṃ samādhissa kāraṇaṃ, samādhi vipassanāyā’’tiādinā payojanatthavīmaṃsañca na karontīti attho. Anupaparikkhatanti anupaparikkhantānaṃ tesaṃ moghapurisānaṃ. Na nijjhānakkhamantīti nijjhānaṃ nissesena pekkhanaṃ paññaṃ na khamanti. Jhe-saddo hi idha pekkhaneyeva, na cintanajhāpanesu, tañca ñāṇapekkhanameva, na cakkhupekkhanaṃ, ārammaṇūpanijjhānameva vā, na lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, tasmā paññāya disvā rocetvā gahetabbā na hontīti adhippāyo veditabbo. Nissesena jhāyate pekkhateti hi nijjhānaṃ. Sandhivasena anusvāralopo nijjhānakkhamantīti, ‘‘nijjhānaṃ khamantī’’tipi pāṭho, tena imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘tesaṃ paññāya atthassa anupaparikkhanato te dhammā na upaṭṭhahanti, imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ, samādhi, vipassanā, maggo, vaṭṭaṃ, vivaṭṭhaṃ kathitanti evaṃ jānituṃ na sakkā hontī’’ti.
为了以挑剔他人言论为利益,以及为了从言论中脱身而获得利益。“挑剔”是指在他人言论中极力寻找过失;也就是说,依靠教法来贬低他人。正如所说,它的特征是“专门寻找他人的过失”。因此,“以从言论中脱身而获得利益”的意思是:依靠这部教法,为了从他人加在自己身上的言论或谴责中脱身,或者从自己的言论中脱身,以此为目的。“iti”这个词在这里就是表达这个意思,所以它指向“学习”这件事。所谓“言论”,就是用来谴责、压制别人的话;就是过失;从中解脱,或使他人解脱,就叫“脱身”。那些以从加在自己身上的言论中脱身为目的的人,就是“以从言论中脱身而获得利益”。加在自己身上的言论被称为“言论”,就像“天授”被称为“授”一样。或者,“言论”也可以指非难和指责,复合词按前面说过的方式理解。这里要表达的是:当别人对自己的言论提出过失,或者提出指责时,心里想“我要用这样那样的方法从那个过失或指责中脱身”,以这个为原因而学习。另一种理解是:各种言论就叫“iti言论”,因为“iti”这个词和“ta”的意思连在一起,带有分别的意味。按前面说过的方式,从这些言论中脱身,就是所说的利益;那些以此为目的的人,就是为了从种种言论中脱身而获得利益。所谓“为了什么目的”,就是为了圆满戒等的目的,或者为了证得道果涅槃、无取解脱的目的。虽然实际上没有分别,但习惯上仍这样说,就像说“像的身体”一样;或者这是把能分和所分合在一起说,就像说“为迦絺那而带来的布”一样。因为经文说“以及为了那个目的”。“ca”这个词表示限定,因此可以确定:学习只可能为了这个目的,不是为了别的目的。所谓“学习法”,意思是两种善男子——无论是因为出身还是因为品行——都按照正确的方法学习法。所谓“他们不能体验那个目的”,是说这些执取错误的人,不能体验、不能获得那个法的目的,也就是圆满戒等的目的,或者道果涅槃、无取解脱的目的。巴利
Upārambhānisaṃsā cevāti paresaṃ vāde dosāropanānisaṃsā ca hutvā. Bhuso ārambhanañhi paresaṃ vāde dosāropanaṃ upārambho, pariyattiṃ nissāya paravambhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hesa ‘‘paravajjānupanayanalakkhaṇo’’ti vutto. Iti vādappamokkhānisaṃsā cāti iti evaṃ etāya pariyattiyā vādappamokkhānisaṃsā attano upari parehi āropitassa vādassa niggahassa attato, sakavādato vā pamokkhapayojanā ca hutvā. Iti saddo idamatthe, tena ‘‘pariyāpuṇantī’’ti ettha pariyāpuṇanaṃ parāmasati. Vadanti niggaṇhanti etenāti vādo, doso, pamuccanaṃ, pamuccāpanaṃ vā pamokkho, attano upari āropitassa pamokkho ānisaṃso yesaṃ tathā. Āropitavādo hi ‘‘vādo’’ti vutto yathā ‘‘devena datto datto’’ti. Vādoti vā upavādonindā yathāvuttanayeneva samāso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – parehi sakavāde dose āropite, nindāya vā āropitāya taṃ dosaṃ, nindaṃ vā evañca evañca mocessāmāti iminā ca kāraṇena pariyāpuṇantīti. Atha vā so so vādo iti vādo iti-saddassa saha vicchāya ta-saddatthe pavattattā. Itivādasa pamokkho yathāvuttanayena, so ānisaṃso yesaṃ tathā, taṃ taṃ vādapamocanānisaṃsā hutvāti attho. Yassa catthāyāti yassa ca sīlādipūraṇassa, maggaphalanibbānabhūtassa vā anupādāvimokkhassa atthāya. Abhedepi bhedavohāro eso yathā ‘‘paṭimāya sarīra’’nti, bhedyabhedakaṃ vā etaṃ yathā ‘‘kathinassatthāya ābhataṃ dussa’’nti. ‘‘Tañcassa attha’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Ca-saddo avadhāraṇe, tena tadatthāya eva pariyāpuṇanaṃ sambhavati, nāññatthāyāti vinicchinoti. Dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti hi jātiācāravasena duvidhāpi kulaputtā ñāyena dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Tañcassa atthaṃ nānubhontīti assa dhammassa sīlādipūraṇasaṅkhātaṃ, maggaphalanibbānabhūtaṃ vā anupādāvimokkhasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ ete duggahitagāhino nānubhonti na vindantiyeva.
另一种理解方式是这样的:有些愚人学习佛法,是为了挑别人的毛病,或者是为了在辩论中让自己脱身。当别人指出“这个道理不是这样的”,他们因为自己学得不对、掌握得不好,根本没有能力证明“这个道理就是这样”。所以,他们既没办法挑别人言论的毛病,也没办法让自己的言论摆脱过失,他们既没有真正体会到那个道理,也根本没有证得它。这里的意思应该这样理解。这里“ca”这个字也是用来表示强调限定的。在“那些法”等说法中,那些法因为被错误掌握,以挑毛病之基础、诤论之基础等为因,长久地导致不利和痛苦,这就是意思。因为“被错误掌握”一语是含有因由的说法。因此说“诸比丘,因为被错误掌握,诸法……”(《中部》1.238)。在这里,是以因中说果的方式说“那些法导致不利和痛苦”,就像说“酥油是寿命,酸奶是力量”一样。同样地,虽然那些法并不导致不利和痛苦,但按照所说的方式,对于正在学习的人来说,在背诵时、在争论时,以那些法为根源的许多不善法有生起的可能,所以说“那些法……乃至……导致”。那是什么原因呢?这里是指:没有体验如上所说的义理,以及那些法导致不利和痛苦,这两点是被针对的。“是什么”是属格,用于原因义;同样,“原因”是依格。巴利
Aparo nayo – yassa upārambhassa, itivādappamokkhassa vā atthāya ye moghapurisā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, te parehi ‘‘ayamattho na hotī’’ti vutte duggahitattāyeva ‘‘tadatthova hotī’’ti paṭipādanakkhamā na honti, tasmā parassa vāde upārambhaṃ āropetuṃ attano vādaṃ pamocetuñca asakkontāpi taṃ atthaṃ nānubhonti ca na vindantiyevāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Idhāpi hi ca-saddo avadhāraṇatthova. ‘‘Tesa’’ntiādīsu tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitattā upārambhamānadabbamakkhapalāsādihetubhāvena dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantīti attho. Duggahitāti hi hetugabbhavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘duggahitattā bhikkhave, dhammāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.238). Ettha ca kāraṇe phalavohāravasena ‘‘te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantī’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘ghatamāyu, dadhi bala’’nti. Tathā hi kiñcāpi na te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, tathāpi vuttanayena pariyāpuṇantānaṃ sajjhāyanakāle, vivādakāle ca tammūlakānaṃ upārambhādīnaṃ anekesaṃ akusalānaṃ uppattisambhavato ‘‘te…pe… saṃvattantī’’ti vuccati. Taṃ kissa hetūti ettha nti yathāvuttassatthassa ananubhavanaṃ, tesañca dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanaṃ parāmasati. Kissāti sāmivacanaṃ hetvatthe, tathā hetūti paccattavacanañca.
“维持”在这里,应当按作用或圣典文句所述的方式来理解它的含义。其中,在作用方面,“善取”虽然不是所依,却用“所依”的说法来表达,就像“行游而行”“正行游而行”等说法那样。他用“戒蕴等”来展开说明这个含义,这里的“等”字包含了定、观等。因为,如果有人学习佛语之后,在戒出现的地方圆满戒,在定出现的地方让定入胎,在观出现的地方安立观,在道果出现的地方心想“我要修道、我要证果”而学习,那么对他来说,这个教法学习就叫做“出离义”。“那”指的是教法的善取。这在《蛇喻经》中说过。“长夜导致利益与安乐”的意思是:在戒等出现的地方圆满戒等,直到证得阿拉汉后,在众人中说法,受用由对说法生起信心的人供养的四资具;或者依正法挑剔他人的言论;或者避开他人对自己言论所加的过失——这些都在长夜中导致利益与安乐。同样,不仅依靠善取教法而有修道、证果等,而且降伏他人言论、安立自己言论也能成就。正如在《般涅槃经》等中所说:“降伏已生起的外道言论,依正法善加降伏后,将宣说具神变的法”等。巴利
Yāpanāti ettha kiriyā pāḷivasena vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Tattha kiriyāpakkhe yā suggahitāti abhedepi bhedavohāro ‘‘cārikaṃ pakkamati, cārikaṃ caramāno’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.254, 300) viya. Tadevatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘sīlakkhandhādī’’tiādinā, ādisaddena cettha samādhivipassanādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Yo hi buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ pūretvā, samādhino āgataṭṭhāne samādhiṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā, vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā, maggaphalānaṃ āgataṭṭhāne ‘‘maggaṃ bhāvessāmi, phalaṃ sacchikarissāmī’’ti uggaṇhāti, tasseva sā pariyatti nissaraṇatthā nāma hoti. Yanti yaṃ pariyattisuggahaṇaṃ. Vuttaṃ alagaddasutte. Dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantīti sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne sīlādīni pūrentānampi arahattaṃ patvā parisamajjhe dhammaṃ desetvā dhammadesanāya pasannehi upanīte cattāro paccaye paribhuñjantānampi paresaṃ vāde sahadhammena upārambhaṃ āropentānampi sakavādato parehi āropitadosaṃ pariharantānampi dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantīti attho. Tathā hi na kevalaṃ suggahitapariyattiṃ nissāya maggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādīniyeva, api tu paravādaniggahasakavādapatiṭṭhāpanānipi ijjhanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ parinibbānasuttā dīsu ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṃ dhammaṃ desessantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.68).
这里的“Yaṃpanā”也按前面说的方式有两种含义:通过遍知苦而遍知的蕴;通过断除集而断除的烦恼;通过证悟阿罗汉果性而证悟的不动。“不动”也是阿罗汉果的名称。虽然四道和四果都具有不坏灭的性质,但七种有学因为舍弃了各自的名称而逐级获得更高的名称,所以他们的道果不被称为“不动”。而阿罗汉无论何时都只是阿罗汉,因此他的果就依补特伽罗的名字而称为“不动”。由此也显示了这个含义:“只有漏尽者的教理学习才称为库藏教理。”因为对他来说,没有未遍知、未断除、未修习或未证得的东西,所以他学习佛语时,只是作为持经者、传承守护者、世系守护者而学习,因此说“为守护传承”等。这里的“传承”就是法的相续,也就是法不间断地流传。“佛陀世尊的世系”也就是上面所说的传承。巴利
Yaṃpanāti etthāpi vuttanayena duvidhena attho. Dukkhaparijānena pariññātakkhandho. Samudayappahānena pahīnakileso. Paṭividdhārahattaphalatāya paṭividdhākuppo.Akuppanti ca arahattaphalassetaṃ nāma. Satipi hi cattunnaṃ maggānaṃ, catunnañca phalānaṃ avinassanabhāve sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ sakasakanāmapariccāgena uparūpari nāmantarappattito tesaṃ maggaphalāti ‘‘akuppāmi’’ti na vuccanti. Arahā pana sabbadāpi arahāyeva nāmāti tasseva phalaṃ puggalanāmavasena ‘‘akuppa’’nti vuttaṃ, iminā ca imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘khīṇāsavasseva pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāmā’’ti. Tassa hi apariññātaṃ, appahīnaṃ abhāvitaṃ, asacchikataṃ vā natthi, tasmā so buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇantopi tantidhārako paveṇīpālako vaṃsānurakkhakova hutvā pariyāpuṇāti, tenevāha ‘‘paveṇīpālanatthāyā’’tiādi. Paveṇī cettha dhammasantati dhammassa avicchedena pavatti. Buddhassa bhagavato vaṃsoti ca yathāvuttapaveṇīyeva.
如果说,为了守护传承而学习佛语就是“库藏教理”,那为什么特别说是“漏已尽”的人呢?因为有些凡夫也有这种做法。比如,有的凡夫比丘因为害怕饥荒等,在无法安住于经教事务的某个地方时,自己因为托钵乞食而过度疲劳,心想:“极为甘美的佛语不要消失,我要持守经典,建立世系,守护传承”,于是就去学习。那么,为什么他的学习不也叫“库藏教理”呢?回答是:即使这样,凡夫的学习也不叫“库藏教理”。因为凡夫虽然以“我要守护传承”的意乐去学习,但由于他还没有超越对生存的贪爱,他的学习实际上只是为了出离,所以凡夫的学习要么像蛇喻那样,要么是为了出离。七种有学的学习则纯粹是为了出离。只有漏已尽者的学习,才应当知道是“库藏教理”。因为漏已尽者与库藏官相似,所以被称为“库藏官”。就像库藏官把装饰用的宝物收存起来,到了该庄严的时候,就把合适的装饰宝物呈献给国王,为他庄严;同样,漏已尽者领受法宝之藏后,看到有因缘、堪能证得解脱的众生,就为他们增长相应的说法,以道支、觉支等称为出世间的庄严来庄严他们。巴利
Nanu ca yadi paveṇīpālanatthāya buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti, atha kasmā ‘‘khīṇāsavo’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Ekaccassa hi puthujjanassāpi ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Tathā hi ekacco puthujjano bhikkhu chātakabhayādinā ganthadhuresu ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasitumasakkontesu sayaṃ bhikkhācārena atikilamamāno ‘‘atimadhuraṃ buddhavacanaṃ mā nassatu, tantiṃ dhāressāmi, vaṃsaṃ ṭhapessāmi, paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti pariyāpuṇāti. Tasmā tassāpi pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma kasmā na hotīti? Vuccate – evaṃ santepi hi puthujjanassa pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma na hoti. Kiñcāpi hi puthujjano ‘‘paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti ajjhāsayena pariyāpuṇāti, attano pana bhavakantārato avitiṇṇattā tassa sā pariyatti nissaraṇatthāyeva nāma hoti, tasmā puthujjanassa pariyatti alagaddupamā vā hoti, nissaraṇatthā vā. Sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ nissaraṇatthāva. Khīṇāsavānaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattiyevāti veditabbaṃ. Khīṇāsavo hi bhaṇḍāgārika sadisattā ‘‘bhaṇḍāgāriko’’ti vuccati. Yathā hi bhaṇḍāgāriko alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā pasādhanakāle tadupiyaṃ alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ rañño upanāmetvā taṃ alaṅkaroti, evaṃ khīṇāsavopi dhammaratanabhaṇḍaṃ sampaṭicchitvā mokkhādhigamāya bhabbarūpe sahetuke satte passitvā tadanurūpaṃ dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggaṅgabojjhaṅgādisaṅkhātena lokuttarena alaṅkārena alaṅkarotīti.
把三种教法这样区分之后,现在为了在三藏中按各自适用的情形判定成就和退失,而加以分别说明,所以说了“然而在律中”等话。在“依戒的成就而证得三明”等说法里,因为戒在净化时,靠念与正知的力量、靠业自性智的力量,从杂染的污垢中净化,并且走向圆满,所以戒的成就正在完成时,就以亲依止成就的方式,使念的力量和智的力量现前。因此应当知道,戒的成就是三明的亲依止,因为它促成了同类的因。依靠念的力量,宿住随念明得以成就;依靠正知的力量,由于在一切事务中都已熟练地善见所作,与死生智相连的第二明得以成就;由于没有违犯,断除杂染得以成立,以还灭亲依止的方式,由意乐清净而成就第三明。先前已成就的定与慧若尚未圆满,戒作为漏尽智亲依止这一点,应当由纯观漏尽者来说明。由于有“得定者如实知”这句话,定的成就是六通的亲依止。由于有“从瑜伽确实生起智慧”这句话,由前分修习、亲近师长、通达地方语言、领受、遍问等所培育的慧的成就,是无碍解差别的亲依止。这里,因为说的是“依戒的成就”,若有人未能成就作为定之展开的无余六通,就最胜的界限来说,他便没有定的成就;因此,虽然明只是通的一部分,这里仍然只取由戒的成就所生的三明。又像由慧的成就所生的四无碍解,对于亲依止具足的人,只依道而成就,因为它们在道的那一刹那就已经获得。这样,由戒的成就所生的三明,以及由定的成就所生的六通,对于亲依止具足的人,只依道而成就,所以应当知道,它们是因证道而证得的。因为对独觉和正自觉者来说,这些圣者的这些殊胜证得,与独觉菩提、正等菩提的证得是相似的。巴利
Evaṃ tisso pariyattiyo vibhajitvā idāni tīsupi piṭakesu yathārahaṃ sampattivipattiyo niddhāretvā vibhajanto ‘‘vinaye panā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Sīlasampadaṃ nissāya tisso vijjā pāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu yasmā sīlaṃ visujjhamānaṃ satisampajaññabalena, kammassakatāñāṇabalena ca saṃkilesamalato visujjhati, pāripūriñca gacchati, tasmā sīlasampadā sijjhamānā upanissayasampattibhāvena satibalaṃ, ñāṇabalañca paccupaṭṭhapetīti tassā vijjattayūpanissayatā veditabbā sabhāgahetusampādanato. Satibalena hi pubbenivāsavijjāsiddhi. Sampajaññabalena sabbakiccesu sudiṭṭhakāritāparicayena cutūpapātañāṇānubaddhāya dutiyavijjāya siddhi. Vītikkamābhāvena saṃkilesappahānasabbhāvato vivaṭṭūpanissayatāvasena ajjhāsayasuddhiyā tatiyavijjāsiddhi. Puretarasiddhānaṃ samādhipaññānaṃ pāripūriṃ vinā sīlassa āsavakkhayañāṇūpanissayatā sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavehi dīpetabbā. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 5.1071; netti. 40; mi. pa. 14) vacanato samādhisampadā chaḷabhiññatāya upanissayo. ‘‘Yogā ve jāyate bhūrī’’ti (dha. pa. 282) vacanato pubbayogena garuvāsadesabhāsākosallauggahaṇaparipucchādīhi ca paribhāvitā paññāsampadā paṭisambhidāppabhedassa upanissayo. Ettha ca ‘‘sīlasampadaṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttattā yassa samādhivijambhanabhūtā anavasesā cha abhiññā na ijjhanti, tassa ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena na samādhisampadā atthīti satipi vijjānaṃ abhiññekadesabhāve sīlasampadāsamudāgatā eva tisso vijjā gahitā, yathā ca paññāsampadāsamudāgatā catasso paṭisambhidā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhanti maggakkhaṇeyeva tāsaṃ paṭiladdhattā. Evaṃ sīlasampadāsamudāgatā tisso vijjā, samādhisampadāsamudāgatā ca cha abhiññā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhantīti maggādhigameneva tāsaṃ adhigamo veditabbo. Paccekabuddhānaṃ, sammāsambuddhānañca paccekabodhisammāsambodhisamadhigamasadisā hi imesaṃ ariyānaṃ ime visesādhigamāti.
对于“即它们本身”这一限定语,在此处是针对应证得的六神通和四无碍解在律藏中没有分别广说这一点而说的。因为在《毗兰若品》中,只分别说了三明。“且”字则是把两者合在一起说,这是就它们在此处有部分言说而说的,因为神通和无碍解的一部分在那里已经提到了。第二处“即它们本身”这个限定语,是着眼于四无碍解而说的,不是指三明。因为三明已经包含在六神通里面,而且在经藏中已经分别说过了。“且”字则是把无碍解的言说也合在一起。第三处“且它们”中的“且”字,是显示其余的功德也存在于那里。因为在阿毗达摩中,三明、六神通和四无碍解都已经说到了。然而,为了显示无碍解在其他地方没有分别广说、唯独在那里被正确分别,所以不按前面所说的方式作限定,而是改用“就在那里”来设立限定。金刚觉长老说:“在阿毗达摩中,三明、六神通、四无碍解,以及正勤等其他殊胜功德都已分别说明。虽然都已分别说明,但为了显示唯独属于慧性、能够证得的四无碍解,才作了这个限定,反过来表述为‘且它们就在那里’。”“如是”等句是总结语。巴利
Tāsaṃyevaca tattha pabhedavacanatoti ettha ‘‘tāsaṃyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ pāpuṇitabbānaṃ chaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidānaṃ vinaye pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Verañjakaṇḍe (pārā. 12) hi tisso vijjāva vibhattāti. Casaddena samuccinanañca tāsaṃ ettha ekadesavacanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ abhiññāpaṭisambhidānampi ekadesānaṃ tattha vuttattā. Dutiye ‘‘tāsaṃyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ catasso paṭisambhidā apekkhitvā kataṃ, na tisso vijjā. Tā hi chasu abhiññāsu antogadhattā sutte vibhattāyevāti. Ca-saddena ca paṭisambhidānamekadesavacanaṃ samuccinoti. Tatiye ‘‘tāsañcā’’ti ca-saddena sesānampi tattha atthibhāvaṃ dīpeti. Abhidhamme hi tisso vijjā, cha abhiññā, catasso ca paṭisambhidā vuttāyeva. Paṭisambhidānaṃ pana aññattha pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ, tattheva ca sammā vibhattabhāvaṃ dīpetukāmo heṭṭhā vuttanayena avadhāraṇamakatvā ‘‘tatthevā’’ti parivattetvā avadhāraṇaṃ ṭhapeti. ‘‘Abhidhamme pana tisso vijjā, cha abhiññā, catasso ca paṭisambhidā aññe ca sammappadhānādayo guṇavisesā vibhattā. Kiñcāpi vibhattā, visesato pana paññājātikattā catassova paṭisambhidā pāpuṇātīti dassanatthaṃ ‘tāsañca tatthevā’ti avadhāraṇavipallāso kato’’ti vajirabuddhitthero. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi nigamanaṃ.
“乐触”是指这些是乐之触。已经允许的敷具、覆具等这类东西,因为它们的触有共同性,所以说为乐触,或者说它们的触是乐的;而这些人已被允许有那样的触,所以叫“已允许的乐触”,也就是敷具、覆具等这类东西,因为它们的触是相同的。执取触就是女人触,也就是淫欲法。这是名叫阿利咤、前世曾做驯鹰人的比丘说的。他多闻、善于说法,但在业障、烦恼障、异熟障、诽谤障、违教障这五种障碍中,不了知违教障,只知道其余四种障碍。所以他独自静处时这样想:“这些在家者享用五种欲乐功德,也能成为入流者、一来者、不来者;比丘们也能看见可爱的、眼所识的色……触触所识的触,享用柔软的敷具、覆具,这一切都可以。为什么唯独女人的色、声、香、味、触不可以?这些也应该可以。”他把无罪资具的受用味和有罪欲乐的受用味混在一起,把有贪欲的受用和无贪欲的受用当成一回事,就像用粗线穿极细的针,又像拿芥子去和须弥山相比。他生起邪恶的见解,说:“世尊为什么要费那么大力气制定第一条波罗夷?这就像要把大海捆起来一样。这里面没有过失。”他与一切知智相违,排斥无畏智,把荆棘投进圣道,说“淫欲法中没有过失”,打击了胜者的法轮。因此说“如他所说”等等。巴利
Sukho samphasso etesanti sukhasamphassāni, anuññātāniyeva tādisāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni, tesaṃ phassasāmaññato sukho vā samphasso tathā, anuññāto so yesanti anuññātasukhasamphassāni, tādisāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni tesaṃ phassena samānatāya. Upādinnakaphasso itthiphasso, methunadhammoyeva. Vuttaṃ ariṭṭhena nāma gaddhabādhipubbena bhikkhunā (ma. ni. 234; pāci. 417). So hi bahussuto dhammakathiko kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhesu antarāyikesu āṇāvītikkamantarāyikaṃ na jānāti, sesantarāyikeyeva jānāti, tasmā so rahogato evaṃ cintesi ‘‘ime agārikā pañca kāmaguṇe paribhuñjantā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi honti, bhikkhūpi manāpikāni cakkhuviññeyyāni rūpāni passanti …pe… kāyaviññeyye phoṭṭhabbe phusanti, mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇāni paribhuñjanti, etaṃ sabbampi vaṭṭati, kasmā itthīnaṃyeva rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbā na vaṭṭanti, etepi vaṭṭantiyevā’’ti anavajjena paccayaparibhogarasena sāvajjaṃ kāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ saṃsanditvā sachandarāgaparibhogañca nicchandarāgaparibhogañca ekaṃ katvā thullavākehi saddhiṃ atisukhumasuttaṃ ghaṭento viya, sāsapena saddhiṃ sineruno sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya ca pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppādetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhagavatā mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya mahatā ussāhena paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, natthi ettha doso’’ti sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhanto vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhanto ariyamagge khāṇukaṇṭakādīni pakkhipanto ‘‘methunadhamme doso natthī’’ti jinacakke pahāramadāsi, tenāha ‘‘tathāha’’ntiādi.
以“不能逾越”的含义而系属于障碍,或者以障碍为果报,或者有造作障碍的习性,所以叫“障碍法”;也就是说,这些法能给生天和解脱带来障碍。这些障碍法按业、烦恼、异熟、诽谤、违教来分,有五种。详细解释应当从《阿利咤学处注释》等书中获取。这里句义之间的关系是这样的:对于世尊所说、所开示、所制立的“这些法是障碍法”,如果有人在实际修持这些法时,认为这些法并不能像它们本应的那样成为生天和解脱的障碍,那么他就是以这种方式了知世尊所说的法。由此,他就落入了恶戒。也就是说,因为把有罪的事当成无罪的,所以违犯之后,他就落入了恶戒。巴利
Anatikkamanatthena antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā, saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakarāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te ca kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhā. Vitthāro ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanādīsu (pāci. aṭṭha. 417) gahetabbo. Ayaṃ panettha padatthasambandho – ye ime dhammā antarāyikā iti bhagavatā vuttā desitā ceva paññattā ca, te dhamme paṭisevato paṭisevantassa yathā yena pakārena te dhammā antarāyāya saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ nālaṃ samatthā na honti, tathā tena pakārena ahaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ ājānāmīti. Tato dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇātīti tato anavajjasaññibhāvahetuto vītikkamitvā dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti.
“四种……等等”这里,“等”这个字——巴利
Cattāro…pe…ādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena –
比丘们,世间确实存在这四种人。哪四种?一种人修行是为了自己的利益,不是为了别人的利益;一种人修行是为了别人的利益,不是为了自己的利益;一种人修行既不是为了自己的利益,也不是为了别人的利益;一种人修行既是为了自己的利益,也是为了别人的利益……比丘们,这就是……世间存在的四种人。巴利
‘‘Cattārome bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmiṃ. Katame cattāro? Attahitāya paṭipanno no parahitāya, parahitāya paṭipanno no attahitāya, nevattahitāya paṭipanno no parahitāya, attahitāya ceva paṭipanno parahitāya ca…pe… ime kho bhikkhave…pe… lokasmi’’nti (a. ni. 4.96) –
像这样开头的说法,是在指出与补特伽罗施设相应的经典原文。所谓意趣,就是世尊心里的想法:“这是依照补特伽罗施设的惯用说法,而不是从胜义的角度来说的。”因为确实这样说过:巴利
Evamādinā puggaladesanāpaṭisaññuttasuttantapāḷiṃ nidasseti. Adhippāyanti ‘‘ayaṃ puggaladesanāvohāravasena, na paramatthato’’ti evaṃ bhagavato adhippāyaṃ. Vuttañhi –
正等觉者、说法者中最胜的人,宣说了两种谛。
世俗谛和胜义谛之外,找不到第三个谛。
约定俗成的说法是真实的,因为世间共同认可的缘故。
胜义的说法是真实的,因为诸法具有真实的作用。
所以,对于那位善用世俗言说方式的世间导师、世尊,
对于使用世俗共许说法的人,妄语不会生起。巴利
‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati. Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā. Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno; Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.57; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170; itivu. aṭṭha. 24);
佛陀们、世尊们并不会舍弃世间的共许说法。他们正是立足于世间的称呼、世间的语言、世间的表达方式来说法。而且,世尊也是依据“为了显示惭愧,为了显示业属于自己”等八种原因(《中部注》1.57;《增支部注》1.1.202;《如是语注》24;《论事复注》1)来说“人施设论”的——不了解这个意图的人,就会误解。这个道理后面会显现出来。
“错误地把握”,就是指像“我这样理解世尊所说的法:这个识流转、轮回,而不是别的”(《中部》1.144)这样,作了错误地把握,也就是颠倒地把握,说的就是这个意思。所谓“错误地把握”,因为它是行为被动名词的用法,要以中性单数来表示。这种行为被动名词的常规就是:以中性来表示,属于被动状态,含有“自作”和“他作”动词的随转,是一种反身作用的表达。所以说“作了错误地把握”。“所把握的”就是指错误地把握。
在《中部·根本五十篇·大爱尽经》中,世尊是针对一位名叫沙地的比丘,他持有这样的主张,而作了开示。“以自己错误把握的法”是剩余部分的读法,意思是:以邪妄的体性。或者说,“错误把握”就是“被错误把握的”,而“以自己”是在属格意义下的工具格,或者是具有格尾形式的不变词,因此意思是“以自己的错误把握、颠倒执取”。“诽谤”,就是进行诽谤。挖掘自己的善根,就是挖自己。所谓“由此”,就是由错误把握的缘故。巴利
Na hi lokasammutiṃ buddhā bhagavanto vijahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyā lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Apica ‘‘hirottappadīpanatthaṃ, kammassakatādīpanattha’’nti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.57; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.202; itivu. aṭṭha. 24; kathā. anuṭī. 1) evamādīhipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ kathetī’’ti evaṃ adhippāyamajānanto. Ayamattho upari āvi bhavissati. Duggahitaṃ gaṇhātīti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anañña’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.144) duggahitaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, viparītaṃ gaṇhātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Duggahitanti hi bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso kiriyāyavisesanabhāvena napuṃsakaliṅgena niddisitabbattā. Ayañhi bhāvanapuṃsakapadassa pakati, yadidaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgena niddisitabbattā, bhāvappaṭṭhānatā, sakammākammakiriyānuyogaṃ paccattopayogavacanatā ca. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘duggahitaṃ katvā’’ti. Yanti duggahitagāhaṃ. Majjhimanikāye mūlapaṇṇāsake mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasutte (ma. ni. 1.144) tathāvādīnaṃ sādhināmakaṃ kevaṭṭaputtaṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha bhagavatā vuttaṃ. Attanā duggahitena dhammenāti pāṭhaseso, micchāsabhāvenāti attho. Atha vā duggahaṇaṃ duggahitaṃ, attanāti ca sāmiatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, vibhattiyantapatirūpakaṃ vā abyayapadaṃ, tasmā attano duggahaṇena viparītagāhenāti attho. Abbhācikkhatīti abbhakkhānaṃ karoti. Attano kusalamūlāni khananto attānaṃ khanati nāma. Tatoti duggahitabhāvahetuto.
“思惟法”是指对诸法自性的考察。“过度奔越”是指:不安住在应当遵守的界限上,而是越过界限,生起这样的想法:“仅仅凭心生起就有布施,心本身就是自己的所缘,一切心都只以自性法为所缘”等等。那些无法思惟的、或者说不相应、无意义的事物,就叫作“不应思惟”。为了说明这些,所以说“故说”等语。其中,“不应思惟”是显示它们的自性;“不应思惟它”是显示对此不应有所作为;“哪些”等语是显示其原因。思惟哪些事物会招致疯狂、心智错乱、苦恼、伤害,这四种就是不应思惟的;或者说,这四种被称为不应思惟,不应去思惟;又或者说,思惟哪些事物会招致这些后果,因此不应思惟,这四种就被称为不应思惟——应当这样连接理解。而“此”字则——巴利
Dhammacintanti dhammasabhāvavicāraṃ. Atidhāvantoti ṭhātabbamariyādāyaṃ aṭṭhatvā ‘‘cittuppādamattenapi dānaṃ hoti, sayameva cittaṃ attano ārammaṇaṃ hoti, sabbampi cittaṃ sabhāvadhammārammaṇameva hotī’’ti ca evamādinā atikkamitvā pavattayamāno. Cintetumasakkuṇeyyāni , anaraharūpāni vā acinteyyāni nāma, tāni dassento ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha acinteyyānīti tesaṃ sabhāvadassanaṃ. Nacintetabbānīti tattha kattabbakiccadassanaṃ. ‘‘Yānī’’tiādi tassa hetudassanaṃ. Yāni cintento ummādassa cittakkhepassa, vighātassa vihesassa ca bhāgī assa, acinteyyāni imāni cattāri na cintetabbāni, imāni vā cattāri acinteyyāni nāma na cintetabbāni, yāni vā…pe… assa, tasmā na cintetabbāni acintetabbabhūtāni imāni cattāri acinteyyāni nāmāti yojanā. Iti-saddena pana –
是哪四种呢?比丘们,诸佛的境界是不可揣度的,不应该去思惟,谁去思惟它,就会陷入疯狂和苦恼。比丘们,禅修者的境界是不可揣度的……比丘们,业的果报是不可揣度的……比丘们,对世间的思惟是不可揣度的……这四种……会招致疯狂和苦恼。巴利
‘‘Katamāni cattāri? Buddhānaṃ bhikkhave buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yaṃ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Jhāyissa bhikkhave jhānavisayo acinteyyo…pe… kammavipāko bhikkhave acinteyyo…pe… lokacintā bhikkhave acinteyyā…pe… imāni…pe… assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77) –
从《增支部》里所说的《不思议经》开始,它收进了所有说明“不可思议”这一状态的巴利经典。六种不可思议——比如不共智等——确实可以说是不可思议的,但对随念它们的人来说,因为它们能成为善法生起的原因,所以还是可以思惟的;而这里说的这些情况却不是这样,因为它们没有结果,所以不应思惟。通过“破戒……差别”这些话,直接依其本身显示了退失;通过“如何?依藏”等语句的衔接,显示了前后文的关联,因此说“如此以种种方式”等。因为缺少前后关联的话是混乱的,不能让听众领会其中的含义,只有通晓前后文的人,经过这样审察的话,才是他的范围。正如所说:巴利
Caturaṅguttare vuttaṃ acinteyyasuttaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbaṃ acinteyyabhāvadīpakaṃ pāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kāmaṃ acinteyyāni cha asādhāraṇañāṇādīni, tāni pana anussarantassa kusaluppattihetubhāvato cintetabbāni, imāni pana evaṃ na honti aphalabhāvato, tasmā na cintetabbāni. ‘‘Dussīlya…pe… pabheda’’nti iminā vipattiṃ sarūpato dasseti. ‘‘Kathaṃ? Piṭakavasenā’’tiādivacanasambajjhanena pubbāparasambandhaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ nānappakārato’’tiādimāha. Pubbāparasambandhavirahitañhi vacanaṃ byākulaṃ. Sotūnañca atthaviññāpakaṃ na hoti, pubbāparaññūnameva ca tathāvicāritavacanaṃ visayo. Yathāha –
通晓前文后文,了知义理,精通词句及其分析。
他牢牢掌握所学的法义,并且反复审查其中的含义。巴利
‘‘Pubbāparaññū atthaññū, niruttipadakovido; Suggahītañca gaṇhāti, atthañco’ paparikkhatī’’ti. (theragā. 1031);
“它们”指的是三藏,“此”指的是佛语。巴利
Tesanti piṭakānaṃ. Etanti buddhavacanaṃ.
由被称为《戒蕴品》《大品》《波提迦品》这三品所摄,所以叫“三品所摄”。不过按偈颂来数,这部类正好有三十四部经。按品的收录方式来说,这个结集有三品,所以是“三品摄”。这第一个部类就是《长部》,它的名字是随顺义理而非与之相违的,或者因为随顺义理而叫“随顺义理之名”,也就是“随义之名”的意思。在这里,“三品摄”这个说法,即使中间隔着“其”字,也只是复合词而非句子,应当像《波逸提》368中“比丘以得新衣”里的“以得新衣”一词那样来看待。注释书师们正是这样解释的:“‘不得’就是得,得就是得。不得什么?衣。什么样的?新的。所以本应说‘以得新衣’时,没有做鼻音省略而说成‘以得新衣’,意思是‘以所得到的新衣’。中间的‘然’是不变词,‘比丘’是所得者的例示。”在这里,无论从音声还是从意义来看,句子都不成立,只有复合词才说得通。因为“三品”一词如果在“摄”中作工具格,那就只能是工具格词;如果这两个词是同格关系,那就应该像“三界”这类词一样是中性。同样,“三品”一词如果没有“摄”字,就无法与其他词构成复合关系,而在那里用那样的句子来连接也不合适,所以即使中间隔着别的词,只要音声和意义不冲突,就是复合词的构成方式,因此只有复合词才合理。“三品为这个结集所有”,即“三品摄”,是把a换成o,或者加上o,就像“七日后般涅槃”“离去不久”“出生一月”这类说法一样;而“这个结集的”意思就是“这个被收录的部类的”。另一些人则说:“把‘三品为谁所有’这样理解,‘摄’这个词就能同格成立,而‘摄’就是计数。注释师们则显示‘三品为这个结集所有’这两个词就是同格关系。”这种说法并不正确,因为数与所数混在一起,而且不明显。巴利
Sīlakkhandhavaggamahāvaggapāthikavaggasaṅkhātehi tīhi vaggehi saṅgaho etesanti tivaggasaṅgahāni. Gāthāya pana yassa nikāyassa suttagaṇanato catuttiṃseva suttantā. Vaggasaṅgahavasena tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassāti tivaggo saṅgaho. Paṭhamo esa nikāyo dīghanikāyoti anulomiko apaccanīko, atthānulomanato atthānulomanāmiko vā, anvatthanāmoti attho. Tattha ‘‘tivaggo saṅgaho’’ti etaṃ ‘‘yassā’’ti antarikepi samāsoyeva hoti, na vākyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘navaṃ pana bhikkhunā cīvaralābhenā’’ti (pāci. 368) ettha ‘‘navaṃcīvaralābhenā’’ti padaṃ viya. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathācariyā vaṇṇayanti ‘‘alabbhīti labho, labho eva lābho. Kiṃ alabbhi? Cīvaraṃ. Kīdisaṃ? Navaṃ, iti ‘navacīvaralābhenā’ti vattabbe anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā ‘navaṃcīvaralābhenā’ti vuttaṃ, paṭiladdhanavacīvarenāti attho. Majjhe ṭhitapadadvaye panāti nipāto. Bhikkhunāti yena laddhaṃ, tassa nidassana’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 368). Idhāpi saddato, atthato ca vākye yuttiyāabhāvato samāsoyeva sambhavati. ‘‘Tivaggo’’ti padañhi ‘‘saṅgaho’’ti ettha yadi karaṇaṃ, evaṃ sati karaṇavacanantameva siyā. Yadi ca padadvayametaṃ tulyādhikaraṇaṃ, tathā ca sati napuṃsakaliṅgameva siyā ‘‘tiloka’’ntiādipadaṃ viya. Tathā ‘‘tivaggo’’ti etassa ‘‘saṅgaho’’ti padamantarena aññatthāsambandho na sambhavati, tattha ca tādisena vākyena sambajjhanaṃ na yuttaṃ, tasmā samānepi padantarantarike saddatthāvirodhabhāvoyeva samāsatākāraṇanti samāso eva yutto. Tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassāti hi tivaggosaṅgaho akārassa okārādesaṃ, okārāgamaṃ vā katvā yathā ‘‘sattāhaparinibbuto, acirapakkanto, māsajāto’’tiādi, assa saṅgahassāti ca saṅgahitassa assa nikāyassāti attho. Apare pana ‘‘tayo vaggā yassāti katvā ‘saṅgaho’ti padena tulyādhikaraṇameva sambhavati, saṅgahoti ca gaṇanā. Ṭīkācariyehi (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) pana ‘tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassā’ti padadvayassa tulyādhikaraṇatāyeva dassitā’’ti vadanti, tadayuttameva saṅkhyāsaṅkhyeyyānaṃ missakattā, apākaṭattā ca.
为了说明“随顺义理”这一点,所以说了“为什么”等话。由于功德上的借代用法,或者由于派生词缀的关系,用“长”这个词就只取了篇幅长的经;而“部类”这个词则是依照惯用法,用在集合和住处等意义上,这一点通过“篇幅长的”等话显示出来。由于能说和所说的约定已经成立,通过实际使用,让人知道它在那层意义上约定已经成立,所以说了“不说”等话。“一部类”就是一个集合。“如此种种”就是如此种种差别。“如”就是像这些畜生道的众生。“波尼迦”和“奇迦利迦”是刹帝利,他们的住处就称为“波尼迦部类”“奇迦利迦部类”。在这里,“部类”这个词是集合和住处的能说者。“能证者”是因为能证成所意指的意义,所以把例子称为能证者。“已集合”是剩余部分的读法,与此相关,或者按照所说的方式能证成。凡是能简择并证成所意指意义的东西,就称为“证者”。正如《满足希求》中所说:“而《五师本生》应当引为证者来说”,这是从教说之用来说,或者是在教说中;从世间之用来说,或者是在世间中。然而这在三藏中并不存在,所以这样说。在这里,第一个例子应当看作从教说而来的能证之语,第二个则从世间而来。巴利
Atthānulomikattaṃ vibhāvetumāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Guṇopacārena, taddhitavasena vā dīgha-saddena dīghappamāṇāni suttāniyeva gahitāni , nikāyasaddo ca ruḷhivasena samūhanivāsatthesu vattatīti dasseti ‘‘dīghappamāṇāna’’ntiādinā. Saṅketasiddhattā vacanīyavācakānaṃ payogato tadatthesu tassa saṅketasiddhataṃ ñāpento ‘‘nāha’’ntiādimāha. Ekanikāyampīti ekasamūhampi. Evaṃ cittanti evaṃ vicittaṃ. Yathayidanti yathā ime tiracchānagatā pāṇā. Poṇikā, cikkhallikā ca khattiyā, tesaṃ nivāso ‘‘poṇikanikāyo cikkhallikanikāyo’’ti vuccati. Etthāti nikāyasaddassa samūhanivāsānaṃ vācakabhāve. Sādhakānīti adhippetassatthassa sādhanato udāharaṇāni vuccanti. ‘‘Samānītānī’’ti pāṭhasesena cetassa sambandho, sakkhīni vā yathāvuttanayena sādhakāni. Yañhi niddhāretvā adhippetatthaṃ sādhenti , taṃ ‘‘sakkhī’’ti vadanti. Tathā hi manorathapūraṇiyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcagarujātakaṃ (jā. 1.1.132) pana sakkhibhāvatthāya āharitvā kathetabba’’nti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.5) sāsanatoti sāsanapayogato, sāsane vā. Lokatoti lokiyapayogato, loke vā. Idaṃ pana piṭakattaye na vijjati, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti vadanti. Ettha ca paṭhamamudāharaṇaṃ sāsanato sādhakavacanaṃ, dutiyaṃ lokatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
以《根本法门》等品来算,总共归入十五品。所谓“一半的第二、一又二分之一”,说的正是一百,也就是一百五十部经。“于彼处”,就是在那个部类里。“十五品所摄”,就是由十五品所统摄、所包含。巴利
Mūlapariyāya vaggādivasena pañcadasavaggasaṅgahāni. Aḍḍhena dutiyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, tadeva sataṃ, ekasataṃ, paññāsa ca suttānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yatthāti yasmiṃ nikāye. Pañcadasavaggapariggahoti pañcadasahi vaggehi pariggahito saṅgahito.
“相应”的意思是“在这里连接在一起”。那么,是什么和什么连接在一起呢?是各种经和品。就像字母聚在一起叫“词”,词聚在一起叫“句”,句聚在一起叫“经”,经聚在一起叫“品”,同样,品聚在一起就叫“相应”。由于天神所问而说出的经、品等是相互连接的,所以有《天相应》等名称,因此说“依《天相应》等”。在“经有七千七百”这个读法中,应该理解为“经有七千,又有七百经”。也有“七千经,又有七百经”这样的读法。“相应摄”就是《相应部》的汇集、计数。巴利
Saṃyujjanti etthāti saṃyuttaṃ, kesaṃ saṃyuttaṃ? Suttavaggānaṃ. Yathā hi byañjanasamudāye padaṃ, padasamudāye ca vākyaṃ, vākyasamudāye suttaṃ, suttasamudāye vaggoti samaññā, evaṃ vaggasamudāye saṃyuttasamaññā. Devatāya pucchitena kathitasuttavaggādīnaṃ saṃyuttattā devatāsaṃyuttādibhāvo (saṃ. ni. 1.1), tenāha ‘‘devatāsaṃyuttādivasenā’’tiādi. ‘‘Suttantānaṃ sahassāni satta suttasatāni cā’’ti pāṭhe suttantānaṃ satta sahassāni, satta suttasatāni cāti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Satta suttasahassāni, satta suttasatāni cā’’tipi pāṭho. Saṃyuttasaṅgahoti saṃyuttanikāyassa saṅgaho gaṇanā.
由于每一支都层层递增、更为殊胜,所以叫“增支”,因此说“以每一支递增的方式”等等。这里确实是从一支开始,一直到十一支都有说明。而“支”就是法的组成部分。巴利
Ekekehi aṅgehi uparūpari uttaro adhiko etthāti aṅguttaroti āha ‘‘ekekaaṅgātirekavasenā’’tiādi. Tattha hi ekekato paṭṭhāya yāva ekādasa aṅgāni kathitāni. Aṅganti ca dhammakoṭṭhāso.
在《经藏》的解说中,“先前”是指:为了用另一种方式把已经说过的内容归纳起来、不加区分地展示出来,才说了“除去”等话。因为“整个律藏”等所说的内容,正是通过这种方式被归纳展示出来的。此外,还可以这样理解:为了以“无余摄尽”的方式表明——除了上面所说的之外,凡是世尊依据所立之教理所开示的,以及世尊所随喜的《导论》《藏释》等一切,全都包含在这里面。因为即使道理已经成立,再着手加以论述,要么是为了说明另外的含义,要么是为了加以限定。还有,这里就像说了“长量的”等等,却没有说“小量的”等等,而只直接讲其本身——应当知道,这是因为律、阿毗达摩等“长量”的内容也含摄在其中;由此也可以看出:“并非在所有情况下,属于小部的东西都名副其实地被称为‘小’,而只是因为它们与长部等的自性相反这一共同点,才在某些地方有这种称呼。”“除彼之外”就是除那四部之外的其余部分。巴利
Pubbeti suttantapiṭakaniddese. Vuttameva pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā avisesetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sakalaṃ vinayapiṭaka’’ntiādinā vuttameva hi iminā pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā dasseti. Apica yathāvuttato avasiṭṭhaṃ yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā dinnanaye ṭhatvā desitaṃ, bhagavatā ca anumoditaṃ nettipeṭakopadesādikaṃ, taṃ sabbampi ettheva pariyāpannanti anavasesapariyādānavasena dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttantipi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Siddhepi hi sati ārambho atthantaraviññāpanāya vā hoti, niyamāya vāti. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘dīghappamāṇāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘khuddakappamāṇāna’’ntiādimavatvā sarūpasseva kathanaṃ vinayābhidhammādīnaṃ dīghappamāṇānampi tadantogadhatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tena ca viññāyati ‘‘na sabbattha khuddakapariyāpannesu tassa anvatthasamaññatā, dīghanikāyādisabhāvaviparītabhāvasāmaññena pana katthaci tabbohāratā’’ti. Tadaññanti tehi catūhi nikāyehi aññaṃ, avasesanti attho.
关于“九种分类”,这里怎么算是九种分类呢?因为应当由九支来界定,而且彼此不能混杂。如果是那样,祇夜等支就应当具有非契经的性质;或者契经的性质就是祇夜等支。这样一来,“契经”就不会单独作为契经支存在了;如此一来,教法就成了八支。另外,注释书里说:“有偈颂的经是祇夜,无偈颂的经是记说。”而所谓契经,可以是有偈颂的,也可以是无偈颂的。所以,仅仅这两支就已经把这两种都包含进去了。因此,并不存在一种既不属于有偈颂、也不属于无偈颂,又不名为优陀那等特殊名称的契经,可以作为契经支。就算勉强有单独的契经支,像《吉祥经》等,因为有偈颂,就不会被归入契经支,就像《法句》等一样。或者,因为有偈颂,就会被归入祇夜支,就像《有偈品》一样。同样,在《两分别》等之中,那些有偈颂的部分又该怎么归类呢?回答说:巴利
Navappabhedanti ettha kathaṃ panetaṃ navappabhedaṃ hoti. Tathā hi navahi aṅgehi vavatthitehi aññamaññasaṅkararahitehi bhavitabbaṃ, tathā ca sati asuttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni siyuṃ, atha suttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni, evaṃ sati suttanti visuṃ suttaṅgameva na siyā, evaṃ sante aṭṭhaṅgaṃ sāsananti āpajjati. Apica ‘‘sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha., pārā. aṭṭha. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Suttañca nāma sagāthakaṃ vā siyā, niggāthakaṃ vā, tasmā aṅgadvayeneva tadubhayaṃ saṅgahitanti tadubhayavinimuttaṃ suttaṃ udānādivisesasaññārahitaṃ natthi, yaṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, athāpi kathañci visuṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ (khu. pā. 1; su. ni. 261) suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā gāthābhāvato dhammapadādīnaṃ viya. Geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā sagāthakattā sagāthāvaggassa viya. Tathā ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānanti? Vuccate –
所谓“经”,是通称;其余的是各别的称呼。巴利
Suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare;
因为具有相状,且已确立,所以能与其他事物共同存在,而不混同于其他。
就像前面所说的过失,这里并不存在执取。
因此,大师的教法就是这九支,彼此不相混杂。巴利
Sanimittā niruḷhattā, sahatāññena nāññato. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā); Yathāvuttassa dosassa, natthi etthāvagāhaṇaṃ; Tasmā asaṅkaraṃyeva, navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ. (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā);
对一切佛语来说,“契经”是一个通称。比如有这样的话:“这么多是那位世尊的契经所摄、属于契经的”,“在舍卫城的经分别中”,“在自说中有五百经”等等。从这些说法可以看出,即使在律藏、阿毗达摩藏这些各自不同的教法里,也能见到“经”这个称呼。正因为如此,具寿大迦旃延在《指导论》中说“九种契经的寻求”。在那里,以经等九分教为对象去寻求、探寻、审察其义,就被称为“九种契经的寻求”。不过,在其中的某些部分,祇夜等其他分类因为各有自己的特征,就依据各自的特征而安立为不同的名称。比如,祇夜的特征是有偈颂。即使在世间,人们也把有偈颂、有诗律的著作叫作“祇夜”。而在没有偈颂的情况下,以提问和回答的方式展开,就是记说的特征。因为问答被称为“记说”,记说就是“记别”。既然如此,那些有偈颂等的经文,如果以问答方式展开,是不是也该变成记说呢?不会。因为祇夜等名称已经没有安立的余地了。没有安立余地的规则,比有安立余地的规则更强。而且,这里特别说明了“在没有偈颂的情况下”。因为简别是为了把不想要的意思从想要的意思中排除掉。比如在《法句》等纯粹以偈颂结集的经文中,虽然也是有偈颂的,却安立了“偈颂”这个名称;在与喜悦、智慧所成的偈颂相关的经文中,在“世尊如此说”等语句相连的经文中,在与稀有法相关的各类经文中,依次安立了偈颂、优陀那、如是说、稀有法的名称。在这里,虽然也有其他名称的特征,但因为无安立余地的名称更强,所以偈颂等名称还是安立了。同样,虽然是以偈颂结集,但在显示世尊过去生中修行事迹的经文中,安立了本生的名称;虽然是以问答方式展开,也有偈颂,但在某些经中因为能令人获得吠陀,所以安立了吠陀罗的名称。这样,就以有偈颂等各自的特征,在各种不同的经文中安立了祇夜等名称。所以,从经分之后,祇夜等就是各别的分类。而在这里,凡是不具有祇夜等分类特征的,就只是经分,因为它是抛开各别名称、以通称而成立的。那么,既然如此,有偈颂的经就是祇夜,没有偈颂的经就是记说,这样一来,离开了这两者的经就不存在了,所以经分不就应该单独成立了吗?这个责难是没有根据的。为什么没有根据呢?因为前面已经澄清过了。前面已经澄清:在没有偈颂的情况下,以问答方式展开,才是记说的特征。巴利
Sabbassāpi hi buddhavacanassa suttanti ayaṃ sāmaññavidhi. Tathā hi ‘‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ, (pāci. aṭṭha. 655, 1242) sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅge, (cūḷava. 456) sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’tiādi (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) vacanato vinayābhidhammapariyatti visesesupi suttavohāro dissati. Teneva ca āyasmā mahākaccāyano nettiyaṃ āha ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti (netti. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā) tattha hi suttādivasena navaṅgassa sāsanassa pariyeṭṭhi pariyesanā atthavicāraṇā ‘‘navavidha suttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti vuttā. Tadekadesesu pana pare geyyādayo sanimittā visesavidhayo tena tena nimittena patiṭṭhitā. Tathā hi geyyassa sagāthakattaṃ tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Lokepi hi sasilokaṃ sagāthakaṃ cuṇṇiyaganthaṃ ‘‘geyya’’nti vadanti, gāthāvirahe pana sati pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Pucchāvissajjanañhi ‘‘byākaraṇa’’nti vuccati, byākaraṇameva veyyākaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sante sagāthakādīnampi pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanavasena pavattānaṃ veyyākaraṇabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati geyyādisaññānaṃ anokāsabhāvato. Saokāsavidhito hi anokāsavidhi balavā. Apica ‘‘gāthāvirahe satī’’ti visesitattā. Yathādhippetassa hi atthassa anadhippetato byavacchedakaṃ visesanaṃ. Tathā hi dhammapadādīsu kevalagāthābandhesu, sagāthakattepi somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaññuttesu, ‘‘vuttaṃ heta’’ntiādivacana sambandhesu, abbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttesu ca suttavisesesu yathākkamaṃ gāthāudānaitivuttaka abbhutadhammasaññā patiṭṭhitā. Ettha hi satipi saññāntaranimittayoge anokāsasaññānaṃ balavabhāveneva gāthādisaññā patiṭṭhitā, tathā satipi gāthābandhabhāve bhagavato atītāsu jātīsu cariyānubhāvappakāsakesu jātakasaññā patiṭṭhitā, satipi pañhāvissajjanabhāve , sagāthakatte ca kesuci suttantesu vedassa labhāpanato vedallasaññā patiṭṭhitā, evaṃ tena tena sagāthakattādinā nimittena tesu tesu suttavisesesu geyyādisaññā patiṭṭhitāti visesavidhayo suttaṅgato pare geyyādayo, yaṃ panettha geyyaṅgādinimittarahitaṃ, taṃ suttaṅgameva visesasaññāparihārena sāmaññasaññāya pavattanato. Nanu ca evaṃ santepi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇanti tadubhayavinimuttassa suttassa abhāvato visuṃ suttaṅgameva na siyāti codanā tadavatthā evāti? Na tadavatthā sodhitattā. Sodhitañhi pubbe gāthāvirahe sati pucchāvissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittanti.
还有人说:“因为《吉祥经》等是偈颂体,所以不应归入契经分。”这种说法也不对,因为已经约定俗成了。《吉祥经》等确实已经约定俗成地被视为契经体。它们并不像《法句经》《佛种姓经》那样以偈颂体的形式而得名,而是以契经体的形式得名。正因如此,在没有争议的情况下,才用“名为经”来称呼它们。又有人说:“因为带有偈颂,或许应归入应颂分。”这也不对。为什么呢?因为所谓“共存”,是指与自身之外的另一个事物共同存在。“带有偈颂”就是指与偈颂共存,但在《吉祥经》等之中,并没有任何一段脱离偈颂的契经文句,可以被说成“与偈颂共存”。难道偈颂的集合体与作为其组成部分的那些偈颂不同,可以依这个集合体说“与偈颂共存”吗?并非如此。因为并不存在脱离组成部分的所谓集合体,能与那些部分共存。不过,在某些地方,比如“长部经标记”等说法中,把集合体与部分区分开来说,这只是随顺世俗言说的权宜说法;而这里是依究竟义来显示分类差别的论述。又有人说:“在《分别论》等之中,带有偈颂的段落应归入应颂分。”这也不对,因为归属不同。那些偈颂属于本生经等的范畴,是不同的。那些偈颂确实是按照相应情况在那里宣说的,因此,不因为那些偈颂就使《分别论》等具有应颂分的性质。这样,就应当了知契经等九分教之间互不混杂。巴利
Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘gāthābhāvato maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ (khu. pā. 1; su. ni. 261) suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā’’ti, tampi na, niruḷhattā. Niruḷho hi maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttabhāvo. Na hi tāni dhammapadabuddhavaṃsādayo viya gāthābhāvena saññitāni, atha kho suttabhāveneva. Teneva hi akathāyaṃ ‘‘suttanāmaka’’nti nāmaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yañca pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sagāthakattā geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā’’ti, tampi natthi. Kasmāti ce? Yasmā sahatāññena, tasmā. Sahabhāvo hi nāma attato aññena hoti. Saha gāthāhīti ca sagāthakaṃ, na ca maṅgalasuttādīsu gāthāvinimutto koci suttapadeso atthi, yo ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti vucceyya, nanu ca gāthāsamudāyo tadekadesāhi gāthāhi añño hoti, yassa vasena ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti sakkā vattunti? Taṃ na. Na hi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma koci atthi, yo tadekadesehi saha bhaveyya. Katthaci pana ‘‘dīghasuttaṅkitassā’’tiādīsu samudāyekadesānaṃ vibhāgavacanaṃ vohāramattaṃ pati pariyāyavacanameva, ayañca nippariyāyena pabhedavibhāgadassanakathāti . Yampi vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānaṃ geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tampi na, aññato. Aññāyeva hi tā gāthā jātakādipariyāpannattā. Tādisāyeva hi kāraṇānurūpena tattha desitā, ato na tāhi ubhatovibhaṅgādīnaṃ geyyaṅgabhāvoti. Evaṃ suttādinavaṅgānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvo veditabboti.
现在,为了分别解说这九分教,说了“其中”等话。所谓“义释”,是在《经集》中——巴利
Idāni etāni navaṅgāni vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Niddeso nāma suttanipāte –
如果一个人渴望欲乐,而他的愿望真的实现了,
确实,人一旦得到想要的东西,就会满心欢喜。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa ce taṃ samijjhati; Addhā pītimano hoti, laddhā macco yadicchatī’’tiādinā. (su. ni. 772); –
已引出的《八颂品》;巴利
Āgatassa aṭṭhakavaggassa;
世间被什么遮住了?(具寿阿逸多问)
它靠什么才不显现?
你说的是什么污垢?
“什么才是他最大的恐惧?”等等。巴利
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito); Kenassu na pakāsati; Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, Kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’ntiādinā. (su. ni. 1038); –
关于所引的《彼岸道品》巴利
Āgatassa pārāyanavaggassa;
对一切众生放下棍棒,
不伤害他们中的任何一个;
连儿子都不该贪求,更何况朋友?
就像犀牛角一样,独自而行。巴利
‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesaṃ; Na puttamiccheyya kuto sahāyaṃ, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’tiādinā. (su. ni. 35); –
对于传来的《犀牛角经》,尊者法将舍利弗长老以等同于导师的方式,依义分别而作成的义释,就是被称为《大义释》和《小义释》的那部。这样,在这里,尊者觉音论师已经指出义释归入契经分;同样,在其他地方,比如《律藏注释》等中,尊者法护长老在《导论注释》里也这样指出。不过,另有一些人主张义释归入偈颂与记说这两分。这确实是优波西那长老在《义释注释》中说的:巴利
Āgatassa khaggavisāṇasuttassa ca atthavibhāgavasena satthukappena āyasmatā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherena kato niddeso, yo ‘‘mahāniddeso, cūḷaniddeso’’ti vuccati. Evamidha niddesassa suttaṅgasaṅgaho bhadantabuddhadhosācariyena dassito, tathā aññatthāpi vinayaṭṭhakathādīsu , ācariyadhammapālattherenāpi nettippakaraṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Apare pana niddesassa gāthāveyyākaraṇaṅgesu dvīsu saṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ niddesaṭṭhakathāyaṃ upasenattherena –
而这部《义释》,在经藏……论藏这三藏当中,属于经藏;在长部……小部这五部当中,属于小部与大部;在经……方广这九分教当中,随其相应,归入偈颂与记说这两分。巴利
‘‘So panesa vinayapiṭakaṃ…pe… abhidhammapiṭakanti tīsu piṭakesu suttantapiṭakapariyāpanno, dīghanikāyo…pe… khuddakanikāyoti pañcasu nikāyesu khuddakamahānikāyapariyāpanno, suttaṃ…pe… vedallanti navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ gāthaṅgaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahito’’ti (mahāni. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā).
在这里要先考察一下:在某些地方,因为具备问答的整体形式,把义释的一部分归入记说分,这还说得通;可是义释并不是偈颂体,那又怎么能归入偈颂分呢?这值得探究。因为像《法句》等那样,纯粹以偈颂结集的形式,才是偈颂分之所以成立的依据。在《法句》等纯粹以偈颂结集的作品中,确实安立了“偈颂”这个名称,但在义释里,却找不到任何纯粹以偈颂结集的部分。因为法将舍利弗只是对正自觉者所说的、收录在《八颂品》等当中的偈颂作了分别解释。那些为了辨明义理而引来的根本偈颂,虽然出自《八颂品》等,但因为属于《经集》,本身就是另一部经,所以不算在义释之内;就像《二部分别》等中出现的偈颂,虽然并未获得那种称法,却属于《本生》等一样。因此,这里应当另找理由,或者采用更合理的解释。巴利
Ettha tāva katthaci pucchāvissajjanasabbhāvato niddesekadesassa veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho yujjatu, agāthābhāvato gāthaṅgasaṅgaho kathaṃ yujjeyyāti vīmaṃsitabbametaṃ. Dhammāpadādīnaṃ viya hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhabhāvo gāthaṅgassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Dhammapadādīsu hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu gāthāsamaññā patiṭṭhitā, niddese ca na koci kevalo gāthābandappadeso upalabbhati. Sammāsambuddhena bhāsitānaṃyeva hi aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitānaṃ gāthānaṃ niddesamattaṃ dhammasenāpatinā kataṃ. Atthavibhajanatthaṃ ānītāpi hi tā aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitā niddisitabbā mūlagāthāyo suttanipātapariyāpannattā aññāyevāti na niddesasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu āgatāpi taṃ vohāramalabhamānā jātakādipariyāpannā gāthāyo viya, tasmā kāraṇantaramettha gavesitabbaṃ, yuttataraṃ vā gahetabbaṃ.
名为《那罗迦经》的这部经,是世尊在转法轮日之后的第七天,对那罗迦长老以“我将为你开示牟尼之道……”(《经集》706偈)等语所宣说的,阐明牟尼修行的经。名为《迅速经》的这部经,是在大集会经说法时聚集起来的诸天当中,有一些天众生起了“证得阿罗汉果的修行之道是什么?”这样的心念,世尊为了让它们明白这个道理,先让化佛向自己发问,然后以“戏论之根……”(《经集》922偈)等语所宣说的经。如此,这里已经指出了《经集》中所收录的《吉祥经》等经归属于“经分”;接下来也将指出,在同一处收录的、不以“经”为名的纯偈颂,归属于“偈颂分”。既然如此,在《经集》注释的开头——巴利
Nālakasuttaṃ nāma dhammacakkappavattita divasato sattame divase nālakattherassa ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 706) bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ moneyya paṭipadāparidīpakaṃ suttaṃ. Tuvaṭṭakasuttaṃ nāma mahāsamayasuttantadesanāya sannipatitesu devesu ‘‘kā nu kho arahattappattiyā paṭipattī’’ti uppannacittānaṃ ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ tamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ nimmitabuddhena attānaṃ pucchāpetvā ‘‘mūlaṃ papañcasaṅkhāyā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 922) bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ. Evamidha suttanipāte āgatānaṃ maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho dassito, tattheva āgatānaṃ asuttanāmikānaṃ suddhikagāthānaṃ gāthaṅgasaṅgahañca dassayissati, evaṃ sati suttanipātaṭṭhakathārambhe –
点缀着成百上千首偈颂,以应颂和记说为庄严;
为什么叫《经集》呢?如果认为它已经得到了这个名字的话。巴利
‘‘Gāthāsatasamākiṇṇo, geyyabyākaraṇaṅkito; Kasmā suttanipātoti, saṅkhamesa gatoti ce’’ti. (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā); –
有人问:为什么整个《经集》都被说成是摄属于应颂分和记说分呢?这并不矛盾。只不过那个责难的人在那里抓住“有偈颂”和“某些地方有问答”这两点,就提出了责难而已。不然的话,因为《经集》里根本找不到没有偈颂的经,那就不该说它摄属于记说分。所以,那个责难者的话在这里是站不住脚的。而在其他地方,比如律藏注释等里面,已经按照前面说的方式,说明了这部经摄属于经分和偈颂分。“经”指的是长行文。“特别地”是指以积聚的状态而说的。“有偈品是应颂”——这是句子的连接关系。巴利
Sakalassāpi suttanipātassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho kasmā coditoti? Nāyaṃ virodho. Kevalañhi tattha codakena sagāthakattaṃ, katthaci pucchāvissajjanattañca gahetvā codanāmattaṃ kataṃ, aññathā suttanipāte niggāthakassa suttasseva abhāvato veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho na codetabbo siyā, tasmā codakassa vacanametaṃ appamāṇanti idha, aññāsu ca vinayaṭṭhakathādīsu vuttanayeneva tassa suttaṅgagāthaṅgasaṅgaho dassitoti. Suttanti cuṇṇiyasuttaṃ. Visesenāti rāsibhāvena ṭhitaṃ sandhāyāha. Sagāthāvaggo geyyanti sambandho.
据说在三部《结集》注疏里都这样说:不被八支所摄的,就叫作“无碍解”等。不过另一些人主张,《无碍解道》摄属于应颂和记说这两分。因为它的注释里确实这样说:“在九分教法中,随其所应,摄属于应颂和记说这两分。”(《无碍解道》注释1,著作起始语)在这里,它摄属于应颂分的情形,也应该按照所说的道理来考察。“不名为经”的意思是在结集时没有被赋予“经”这个名称。据说在三部《结集》注疏里都这样说:“纯粹偈颂叫作事偈。”所谓“事偈”,指的是结集时具寿阿难长老在安立《彼岸品》的序言时所说的五十六首偈颂,以及他在安立《那罗迦经》的序言时当时所说的二十来首偈颂。然而,《经集》注释里说:“世尊般涅槃后,具寿大迦叶进行结集时,向具寿阿难询问那位牟尼的修行之道,阿难为了清楚显示大迦叶是在何时、如何劝导那罗迦长老向世尊提问等一切经过,讲述了‘阿难生起……’等二十首事偈之后作了解答,这一切都称为‘那罗迦经’。”因此,由于《那罗迦经》的事偈已经随着《那罗迦经》的取摄而被取摄,所以在这里应当把《彼岸品》的事偈视为纯粹偈颂。而且,就在那个《彼岸品》里,阿耆多贤者等十六位婆罗门的问偈和世尊的答偈,在圣典中没有以经名出现,而是以“阿耆多贤者问、帝沙弥提耶贤者问”等方式(《经集》1038)传来;又因为在注疏之书中不相混杂,所以说它们是“非经名的纯粹偈颂”是妥当的。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṃ nāma paṭisambhidādī’’ti tīsupi kira gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Apare pana paṭisambhidāmaggassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahita’’nti (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā), etthāpi geyyaṅgasaṅgahitabhāvo vuttanayena vīmaṃsitabbo. No suttanāmikāti asuttanāmikā saṅgītikāle suttasamaññāya apaññātā. ‘‘Suddhikagāthā nāma vatthugāthā’’ti tīsupi kira gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, vatthugāthāti ca pārāyanavaggassa nidānamāropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena saṅgītikāle vuttā chappaññāsa gāthāyo, nālakasuttassa nidānamāropentena teneva tadā vuttā vīsatimattā gāthāyo ca vuccanti. Suttanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.685) pana ‘‘parinibbute bhagavati saṅgītiṃ karontenāyasmatā mahākassapena tameva moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puṭṭho āyasmā ānando yena, yadā ca samādapito nālakatthero bhagavantaṃ pucchi, taṃ sabbaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetukāmo ‘ānandajāte’tiādikā (su. ni. 684) vīsati vatthugāthāyo vatvā vissajjesi, taṃ sabbampi ‘nālakasutta’’nti vuccatī’’ti āgatattā nālakasuttassa vatthugāthāyo nālakasuttaggahaṇeneva gahitāti pārāyanavaggassa vatthugāthāyo idha suddhikagāthāti gahetabbaṃ. Tattheva ca pārāyanavagge ajitamāṇavakādīnaṃ soḷasannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ pucchāgāthā, bhagavato vissajjanagāthā ca pāḷiyaṃ suttanāmena avatvā ‘ajitamāṇavakapucchā, tissametteyyamāṇavakapucchā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 1038) āgatattā, cuṇṇiyaganthe hi asammissattā ca ‘‘no suttanāmikā suddhikagāthā nāmā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
“与喜和智所成的偈颂相应”——用这个“因喜悦而发出”的语源含义,说明它是以同义名称来标示“感慨”。那么,这个“感慨”到底是什么呢?它是由喜悦的冲动所引发的言说。就像油等需要计量的东西,如果量器装不下,溢出来流走,那就叫“剩下的”;又像水,池塘装不下,漫出来流走,那就叫“大洪水”;同样,由喜悦的冲动所引发的思惟波动,心里装不住,变得过剩,在内部待不住,于是通过语言之门向外发出,不期待听者,这种特别的言说,就叫作“感慨”。因为文字学家说:“uda 这个词根,用于欢喜、游戏等义。”而且,这大多数情况是就由喜悦而发出的而言,因为“如果你们害怕苦……”等感慨也出现在《感慨经》中。同样,“与偈颂相应”这一说法,也大多数是就常见情况而言,因为“诸比丘,有一个处所,那里没有地、没有水……”等以长行文句发出的内容也出现在那里。难道“感慨”不是指由喜与悦引发,或由法之警策引发,不期待听者,以偈颂形式结集,或以长行文句形式展开的言说吗?而且它在各处都是这样出现的。那么,这里为什么说“诸比丘”这样的称呼呢?只是为了让他们明白,并不是为了让他们成为听受者。因为世尊宣说了与涅槃相应的法之后,随着忆念涅槃的功德而生起喜与悦,发出感慨时,知道那些比丘心中在想“这个涅槃法怎样才能以无因缘而证得呢”,为了让他们明白这个道理,才说了“那个处所”,并不是完全把他们当作听受者来对待,应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti etena udānaṭṭhena udānanti anvatthasaññataṃ dasseti (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) kimidaṃ udānaṃ nāma? Pītivegasamuṭṭhāpito udāhāro. Yathā hi yaṃ telādi minitabbavatthu mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘avasesako’’ti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘mahogho’ti vuccati, evameva yaṃ pītivegasamuṭṭhāpitaṃ vitakkavipphāraṃ antohadayaṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti, so adhiko hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi vacīdvārena nikkhanto paṭiggāhakanirapekkho udāhāraviseso ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) ‘‘uda mode kīḷāyañcā’’ti hi akkharacintakā vadanti, idañca yebhuyyena vuttaṃ dhammasaṃvegavasena uditassāpi ‘‘sace bhāyatha dukkhassā’’tiādiudānassa (udā. 44) udānapāḷiyaṃ āgatattā, tathā‘‘gāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti idampi yebhuyyeneva ‘‘atthi bhikkhave, tadāyatanaṃ, yattha neva pathavī, na āpo’’tiādikassa (udā. 71) cuṇṇiyavākyavasena uditassāpi tattha āgatattā. Nanu ca udānaṃ nāma pītisomanassasamuṭṭāpito, dhammasaṃvegasamuṭṭhāpito vā dhammapaṭiggāhakanirapekkho gāthābandhavasena, cuṇṇiyavākyavasena ca pavatto udāhāro, tathā ceva sabbattha āgataṃ, idha kasmā ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti āmantanaṃ vuttanti? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saññāpanatthaṃ eva, na paṭiggāhakakaraṇatthaṃ. Nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttañhi bhagavā dhammaṃ desetvā nibbānaguṇānussaraṇena uppannapītisomanassena udānaṃ udānento ‘‘ayaṃ nibbānadhammo kathamapaccayo upalabbhatī’’ti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cetoparivitakkamaññāya tesaṃ tamatthaṃ ñāpetukāmena ‘‘tadāyatana’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana ekantato te paṭiggāhake katvāti veditabbanti.
这分为三种:遍正觉者所说、独觉者所说、声闻弟子所说。其中,独觉者所说——巴利
Tayidaṃ sabbaññubuddhabhāsitaṃ paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ sāvakabhāsitanti tibbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ –
‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesa’’nti. ādinā (su. ni. 35) –
出自《犀牛角经》,也是声闻所说——巴利
Khaggavisāṇasutte āgataṃ. Sāvakabhāsitampi –
我已彻底断除一切贪。
一切嗔恨都已彻底断除;
我的愚痴已经全部断除,
我已清凉,已般涅槃。等等(《长老偈》79)巴利
‘‘Sabbo rāgo pahīno me, Sabbo doso samūhato; Sabbo me vihato moho, Sītibhūtosmi nibbuto’’ti. ādinā (theragā. 79) –
我曾以身、以语、以心守护自己;
我把渴爱连根拔起,已经彻底清凉,证入了寂灭。巴利
‘‘Kāyena saṃvutā āsiṃ, vācāya uda cetasā; Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyha, sītibhūtāmhi nibbutā’’ti. (therīgā. 15); –
《长老尼偈》里也有收录。另外还有帝释天等诸天所说的,比如“啊,布施才是殊胜的布施,在迦叶佛那里善巧地安立了”(《优陀那》27)。还有种德婆罗门等人类所说的,比如“礼敬那位世尊”(《长部》2.371;《中部》1.290;2.290、357;《相应部》1187;2.38;《增支部》5.194)。这些确实都收进了三次结集的优陀那中,但这里指的不是全部这些。只有正自觉者亲自直接说出、成为胜者之语的,结集法藏的人才把它结集为“优陀那”,世尊把教法分为九分来开示时,也正是针对这个而说“优陀那”。至于“历经多生轮回”等偈颂(《法句》153),是世尊在菩提树下以优陀那的方式说出的,也是无数百千位正自觉者的优陀那,这些后来因为世尊为持法藏者宣说,结集法藏的人没有把它们收进《优陀那》集,而是收进了《法句》。还有“确实了知了,贤者们,衮丹雅!确实了知了,贤者们,衮丹雅!”(《相应部》5.1081;《大品》17;《无碍解道》2.30)这句优陀那语,是世尊说的,声音传遍一万世界,能让诸天与人类听到。但这也和“诸比丘确实令我满意,在某个时候”等语(《中部》1.225)一样,是在刚成道时,为了让一切比丘观察自己的正确修行而说的。它只是在转法轮经说法结束时,因为自己已证悟的那部分法、以及如所说的圣道,在弟子中最初由那位长老证得,于是观察自己的精进没有白费,生起喜乐,只是一种感叹之语,并不像“当诸法显现时”等语(《大品》1;《优陀那》1)那样,是在宣说生起或止息。所以应当知道,结集法藏的人没有把它结集进《优陀那》集。而《优陀那》集里,在八品中,每品十经,一共结集了八十经。正如它的义注中所说——巴利
Therīgāthāsu ca āgataṃ. Aññānipi sakkādīhi devehi bhāsitāni ‘‘aho dānaṃ paramadānaṃ, kassape suppatiṭṭhita’’ntiādīni (udā. 27). Soṇadaṇḍabrāhmaṇādīhi manussehi ca bhāsitāni ‘‘namo tassa bhagavato’’tiādīni (dī. ni. 2.371; ma. ni. 1.290; 2.290, 357; saṃ. ni. 1187; 2.38; a. ni. 5.194) tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāni udānāni santi eva, tāni sabbānipi idha na adhippetāni. Yaṃ pana sammāsambuddhena sāmaṃ āhaccabhāsitaṃ jinavacanabhūtaṃ, tadeva dhammasaṅgāhakehi ‘‘udāna’’nti saṅgītaṃ, tadeva ca sandhāya bhagavatā pariyattidhammaṃ navadhā vibhajitvā uddisantena ‘‘udāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yā pana ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādikā (dha. pa. 153) gāthā bhagavatā bodhimūle udānavasena pavattitā, anekasatasahassānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ udānabhūtā ca, tā aparabhāge dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa bhagavatā desitattā dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ anāropetvā dhammapade saṅgahitā, yañca ‘‘aññāsi vata bho koṇḍañño aññāsi vata bho koṇḍañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 17; paṭi. ma. 2.30) udānavacanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuyā devamanussānaṃ pavedanasamatthanigghosavipphāraṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, tadapi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ sabbesaṃ eva bhikkhūnaṃ sammāpaṭipattipaccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ ‘‘ārādhayiṃsu vata maṃ bhikkhū ekaṃ samaya’’ntiādivacanaṃ (ma. ni. 1.225) viya dhammacakkappavattanasuttantadesanāpariyosāne attanāpi adhigatadhammekadesassa yathādesitassa ariyamaggassa sabbapaṭhamaṃ sāvakesu therena adhigatattā attano parissamassa saphalabhāvapaccavekkhaṇahetutaṃ pītisomanassajanitaṃ udāhāramattaṃ, na pana ‘‘yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’tiādivacanaṃ viya (mahāva. 1; udā. 1) pavattiyā, nivattiyā vā pakāsananti dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ na saṅgītanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Udānapāḷiyaṃ pana aṭṭhasu vaggesu dasa dasa katvā asītiyeva suttantā saṅgītā. Tathā hi tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ –
“总共有八十部经,简要地说,分为八品。”巴利
‘‘Asītiyeva suttantā, vaggā aṭṭha samāsato’’ti. (Udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā).
这里说“八十二经”,这和《自说》的经文对不上,所以应该以“八十经”这个读法为准。而且不只是这里,在其他律注和论注里也是这样说的,因此这可能是按“少量增减不计入总数”的原则,从不同角度来说的。或者,那些地方只是按大概数目来算,所以有增有减;如果不是这样,那些说法本身也就不会出现了。也有人说,这不过是后来传抄时写错了。巴利
Idha pana ‘‘dveasīti suttantā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ udānapāḷiyā na sameti, tasmā ‘‘asīti suttantā’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. Apica na kevalaṃ idheva, atha kho aññāsupi (vi. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) vinayābhidhammaṭṭhakathāsu (dha. saṃ. nidānakathā) tathāyeva vuttattā ‘‘appakaṃ pana ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotī’’ti pariyāyena anekaṃsena vuttaṃ siyā. Yathā vā tathā vā anumānena gaṇanameva hi tattha tattha ūnādhikasaṅkhyā, itarathā tāyeva na siyuntipi vadanti, pacchā pamādalekhavacanaṃ vā etaṃ.
这里说“世尊如此说过”等等,是以“世尊如此说过”这类句式开头的。其中“等等”这个词,涵盖了“世尊如此说过,我听闻阿罗汉如此说过。诸比丘,你们要断除一法,我保证你们证得不还果。是哪一法呢?诸比丘,你们要断除贪这一法,我保证你们证得不还果”(《如是语》1)这样开头的经文,也就是按一法、二法、三法、四法的方式所宣说的一百一十二经的集合。事实上,《如是语》的原文就是以自说偈颂来计数,结集了一百一十二经,它的注释书也是这样说的。所以应该以“一百一十二经”这个文本为准;或者按照前面说的方式,也可以说是从多个角度来说的。不过在这种地方,要显示权威依据时,应当如实确定地说明,因此“一百一十经”这个说法只是后来抄写时的错误,应当这样理解——有人这样说。如此,由世尊所说的就是“如是语”。被结集为“如是语”的就是《如是语》。或者这是一个惯用名称,就像“耶瓦帕那卡”“非汝等品”那样。以“世尊如此说过,我听闻阿罗汉如此说过”这段缘起语所结集的,就是前面所说的那些经的集合。巴利
Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatātiādinayappavattāti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā, vuttamarahatāti me sutaṃ. Ekadhammaṃ bhikkhave, pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāya. Katamaṃ ekadhammaṃ? Lobhaṃ bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’’ti (itivu. 1) evamādinā ekadukatikacatukkanipātavasena vuttaṃ dvādasuttarasatasuttasamūhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi itivuttakapāḷiyameva udānagāthāhi dvādasuttarasatasuttāni gaṇetvā saṅgītāni, tadaṭṭhakathāyampi (itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) tathāyeva vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ icceva pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, yathāvuttanayena vā anekaṃsato vuttantipi vattuṃ sakkā, tathāpi īdise ṭhāne pamāṇaṃ dassentena yāthāvatova niyametvā dassetabbanti ‘‘dasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti idaṃ pacchā pamādalekhamevāti gahetabbanti vadanti. Iti evaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ itivuttaṃ. Itivuttanti saṅgītaṃ itivuttakaṃ. Ruḷhināmaṃ vā etaṃ yathā ‘‘yevāpanakaṃ, natumhākavaggo’’ti, vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā, vuttamarahatāti me sutanti nidānavacanena saṅgītaṃ yathāvuttasuttasamūhaṃ.
所谓“本生”,就是用它来讲述、宣说、阐明世尊过去生中所行的事迹,所以叫本生。为了说明这些本生,他说“无猜本生等”。其中“五百五十本生”这个说法,因为稍有增减就不算入确切数目,所以是从不确定的角度说的,也只是为了称呼方便而已。严格来说,确实只有五百四十七则,比前面说的数目少了三则。具体来说:一集有一百五十则,二集有一百则,三集有五十则,四集也一样,五集有二十五则,六集有二十则,七集有二十一则,八集有十则,九集有十二则,十集有十六则,十一集有九则,十二集有十则,十三集也一样,杂集有十三则,二十集有十四则,三十集有十则,四十集有五则,五十集有三则,六十集有二则,七十集也一样,八十集有五则,大集有十则。这样结集下来的本生,确实只有五百四十七则。巴利
Jātaṃ bhūtaṃ purāvutthaṃ bhagavato pubbacaritaṃ kāyati katheti pakāseti etenāti jātakaṃ, taṃ pana imānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘apaṇṇakajātakādīnī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘paññāsādhikāni pañcajātakasatānī’’ti idaṃ appakaṃ pana ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti katvā anekaṃsena, vohārasukhatāmattena ca vuttaṃ. Ekaṃsato hi sattacattālīsādhikāniyeva yathāvuttagaṇanato tīhi ūnattā. Tathā hi ekanipāte paññāsasataṃ, dukanipāte sataṃ, tikanipāte paññāsa, tathā catukkanipāte, pañcakanipāte pañcavīsa, chakkanipāte vīsa, sattanipāte ekavīsa, aṭṭhanipāte dasa, navanipāte dvādasa, dasanipāte soḷasa, ekādasanipāte nava, dvādasanipāte dasa, tathā terasanipāte, pakiṇṇakanipāte terasa, vīsatinipāte cuddasa, tiṃsanipāte dasa, cattālīsanipāte pañca, paṇṇāsanipāte tīṇi, saṭṭhinipāte dve, tathā sattatinipāte, asītinipāte pañca, mahānipāte dasāti sattacattālīsādhikāneva pañca jātakasatāni saṅgītānīti.
被称为“未曾有法”,是因为其中所说的法具有稀有、本然的性质。接着,为了说明这一点,他说“有四种”等等。这里用“等”字——巴利
Abbhuto dhammo sabhāvo vutto yatthāti abbhutadhammaṃ, taṃ panidanti āha ‘‘cattārome’’tiādi. Ādisaddena cettha –
比丘们,阿难有四种稀有、未曾有之法。是哪四种呢?比丘们,如果有比丘众前来见阿难,他们一见到就心生欢喜。如果阿难在那里说法,他们听了说法也心生欢喜。比丘们,比丘众还没听够,阿难就已经沉默了。比丘们,如果有比丘尼众……近事男众……近事女众前来见阿难,他们一见到就心生欢喜。如果阿难在那里说法,他们听了说法也心生欢喜。比丘们,他们还没听够,阿难就已经沉默了。比丘们,这就是……在阿难身上……巴利
‘‘Cattārome bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande. Katame cattāro? Sace bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanenapi sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando, dhammaṃ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti, atittāva bhikkhave bhikkhuparisā hoti, atha ānando tuṇhī bhavati. Sace bhikkhave, bhikkhunīparisā…pe… upāsakaparisā…pe… upāsikā – parisā…pe… tuṇhī bhavati. Ime kho bhikkhave…pe… ānande’’ti (a. ni. 4.129) –
像这样展开、在各处宣说的全部经典,也都收归为与稀有未曾有法相关的经典。巴利
Evamādinayappavattaṃ tattha tattha bhāsitaṃ sabbampi acchariyabbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ suttantaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在《小有明经》等经中,有一部经是一位名叫毗舍佉的优婆塞提问、一位名叫法施的比丘尼所说的,名叫《小有明经》。由大拘絺罗长老提问、尊者舍利弗长老所说的,名叫《大有明经》。《正见经》也是由比丘们提问、由同一位舍利弗所说,这些都属于中部。而《帝释所问经》是帝释提问、世尊所说,属于长部。《大满月经》则是在当天十五布萨日的满月之夜,由一位比丘提问、世尊所说,属于中部。应当知道,像这样在各处获得智与喜之后所提问的各种经典,都叫做“有明”。“明”就是智。“喜”就是了知所宣说的法义之后,以“善哉,尊者!善哉,贤友!”等方式生起的随喜喜悦。“获得获得”就是一次又一次获得,也就是反复获得的意思。由此表明,“明”这个词按省略用法或通称用法,同时涵盖智和喜悦两者;而“有明”则是指依止于明,或者令获得明与喜悦。巴利
Cūḷavedallādīsu (ma. ni. 1.460) visākhena nāma upāsakena puṭṭhāya dhammadinnāya nāma bhikkhuniyā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ cūḷavedallaṃ nāma. Mahākoṭṭhikattherena pucchitena āyasmatā sāriputtattherena bhāsitaṃ mahāvedallaṃ (ma. ni. 1.449) nāma. Sammādiṭṭhisuttampi (ma. ni. 1.89) bhikkhūhi puṭṭhena teneva bhāsitaṃ, etāni majjhimanikāyapariyāpannāni. Sakkapañhaṃ (dī. ni. 2.344) pana sakkena puṭṭho bhagavā abhāsi, taṃ dīghanikāyapariyāpannaṃ. Mahāpuṇṇamasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.85) pana tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇamāya rattiyā aññatarena bhikkhunā puṭṭhena bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, taṃ majjhimanikāyapariyāpannaṃ. Evamādayo sabbepi tattha tatthāgatā vedañca tuṭṭhiñca laddhā laddhā pucchitasuttantā ‘‘vedalla’’nti veditabbaṃ.Vedanti ñāṇaṃ. Tuṭṭhinti yathābhāsitadhammadesanaṃ viditvā ‘‘sādhu ayye sādhāvuso’’tiādinā abbhanumodanavasappavattaṃ pītisomanassaṃ. Laddhā laddhāti labhitvā labhitvā, punappunaṃ labhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti, etena vedasaddo ñāṇe, somanasse ca ekasesanayena, sāmaññaniddesena vā pavattati, vedamhi nissitaṃ tassa labhāpanavasenāti vedallanti ca dasseti.
像这样按“分教”把整个佛语都分析完之后,现在想按“法蕴”来分析,于是说出“如何……”等话。其中,“按法蕴”就是按法的类别。“八万二千”这个偈颂,意思已经讲过了。像这样,按已经阐明了的法蕴来说,就是:有一位名叫瞿默目犍连的婆罗门提问,在《瞿默目犍连经》中,或者为了显示自己的功德,在《长老偈》中,由尊者阿难长老从各方面阐明的法蕴;他用这种方式说明:即使还有阿难没有阐明的法蕴,也是存在的。因此应当知道,按《论事》《摩偷罗经》《天宫事》等中的某些偈颂来算,法蕴的数量甚至超过八万四千。巴利
Evaṃ aṅgavasena sakalampi buddhavacanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni dhammakkhandhavasena vibhajitukāmo ‘‘katha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha dhammakkhandhavasenāti dhammarāsivasena. ‘‘Dvāsītī’’ti ayaṃ gāthā vuttatthāva. Evaṃ paridīpitadhammakkhandhavasenāti gopakamoggallānena nāma brāhmaṇena puṭṭhena gopakamoggallānasutte (ma. ni. 3.79) attano guṇappakāsanatthaṃ vā theragāthāyaṃ (theragā. 1017 ādayo) āyasmatā ānandattherena samantato dīpitadhammakkhandhavasena iminā evaṃ tena aparidīpitāpi dhammakkhandhā santīti pakāseti, tasmā kathāvatthuppakaraṇa mādhuriyasuttādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 2.317) vimānavatthādīsu kesañci gāthānañca vasena caturāsītisahassatopi dhammakkhandhānaṃ adhikatā veditabbā.
这里要问的是:《须跋经》(《长部》1.444)和《瞿巴迦·目犍连经》是世尊般涅槃之后由阿难长老说出的,那么它们到底算不算包含在八万四千法蕴里面呢?关于这一点,《无碍解道义释》里先说:“比丘自己所说的法蕴,也应当理解为是摄属于从佛那里领受而来的法蕴,所以才这样说。”不过,如果站在世尊所传教法的立场来说,那么更妥当的说法应该是:“这两部经虽然是阿难自己说的,但也同样是摄归于佛说之中而说的。”因为弟子们是依着世尊所传的教法来说法的,正因如此,弟子所说的《论事》等也被视为佛说。也正是基于这个道理,阿难长老在结集时,把自己亲口所说的《须跋经》等也收入其中,并说“如是我闻”。巴利
Ettha ca subhasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 1.444), gopakamoggallānasuttañca parinibbute bhagavati ānandattherena bhāsitattā caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassesu antogadhaṃ hoti, na hotīti? Paṭisambhidāgaṇṭhipade tāva idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ vuttadhammakkhandhānampi bhikkhuto gahiteyeva saṅgahetvā evamāhāti daṭṭhabba’’nti, bhagavatā pana dinnanaye ṭhatvā bhāsitattā ‘‘sayaṃ vuttampi cetaṃ suttadvayaṃ bhagavato gahiteyeva saṅgahetvā vutta’’nti evampi vattuṃ yuttataraṃ viya dissati. Bhagavatā hi dinnanaye ṭhatvā sāvakā dhammaṃ desenti, teneva sāvakabhāsitampi kathāvatthādikaṃ buddhabhāsitaṃ nāma jātaṃ , tatoyeva ca attanā bhāsitampi subhasuttādikaṃ saṅgītimāropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vuttaṃ.
只有一条主线贯穿的经,比如《念处经》等。因为《念处经》开头就说“比丘们,这是一条唯一的道路,能让众生清净……”(《长部》2.373;《中部》1.106;《相应部》3.367-384),举出四念处之后,就只是围绕展示这四念处的内容来展开,所以叫“一条主线贯穿”。《般涅槃经》等则是多条主线贯穿的经(《长部》2.131等)。因为《般涅槃经》是在不同地点、根据不同法义的开示来展开的,所以叫“多条主线贯穿”。巴利
Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ satipaṭṭhānādi. Satipaṭṭhānasuttañhi ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.373; ma. ni. 1.106; saṃ. ni. 3.367-384) cattāro satipaṭṭhāne ārabhitvā tesaṃyeva vibhāgadassanavasena pavattattā ‘‘ekānusandhika’’nti vuccati. Anekānusandhikaṃ parinibbānasuttādi (dī. ni. 2.131 ādayo) parinibbānasuttañhi nānāṭhānesu nānādhammadesanānaṃ vasena pavattattā ‘‘anekānusandhika’’nti vuccati.
要断除多少,要舍弃多少,又要修习多少?
比丘超越多少结缚,才被称为“渡过了暴流的人”?巴利
‘‘Kati chinde kati jahe, kati cuttari bhāvaye; Kati saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5); –
像这样以提问形式出现在偈颂中的,就是一个法蕴。巴利
Evamādinā pañhāpucchanaṃ gāthābandhesu eko dhammakkhandho.
应断五,应舍五,应更修习五;
比丘超越了五结缚,就被称为“已渡过暴流的人”。巴利
‘‘Pañca chinde pañca jahe, pañca cuttari bhāvaye; Pañca saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5); –
像这样以解答方式宣说的,就是一个法蕴。巴利
Evamādinā ca vissajjanaṃ eko dhammakkhandho.
《法集论》里三法二法的分别,应该按照摄品和注释篇来理解。因此,善三法论母那条目在摄品中依分别方式所说的内容如下——巴利
Tikadukabhājanaṃ dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ nikkhepakaṇḍaaṭṭhakathākaṇḍavasena gahetabbaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ kusalattikamātikāpadassa (dha. sa. 1) vibhajanavasena nikkhepakaṇḍe vuttaṃ –
哪些法是善的?三种善根……中间省略……这些法是善的。哪些法是不善的?三种不善根……中间省略……这些法是不善的。哪些法是无记的?善法和不善法的果报……中间省略……这些法是无记的。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Tīṇi kusalamūlāni…pe… ime dhammā kusalā. Katame dhammā akusalā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni…pe… ime dhammā akusalā. Katame dhammā abyākatā’’? Kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ vipākā…pe… ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti (dha. sa. 187),
这是一个法蕴。其余三法与二法的论母分别也同样是这个道理。而在义注篇中曾这样说:巴利
Ayameko dhammakkhandho. Esa nayo sesattikadukapadavibhajanesupi. Yadapi aṭṭhakathākaṇḍe vuttaṃ –
哪些法是善的?四种地中的善法,这些法是善的。哪些法是不善的?十二种不善心生起,这些法是不善的。哪些法是无记的?四种地中的异熟、三种地中的唯作无记,以及色法和涅槃,这些法是无记的。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Catūsu bhūmīsu kusalaṃ. Ime dhammā kusalā. Katame dhammā akusalā? Dvādasa akusalacittuppādā. Ime dhammā akusalā. Katame dhammā abyākatā? Catūsu bhūmīsu vipāko tīsu bhūmīsu kiriyābyākataṃ rūpañca nibbānañca. Ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1386),
这一段是依善三法论母的分别而展开的一个法蕴。其余各处也是同样的方法。不过,心转的分别应当依据《心生起品》来理解。因为在那里,为了分别善心而说——巴利
Ayaṃ kusalattikamātikāpadassa vibhajanavasena pavatto eko dhammakkhandho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Cittavārabhājanaṃ pana cittuppādakaṇḍa vasena (dha. sa. 1) gahetabbaṃ. Yañhi tattha vuttaṃ kusalacittavibhajanatthaṃ –
哪些法是善的?在某个时候,当欲界的善心生起,伴随着喜悦,与智慧相应,以色为所缘……(中略)……在那个时侯,有触……(中略)……有不散乱。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā…pe… tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti…pe… avikkhepo hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1),
这是一个法蕴。其余心转分别的划分也是这样。“一个法蕴”的意思是:每一个法蕴(有六个或八个)。因为从“一一的三法与二法分别、一一的心转分别”这种说法来看,即使没有明说“一一”,这个意思也能凭其内在力量自然被理解。巴利
Ayameko dhammakkhandho. Evaṃ sesacittavāravibhajanesu. Eko dhammakkhandhoti (ekameko dhammakkhandho chaḷa aṭṭha.) ca ekeko dhammakkhandhoti attho. ‘‘Ekamekaṃ tikadukabhājanaṃ, ekamekaṃ cittavārabhājana’’nti ca vacanato hi ‘‘ekeko’’ti avuttepi ayamattho sāmatthiyato viññāyamānova hoti.
事,就是苏丁那篇等。论母,就是“若有比丘,已受比丘学与活命的修习……”等,针对每一种具体违犯情形所制定的诵出学处。句分别,就是对每一学处,按“若复者,即无论何人……”这种方式展开的词句解析。中间罪,就是“玩弄炽热铁器,得恶作罪”等,在学处与学处之间所制定的罪。罪,就是与该学处相应、除三截之外所宣说的罪的部分。无犯,就是按“无知者无犯、不情愿者无犯、心散乱者无犯、受痛苦者无犯、最初犯者无犯”等方式展开的无犯部分。三截,就是按“超过十日,想已超过十日,舍堕;超过十日,有疑惑……中略……超过十日,想未超过十日,舍堕”等方式展开的,分为三波逸提、三恶作等的三重章节。此中,就是指在那些事、论母等当中。巴利
Vatthu nāma sudinnakaṇḍādi. Mātikā nāma ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’tiādinā (pārā. 44) tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ajjhācāre paññattaṃ uddesa sikkhāpadaṃ. Padabhājaniyanti tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘yo panāti yo yādiso’’tiādi (pārā. 45) nayappavattaṃ padavibhajanaṃ. Antarāpattīti ‘‘paṭilātaṃ ukkhipati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 355) evamādinā sikkhāpadantaresu paññattā āpatti. Āpattīti taṃtaṃsikkhāpadānurūpaṃ vutto tikacchedamutto āpattivāro. Anāpattīti ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassa khittacittassa vedanāṭṭassa ādikammikassā’’tiādi (pārā. 66) nayappavatto anāpattivāro. Tikacchedoti ‘‘dasāhātikkante atikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, dasāhātikkante vematiko…pe… dasāhātikkante anatikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 468) evamādinayappavatto tikapācittiya-tika-dukkaṭādibhedo tikaparicchedo. Tatthāti tesu vatthumātikādīsu.
就这样,以摩诃迦叶为首、具足神变的僧团,用种种方式庄严地展示了结集的样貌,并且依照法与律等类别,确定了佛语——“这是法,这是律……乃至……这是八万四千法蕴”——然后进行结集。为了说明在这样以种种稀有瑞相庄严的结集中,这部《长部》的法性,以及《中部》等佛语的性质,都已经确定下来,所以接着说了“如是等”这一段。
虽然用共通的说法已经表明了,但诸位阿阇梨仍然指出这样的关联:“为了赞叹某个目的而开始说这段话,那个目的就按照主要着力点来显示。”
另一种理解方式是:为了说明在前面所说的单一分类等种种类别中,法与律等性质是在结集者结集的时候就已经确定下来的,并不是后来才仅仅靠构想安立而成的,所以说“如是等”,也应该这样理解。
接着用“非唯”等语句,是为了说明:并非只按照上面所说的方式确定之后就结集了,此外还有别的。名为《优陀那摄》的,是法集论师们为了把初波罗夷等中出现的判罪事例等,以简要方式显示其摄集而设立的——巴利
Evaṃ anekanayasamalaṅkataṃ saṅgītippakāraṃ dassetvā ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo…pe… imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti buddhavacanaṃ dhammavinayādibhedena vavatthapetvā saṅgāyantena mahākassapappamukhena vasīgaṇena anekacchariyapātubhāvapaṭimaṇḍitāya saṅgītiyā imassa dīghāgamassa dhammabhāvo, majjhimabuddhavacanādibhāvo ca vavatthāpitoti dassento ‘‘evameta’’ntiādimāha. Sādhāraṇavacanena dassitepi hi ‘‘yadatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetuṃ idamārabhati, soyeva padhānavasena dassito’’ti ācariyehi ayaṃ sambandho vutto. Aparo nayo – heṭṭhā vuttesu ekavidhādibhedabhinnesu pakāresu dhammavinayādibhāvo saṅgītikārake heva saṅgītikāle vavatthāpito, na pacchā kappanamattasiddhoti dassento ‘‘evameta’’ntiādimāhātipi vattabbo. Na kevalaṃ yathāvuttappakārameva vavatthāpetvā saṅgītaṃ, atha kho aññampīti dasseti ‘‘na kevalañcā’’tiādinā. Udānasaṅgaho nāma paṭhamapārājikādīsu āgatānaṃ vinītavatthuādīnaṃ saṅkhepato saṅgahadassanavasena dhammasaṅgāhakehi ṭhapitā –
猕猴、跋耆子、居士、裸形外道,
优钵罗色女,以及其他两位,依其标记(特征)而说。巴利
‘‘Makkaṭī vajjiputtā ca, gihī naggo ca titthiyā; Dārikuppalavaṇṇā ca, byañjanehi pare duve’’ti. ādikā (pārā. 66); –
偈颂。对于正在宣说或已经宣说的义理,不让它散乱地流布,而是向上收摄、守护,这就是“优陀那”,意思是摄集之语。按照《戒蕴品》《根本法门品》等的分类,就是“品”的结集。所谓“品”,是结集佛法的人对经典集合所安立的名称。按照《上人篇》《青莲篇》等的分类,就是“篇”的结集。所谓“篇”,意思是守护或展开,也就是省略之语,是用简略的方式来表达。在《增支部》等中,有“集”的结集,以偈颂等支分来编集。“集”就是合集。按照《天相应》等的分类,就是“相应”的结集。“相应”是结集佛法的人对品群所安立的名称。按照《根本五十经》等的分类,就是“五十经”的结集,意思是数五十经、五十经地结集起来。句中的“等”字,包含了各部经典中所见的结集者的话。由优陀那结集……乃至……五十经结集等,有多种方式。“以七个月”是具格用法,用来表示动作的完成,比如“仅一天就到了波罗奈城”“以九个月完成了精舍”这类说法。所谓动作的完成,就是指动作的彻底完成。巴利
Gāthāyo. Vuccamānassa hi vuttassa vā atthassa vippakiṇṇabhāvena pavattituṃ adatvā uddhaṃ dānaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ udānaṃ, saṅgahavacananti attho. Sīlakkhandhavaggamūlapariyāyavaggādivasena vaggasaṅgaho. Vaggoti hi dhammasaṅgāhakeheva katā suttasamudāyassa samaññā. Uttarimanussapeyyālanīlapeyyālādivasena peyyālasaṅgaho. Pātuṃ rakkhituṃ, vitthārituṃ vā alanti hi peyyālaṃ, saṅkhipitvā dassanavacanaṃ. Aṅguttaranikāyādīsu nipātasaṅgaho, gāthaṅgādivasena nipātanaṃ. Samudāyakaraṇañhi nipāto. Devatāsaṃyuttādivasena (saṃ. ni. 1.1) saṃyuttasaṅgaho. Vaggasamudāye eva dhammasaṅgāhakehi katā saṃyuttasamaññā. Mūlapaṇṇāsakādivasena paṇṇāsasaṅgaho, paññāsa paññāsa suttāni gaṇetvā saṅgahoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ādisaddena tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ dissamānaṃ saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Udānasaṅgaha…pe… paṇṇāsasaṅgahādīhi anekavidhaṃ tathā. Sattahi māsehīti kiriyāpavagge tatiyā ‘‘ekāheneva bārāṇasiṃ pāyāsi. Navahi māsehi vihāraṃ niṭṭhāpesī’’tiādīsu viya. Kiriyāya āsuṃ pariniṭṭhāpanañhi kiriyāpavaggo.
那时,为了通过显示许多稀有瑞相的出现,让善人们生起净信,注释说“在结集终了时”等。意思是:在这佛语结集终了时,大地仿佛心生欢喜、仿佛在发出赞叹之声一般,震动……中略……种种瑞相出现。这里的“仿佛”一词,在欢喜和赞叹两处都要连用。“能转起”——是指有能力使(大地)转起,或堪能于转起。“以水为边际”——是说以支撑大地的水为终极界限,连同那水一起震动,或者说触及那水而震动,以此排除只是局部震动。“震”——是指向上、向上行进时剧烈地动。“遍震”——是指向上向下行进时完整地动。“普遍震动”——是指向四方行进时更加剧烈地摇动。这样,通过这三个词显示了六种方式的大地震动。另一种说法是:从东、从西以隆起下沉的方式震动叫“震”;从北、从南以隆起下沉的方式震动叫“遍震”;从中央、从边缘以隆起下沉的方式震动叫“普遍震动”。这样也显示了六种方式的大地震动——正是针对这个,诸注释书中说——巴利
Tadā anekacchariyapātubhāvadassanena sādhūnaṃ pasādajananatthamāha ‘‘saṅgītipariyosāne cassā’’tiādi. Assa buddhavacanassa saṅgītipariyosāne sañjātappamodā viya, sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viya ca saṅkampi…pe… pāturahesunti sambandho. Viyāti hi ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ. Pavattane, pavattanāya vā samatthaṃ pavattanasamatthaṃ. Udakapariyantanti pathavīsandhārakaudakapariyosānaṃ katvā, saha tena udakena, taṃ vā udakaṃ āhaccāti vuttaṃ hoti, tena ekadesakampanaṃ nivāreti. Saṅkampīti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ gacchantī suṭṭhu kampi. Sampakampīti uddhamadho ca gacchantī sammā pakārena kampi. Sampavedhīti catūsu disāsu gacchantī suṭṭhu bhiyyo pavedhi. Evaṃ etena padattayena chappakāraṃ pathavīcalanaṃ dasseti. Atha vā puratthimato, pacchimato ca unnamanaonamanavasena saṅkampi. Uttarato, dakkhiṇato ca unnamanaonamanavasena sampakampi. Majjhimato, pariyantato ca unnamanaonamanavasena sampavedhi. Evampi chappakāraṃ pathavīcalanaṃ dasseti, yaṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ –-
从东边隆起、从西边下沉;从西边隆起、从东边下沉;从北边隆起、从南边下沉;从南边隆起、从北边下沉;从中间隆起、从边缘下沉;从边缘隆起、从中间下沉——就这样以六种方式……大地震动了。巴利
‘‘Puratthimato unnamati pacchimato onamati, pacchimato unnamati puratthimato onamati, uttarato unnamati dakkhiṇato onamati, dakkhiṇato unnamati uttarato onamati , majjhimato unnamati pariyantato onamati, pariyantato unnamati majjhimato onamatīti evaṃ chappakāraṃ…pe… akampitthā’’ti (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 71).
能让人弹指惊叹的事,就是“希有之事”。为了说明花雨、抖衣等事也以这个名称而为人所知,所以说“凡在世中”等话。所谓“第一次大结集”,是由结集法的五百位长老,也就是以大迦叶等人为首所举行的结集;因为参与的有五百位,所以在世间被称为“五百众”,又因为纯粹是由长老们举行的,大迦叶等长老就是它的结集者,所以也被称为“长老之说”。这就是所谓的第一次大结集。这是上下文之间的关联。巴利
Accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttāni acchariyāni, pupphavassacelukkhepādīni aññāyapi sā samaññāya pākaṭāti dassento āha ‘‘yā loke’’tiādi. Yā paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti dhammasaṅgāhakehi mahākassapādīhi pañcahi satehi yena katā saṅgītā, tena pañca satāni etissāti ‘‘pañcasatā’’ti ca thereheva katattā therā mahākassapādayo etissā, therehi vā katāti ‘‘therikā’’ti ca loke pavuccati, ayaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāmāti sambandho.
这样展示了第一次大结集之后,为了说明它在这里被讲述的目的,现在以总结的方式说明它的缘起,而说了“于此”等话。“为最初之部类”,是指在收录于经藏的五部中,作为最初的《长部》。因为包含小部的律,是最初结集的。正如所说“在经藏中”。由于如此所说的缘故,我依据这如所说的第一次大结集中的如此之说,而如前所说,这便是前后的关联;或者,这是为了显示如所说的广说之语的功德。巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti dassetvā yadatthaṃ sā idha dassitā, idāni taṃ nidānaṃ nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘imissā’’tiādimāha. Ādinikāyassāti suttantapiṭakapariyāpannesu pañcasu nikāyesu ādibhūtassa dīghanikāyassa. Khuddakapariyāpanno hi vinayo paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘suttanta piṭake’’ti. Tenāti tathāvuttattā, iminā yathāvuttapaṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ tathāvacanameva sandhāya mayā heṭṭhā evaṃ vuttanti pubbāparasambandhaṃ, yathāvuttavitthāravacanassa vā guṇaṃ dassetīti.
以上就是《长部》注释书《吉祥悦意》里,由一位名叫智胜法军的长老所造的、名为《善悦》的《外序分注》中,对隐晦含义的阐明——这位长老是大论师、大语法学家,具备正直、柔和、惭耻、信仰、正念、智慧、忍耐、精进等品质,精通带注释的三藏,以无碍而无所畏惧的智慧行持,能深入自他各宗派种种教义的幽深之处,被尊为大法王增上尊重。至此结束。巴利
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya paramasukhumagambhīraduranubodhatthaparidīpanāya suvimalavipulapaññāveyyattiyajananāya ajjavamaddavasoraccasaddhāsatidhitibuddhikhanti vīriyādidhammasamaṅginā sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṅgāsaṃhīravisāradañāṇacārinā anekappabhedasakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhinā mahāgaṇinā mahāveyyākaraṇena ñāṇābhivaṃsadhammasenāpatināmatherena mahādhammarājādhirājagarunā katāya sādhuvilāsiniyā nāma līnatthapakāsaniyā bāhiranidānavaṇṇanāya līnatthapakāsanā.